The Project Gutenberg eBook of Latin for Beginners

This ebook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most
other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of
the Project Gutenberg License included with this ebook or online at
www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you will
have to check the laws of the country where you are located before using
this eBook.

Title: Latin for Beginners

Author: Benjamin L. D'Ooge

Release date: April 25, 2006 [eBook #18251]

Most recently updated: June 12, 2022

Language: English

*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK LATIN FOR

BEGINNERS ***
 LATIN FOR BEGINNERS
BY

BENJAMIN L. D’OOGE, Ph.D.

PROFESSOR IN THE MICHIGAN STATE NORMAL COLLEGE

GINN AND COMPANY

BOSTON · NEW YORK · CHICAGO · LONDON

COPYRIGHT, 1909, 1911 BY BENJAMIN L. D’OOGE

ENTERED AT STATIONERS’ HALL

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
013.4

The Athenæum Press

GINN AND COMPANY · PROPRIETORS ·
BOSTON · U.S.A.

CONTENTS
LESSON PAGE

Preface

To the Student—By way of Introduction 1-4

 PART I. THE PRONUNCIATION OF LATIN

Alphabet, Sounds of the Letters, Syllables, 5-11

Quantity, Accent, How to Read Latin

PART II. WORDS AND FORMS

I-VI. First Principles—Subject and Predicate, 12-

Inflection, Number, Nominative Subject, 24
Possessive Genitive, Agreement of Verb, Direct
Object, Indirect Object, etc.—Dialogue
VII-VIII. First or 25-
30
Ā-Declension—Gender, Agreement of Adjectives,
Word Order

IX-X. Second or O-Declension—General Rules for 31-

Declension—Predicate Noun, 35

Apposition—Dialogue

XI. Adjectives of the First and Second Declensions 36-

37
XII. Nouns in -ius and -ium—Germānia 38-
39
XIII. Second Declension (Continued)—Nouns in -er 39-
and -ir—Italia—Dialogue 41
XIV. Possessive Adjective Pronouns 42-
43
XV. Ablative Denoting With—Cause, Means, 44-
Accompaniment, Manner—The 46

Romans Prepare for War

 XVI. The Nine Irregular Adjectives 46-
47
XVII. The Demonstrative is, ea, id—Dialogue 48-
50
XVIII. Conjugation—Present, Imperfect, and Future of 51-
sum—Dialogue 53
XIX. Present Active Indicative of amō and moneō 54-
56
XX. Imperfect Active Indicative of amō and moneō 56-
—Meaning of the Imperfect—Niobe and her 57
Children
XXI. Future Active Indicative of amō and moneō— 58-
Niobe and her Children (Concluded) 59
XXII. Review of Verbs—The Dative with Adjectives— 59-
Cornelia and her 61

Jewels

XXIII. Present Active Indicative of regō and audiō— 61-

Cornelia and her Jewels (Concluded) 63
XXIV. Imperfect Active Indicative of regō and audiō— 63-
The Dative with Special Intransitive Verbs 65
XXV. Future Active Indicative of regō and audiō 65-
66
XXVI. Verbs in -iō—Present, Imperfect, and Future 66-
Active Indicative of capiō—The Imperative 68
XXVII. Passive Voice—Present, Imperfect, and Future 68-
Indicative of amō and moneō—Perseus and 71
Andromeda
XXVIII. Present, Imperfect, and Future Indicative 72-
Passive of regō and audiō—Perseus and 73

Andromeda (Continued)
 XXIX. Present, Imperfect, and Future Indicative 73-
Passive of -iō Verbs—Present Passive 75
Infinitive and Imperative
XXX. Synopses in the Four Conjugations—The 75-
Ablative Denoting From—Place from Which, 78
Separation, Personal Agent
XXXI. Perfect, Pluperfect and Future Perfect of sum 79-
—Dialogue 81
XXXII. Perfect Active Indicative of the Four Regular 81-
Conjugations—Meanings of the Perfect— 83
Perseus and Andromeda (Continued)
XXXIII. Pluperfect and Future Perfect Active 84-
Indicative—Perfect Active Infinitive 85
XXXIV. Review of the Active Voice—Perseus and 86-
Andromeda (Concluded) 87
XXXV. Passive Perfects of the 88-
90
Indicative—Perfect Passive and Future Active
Infinitive

XXXVI. Review of Principal 90-

93
Parts—Prepositions, Yes-or-No Questions

XXXVII. Conjugation of possum—The Infinitive used as 93-

in English—Accusative Subject of an Infinitive 96
—The Faithless Tarpeia
XXXVIII. The Relative Pronoun and the Interrogative 97-
Pronoun—Agreement of the Relative—The 101
Faithless Tarpeia (Concluded)
XXXIX- The Third Declension—Consonant Stems 101-
XLI. 106
XLII. Review Lesson—Terror Cimbricus 107
 XLIII. Third Declension—I-Stems 108-
110
XLIV. Irregular Nouns of the Third Declension— 111-
Gender in the Third Declension—The First 112
Bridge

over the Rhine

XLV. Adjectives of the Third Declension—The 113-

Romans Invade the Enemy’s Country 115
XLVI. The Fourth or U-Declension 116-
117
XLVII. Expressions of Place—Place to Which, Place 117-
from Which, Place at or in Which, the 121

Locative—Declension of domus—Dædalus and

Icarus

XLVIII. The Fifth or Ē-Declension—Ablative of Time— 121-

Dædalus and Icarus (Continued) 123
XLIX. Pronouns—Personal and Reflexive Pronouns— 123-
Dædalus and Icarus (Concluded) 126
L. The Intensive Pronoun ipse and the 126-
Demonstrative īdem—How Horatius Held 127
the Bridge

LI. The Demonstratives hic, iste, ille—A German 128-

Chieftain Addresses his Followers—How 130
Horatius Held the

Bridge (Continued)

LII. The Indefinite Pronouns—How Horatius Held 130-

the Bridge (Concluded) 132
LIII. Regular Comparison of Adjectives 133-
 135
LIV. Irregular Comparison of 135-
136
Adjectives—Ablative with Comparatives

LV. Irregular Comparison of Adjectives (Continued) 137-

—Declension of plūs 138
LVI. Irregular Comparison of Adjectives 138-
(Concluded)—Ablative of the Measure of 139
Difference
LVII. Formation and Comparison of Adverbs 140-
142
LVIII. Numerals—Partitive Genitive 142-
144
LIX. Numerals (Continued)—Accusative of Extent— 144-
Cæsar in Gaul 146
LX. Deponent Verbs—Prepositions with the 146-
Accusative 147

PART III. CONSTRUCTIONS

LXI. The Subjunctive Mood—Inflection of the Present 148-

—Indicative and Subjunctive Compared 152
LXII. The Subjunctive of Purpose 152-
153
LXIII. Inflection of the Imperfect Subjunctive— 153-
Sequence of Tenses 155
LXIV. Inflection of the Perfect and Pluperfect 156-
Subjunctive—Substantive Clauses of Purpose 159
LXV. Subjunctive of possum—Verbs of Fearing 160-
161
LXVI. The Participles—Tenses and Declension 161-
164
 LXVII. The Irregular Verbs volō, nōlō, mālō—Ablative 164-
Absolute 166
LXVIII. The Irregular Verb fīō—Subjunctive of Result 167-
168
LXIX. Subjunctive of 169-
171
Characteristic—Predicate Accusative

LXX. Constructions with cum—Ablative of 171-

Specification 173
LXXI. Vocabulary Review—Gerund and Gerundive— 173-
Predicate Genitive 177
LXXII. The Irregular Verb eō—Indirect Statements 177-
180
LXXIII. Vocabulary Review—The Irregular Verb ferō 181-
—Dative with Compounds 183
LXXIV. Vocabulary Review—Subjunctive in Indirect 183-
Questions 185
LXXV. Vocabulary Review—Dative of Purpose or End 185-
for Which 186
LXXVI. Vocabulary Review—Genitive and Ablative of 186-
Quality or Description 188
LXXVII. Review of Agreement—Review of the Genitive, 189-
Dative, and Accusative 190
LXXVIII. Review of the Ablative 191-
192
LXXIX. Review of the Syntax of Verbs 192-
193

READING MATTER

Introductory Suggestions 194-

195
The Labors of Hercules 196-
203
P. Cornelius Lentulus: The Story of a Roman Boy 204-
215

APPENDIXES AND VOCABULARIES

Appendix I. Tables of Declensions, Conjugations, Numerals, 226-

etc. 260
Appendix II. Rules of Syntax 261-
264
Appendix III. Reviews 265-
282
Special Vocabularies 283-
298
Latin-English Vocabulary 299-
331
English-Latin Vocabulary 332-
343

INDEX 344-
348
Display Problems
 PREFACE
To make the course preparatory to Cæsar at the same time systematic,
thorough, clear, and interesting is the purpose of this series of lessons.
The first pages are devoted to a brief discussion of the Latin language, its
history, and its educational value. The body of the book, consisting of
seventy-nine lessons, is divided into three parts.
Part I is devoted to pronunciation, quantity, accent, and kindred
introductory essentials.
Part II carries the work through the first sixty lessons, and is devoted to the
study of forms and vocabulary, together with some elementary
constructions, a knowledge of which is necessary for the translation of the
exercises and reading matter. The first few lessons have been made
unusually simple, to meet the wants of pupils not well grounded in English
grammar.
Part III contains nineteen lessons, and is concerned primarily with the study
of syntax and of subjunctive and irregular verb forms. The last three of
these lessons constitute a review of all the constructions presented in the
book. There is abundant easy reading matter; and, in order to secure proper
concentration of effort upon syntax and translation, no new vocabularies are
introduced, but the vocabularies in Part II are reviewed.
It is hoped that the following features will commend themselves to teachers:
The forms are presented in their natural sequence, and are given, for the
most part, in the body of the book as well as in a grammatical appendix.
The work on the verb is intensive in character, work in other directions
being reduced to a minimum while this is going on. The forms of the
subjunctive are studied in correlation with the subjunctive constructions.
The vocabulary has been selected with the greatest care, using Lodge’s
“Dictionary of Secondary Latin” and Browne’s “Latin Word List” as a
basis. There are about six hundred words, exclusive of proper names, in the
special vocabularies, and these are among the simplest and commonest
words in the language. More than ninety-five per cent of those chosen are
Cæsarian, and of these more than ninety per cent are used in Cæsar five or
more times. The few words not Cæsarian are of such frequent occurrence in
Cicero, Vergil, and other authors as to justify their appearance here. But
teachers desiring to confine word study to Cæsar can easily do so, as the
Cæsarian words are printed in the vocabularies in distinctive type. Concrete
nouns have been preferred to abstract, root words to compounds and
derivatives, even when the latter were of more frequent occurrence in
Cæsar. To assist the memory, related English words are added in each
special vocabulary. To insure more careful preparation, the special
vocabularies have been removed from their respective lessons and placed
by themselves. The general vocabulary contains about twelve hundred
words, and of these above eighty-five per cent are found in Cæsar.
The syntax has been limited to those essentials which recent investigations,
such as those of Dr. Lee Byrne and his collaborators, have shown to belong
properly to the work of the first year. The constructions are presented, as far
as possible, from the standpoint of English, the English usage being given
first and the Latin compared or contrasted with it. Special attention has been
given to the constructions of participles, the gerund and gerundive, and the
infinitive in indirect statements. Constructions having a logical connection
are not separated but are treated together.
Exercises for translation occur throughout, those for translation into Latin
being, as a rule, only half as long as those for translation into English. In
Part III a few of the commoner idioms in Cæsar are introduced and the
sentences are drawn mainly from that author. From first to last a consistent
effort is made to instill a proper regard for Latin word order, the first
principles of which are laid down early in the course.
Selections for reading are unusually abundant and are introduced from the
earliest possible moment. These increase in number and length as the book
progresses, and, for the most part, are made an integral part of the lessons
instead of being massed at the end of the book. This arrangement insures a
more constant and thorough drill in forms and vocabulary, promotes reading
power, and affords a breathing spell between succeeding subjects. The
material is drawn from historical and mythological sources, and the
vocabulary employed includes but few words not already learned. The book
closes with a continued story which recounts the chief incidents in the life
of a Roman boy. The last chapters record his experiences in Cæsar’s army,
and contain much information that will facilitate the interpretation of the
Commentaries. The early emphasis placed on word order and sentence
structure, the simplicity of the syntax, and the familiarity of the vocabulary,
make the reading selections especially useful for work in sight translation.
Reviews are called for at frequent intervals, and to facilitate this branch of
the work an Appendix of Reviews has been prepared, covering both the
vocabulary and the grammar.
The illustrations are numerous, and will, it is hoped, do much to stimulate
interest in the ancient world and to create true and lasting impressions of
Roman life and times.
A consistent effort has been made to use simple language and clear
explanation throughout.
As an aid to teachers using this book a “Teacher’s Manual” has been
prepared, which contains, in addition to general suggestions, notes on each
lesson.
The author wishes to express his gratitude to the numerous teachers who
tested the advance pages in their classes, and, as a result of their experience,
have given much valuable aid by criticism and suggestion. Particular
acknowledgments are due to Miss A. Susan Jones of the Central High
School, Grand Rapids, Michigan; to Miss Clara Allison of the High School
at Hastings, Michigan; and to Miss Helen B. Muir and Mr. Orland O.
Norris, teachers of Latin in this institution.

BENJAMIN L. D’OOGE

Michigan State Normal College

LATIN FOR BEGINNERS
 TO THE STUDENT—BY WAY OF
INTRODUCTION
What is Latin? If you will look at the map of Italy on the opposite page,
you will find near the middle of the peninsula and facing the west coast a
district called Latium, 1 and Rome its capital. The Latin language, meaning
the language of Latium, was spoken by the ancient Romans and other
inhabitants of Latium, and Latin was the name applied to it after the armies
of Rome had carried the knowledge of her language far beyond its original
boundaries. As the English of to-day is not quite the same as that spoken
two or three hundred years ago, so Latin was not always the same at all
times, but changed more or less in the course of centuries. The sort of Latin
you are going to learn was in use about two thousand years ago. And that
period has been selected because the language was then at its best and the
greatest works of Roman literature were being produced. This period,
because of its supreme excellence, is called the Golden Age of Roman
letters.
1. Pronounce Lā´shĭ-ŭm.

The Spread of Latin. For some centuries after Rome was founded, the
Romans were a feeble and insignificant people, their territory was limited to
Latium, and their existence constantly threatened by warlike neighbors. But
after the third century before Christ, Rome’s power grew rapidly. She
conquered all Italy, then reached out for the lands across the sea and beyond
the Alps, and finally ruled over the whole ancient world. The empire thus
established lasted for more than four hundred years. The importance of
Latin increased with the growth of Roman power, and what had been a
dialect spoken by a single tribe became the universal language. Gradually
the language changed somewhat, developing differently in different
countries. In Italy it has become Italian, in Spain Spanish, and in France
French. All these nations, therefore, are speaking a modernized form of
Latin.
The Romans and the Greeks. In their career of conquest the Romans came
into conflict with the Greeks. The Greeks were inferior to the Romans in
military power, but far superior to them in culture. They excelled in art,
literature, music, science, and philosophy. Of all these pursuits the Romans
were ignorant until contact with Greece revealed to them the value of
education and filled them with the thirst for knowledge. And so it came
about that while Rome conquered Greece by force of arms, Greece
conquered Rome by force of her intellectual superiority and became her
schoolmaster. It was soon the established custom for young Romans to go
to Athens and to other centers of Greek learning to finish their training, and
the knowledge of the Greek language among the educated classes became
universal. At the same time many cultured Greeks—poets, artists, orators,
and philosophers—flocked to Rome, opened schools, and taught their arts.
Indeed, the preëminence of Greek culture became so great that Rome
almost lost her ambition to be original, and her writers vied with each other
in their efforts to reproduce in Latin what was choicest in Greek literature.
As a consequence of all this, the civilization and national life of Rome
became largely Grecian, and to Greece she owed her literature and her art.
Rome and the Modern World. After conquering the world, Rome
impressed her language, laws, customs of living, and modes of thinking
upon the subject nations, and they became Roman; and the world has
remained largely Roman ever since. Latin continued to live, and the
knowledge of Latin was the only light of learning that burned steadily
through the dark ages that followed the downfall of the Roman Empire.
Latin was the common language of scholars and remained so even down to
the days of Shakespeare. Even yet it is more nearly than any other tongue
the universal language of the learned. The life of to-day is much nearer the
life of ancient Rome than the lapse of centuries would lead one to suppose.
You and I are Romans still in many ways, and if Cæsar and Cicero should
appear among us, we should not find them, except for dress and language,
much unlike men of to-day.
Latin and English. Do you know that more than half of the words in the
English dictionary are Latin, and that you are speaking more or less Latin
every day? How has this come about? In the year 1066 William the
Conqueror invaded England with an army of Normans. The Normans spoke
French—which, you remember, is descended from Latin—and spread their
language to a considerable extent over England, and so Norman-French
played an important part in the formation of English and forms a large
proportion of our vocabulary. Furthermore, great numbers of almost pure
Latin words have been brought into English through the writings of
scholars, and every new scientific discovery is marked by the addition of
new terms of Latin derivation. Hence, while the simpler and commoner
words of our mother tongue are Anglo-Saxon, and Anglo-Saxon forms the
staple of our colloquial language, yet in the realms of literature, and
especially in poetry, words of Latin derivation are very abundant. Also in
the learned professions, as in law, medicine, and engineering, a knowledge
of Latin is necessary for the successful interpretation of technical and
scientific terms.
Why study Latin? The foregoing paragraphs make it clear why Latin
forms so important a part of modern education. We have seen that our
civilization rests upon that of Greece and Rome, and that we must look to
the past if we would understand the present. It is obvious, too, that the
knowledge of Latin not only leads to a more exact and effective use of our
own language, but that it is of vital importance and of great practical value
to any one preparing for a literary or professional career. To this it may be
added that the study of Latin throws a flood of light upon the structure of
language in general and lays an excellent foundation for all grammatical
study. Finally, it has been abundantly proved that there is no more effective
means of strengthening the mind than by the earnest pursuit of this branch
of learning.
Review Questions. Whence does Latin get its name? Where is Latium?
Where is Rome? Was Latin always the same? What sort of Latin are we to
study? Describe the growth of Rome’s power and the spread of Latin. What
can you say of the origin of Italian, French, and Spanish? How did the
ancient Greeks and Romans compare? How did Greece influence Rome?
How did Rome influence the world? In what sense are we Romans still?
What did Latin have to do with the formation of English? What proportion
of English words are of Latin origin, and what kind of words are they? Why
should we study Latin?
 PART I

THE PRONUNCIATION OF LATIN

THE ALPHABET

1. The Latin alphabet contains the same letters as the English except that it
has no w and no j.
2. The vowels, as in English, are a, e, i, o, u, y. The other letters are
consonants.
3. I is used both as a vowel and as a consonant. Before a vowel in the same
syllable it has the value of a consonant and is called I consonant.
Thus in Iū-li-us the first i is a consonant, the second a vowel.

SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS 1

1. N.B. The sounds of the letters are best learned by hearing them correctly pronounced. The matter
in this section is, therefore, intended for reference rather than for assignment as a lesson. As a first
step it is suggested that the teacher pronounce the examples in class, the pupils following.

4. Latin was not pronounced like English. The Romans at the beginning of
the Christian era pronounced their language substantially as described
below.
5. The vowels have the following sounds:
Vowels 2 Latin Examples
ā as in father hāc, stās
ă like the first a in aha´, never as in hat ă´-măt, că-nās
ē as in they tē´-lă, mē´-tă
ĕ as in met tĕ´-nĕt, mĕr´-cēs
ī as in machine sĕr´-tī, prā´-tī
ĭ as in bit sĭ´-tĭs, bĭ´-bī
ō as in holy Rō´-mă, ō´-rĭs
ŏ as in wholly, never as in hot mŏ´-dŏ, bŏ´-nōs
 ū as in rude, or as oo in boot ū´-mŏr, tū´-bĕr
ŭ as in full, or as oo in foot ŭt, tū´-tŭs
2. Long vowels are marked ¯, short ones ˘.

Note. It is to be observed that there is a decided difference in sound,

except in the case of a, between the long and the short vowels. It is not
merely a matter of quantity but also of quality.
6. In diphthongs (two-vowel sounds) both vowels are heard in a single
syllable.
Diphthongs Latin Examples
ae as ai in aisle tae´-dae
au as ou in out gau´-dĕt
ei as ei in eight dein´-dĕ
eu as ĕ´o͝ o (a short e followed by a short u seu
in one syllable)
oe like oi in toil foe´-dŭs
ui like o͝ o´ĭ (a short u followed by a short i cui, huic
in one syllable. Cf. English we)
Note. Give all the vowels and diphthongs their proper sounds and do
not slur over them in unaccented syllables, as is done in English.
7. Consonants are pronounced as in English, except that
Consonants Latin Examples
c is always like c in cat, never as in cent că´-dō, cĭ´-bŭs, cē
g is always like g in get, never as in gem ´-nă
i consonant is always like y in yes gĕ´-mō, gĭg´-nō
n before c, qu, or g is like ng in sing iăm, iŏ´-cŭs
(compare the sound of n in anchor) ăn´-cŏ-ră (ang´-
ko-ra)
qu, gu, and sometimes su before a vowel ĭn´-quĭt, quī, lĭn´-
have the sound of qw, gw, and sw. Here guă, săn´-guĭs,
u has the value of consonant v and is not suā´-dĕ-ō
counted a vowel
 s is like s in sea, never as in ease rŏ´-să, ĭs
t is always like t in native, never as in ră´-tĭ-ō, nā´-tĭ-ō
nation
v is like w in wine, never as in vine vī´-nŭm, vĭr
x has the value of two consonants (cs or ĕx´-trā, ĕx-āc´-tŭs
gs) and is like x in extract, not as in
exact
bs is like ps and bt like pt ŭrbs, ŏb-tĭ´-nĕ-ō
ch, ph, and th are like c, p, t pŭl´-chĕr, Phoe´-
bē, thĕ-ā´-trŭm
a. In combinations of consonants give each its distinct sound. Doubled
consonants should be pronounced with a slight pause between the two
sounds. Thus pronounce tt as in rat-trap, not as in rattle; pp as in hop-
pole, not as in upper. Examples, mĭt´-tō, Ăp´pĭ-ŭs, bĕl´-lŭm.

SYLLABLES

8. A Latin word has as many syllables as it has vowels and diphthongs.

Thus aes-tā´-tĕ has three syllables, au-dĭ-ĕn´-dŭs has four.
a. Two vowels with a consonant between them never make one
syllable, as is so often the case in English. Compare English inside
with Latin īn-sī´-dĕ.
9. Words are divided into syllables as follows:
1. A single consonant between two vowels goes with the second. Thus ă-
mā´-bĭ-lĭs, mĕ-mŏ´-rĭ-ă, ĭn-tĕ´-rĕ-ā, ă´-bĕst, pĕ-rē´-gĭt. 3
3. In writing and printing it is customary to divide the parts of a compound, as inter-eā, ab-est, sub-
āctus, per-ēgit, contrary to the correct phonetic rule.

2. Combinations of two or more consonants:

a. A consonant followed by l or r goes with the l or r. Thus pū´-blĭ-
cŭs, ă´-grī.
Exception. Prepositional compounds of this nature, as also ll and rr,
follow rule b. Thus ăb´-lŭ-ō, ăb-rŭm´-pō, ĭl´-lĕ, fĕr´-rŭm.
 b. In all other combinations of consonants the first consonant goes
with the preceding vowel. 4 Thus măg´-nŭs, ĕ-gĕs´-tās, vĭc-tō´-rĭ-ă,
hŏs´-pĕs, ăn´-nŭs, sŭ-bāc´-tŭs.
4. The combination nct is divided nc-t, as fūnc-tŭs, sānc-tŭs.

3. The last syllable of a word is called the ul´-ti-ma; the one next to the last,
the pe-nult´; the one before the penult, the an´-te-pe-nult´.
10. EXERCISE

Divide the words in the following passage into syllables and pronounce
them, placing the accent as indicated:
Vā́dĕ ăd fŏrmī́căm, Ō pĭ́gĕr, ĕt cōnsī́dĕrā vĭ́ās ĕ́iŭs ĕt dĭ́scĕ săpĭĕ́ntĭăm: quae
cŭm nōn hắbĕăt dŭ́cĕm nĕc praecĕptṓrĕm nĕc prī́ncĭpĕm, pắrăt ĭn aestā́tĕ
cĭ́bŭm sĭ́bĭ ĕt cŏ́ngrĕgăt ĭn mĕ́ssĕ quŏd cŏ́mĕdăt.
[Go to the ant, thou sluggard; consider her ways, and be wise: which,
having no guide, overseer, or ruler, provideth her meat in the summer and
gathereth her food in the harvest.]

QUANTITY

11. The quantity of a vowel or a syllable is the time it takes to pronounce it.
Correct pronunciation and accent depend upon the proper observance of
quantity.
12. Quantity of Vowels. Vowels are either long (¯) or short (˘). In this book
the long vowels are marked. Unmarked vowels are to be considered short.
1. A vowel is short before another vowel or h; as pŏ-ē´-ta, tră´-hō.
2. A vowel is short before nt and nd, before final m or t, and, except in
words of one syllable, before final l or r. Thus a´-mănt, a-măn´-dus, a-mā
´-băm, a-mā´-băt, a´-ni-măl, a´-mŏr.
3. A vowel is long before nf, ns, nx, and nct. Thus īn´-fe-rō, re´-gēns, sān´-
xī, sānc´-tus.
4. Diphthongs are always long, and are not marked.
13. Quantity of Syllables. Syllables are either long or short, and their
quantity must be carefully distinguished from that of vowels.
1. A syllable is short,
a. If it ends in a short vowel; as ă´-mō, pĭ´-grĭ.
Note. In final syllables the short vowel may be followed by a final
consonant. Thus the word mĕ-mŏ´-rĭ-ăm contains four short syllables.
In the first three a short vowel ends the syllable, in the last the short
vowel is followed by a final consonant.
2. A syllable is long,
a. If it contains a long vowel or a diphthong, as cū´-rō, poe´-nae, aes-
tā´-te.
b. If it ends in a consonant which is followed by another consonant, as
cor´-pus, mag´-nus.
Note. The vowel in a long syllable may be either long or short, and
should be pronounced accordingly. Thus in ter´-ra, in´-ter, the first
syllable is long, but the vowel in each case is short and should be given
the short sound. In words like saxum the first syllable is long because
x has the value of two consonants (cs or gs).
3. In determining quantity h is not counted a consonant.
Note. Give about twice as much time to the long syllables as to the
short ones. It takes about as long to pronounce a short vowel plus a
consonant as it does to pronounce a long vowel or a diphthong, and so
these quantities are considered equally long. For example, it takes
about as long to say cŭr´-rō as it does cū´-rō, and so each of these first
syllables is long. Compare mŏl´-lis and mō´-lis, ā-mĭs´-sī and ā-mi´-
sī.

ACCENT

14. Words of two syllables are accented on the first, as mēn´-sa, Cae´-sar.
15. Words of more than two syllables are accented on the penult if the
penult is long. If the penult is short, accent the antepenult. Thus mo-nē´-
mus, re´-gi-tur, a-gri´-co-la, a-man´-dus.
Note. Observe that the position of the accent is determined by the
length of the syllable and not by the length of the vowel in the syllable.
(Cf. § 13. 2, Note.)
16. Certain little words called enclit´ics 5 which have no separate existence,
are added to and pronounced with a preceding word. The most common are
-que, and; -ve, or; and -ne, the question sign. The syllable before an enclitic
takes the accent, regardless of its quantity. Thus populus´que, dea´que,
rēgna´ve, audit´ne.
5. Enclitic means leaning back, and that is, as you see, just what these little words do. They cannot
stand alone and so they lean back for support upon the preceding word.

HOW TO READ LATIN

17. To read Latin well is not so difficult, if you begin right. Correct habits
of reading should be formed now. Notice the quantities carefully, especially
the quantity of the penult, to insure your getting the accent on the right
syllable. (Cf. § 15.) Give every vowel its proper sound and every syllable
its proper length. Then bear in mind that we should read Latin as we read
English, in phrases rather than in separate words. Group together words that
are closely connected in thought. No good reader halts at the end of each
word.
18. Read the stanzas of the following poem by Longfellow, one at a time,
first the English and then the Latin version. The syllables inclosed in
parentheses are to be slurred or omitted to secure smoothness of meter.

EXCELSIOR [HIGHER]! 6

The shades of night were falling fast, Cadēbant noctis umbrae,

As through an Alpine village passed dum
A youth, who bore, ’mid snow and ice, Ibat per vīcum Alpicum
Gelū nivequ(e) adolēscēns,
 A banner with the strange device, Vēxillum cum signō ferēns,
Excelsior! Excelsior!
His brow was sad; his eye beneath, Frōns trīstis, micat oculus
Flashed like a falchion from its sheath, Velut ē vāgīnā gladius;
And like a silver clarion rung Sonantque similēs tubae
The accents of that unknown tongue, Accentūs lingu(ae)
Excelsior! incognitae,
Excelsior!
In happy homes he saw the light In domibus videt clārās
Of household fires gleam warm and Focōrum lūcēs calidās;
bright; Relucet glaciēs ācris,
Above, the spectral glaciers shone, Et rumpit gemitūs labrīs,
And from his lips escaped a groan, Excelsior!
Excelsior!
“Try not the Pass!” the old man said; Dīcit senex, “Nē trānseās!
“Dark lowers the tempest overhead, Suprā nigrēscit tempestās;
The roaring torrent is deep and wide!” Lātus et altus est torrēns.”
And loud that clarion voice replied, Clāra vēnit vōx respondēns,
Excelsior! Excelsior!
At break of day, as heavenward Iam lūcēscēbat, et frātrēs
The pious monks of Saint Bernard Sānctī Bernardī vigilēs
Uttered the oft-repeated prayer, Ōrābant precēs solitās,
A voice cried through the startled air, Cum vōx clāmāvit per aurās,
Excelsior! Excelsior!
A traveler, by the faithful hound, Sēmi-sepultus viātor
Half-buried in the snow was found, Can(e) ā fīdō reperītur,
Still grasping in his hand of ice Comprēndēns pugnō gelidō
That banner with the strange device, Illud vēxillum cum signō,
Excelsior! Excelsior!
There in the twilight cold and gray, Iacet corpus exanimum
Lifeless, but beautiful, he lay, Sed lūce frīgidā pulchrum;
And from the sky, serene and far, Et caelō procul exiēns
A voice fell, like a falling star, Cadit vōx, ut Stella cadēns,
Excelsior! Excelsior!
6. Translation by C. W. Goodchild in Praeco Latinus, October, 1898.
 PART II

WORDS AND FORMS

 LESSON I
FIRST PRINCIPLES

19. Subject and Predicate. 1. Latin, like English, expresses thoughts by

means of sentences. A sentence is a combination of words that

expresses a thought, and in its simplest form is the statement of a single

fact. Thus,

Galba is a farmer The sailor fights

Galba est agricola Nauta pugnat

In each of these sentences there are two parts:

Galba is a farmer
Galba est agricola
Subject Predicate
The sailor fights
Nauta pugnat

2. The subject is that person, place, or thing about which something is said,
and is therefore a noun or some word which can serve the same purpose.
a. Pronouns, as their name implies (pro, “instead of,” and noun), often
take the place of nouns, usually to save repeating the same noun, as,
Galba is a farmer; he is a sturdy fellow.
3. The predicate is that which is said about the subject, and consists of a
verb with or without modifiers.
a. A verb is a word which asserts something (usually an act)
concerning a person, place, or thing.
20. The Object. In the two sentences, The boy hit the ball and The ball hit
the boy, the same words are used, but the meaning is different, and depends
upon the order of the words. The doer of the act, that about which
something is said, is, as we have seen above, the subject. That to which
something is done is the direct object of the verb. The boy hit the ball is
therefore analyzed as follows:

Subject Predicate
The boy hit the ball
(verb) (direct object)

a. A verb whose action passes over to the object directly, as in the

sentence above, is called a transitive verb. A verb which does not
admit of a direct object is called intransitive, as, I walk, he comes.
21. The Copula. The verb to be in its different forms—are, is, was, etc.—
does not tell us anything about the subject; neither does it govern an object.
It simply connects the subject with the word or words in the predicate that
possess a distinct meaning. Hence it is called the copula, that is, the joiner
or link.
22. In the following sentences pronounce the Latin and name the nouns,
verbs, subjects, objects, predicates, copulas:

1. America est patria mea

America is fatherland my
2. Agricola fīliam amat
(The) farmer (his) daughter loves
3. Fīlia est Iūlia
(His) daughter is Julia
4. Iūlia et agricola sunt in īnsulā
Julia and (the) farmer are on (the) island
5. Iūlia aquam portat
Julia water carries
6. Rosam in comīs habet
(A) rose in (her) hair (she) has
7. Iūlia est puella pulchra
Julia is (a) girl pretty
 8. Domina fīliam pulchram habet
(The) lady (a) daughter beautiful has

a. The sentences above show that Latin does not express some words
which are necessary in English. First of all, Latin has no article the or
a; thus agricola may mean the farmer, a farmer, or simply farmer.
Then, too, the personal pronouns, I, you, he, she, etc., and the
possessive pronouns, my, your, his, her, etc., are not expressed if the
meaning of the sentence is clear without them.
 LESSON II
FIRST PRINCIPLES (Continued)

23. Inflection. Words may change their forms to indicate some change in
sense or use, as, is, are; was, were; who, whose, whom; farmer, farmer’s;
woman, women. This is called inflection. The inflection of a noun,
adjective, or pronoun is called its declension, that of a verb its conjugation.
24. Number. Latin, like English, has two numbers, singular and plural. In
English we usually form the plural by adding -s or -es to the singular. So
Latin changes the singular to the plural by changing the ending of the word.
Compare
Naut-a pugnat Naut-ae pugnant
The sailor fights The sailors fight
25. Rule. Nouns that end in -a in the singular end in -ae in the plural.
26. Learn the following nouns so that you can give the English for the Latin
or the Latin for the English. Write the plural of each.

agri´cola, farmer fuga, flight (fugitive)

(agriculture) 1 iniū´ria, wrong, injury
aqua, water (aquarium) lūna, moon (lunar)
causa, cause, reason nauta, sailor (nautical)
do´mina, lady of the puel´la, girl
house, mistress silva, forest (silvan)
(dominate) terra, land (terrace)
filia, daughter (filial)
fortū´na, fortune

1. The words in parentheses are English words related to the Latin. When the words are practically
identical, as causa, cause, no comparison is needed.

27. Compare again the sentences

 Nauta pugna-t Nautae pugna-nt
The sailor fights The sailors fight
In the first sentence the verb pugna-t is in the third person singular, in the
second sentence pugna-nt is in the third person plural.
28. Rule. Agreement of Verb. A finite verb must always be in the same
person and number as its subject.
29. Rule. In the conjugation of the Latin verb the third person singular
active ends in -t, the third person plural in -nt. The endings which show the
person and number of the verb are called personal endings.
30. Learn the following verbs and write the plural of each. The personal
pronouns he, she, it, etc., which are necessary in the inflection of the
English verb, are not needed in the Latin, because the personal endings take
their place. Of course, if the verb’s subject is expressed we do not translate
the personal ending by a pronoun; thus nauta pugnat is translated the
sailor fights, not the sailor he fights.
ama-t he (she, loves, is loving, does love (amity,
it) amiable)
labō´ra- “““ labors, is laboring, does labor
t
nūntia- “““ announces, is announcing, does
t2 announce
porta-t “““ carries, is carrying, does carry (porter)
pugna-t “““ fights, is fighting, does fight
(pugnacious)
2. The u in nūntiō is long by exception. (Cf. § 12. 2.)

31. EXERCISES

I. 1. The daughter loves, the daughters love. 2. The sailor is carrying, the
sailors carry. 3. The farmer does labor, the farmers labor. 4. The girl is
announcing, the girls do announce. 5. The ladies are carrying, the lady
carries.
II. 1. Nauta pugnat, nautae pugnant. 2. Puella amat, puellae amant. 3.
Agricola portat, agricolae portant. 4. Fīlia labōrat, fīliae labōrant. 5. Nauta
nūntiat, nautae nūntiant. 6. Dominae amant, domina amat.
DOMINA
 LESSON III
FIRST PRINCIPLES (Continued)

32. Declension of Nouns. We learned above (§§ 19, 20) the difference
between the subject and object, and that in English they may be
distinguished by the order of the words. Sometimes, however, the order is
such that we are left in doubt. For example, the sentence The lady her
daughter loves might mean either that the lady loves her daughter, or that
the daughter loves the lady.
1. If the sentence were in Latin, no doubt could arise, because the subject
and the object are distinguished, not by the order of the words, but by the
endings of the words themselves. Compare the following sentences:

Domina fīliam amat

Fīliam domina amat
The lady loves her daughter
Amat fīliam domina
Domina amat fīliam
Fīlia dominam amat
Dominam fīlia amat
The daughter loves the lady
Amat dominam fīlia
Fīlia amat dominam

a. Observe that in each case the subject of the sentence ends in -a and
the object in -am. The form of the noun shows how it is used in the
sentence, and the order of the words has no effect on the essential
meaning.
2. As stated above (§ 23), this change of ending is called declension, and
each different ending produces what is called a case. When we decline a
noun, we give all its different cases, or changes of endings. In English we
have three cases,—nominative, possessive, and objective; but, in nouns, the
nominative and objective have the same form, and only the possessive case
shows a change of ending, by adding ’s or the apostrophe. The interrogative
pronoun, however, has the fuller declension, who? whose? whom?
33. The following table shows a comparison between English and Latin
declension forms, and should be thoroughly memorized:

English Cases Latin Cases

Declension Name of case Declension of domina Name of case

of who? and use and translation and use

Who? Nominative— do´min-a Nominative—

case of the the lady case of the
S
subject subject
i
n
Whose? Possessive— domin-ae Genitive—
g
case of the the lady’s case of the
u
possessor possessor
l
a
Whom? Objective— domin-am Accusative—
r
case of the the lady case of the
object direct object

Who? Nominative— domin-ae Nominative—

case of the the ladies case of the
P subject subject
l
Whose? Possessive— domin-ā´rum Genitive—
u
case of the the ladies’ case of the
r
possessor of the ladies possessor
a
l
Whom? Objective— domin-ās Accusative—
case of the the ladies case of the
object direct object

When the nominative singular of a noun ends in -a, observe that

 a. The nominative plural ends in -ae.
b. The genitive singular ends in -ae and the genitive plural in -ārum.
c. The accusative singular ends in -am and the accusative plural in -ās.
d. The genitive singular and the nominative plural have the same
ending.
34. EXERCISE

Pronounce the following words and give their general meaning. Then give
the number and case, and the use of each form. Where the same form stands
for more than one case, give all the possible cases and uses.
1. Silva, silvās, silvam. 2. Fugam, fugae, fuga. 3. Terrārum, terrae, terrās. 4.
Aquās, causam, lūnās. 5. Fīliae, fortūnae, lūnae. 6. Iniūriās, agricolārum,
aquārum. 7. Iniūriārum, agricolae, puellās. 8. Nautam, agricolās, nautās. 9.
Agricolam, puellam, silvārum.
 LESSON IV
FIRST PRINCIPLES (Continued)

35. We learned from the table (§ 33) that the Latin nominative, genitive, and
accusative correspond, in general, to the nominative, possessive, and
objective in English, and that they are used in the same way. This will be
made even clearer by the following sentence:
Fīlia agricolae nautam amat,
the farmer’s daughter (or the daughter of the farmer) loves the sailor
What is the subject? the direct object? What case is used for the subject? for
the direct object? What word denotes the possessor? In what case is it?
36. Rule. Nominative Subject. The subject of a finite verb is in the
Nominative and answers the question Who? or What?
37. Rule. Accusative Object. The direct object of a transitive verb is in the
Accusative and answers the question Whom? or What?
38. Rule. Genitive of the Possessor. The word denoting the owner or
possessor of something is in the Genitive and answers the question Whose?

DIANA SAGITTAS PORTAT ET FERAS NECAT

39. EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 283.

I. 1. Diāna est dea. 2. Lātōna est dea. 3. Diāna et Lātōna sunt deae. 4. Diāna
est dea lūnae. 5. Diāna est fīlia Lātōnae. 6. Lātōna Diānam amat. 7. Diāna
est dea silvārum. 8. Diāna silvam amat. 9. Diāna sagittās portat. 10. Diāna
ferās silvae necat. 11. Ferae terrārum pugnant.
For the order of words imitate the Latin above.
II. 1. The daughter of Latona does love the forests. 2. Latona’s daughter
carries arrows. 3. The farmers’ daughters do labor. 4. The farmer’s daughter
loves the waters of the forest. 5. The sailor is announcing the girls’ flight. 6.
The girls announce the sailors’ wrongs. 7. The farmer’s daughter labors. 8.
Diana’s arrows are killing the wild beasts of the land.
40. CONVERSATION

Translate the questions and answer them in Latin. The answers may be
found in the exercises preceding.
1. Quis est Diāna?
2. Cuius fīlia est Diāna?
3. Quis Diānam amat?
4. Quis silvam amat?
5. Quis sagittās portat?
6. Cuius fīliae labōrant?
 LESSON V
FIRST PRINCIPLES (Continued)

41. The Dative Case. In addition to the relationships between words

expressed by the nominative, genitive (possessive), and accusative
(objective) cases, there are other relationships, to express which in English
we use such words as from, with, by, to, for, in, at. 1
1. Words like to, for, by, from, in, etc., which define the relationship between words, are called
prepositions.

Latin, too, makes frequent use of such prepositions; but often it expresses
these relations without them by means of case forms which English does
not possess. One of the cases found in the Latin declension and lacking in
English is called the dative.
42. When the nominative singular ends in -a, the dative singular ends in -ae
and the dative plural in -īs.
Note. Observe that the genitive singular, the dative singular, and the
nominative plural all have the same ending, -ae; but the uses of the
three cases are entirely different. The general meaning of the sentence
usually makes clear which case is intended.
a. Form the dative singular and plural of the following nouns: fuga,
causa, fortūna, terra, aqua, puella, agricola, nauta, domina.
43. The Dative Relation. The dative case is used to express the relations
conveyed in English by the prepositions to, towards, for.
These prepositions are often used in English in expressions of motion, such
as She went to town, He ran towards the horse, Columbus sailed for
America. In such cases the dative is not used in Latin, as motion through
space is foreign to the dative relation. But the dative is used to denote that
to or towards which a benefit, injury, purpose, feeling, or quality is directed,
or that for which something serves or exists.
 a. What dative relations do you discover in the following?
The teacher gave a prize to John because he replied so promptly to all her
questions—a good example for the rest of us. It is a pleasure to us to hear
him recite. Latin is easy for him, but it is very hard for me. Some are fitted
for one thing and others for another.
44. The Indirect Object. Examine the sentence
Nauta fugam nūntiat, the sailor announces the flight
Here the verb, nūntiat, governs the direct object, fugam, in the accusative
case. If, however, we wish to mention the persons to whom the sailor
announces the flight, as, The sailor announces the flight to the farmers, the
verb will have two objects:
1. Its direct object, flight (fugam)
2. Its indirect object, farmers
According to the preceding section, to the farmers is a relation covered by
the dative case, and we are prepared for the following rule:
45. Rule. Dative Indirect Object. The indirect object of a verb is in the
Dative.
a. The indirect object usually stands before the direct object.
46. We may now complete the translation of the sentence The sailor
announces the flight to the farmers, and we have
Nauta agricolīs fugam nūntiat
47. EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 283.

Point out the direct and indirect objects and the genitive of the possessor.
I. 1. Quis nautīs pecūniam dat? 2. Fīliae agricolae nautīs pecūniam dant. 3.
Quis fortūnam pugnae nūntiat? 4. Galba agricolīs fortunam pugnae nūntiat.
5. Cui domina fābulam nārrat? 6. Fīliae agricolae domina fābulam nārrat. 7.
Quis Diānae corōnam dat? 8. Puella Diānae corōnam dat quia Diānam amat.
9. Dea lūnae sagittās portat et ferās silvārum necat. 10. Cuius victōriam
Galba nūntiat? 11. Nautae victōriam Galba nūntiat.
Imitate the word order of the preceding exercise.
II. 1. To whom do the girls give a wreath? 2. The girls give a wreath to
Julia, because Julia loves wreaths. 3. The sailors tell the ladies 2 a story,
because the ladies love stories. 4. The farmer gives his (§ 22. a) daughter
water. 5. Galba announces the cause of the battle to the sailor. 6. The
goddess of the moon loves the waters of the forest. 7. Whose wreath is
Latona carrying? Diana’s.
2. Observe that in English the indirect object often stands without a preposition to to mark it,
especially when it precedes the direct object.
 LESSON VI
FIRST PRINCIPLES (Continued)

48. The Ablative Case. Another case, lacking in English but found in the
fuller Latin declension, is the ab´la-tive.
49. When the nominative singular ends in -a, the ablative singular ends in
-ā and the ablative plural in -īs.
a. Observe that the final -ă of the nominative is short, while the final -ā
of the ablative is long, as,
Nom. fīliă Abl. fīliā
b. Observe that the ablative plural is like the dative plural.
c. Form the ablative singular and plural of the following nouns: fuga,
causa, fortūna, terra, aqua, puella, agricola, nauta, domina.
50. The Ablative Relation. The ablative case is used to express the
relations conveyed in English by the prepositions from, with, by, at, in. It
denotes
1. That from which something is separated, from which it starts, or of which
it is deprived—generally translated by from.
2. That with which something is associated or by means of which it is done
—translated by with or by.
3. The place where or the time when something happens—translated by in
or at.
a. What ablative relations do you discover in the following?
In our class there are twenty boys and girls. Daily at eight o’clock they
come from home with their books, and while they are at school they study
Latin with great zeal. In a short time they will be able to read with ease the
books written by the Romans. By patience and perseverance all things in
this world can be overcome.
51. Prepositions. While, as stated above (§ 41), many relations expressed
in English by prepositions are in Latin expressed by case forms, still
prepositions are of frequent occurrence, but only with the accusative or
ablative.
52. Rule. Object of a Preposition. A noun governed by a preposition must
be in the Accusative or Ablative case.
53. Prepositions denoting the ablative relations from, with, in, on, are
naturally followed by the ablative case. Among these are
ā 1 or ab, from, away from
dē, from, down from
ē 1 or ex, from, out from, out of
cum, with
in, in, on
1. ā and ē are used only before words beginning with a consonant; ab and ex are used before either
vowels or consonants.

1. Translate into Latin, using prepositions. In the water, on the land, down
from the forest, with the fortune, out of the forests, from the victory, out of
the waters, with the sailors, down from the moon.
54. Adjectives. Examine the sentence
Puella parva bonam deam amat, the little girl loves the good goddess
In this sentence parva (little) and bonam (good) are not nouns, but are
descriptive words expressing quality. Such words are called adjectives, 2
and they are said to belong to the noun which they describe.
2. Pick out the adjectives in the following: “When I was a little boy, I remember that one cold
winter’s morning I was accosted by a smiling man with an ax on his shoulder. ‘My pretty boy,’ said
he, ‘has your father a grindstone?’ ‘Yes, sir,’ said I. ‘You are a fine little fellow,’ said he. ‘Will you let
me grind my ax on it?’”

You can tell by its ending to which noun an adjective belongs. The ending
of parva shows that it belongs to puella, and the ending of bonam that it
belongs to deam. Words that belong together are said to agree, and the
belonging-together is called agreement. Observe that the adjective and its
noun agree in number and case.
55. Examine the sentences
Puella est parva, the girl is little
Puella parva bonam deam amat, the little girl loves the good goddess
In the first sentence the adjective parva is separated from its noun by the
verb and stands in the predicate. It is therefore called a predicate adjective.
In the second sentence the adjectives parva and bonam are closely attached
to the nouns puella and deam respectively, and are called attributive
adjectives.
a. Pick out the attributive and the predicate adjectives in the following:
Do you think Latin is hard? Hard studies make strong brains. Lazy
students dislike hard studies. We are not lazy.
56. DIALOGUE

Julia and Galba

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 283.

I. Quis, Galba, est Diāna?
G. Diāna, Iūlia, est pulchra dea lūnae et silvārum.
I. Cuius fīlia, Galba, est Diāna?
G. Lātōnae fīlia, Iūlia, est Diāna.
I. Quid Diāna portat?
G. Sagittās Diāna portat.
I. Cūr Diāna sagittās portat?
G. Diāna sagittās portat, Iūlia, quod malās ferās silvae magnae
necat.
I. Amatne Lātōna fīliam?
G. Amat, et fīlia Lātōnam amat.
I. Quid fīlia tua parva portat?
G. Corōnās pulchrās fīlia mea parva portat.
I. Cui fīlia tua corōnās pulchrās dat?
 G. Diānae corōnās dat.
I. Quis est cum fīliā tuā? Estne sōla?
G. Sōla nōn est; fīlia mea parva est cum ancillā meā.
a. When a person is called or addressed, the case used is called the voc
´ative (Latin vocāre, “to call”). In form the vocative is regularly like
the nominative. In English the name of the person addressed usually
stands first in the sentence. The Latin vocative rarely stands first. Point
out five examples of the vocative in this dialogue.
b. Observe that questions answered by yes or no in English are
answered in Latin by repeating the verb. Thus, if you wished to answer
in Latin the question Is the sailor fighting? Pugnatne nauta? you
would say Pugnat, he is fighting, or Nōn pugnat, he is not fighting.
 LESSON VII
THE FIRST OR Ā-DECLENSION

57. In the preceding lessons we have now gone over all the cases, singular
and plural, of nouns whose nominative singular ends in -a. All Latin nouns
whose nominative singular ends in -a belong to the First Declension. It is
also called the Ā-Declension because of the prominent part which the vowel
a plays in the formation of the cases. We have also learned what relations
are expressed by each case. These results are summarized in the following
table:

Use and General Meaning of Each

Case Noun Translation
Case

Singular

Nom. do´min-a the lady The subject

Gen. domin- of the lady, The possessor of something

ae or the
lady’s

Dat. domin- to or for the Expressing the relation to or for,

ae lady especially the indirect object

Acc. domin- the lady The direct object

am

Abl. domin-ā from, with, Separation (from), association or

by, in, the means (with, by), place where or
lady time when (in, at)

Plural
 Nom. domin- the ladies The same as the singular
ae

Gen. domin-ā of the

´rum ladies, or
the
ladies’

Dat. domin-īs to or for the

ladies

Acc. domin-ās the ladies

Abl. domin-īs from, with,

by, in, the
ladies

58. The Base. That part of a word which remains unchanged in inflection
and to which the terminations are added is called the base.
Thus, in the declension above, domin- is the base and -a is the termination
of the nominative singular.
59. Write the declension of the following nouns, separating the base from
the termination by a hyphen. Also give them orally.
pugna, terra, lūna, ancil´la, corō´na, īn´sula, silva
60. Gender. In English, names of living beings are either masculine or
feminine, and names of things without life are neuter. This is called natural
gender. Yet in English there are some names of things to which we refer as
if they were feminine; as, “Have you seen my yacht? She is a beauty.” And
there are some names of living beings to which we refer as if they were
neuter; as, “Is the baby here? No, the nurse has taken it home.” Some
words, then, have a gender quite apart from sex or real gender, and this is
called grammatical gender.
Latin, like English, has three genders. Names of males are usually
masculine and of females feminine, but names of things have grammatical
gender and may be either masculine, feminine, or neuter. Thus we have in
Latin the three words, lapis, a stone; rūpēs, a cliff; and saxum, a rock.
Lapis is masculine, rūpēs feminine, and saxum neuter. The gender can
usually be determined by the ending of the word, and must always be
learned, for without knowing the gender it is impossible to write correct
Latin.
61. Gender of First-Declension Nouns. Nouns of the first declension are
feminine unless they denote males. Thus silva is feminine, but nauta,
sailor, and agricola, farmer, are masculine.
62. EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 284.

I. 1. Agricola cum fīliā in casā habitat. 2. Bona fīlia agricolae cēnam parat.
3. Cēna est grāta agricolae 1 et agricola bonam fīliam laudat. 4. Deinde fīlia
agricolae gallīnās ad cēnam vocat. 5. Gallīnae fīliam agricolae amant. 6.
Malae fīliae bonās cēnās nōn parant. 7. Fīlia agricolae est grāta dominae. 8.
Domina in īnsulā magnā habitat. 9. Domina bonae puellae parvae pecūniam
dat.
II. 1. Where does the farmer live? 2. The farmer lives in the small cottage.
3. Who lives with the farmer? 4. (His) little daughter lives with the farmer.
5. (His) daughter is getting (parat) a good dinner for the farmer. 6. The
farmer praises the good dinner. 7. The daughter’s good dinner is pleasing to
the farmer.
1. Note that the relation expressed by the dative case covers that to which a feeling is directed. (Cf. §
43.)
What Latin words are suggested by this picture?
63. CONVERSATION

Answer the questions in Latin.

1. Quis cum agricolā in casā habitat?
2. Quid bona fīlia agricolae parat?
3. Quem agricola laudat?
4. Vocatne fīlia agricolae gallīnās ad cēnam?
5. Cuius fīlia est grāta dominae?
6. Cui domina pecūniam dat?
 LESSON VIII
FIRST DECLENSION (Continued)

64. We have for some time now been using adjectives and nouns together
and you have noticed an agreement between them in case and in number (§
54). They agree also in gender. In the phrase silva magna, we have a
feminine adjective in -a agreeing with a feminine noun in -a.
65. Rule. Agreement of Adjectives. Adjectives agree with their nouns in
gender, number, and case.
66. Feminine adjectives in -a are declined like feminine nouns in -a, and
you should learn to decline them together as follows:
Noun Adjective
domina (base domin-), f., lady bona (base bon-), good
Singular TERMINATIONS
Nom. do´mina bona -a
Gen. dominae bonae -ae
Dat. dominae bonae -ae
Acc. dominam bonam -am
Abl. dominā bonā -ā
Plural TERMINATIONS
Nom. dominae bonae -ae
Gen. dominā´rum bonā´rum -ārum
Dat. dominīs bonīs -īs
Acc. dominās bonās -ās
Abl. dominīs bonīs -īs
a. In the same way decline together puella mala, the bad girl; ancil´la
parva, the little maid; fortū´na magna, great fortune.
67. The words dea, goddess, and fīlia, daughter, take the ending -ābus
instead of -īs in the dative and ablative plural. Note the dative and ablative
plural in the following declension:
dea bona (bases de- bon-)
Singular Plural
Nom. dea bona deae bonae
Gen. deae bonae deā´rum bonā´rum
Dat. deae bonae deā´bus bonīs
Acc. deam bonam deās bonās
Abl. deā bonā dea´bus bonīs
a. In the same way decline together fīlīa parva.
68. Latin Word Order. The order of words in English and in Latin
sentences is not the same.
In English we arrange words in a fairly fixed order. Thus, in the sentence
My daughter is getting dinner for the farmers, we cannot alter the order of
the words without spoiling the sentence. We can, however, throw emphasis
on different words by speaking them with more force. Try the effect of
reading the sentence by putting special force on my, daughter, dinner,
farmers.
In Latin, where the office of the word in the sentence is shown by its ending
(cf. § 32. 1), and not by its position, the order of words is more free, and
position is used to secure the same effect that in English is secured by
emphasis of voice. To a limited extent we can alter the order of words in
English, too, for the same purpose. Compare the sentences
I saw a game of football at Chicago last November (normal
order)
Last November I saw a game of football at Chicago
At Chicago, last November, I saw a game of football
1. In a Latin sentence the most emphatic place is the first; next in
importance is the last; the weakest point is the middle. Generally the subject
is the most important word, and is placed first; usually the verb is the next
in importance, and is placed last. The other words of the sentence stand
between these two in the order of their importance. Hence the normal order
of words—that is, where no unusual emphasis is expressed—is as follows:
subject—modifiers of the subject—indirect object—direct object—adverb
—verb
Changes from the normal order are frequent, and are due to the desire for
throwing emphasis upon some word or phrase. Notice the order of the Latin
words when you are translating, and imitate it when you are turning
English into Latin.
2. Possessive pronouns and modifying genitives normally stand after their
nouns. When placed before their nouns they are emphatic, as fīlia mea, my
daughter; mea fīlia, my daughter; casa Galbae, Galba’s cottage; Galbae
casa, Galba’s cottage.
Notice the variety of emphasis produced by writing the following sentence
in different ways:
Fīlia mea agricolīs cēnam parat (normal order)
Mea fīlia agricolīs parat cēnam (mea and cēnam emphatic)
Agricolīs fīlia mea cēnam parat (agricolīs emphatic)
3. An adjective placed before its noun is more emphatic than when it
follows. When great emphasis is desired, the adjective is separated from its
noun by other words.
Fīlia mea casam parvam nōn amat (parvam not emphatic)
Fīlia mea parvam casam nōn amat (parvam more emphatic)
Parvam fīlia mea casam nōn amat (parvam very emphatic)
4. Interrogative words usually stand first, the same as in English.
5. The copula (as est, sunt) is of so little importance that it frequently does
not stand last, but may be placed wherever it sounds well.
69. EXERCISE

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 284.

Note the order of the words in these sentences and pick out those that are
emphatic.
1. Longae nōn sunt tuae viae. 2. Suntne tubae novae in meā casā? Nōn sunt.
3. Quis lātā in silvā habitat? Diāna, lūnae clārae pulchra dea, lātā in silvā
habitat. 4. Nautae altās et lātās amant aquās. 5. Quid ancilla tua portat?
Ancilla mea tubam novam portat. 6. Ubi sunt Lesbia et Iūlia? In tuā casa est
Lesbia et Iūlia est in meā. 7. Estne Italia lāta terra? Longa est Italia, nōn
lāta. 8. Cui Galba agricola fābulam novam nārrat? Fīliābus dominae clārae
fābulam novam nārrat. 9. Clāra est īnsula Sicilia. 10. Quem laudat Lātōna?
Lātōna laudat fīliam.

First Review of Vocabulary and Grammar, §§ 502-505

 LESSON IX
THE SECOND OR O-DECLENSION

70. Latin nouns are divided into five declensions.

The declension to which a noun belongs is shown by the ending of the
genitive singular. This should always be learned along with the nominative
and the gender.
71. The nominative singular of nouns of the Second or O-Declension ends
in -us, -er, -ir, or -um. The genitive singular ends in -ī.
72. Gender. Nouns in -um are neuter. The others are regularly masculine.
73. Declension of nouns in -us and -um. Masculines in -us and neuters in -
um are declined as follows:
dominus (base domin-), m., pīlum (base pīl-), n.,
master spear
Singular
TERMINATIONS TERMINATIONS
Nom. do´minus 1 -us pīlum -um
Gen. dominī -ī pīlī -ī
Dat. dominō -ō pīlō -ō
Acc. dominum -um pīlum -um
Abl. dominō -ō pīlō -ō
Voc. domine -e pīlum -um
Plural
Nom. dominī -ī pīla -a
Gen. dominō´rum -ōrum pīlō´rum -ōrum
Dat. dominīs -īs pīlīs -īs
Acc. dominōs -ōs pīla -a
 Abl. dominīs -īs pīlīs -īs
1. Compare the declension of domina and of dominus.

a. Observe that the masculines and the neuters have the same
terminations excepting in the nominative singular and the nominative
and accusative plural.
b. The vocative singular of words of the second declension in -us ends
in -ĕ, as domine, O master; serve, O slave. This is the most important
exception to the rule in § 56. a.
74. Write side by side the declension of domina, dominus, and pīlum. A
comparison of the forms will lead to the following rules, which are of great
importance because they apply to all five declensions:
a. The vocative, with a single exception (see § 73. b), is like the
nominative. That is, the vocative singular is like the nominative
singular, and the vocative plural is like the nominative plural.
b. The nominative, accusative, and vocative of neuter nouns are alike,
and in the plural end in -a.
c. The accusative singular of masculines and feminines ends in -m and
the accusative plural in -s.
d. The dative and ablative plural are always alike.
e. Final -i and -o are always long; final -a is short, except in the
ablative singular of the first declension.
75. Observe the sentences
Lesbia est bona, Lesbia is good
Lesbia est ancilla, Lesbia is a maidservant
We have learned (§ 55) that bona, when used, as here, in the predicate to
describe the subject, is called a predicate adjective. Similarly a noun, as
ancilla, used in the predicate to define the subject is called a predicate
noun.
76. Rule. Predicate Noun. A predicate noun agrees in case with the subject
of the verb.
PILA
77. DIALOGUE
LEGATUS CUM PILO ET TUBA
Galba and Marcus

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 285.

G. Quis, Mārce, est lēgātus cum pīlō et tubā?
M. Lēgātus, Galba, est Sextus.
G. Ubi Sextus habitat? 2
M. In oppidō Sextus cum fīliābus habitat.
G. Amantne oppidānī Sextum?
M. Amant oppidānī Sextum et laudant, quod magnā cum cōnstantiā
pugnat.
G. Ubi, Mārce, est ancilla tua? Cūr nōn cēnam parat?
M. Ancilla mea, Galba, equō lēgātī aquam et frūmentum dat.
G. Cūr nōn servus Sextī equum dominī cūrat?
M. Sextus et servus ad mūrum oppidī properant. Oppidānī bellum
parant. 3
2. habitat is here translated does live. Note the three possible translations of the Latin present tense:
he lives
habitat he is living
he does live
Always choose the translation which makes the best sense.
3. Observe that the verb parō means not only to prepare but also to prepare for, and governs the
accusative case.

78. CONVERSATION

Translate the questions and answer them in Latin.

1. Ubi fīliae Sextī habitant?
2. Quem oppidānī amant et laudant?
3. Quid ancilla equō lēgātī dat?
4. Cuius equum ancilla cūrat?
5. Quis ad mūrum cum Sextō properat?
6. Quid oppidānī parant?
 LESSON X
SECOND DECLENSION (Continued)

79. We have been freely using feminine adjectives, like bona, in agreement
with feminine nouns of the first declension and declined like them.
Masculine adjectives of this class are declined like dominus, and neuters
like pīlum. The adjective and noun, masculine and neuter, are therefore
declined as follows:

Masculine Noun and Adjective Neuter Noun and Adjective

dominus bonus, the good master pīlum bonum, the good
spear
Bases domin- bon- Bases pīl- bon-
Singular
TERMINATIONS TERMINATIONS
Nom. do´minus bonus -us pīlum -um
bonum
Gen. dominī bonī -ī pīlī bonī -ī
Dat. dominō bonō -ō pīlō bonō -ō
Acc. dominum -um pīlum -um
bonum bonum
Abl. dominō bonō -ō pīlō bonō -ō
Voc. domine bone -e pīlum -um
bonum
Plural
Nom. dominī bonī -ī pīla bona -a
Gen. dominō´rum -ōrum pīlō´rum -ōrum
bonō´rum bonō´rum
Dat. dominīs bonīs -is pīlīs bonīs -īs
Acc. dominōs bonōs -ōs pīla bona -a
 Abl. dominīs bonīs -īs pīlīs bonīs -īs

Decline together bellum longum, equus parvus, servus malus, mūrus

altus, frūmentum novum.
80. Observe the sentences

Lesbia ancilla est bona, Lesbia, the maidservant, is good

Fīlia Lesbiae ancillae est bona, the daughter of Lesbia, the
maidservant, is good
Servus Lesbiam ancillam amat, the slave loves Lesbia, the
maidservant

In these sentences ancilla, ancillae, and ancillam denote the class of

persons to which Lesbia belongs and explain who she is. Nouns so related
that the second is only another name for the first and explains it are said to
be in apposition, and are always in the same case.
81. Rule. Apposition. An appositive agrees in case with the noun which it
explains.
82. EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 285.

I. 1. Patria servī bonī, vīcus servōrum bonōrum, bone popule.

2. Populus oppidī magnī, in oppidō magnō, in oppidīs magnīs.

3. Cum pīlīs longīs, ad pīla longa, ad mūrōs lātōs. 4. Lēgāte male, amīcī
legātī malī, cēna grāta dominō bonō. 5. Frūmentum equōrum parvōrum,
domine bone, ad lēgātōs clārōs. 6. Rhēnus est in Germāniā, patriā meā. 7.
Sextus lēgātus pīlum longum portat.

8. Oppidānī bonī Sextō lēgātō clārā pecūniam dant. 9. Malī

servī equum bonum Mārcī dominī necant. 10. Galba agricola et Iūlia fīlia
bona labōrant. 11. Mārcus nauta in īnsulā Siciliā
habitat.

II. 1. Wicked slave, who is your friend? Why does he not praise Galba, your
master? 2. My friend is from (ex) a village of Germany, my fatherland. 3.
My friend does not love the people of Italy. 4. Who is caring for 1 the good
horse of Galba, the farmer? 5. Mark, where is Lesbia, the

maidservant? 6. She is hastening 1 to the little cottage 2 of Julia, the farmer’s

daughter.
1. See footnote 1, p. 33. Remember that cūrat is transitive and governs a direct object.
2. Not the dative. (Cf. § 43.)
 LESSON XI
ADJECTIVES OF THE FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS

83. Adjectives of the first and second declensions are declined in the three
genders as follows:

Singular
MASCULINE FEMININE NEUTER
Nom. bonus bona bonum
Gen. bonī bonae bonī
Dat. bonō bonae bonō
Acc. bonum bonam bonum
Abl. bonō bonā bonō
Voc. bone bona bonum
Plural
Nom. bonī bonae bona
Gen. bonōrum bonārum bonōrum
Dat. bonīs bonīs bonīs
Acc. bonōs bonās bona
Abl. bonīs bonīs bonīs

a. Write the declension and give it orally across the page, thus giving
the three genders for each case.
b. Decline grātus, -a, -um; malus, -a, -um; altus, -a, -um; parvus, -a,
-um.
84. Thus far the adjectives have had the same terminations as the nouns.

However, the agreement between the adjective and its noun does not mean
that they must have the same termination. If the adjective and the noun
belong to different declensions, the terminations will, in many cases, not be
the same. For example, nauta, sailor, is masculine and belongs to the first
declension. The masculine form of the adjective bonus is of the second
declension. Consequently, a good sailor is nauta bonus.

So, the wicked farmer is agricola malus. Learn the following declensions:

85. nauta bonus (bases naut- bon-), m., the good sailor

Singular Plural
Nom. nauta bonus nautae bonī
Gen. nautae bonī nautārum bonōrum
Dat. nautae bonō nautīs bonīs
Acc. nautam bonum nautās bonōs
Abl. nautā bonō nautīs bonīs
Voc. nauta bone nautae bonī

86. EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 285.

I. 1. Est 1 in vīcō nauta bonus.

2. Sextus est amīcus nautae bonī. 3. Sextus nautae bonō galeam dat. 4.
Populus Rōmānus nautam bonum laudat. 5. Sextus cum

nautā bonō praedam portat. 6. Ubi, nauta bone, sunt arma et tēla lēgātī
Rōmānī? 7. Nautae bonī ad bellum properant. 8. Fāma

nautārum bonōrum est clāra. 9. Pugnae sunt grātae nautīs bonīs.

10. Oppidānī nautās bonōs cūrant. 11. Cūr, nautae bonī, malī

agricolae ad Rhēnum properant? 12. Malī agricolae cum bonīs nautīs

pugnant.
II. 1. The wicked farmer is hastening to the village with (his) booty. 2. The
reputation of the wicked farmer is not good.

3. Why does Galba’s daughter give arms and weapons to the wicked
farmer? 4. Lesbia invites the good sailor to dinner. 5. Why is Lesbia with
the good sailor hastening from the cottage? 6. Sextus, where is my helmet?
7. The good sailors are hastening to the toilsome battle. 8. The horses of the
wicked farmers are small.

9. The Roman people give money to the good sailors.

10. Friends care for the good sailors. 11. Whose friends are fighting with
the wicked farmers?
1. Est, beginning a declarative sentence, there is.
GALEAE
 LESSON XII
NOUNS IN -IUS AND -IUM

87. Nouns of the second declension in -ius and -ium end in -ī in the
genitive singular, not in -iī, and the accent rests on the penult; as, fīlī from
fīlius (son), praesi´dī from praesi´dium (garrison).
88. Proper names of persons in -ius, and fīlius, end in -ī in the vocative
singular, not in -ĕ, and the accent rests on the penult; as, Vergi´lī, O Vergil;
fīlī, O son.
a. Observe that in these words the vocative and the genitive are alike.
89. praesidium (base praesidi-), n., garrison fīlius (base
fīli-), m., son
Singular
Nom. praesidium fīlius
Gen. praesi´dī fīlī
Dat. praesidiō fīliō
Acc. praesidium fīlium
Abl. praesidiō fīliō
Voc. praesidium fīlī
The plural is regular. Note that the -i- of the base is lost only in the genitive
singular, and in the vocative of words like fīlius.
Decline together praesidium parvum; fīlius bonus; fluvius longus, the
long river; proelium clārum, the famous battle.
90. EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 285.

I. 1. Frūmentum bonae terrae, gladī malī, bellī longī. 2. Cōnstantia magna,
praesidia magna, clāre Vergi´lī. 3. Male serve, Ō clārum oppidum, male fīlī,
fīliī malī, fīlī malī. 4. Fluvī longī, fluviī longī, fluviōrum longōrum, fāma
praesi´dī magnī. 5. Cum gladiīs parvīs, cum deābus clārīs, ad nautās clārōs.
6. Multōrum proeliōrum, praedae magnae, ad proelia dūra.

Germānia

II. Germānia, patria Germānōrum, est clāra terra. In Germāniā sunt fluviī
multī. Rhēnus magnus et lātus fluvius Germāniae est. In silvīs lātīs
Germāniae sunt ferae multae. Multi Germāni in oppidīs magnis et in vīcīs
parvīs habitant et multī sunt agricolae bonī. Bella Germānōrum sunt magna
et clāra. Populus Germāniae bellum et proelia amat et saepe cum finitimīs
pugnat. Fluvius Rhēnus est fīnitimus oppidīs 1 multīs et clārīs.
1. Dative with fīnitimus. (See § 43.)
 LESSON XIII
SECOND DECLENSION (Continued)

91. Declension of Nouns in -er and -ir. In early Latin

all the masculine nouns of the second declension ended in -os.

This -os later became -us in words like servus, and

was dropped entirely in words with bases ending in -r, like

puer, boy; ager, field; and vir,

man. These words are therefore declined as follows:

92. puer, m., boy ager, m., field vir, m., man

Base puer- Base agr- Base vir-

Singular TERMINATIONS
Nom. puer ager vir ——
Gen. puerī agrī virī -ī
Dat. puerō agrō virō -ō
Acc. puerum agrum virum -um
Abl. puerō agrō virō -ō
Plural
Nom. puerī agrī virī -ī
Gen. puerōrum agrōrum virōrum -ōrum
Dat. puerīs agrīs virīs -īs
Acc. puerōs agrōs virōs -ōs
Abl. puerīs agrīs virīs -īs

a. The vocative case of these words is like the nominative,

following the general rule (§ 74. a).

b. The declension differs from that of servus only in the

nominative and vocative singular.

c. Note that in puer the e remains all the way

through, while in ager it is present only in the nominative. In

puer the e belongs to the base, but in ager (base

agr-) it does not, and was inserted in the nominative to make it

easier to pronounce. Most words in -er are declined like

ager. The genitive shows whether you are to follow puer or ager.

93. Masculine adjectives in -er of the second declension are declined

like nouns in -er. A few of them are declined like puer,

but most of them like ager. The feminine and neuter nominatives

show which form to follow, thus,

Masc. Fem. Neut.

līber lībera līberum (free) is like puer
pulcher pulchra pulchrum (pretty) is like ager

For the full declension in the three genders, see § 469. b. c.

94. Decline together the words vir līber, terra lībera,

frūmentum līberum, puer pulcher, puella pulchra,

oppidum pulchrum
95. Italia 1
First learn the special

vocabulary, p. 286.

Magna est Italiae fāma, patriae Rōmānōrum, et clāra est Rōma, domina

orbis terrārum. 2 Tiberim, 3 fluvium Rōmānum, quis nōn laudat et pulchrōs

fluviō

fīnitimōs agrōs? Altōs mūrōs, longa et dūra bella, clārās victōriās quis

nōn laudat? Pulchra est terra Italia. Agrī bonī agricolīs praemia dant

magna, et equī agricolārum cōpiam frūmentī ad oppida et vīcōs portant.

In agrīs populī Rōmānī labōrant multī servī. Viae Italiae sunt longae et

lātae. Fīnitima Italiae est īnsula Sicilia.

1. In this selection note especially the emphasis as shown by the order

of the words.

2. orbis terrārum, of the world.

3. Tiberim, the Tiber, accusative case.

96. DIALOGUE

Marcus and Cornelius

C. Ubi est, Mārce, fīlius tuus? Estne in pulchrā terrā Italiā?

M. Nōn est, Cornēlī, in Italiā. Ad fluvium Rhēnum properat cum
cōpiīs

Rōmānīs quia est 4 fāma Novī bellī cum

 Germānīs. Līber Germāniae
populus Rōmānōs Nōn amat.
C. Estne fīlius tuus copiārum
Rōmānārum lēgātus?
M. Lēgātus nōn est, sed est apud
legiōnāriōs.
C. Quae 5 arma portat 6?
M. Scūtum magnum et lōrīcam
dūram et galeam pulchram portat.
C. Quae tēla portat?
M. Gladium et pīlum longum
portat.
C. Amatne lēgātus fīlium tuum?
M. Amat, et saepe fīliō meō
praemia pulchra et praedam
multam dat.
C. Ubi est terra Germānōrum?
M. Terra Germānōrum, Cornēlī est
fīnitima Rhēnō, fluviō magnō et
altō.
LEGIONARIUS
4. est, before its subject, there is; so sunt, there are.
5. Quae, what kind of, an interrogative adjective pronoun.
6. What are the three possible translations of the present tense?
 LESSON XIV
THE POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS

97. Observe the sentences

This is my shield
This shield is mine
In the first sentence my is a possessive adjective; in the second mine is a
possessive pronoun, for it takes the place of a noun, this shield is mine
being equivalent to this shield is my shield. Similarly, in Latin the
possessives are sometimes adjectives and sometimes pronouns.
98. The possessives my, mine, your, yours, etc. are declined like adjectives
of the first and second declensions.
Singular
1st Pers. meus, mea, meum my, mine
2d Pers. tuus, tua, tuum your, yours
3d Pers. suus, sua, suum his (own), her (own), its (own)
Plural
1st Pers. noster, nostra, nostrum our, ours
2d Pers. vester, vestra, vestrum your, yours
3d Pers. suus, sua, suum their (own), theirs
Note. Meus has the irregular vocative singular masculine mī, as mī
fīlī, O my son.
a. The possessives agree with the name of the thing possessed in
gender, number, and case. Compare the English and Latin in
Sextus is calling his boy Sextus suum puerum vocat
Julia is calling her boy
 Iūlia

Observe that suum agrees with puerum, and is unaffected by the

gender of Sextus or Julia.
b. When your, yours, refers to one person, use tuus; when to more than
one, vester; as,
Lesbia, your wreaths are Corōnae tuae, Lesbia, sunt pulchrae
pretty Corōnae vestrae, puellae, sunt
Girls, your wreaths are pretty pulchrae
c. Suus is a reflexive possessive, that is, it usually stands in the
predicate and regularly refers back to the subject. Thus, Vir suōs
servōs vocat means The man calls his (own) slaves. Here his (suōs)
refers to man (vir), and could not refer to any one else.
d. Possessives are used much less frequently than in English, being
omitted whenever the meaning is clear without them. (Cf. § 22. a.)
This is especially true of suus, -a, -um, which, when inserted, is more
or less emphatic, like our his own, her own, etc.
99. EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 286.

I. 1. Mārcus amīcō Sextō cōnsilium suum nūntiat 2. Est cōpia frūmentī in
agrīs nostrīs. 3. Amīcī meī bonam cēnam ancillae vestrae laudant 4. Tua
lōrīca, mī fīlī, est dūra. 5. Scūta nostra et tēla, mī amīce, in castrls Rōmānīs
sunt. 6. Suntne virī patriae tuae līberī? Sunt. 7. Ubi, Cornēlī, est tua galea
pulchra? 8. Mea galea, Sexte, est in casā meā. 9. Pīlum longum est tuum,
sed gladius est meus. 10. Iūlia gallīnās suās pulchrās amat et gallīnae
dominam suam amant. 11. Nostra castra sunt vestra. 12. Est cōpia praedae
in castrīs vestrīs. 13. Amīcī tuī miserīs et aegrīs cibum et pecūniam saepe
dant.
II. 1. Our teacher praises Mark’s industry. 2. My son Sextus is carrying his
booty to the Roman camp. 1 3. Your good girls are giving aid to the sick and
wretched. 2 4. There are 3 frequent battles in our villages. 5. My son, where
is the lieutenant’s food? 6. The camp is mine, but the weapons are yours.
1. Not the dative. Why?
2. Here the adjectives sick and wretched are used like nouns.
3. Where should sunt stand? Cf. I. 2 above.

AGRICOLA ARAT
 LESSON XV
THE ABLATIVE DENOTING WITH

100. Of the various relations denoted by the ablative case (§ 50) there is
none more important than that expressed in English by the preposition with.
This little word is not so simple as it looks. It does not always convey the
same meaning, nor is it always to be translated by cum. This will become
clear from the following sentences:
a. Mark is feeble with (for or because of) want of food
b. Diana kills the beasts with (or by) her arrows
c. Julia is with Sextus
d. The men fight with great steadiness
a. In sentence a, with want (of food) gives the cause of Mark’s
feebleness. This idea is expressed in Latin by the ablative without a
preposition, and the construction is called the ablative of cause:
Mārcus est īnfīrmus inopiā cibī
b. In sentence b, with (or by) her arrows tells by means of what Diana
kills the beasts. This idea is expressed in Latin by the ablative without
a preposition, and the construction is called the ablative of means:
Diāna sagittīs suīs ferās necat
c. In sentence c we are told that Julia is not alone, but in company
with Sextus. This idea is expressed in Latin by the ablative with the
preposition cum, and the construction is called the ablative of
accompaniment:
Iūlia est cum Sextō
d. In sentence d we are told how the men fight. The idea is one of
manner. This is expressed in Latin by the ablative with cum, unless
there is a modifying adjective present, in which case cum may be
omitted. This construction is called the ablative of manner:
Virī (cum) cōnstantiā magnā pugnant
101. You are now able to form four important rules for the ablative denoting
with:
102. Rule. Ablative of Cause. Cause is denoted by the ablative without a
preposition. This answers the question Because of what?
103. Rule. Ablative of Means. Means is denoted by the ablative without a
preposition. This answers the question By means of what? With what?
N.B. Cum must never be used with the ablative expressing cause or
means.
104. Rule. Ablative of Accompaniment. Accompaniment is denoted by the
ablative with cum. This answers the question With whom?
105. Rule. Ablative of Manner. The ablative with cum is used to denote
the manner of an action. Cum may be omitted, if an adjective is used with
the ablative. This answers the question How? In what manner?
106. What uses of the ablative do you discover in the following passage,
and what question does each answer?
The soldiers marched to the fort with great speed and broke down the gate
with blows of their muskets. The inhabitants, terrified by the din, attempted
to cross the river with their wives and children, but the stream was swollen
with (or by) the rain. Because of this many were swept away by the waters
and only a few, almost overcome with fatigue, with great difficulty
succeeded in gaining the farther shore.
107. EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 286.

I. The Romans prepare for War. Rōmānī, clārus Italiae populus, bellum
parant. Ex agrīs suīs, vicīs, oppidīsque magnō studiō virī validī ad arma
properant. Iam lēgatī cum legiōnariīs ex Italiā ad Rhēnum, fluvium
Germāniae altum et lātum, properant, et servī equīs et carrīs cibum
frūmentumque ad castra Rōmāna portant. Inopiā bonōrum tēlōrum īnfirmī
sunt Germānī, sed Rōmānī armāti galeīs, lōrīcīs, scūtīs, gladiīs, pīlīsque
sunt validī.
II. 1. The sturdy farmers of Italy labor in the fields with great diligence. 2.
Sextus, the lieutenant, and (his) son Mark are fighting with the Germans. 3.
The Roman legionaries are armed with long spears. 4. Where is Lesbia,
your maid, Sextus? Lesbia is with my friends in Galba’s cottage. 5. Many
are sick because of bad water and for lack of food. 6. The Germans, with
(their) sons and daughters, are hastening with horses and wagons.
 LESSON XVI
THE NINE IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES

108. There are nine irregular adjectives of the first and second declensions
which have a peculiar termination in the genitive and dative singular of all
genders:
Masc. Fem. Neut.
Gen. -īus -īus -īus
Dat. -ī -ī -ī
Otherwise they are declined like bonus, -a, -um. Learn the list and the
meaning of each:
alius, alia, aliud, other, another (of several)
alter, altera, alterum, the one, the other (of two) ūnus, -a, -um,
one, alone; (in the plural) only ūllus, -a, -um, any
nūllus, -a, -um, none, no
sōlus, -a, -um, alone
tōtus, -a, -um, all, whole, entire
uter, utra, utrum, which? (of two)
neuter, neutra, neutrum, neither (of two)
109. PARADIGMS

Singular
MASC. FEM. NEUT. MASC. FEM. NEUT.
Nom. nūllus nūlla nūllum alius alia aliud
Gen. nūllī´us nūllī´us nūllī´us alī´us alī´us alī´us
Dat. nūllī nūllī nūllī aliī aliī aliī
Acc. nūllum nūllam nūllum alium aliam aliud
Abl. nūllō nūllā nūllō aliō aliā aliō
The Plural is Regular
 a. Note the peculiar neuter singular ending in -d of alius. The genitive
alīus is rare. Instead of it use alterīus, the genitive of alter.
b. These peculiar case endings are found also in the declension of
pronouns (see § 114). For this reason these adjectives are sometimes
called the pronominal adjectives.
110. Learn the following idioms:
alter, -era, -erum ... alter, -era, -erum, the one ... the other (of
two)
alius, -a, -ud ... alius, -a, -ud, one ... another (of any number)
aliī, -ae, -a ... aliī, -ae, -a, some ... others
EXAMPLES

1. Alterum oppidum est magnum, alterum parvum, the one town is

large, the other small (of two towns).
2. Aliud oppidum est validum, aliud īnfīrmum, one town is strong,
another weak (of towns in general).
3. Aliī gladiōs, aliī scūta portant, some carry swords, others shields.
111. EXERCISES

I. 1. In utrā casā est Iūlia? Iūlia est in neutrā casā. 2. Nūllī malō puerō
praemium dat magister. 3. Alter puer est nauta, alter agricola. 4. Aliī virī
aquam, aliī terram amant. 5. Galba ūnus (or sōlus) cum studiō labōrat. 6.
Estne ūllus carrus in agrō meō? 7. Lesbia est ancilla alterīus dominī, Tullia
alterīus. 8. Lesbia sōla cēnam parat. 9. Cēna nūllīus alterīus ancillae est
bona. 10. Lesbia nūllī aliī virō cēnam dat.
Note. The pronominal adjectives, as you observe, regularly stand
before and not after their nouns.
II. 1. The men of all Germany are preparing for war. 2. Some towns are
great and others are small. 3. One boy likes chickens, another horses. 4.
Already the booty of one town is in our fort. 5. Our whole village is
suffering for (i.e. weak because of) lack of food. 6. The people are already
hastening to the other town. 7. Among the Romans (there) is no lack of
grain.
 LESSON XVII
THE DEMONSTRATIVE IS, EA, ID

112. A demonstrative is a word that points out an object definitely, as this,

that, these, those. Sometimes these words are pronouns, as, Do you hear
these? and sometimes adjectives, as, Do you hear these men? In the former
case they are called demonstrative pronouns, in the latter demonstrative
adjectives.
113. Demonstratives are similarly used in Latin both as pronouns and as
adjectives. The one used most is
is, masculine; ea, feminine; id, neuter
this these
Singular Plural
that those
114. Is is declined as follows. Compare its declension with that of alius, §
109.
Base e-
Singular Plural
MASC. FEM. NEUT. MASC. FEM. NEUT.
Nom. is ea id eī (or iī) eae ea
Gen. eius eius eius eōrum eārum eōrum
Dat. eī eī eī eīs (or iīs) eīs (or iīs) eīs (or iīs)
Acc. eum eam id eōs eās ea
Abl. eō eā eō eīs (or iīs) eīs (or iīs) eīs (or iīs)
Note that the base e- changes to i- in a few cases. The genitive singular
eius is pronounced eh´yus. In the plural the forms with two i’s are
preferred and the two i’s are pronounced as one. Hence, pronounce iī
as ī and iīs as īs.
115. Besides being used as demonstrative pronouns and adjectives the Latin
demonstratives are regularly used for the personal pronoun he, she, it. As a
personal pronoun, then, is would have the following meanings:

Nom. is, he; ea, she; id, it

Gen. eius, of him or his; eius, of her, her, or hers; eius, of it or
its
Sing. Dat. eī, to or for him; eī, to or for her; eī, to or for it
Acc. eum, him; eam, her; id, it
Abl. eō, with, from, etc., him; eā, with, from, etc., her; eō,
with, from, etc., it
Nom. eī or iī, eae, ea, they
Gen. eōrum, eārum, eōrum, of them, their
Plur. Dat. eīs or iīs, eīs or iīs, eīs or iīs, to or for them
Acc. eōs, eās, ea, them
Abl. eīs or iīs, eīs or iīs, eīs or iīs, with, from, etc., them

116. Comparison between suus and is. We learned above (§ 98. c) that
suus is a reflexive possessive. When his, her (poss.), its, their, do not refer
to the subject of the sentence, we express his, her, its by eius, the genitive
singular of is, ea, id; and their by the genitive plural, using eōrum to refer
to a masculine or neuter antecedent noun and eārum to refer to a feminine
one.
EXAMPLES

Galba calls his (own) son, Galba suum fīlium vocat

Galba calls his son (not his own, but another’s), Galba eius
fīlium vocat
Julia calls her (own) children, Iūlia suōs līberōs vocat
Julia calls her children (not her own, but another’s), Iūlia eius
līberōs vocat
The men praise their (own) boys, virī suōs puerōs laudant
 The men praise their boys (not their own, but others’), virī
eōrum puerōs laudant
117. EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 287.

1. He praises her, him, it, them. 2. This cart, that report, these teachers,
those women, that abode, these abodes. 3. That strong garrison, among
those weak and sick women, that want of firmness, those frequent plans.
4. The other woman is calling her chickens (her own). 5. Another woman is
calling her chickens (not her own). 6. The Gaul praises his arms (his own).
7. The Gaul praises his arms (not his own). 8. This farmer often plows their
fields. 9. Those wretched slaves long for their master (their own). 10. Those
wretched slaves long for their master (not their own). 11. Free men love
their own fatherland. 12. They love its villages and towns.
118. DIALOGUE 1

Cornelius and Marcus

M. Quis est vir, Cornēlī, cum puerō parvō? Estne Rōmānus et līber?
C. Rōmānus nōn est, Mārce. Is vir est servus et eius domicilium est
in silvīs Galliae.
M. Estne puer fīlius eius servī an alterīus?
C. Neutrīus fīlius est puer. Is est fīlius lēgātī Sextī.
M. Quō puer cum eō servō properat?
C. Is cum servō properat ad lātōs Sextī agrōs. 2 Tōtum frūmentum
est iam mātūrum et magnus servōrum numerus in Italiae 3 agrīs
labōrat.
M. Agricolaene sunt Gallī et patriae suae agrōs arant?
C. Nōn agricolae sunt. Bellum amant Gallī, nōn agrī cultūram. Apud
eōs virī pugnant et fēminae auxiliō līberōrum agrōs arant parantque
cibum.
M. Magister noster puerīs puellīsque grātās Gallōrum fābulās saepe
nārrat et laudat eōs saepe.
 C. Mala est fortūna eōrum et saepe miserī servī multīs cum lacrimīs
patriam suam dēsīderant.
1. There are a number of departures from the normal order in this dialogue. Find them, and give the
reason.
2. When a noun is modified by both a genitive and an adjective, a favorite order of words is
adjective, genitive, noun.
3. A modifying genitive often stands between a preposition and its object.

Second Review, Lessons IX-XVII, §§ 506-509

 LESSON XVIII
CONJUGATION

THE PRESENT, IMPERFECT, AND FUTURE TENSES OF SUM

119. The inflection of a verb is called its conjugation (cf. § 23). In English
the verb has but few changes in form, the different meanings being
expressed by the use of personal

pronouns and auxiliaries, as, I am carried, we have carried, they shall have
carried, etc. In Latin, on the other hand, instead of

using personal pronouns and auxiliary verbs, the form changes with the
meaning. In this way the Romans expressed differences in tense, mood,
voice, person, and number.

120. The Tenses. The different forms of a verb referring to different times
are called its tenses. The chief distinctions of time are present, past, and
future:

1. The present, that is, what is happening now, or the Present Tense
what usually happens, is expressed by
2. The past, that is, what was happening, used to the Imperfect,
happen, happened, has happened, or had Perfect, and
happened, is expressed by Pluperfect Tenses

3. The future, that is, what is going to happen, is theFuture and

expressed by Future Perfect
Tenses

121. The Moods. Verbs have inflection of mood to indicate the manner in
which they express action. The moods of the Latin verb are the indicative,
subjunctive, imperative, and infinitive.
a. A verb is in the indicative mood when it makes a statement or asks a
question about something assumed as a fact. All the verbs we have
used thus far are in the present indicative.
122. The Persons. There are three persons, as in English. The first person is
the person speaking (I sing); the second person the person spoken to (you
sing); the third person the person spoken of

(he sings). Instead of using personal pronouns for the different persons in
the two numbers, singular and plural, the Latin verb uses the personal
endings (cf. § 22 a; 29). We have already learned that -t is the ending of the
third person singular in the active voice and -nt of the third person plural.
The complete list of personal endings of the

active voice is as follows:

Singular Plural
1st Pers. I -m or -ō we -mus
2d Pers. thou or you -s you -tis
3d Pers. he, she, it -t they -nt

123. Most verbs form their moods and tenses after a regular plan and are

called regular verbs. Verbs that depart from this plan are called irregular.
The verb to be is irregular in Latin as in English. The present, imperfect,
and future tenses of the indicative are inflected as follows:

Present Indicative
SINGULAR PLURAL
1st Pers. su-m, I am su-mus, we are
2d Pers. e-s, you 1 are es-tis, you 1 are
3d Pers. es-t, he, she, or it is su-nt, they are
Imperfect Indicative
1st Pers. er-a-m, I was er-ā´-mus, we were
 2d Pers. er-ā-s, you were er-ā´-tis, you were
3d Pers. er-a-t, he, she, or it was er-a-nt, they were
Future Indicative
1st Pers. er-ō, I shall be er´-i-mus, we shall be
2d Pers. er-i-s, you will be er´-i-tis, you will be
3d Pers. er-i-t, he will be er-u-nt, they will be

a. Be careful about vowel quantity and accent in these forms, and

consult §§ 12.2; 14; 15.
1. Observe that in English you are, you were, etc. may be either singular or plural. In Latin the
singular and plural forms are

never the same.

124. DIALOGUE

The Boys Sextus and Marcus

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 287.

S. Ubi es, Mārce? Ubi est Quīntus? Ubi estis, amīcī?
M. Cum Quīntō, Sexte, in silvā sum. Nōn sōlī sumus; sunt in silvā
multī

aliī puerī.
S. Nunc laetus es, sed nūper nōn laetus erās. Cūr miser erās?
M. Miser eram quia amīcī meī erant in aliō vicō et eram sōlus. Nunc sum

apud sociōs meōs. Nunc laetī sumus et erimus.

S. Erātisne in lūdo hodiē?
M. Hodiē nōn erāmus in lūdō, quod magister erat aeger.
S. Eritisne mox in lūdō?
M. Amīcī meī ibi erunt, sed ego (I) nōn erō.
S. Cūr nōn ibi eris? Magister, saepe irātus, inopiam tuam studī

dīligentiaeque nōn laudat.

M. Nūper aeger eram et nunc īnfīrmus sum.
125. EXERCISE

1. You are, you were, you will be, (sing. and plur.). 2. I am, I was, I shall be.
3. He is, he was, he will be. 4. We

are, we were, we shall be. 5. They are, they were, they will be.

6. Why were you not in school to-day? I was sick. 7. Lately he was a sailor,
now he is a farmer, soon he will be a teacher.

8. To-day I am happy, but lately I was wretched. 9. The

teachers were happy because of the boys’ industry.

PUERI ROMANI IN LUDO
 LESSON XIX
THE FOUR REGULAR CONJUGATIONS · PRESENT ACTIVE

INDICATIVE OF AMŌ AND MONEŌ

126. There are four conjugations of the regular verbs. These conjugations
are

distinguished from each other by the final vowel of the present

conjugation-stem. 1 This vowel is called the

distinguishing vowel, and is best seen in the present

infinitive.
1. The stem is the body of a word to which the terminations are

attached. It is often identical with the base (cf. § 58). If, however, the stem ends in a vowel, the

latter does not appear in the base, but is variously combined with the

inflectional terminations. This point is further explained in § 230.

Below is given the present infinitive of a verb of each

conjugation, the present stem, and the distinguishing

vowel.

DISTINGUISHING
Conjugation Pres. Infin. Pres. Stem VOWEL
I. amā´re, to love amā- ā
II. monē´re, to advise monē- ē
III. re´gĕre, to rule regĕ- ĕ
IV. audī´re, to hear audi- ī
 a. Note that the present stem of each conjugation is found by

dropping -re, the ending of the present infinitive.

Note. The present infinitive of

sum is esse, and es- is the present stem.

127. From the present stem are formed the present, imperfect,

and future tenses.

128. The inflection of the Present Active Indicative of the first and of the

second conjugation is as follows:

a´mō, amā´re (love) mo´neō, monē´re

(advise)
Pres. Stem amā- Pres. Stem monē- PERSONAL
ENDINGS

1. a´mō, I love mo´neō, I advise -ō

Sing. 2. a´mās, you love mo´nēs, you advise -s
3. a´mat, he (she, it) mo´net, he (she, it) -t
loves advises
1. amā´mus, we love monē´mus, we advise -mus
Plur.
2. amā´tis, you love monē´tis, you advise -tis
3. a´mant, they love mo´nent, they advise -nt

1. The present tense is inflected by adding the personal endings to the

present stem, and its first person uses -o and not -m. The

form amō is for amā-ō, the two vowels ā-ō contracting to ō. In moneō
there is no contraction.
Nearly all regular verbs ending in -eo belong to the second

conjugation.

2. Note that the long final vowel of the stem is shortened before

another vowel (monē-ō = mo´nĕō), and before final

-t (amăt, monĕt) and -nt (amănt,

monĕnt). Compare § 12. 2.

129. Like amō and moneō inflect the present active indicative

of the following verbs 2:

2. The only new verbs in this list are the five of the second

conjugation which are starred. Learn their meanings.

Indicative Present Infinitive Present

a´rō, I plow arā´re, to plow
cū´rō, I care for cūrā´re, to care for
*dē´leō, I destroy dēlē´re, to destroy
dēsī´derō, I long for dēsīderā´re, to long for
dō, 3 I give da´re, to give
*ha´beō, I have habē´re, to have
ha´bitō, I live, I dwell habitā´re, to live, to dwell
*iu´beō, I order iubē´re, to order
labō´rō, I labor labōrā´re, to labor
lau´dō, I praise laudā´re, to praise
mātū´rō, I hasten mātūrā´re, to hasten
*mo´veō, I move movē´re, to move
nār´rō, I tell nārrā´re, to tell
ne´cō, I kill necā´re, to kill
 nūn´tiō, I announce nūntiā´re, to announce
pa´rō, I prepare parā´re, to prepare
por´tō, I carry portā´re, to carry
pro´perō, I hasten properā´re, to hasten
pug´nō, I fight pugnā´re, to fight
*vi´deō, I see vidē´re, to see
vo´cō, I call vocā´re, to call

3. Observe that in dō, dăre, the a is short, and

that the present stem is dă- and not dā-. The only forms

of dō that have a long are dās (pres. indic.), dā (pres. imv.), and dāns (pres. part.).

130. The Translation of the Present. In English there are three ways

of expressing present action. We may say, for example, I live, I am

living, or I do live. In Latin the one expression

habitō covers all three of these expressions.

131. EXERCISES

Give the voice, mood, tense, person, and

number of each form.

I. 1. Vocāmus, properātis, iubent. 2. Movētis, laudās, vidēs.

3. Dēlētis, habētis, dant. 4. Mātūrās, dēsīderat, vidēmus.

5. Iubet, movent, necat. 6. Nārrāmus, movēs, vident.

7. Labōrātis, properant, portās, parant. 8. Dēlet, habētis,

iubēmus, dās.

N.B. Observe that the personal ending is of prime importance in

translating a Latin verb form. Give that your first attention.

II. 1. We plow, we are plowing, we do plow. 2. They care for,

they are caring for, they do care for. 3. You give, you are having,

you do have (sing.). 4. We destroy, I do long for, they are

living. 5. He calls, they see, we are telling. 6. We do fight,

we order, he is moving, he prepares. 7. They are laboring, we kill,

you announce.
 LESSON XX
IMPERFECT ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF AMŌ AND MONEŌ

132. Tense Signs. Instead of using auxiliary verbs to express differences in

tense, like was, shall, will, etc., Latin adds to the verb stem certain elements
that have the force of auxiliary verbs. These are called tense signs.
133. Formation and Inflection of the Imperfect. The tense sign of the
imperfect is -bā-, which is added to the present stem. The imperfect
consists, therefore, of three parts:
PERSONAL
Present Stem Tense Sign ENDING
amā- ba- m
loving was I
The inflection is as follows:
Conjugation I Conjugation II
SINGULAR PERSONAL
ENDINGS
1. amā´bam, I was loving monē´bam, I was advising -m
2. amā´bās, you were loving monē´bās, you were advising -s
3. amā´bat, he was loving monē´bat, he was advising -t
PLURAL
1. amābā´mus, we were monēbā´mus, we were -mus
loving advising
2. amābā´tis, you were monēbā´tis, you were -tis
loving advising
3. amā´bant, they were monē´bant, they were -nt
loving advising
a. Note that the ā of the tense sign -bā- is shortened before -nt, and
before m and t when final. (Cf. § 12. 2.)
In a similar manner inflect the verbs given in § 129.
134. Meaning of the Imperfect. The Latin imperfect describes an act as
going on or progressing in past time, like the English past-progressive tense
(as, I was walking). It is the regular tense used to describe a past situation or
condition of affairs.
135. EXERCISES

I. 1. Vidēbāmus, dēsīderābat, mātūrābās. 2. Dabant, vocābātis, dēlēbāmus.

3. Pugnant, laudābās, movēbātis. 4. Iubēbant, properābātis, portābāmus. 5.
Dabās, nārrābant, labōrābātis. 6. Vidēbant, movēbās, nūntiābāmus. 7.
Necābat, movēbam, habēbat, parābātis.
II. 1. You were having (sing. and plur.), we were killing, they were
laboring. 2. He was moving, we were ordering, we were fighting. 3. We
were telling, they were seeing, he was calling. 4. They were living, I was
longing for, we were destroying. 5. You were giving, you were moving, you
were announcing, (sing. and plur.). 6. They were caring for, he was
plowing, we were praising.
136. Ni´obe and her Children
First learn the special vocabulary, p. 287.
Niobē, rēgina Thēbānōrum, erat pulchra fēmina sed superba. Erat superba
nōn sōlum fōrmā 1 suā marītīque potentiā 1 sed etiam magnō līberōrum
numerō. 1 Nam habēbat 2 septem fīliōs et septem fīliās. Sed ea superbia erat
rēgīnae 3 causa magnae trīstitiae et līberīs 3 causa dūrae poenae.
Note. The words Niobē, Thēbānōrum, and marītī will be found in
the general vocabulary. Translate the selection without looking up any
other words.
1. Ablative of cause.
2. Translate had; it denotes a past situation. (See § 134.)
3. Dative, cf. § 43.
 LESSON XXI
FUTURE ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF AMŌ AND MONEŌ

137. The tense sign of the Future Indicative in the first and second
conjugations is -bi-. This is joined to the present stem of the verb and
followed by the personal ending, as follows:
PERSONAL
Present Stem Tense Sign ENDING
amā- bi- s
love will you
138. The Future Active Indicative is inflected as follows.
Conjugation I Conjugation II
SINGULAR
1. amā´bō, I shall love monē´bō, I shall advise
2. amā´bis, you will love monē´bis, you will advise
3. amā´bit, he will love monē´bit, he will advise
PLURAL
1. amā´bimus, we shall love monē´bimus, we shall advise
2. amā´bitis will love monē´bitis, you will advise
3. amā´bunt, they will love monē´bunt, they will advise
a. The personal endings are as in the present. The ending -bō in the
first person singular is contracted from -bi-ō. The -bi- appears as -bu-
in the third person plural. Note that the inflection is like that of erō, the
future of sum. Pay especial attention to the accent.
In a similar manner inflect the verbs given in § 129.
139. EXERCISES

I. 1. Movēbitis, laudābis, arābō. 2. Dēlēbitis, vocābitis, dabunt. 3.

Mātūrābis, dēsīderābit, vidēbimus. 4. Habēbit, movēbunt, necābit. 5.
Nārrābimus, monēbis, vidēbunt. 6. Labōrābitis, cūrābunt, dabis. 7.
Habitābimus, properābitis, iubēbunt, parābit. 8. Nūntiābō, portābimus,
iubēbō.
II. 1. We shall announce, we shall see, I shall hasten. 2. I shall carry, he will
plow, they will care for. 3. You will announce, you will move, you will
give, (sing. and plur.). 4. We shall fight, we shall destroy, I shall long for. 5.
He will call, they will see, you will tell (plur.). 6. They will dwell, we shall
order, he will praise. 7. They will labor, we shall kill, you will have (sing.
and plur.), he will destroy.
140. Niobe and her Children (Concluded)
First learn the special vocabulary, p. 288.
Apollō et Diāna erant līberī Lātōnae. Iīs Thēbānī sacra crēbra parābant. 1
Oppidānī amābant Lātōnam et līberōs eius. Id superbae rēgīnae erat
molestum. “Cūr,” inquit, “Lātōnae et līberīs sacra parātis? Duōs līberōs
habet Lātōna; quattuordecim habeō ego. Ubi sunt mea sacra?” Lātōna iīs
verbīs 2 īrāta līberōs suōs vocat. Ad eam volant Apollō Diānaque et sagittīs 3
suīs miserōs līberōs rēgīnae superbae dēlent. Niobē, nūper laeta, nunc
misera, sedet apud līberōs interfectōs et cum perpetuīs lacrimīs 4 eōs
dēsīderat.
Note. Consult the general vocabulary for Apollō, inquit, duōs, and
quattuordecim. Try to remember the meaning of all the other words.
1. Observe the force of the imperfect here, used to prepare, were in the habit of preparing; so
amābant denotes a past situation of affairs. (See § 134.)
2. Ablative of cause.
3. Ablative of means.
4. This may be either manner or accompaniment. It is often impossible to draw a sharp line between
means, manner, and accompaniment. The Romans themselves drew no sharp distinction. It was
enough for them if the general idea demanded the ablative case.
 LESSON XXII
REVIEW OF VERBS · THE DATIVE WITH ADJECTIVES

141. Review the present, imperfect, and future active indicative, both orally
and in writing, of sum and the verbs in § 129.
142. We learned in § 43 for what sort of expressions we may expect the
dative, and in § 44 that one of its commonest uses is with verbs to express
the indirect object. It is also very common with adjectives to express the
object toward which the quality denoted by the adjective is directed. We
have already had a number of cases where grātus, agreeable to, was so
followed by a dative; and in the last lesson we had molestus, annoying to,
followed by that case. The usage may be more explicitly stated by the
following rule:
143. Rule. Dative with Adjectives. The dative is used with adjectives to
denote the object toward which the given quality is directed. Such are,
especially, those meaning near, also fit, friendly, pleasing, like, and their
opposites.
144. Among such adjectives memorize the following:
idōneus, -a, -um, fit, suitable (for)
amīcus, -a, -um, friendly (to)
inimīcus, -a, -um, hostile (to)
grātus, -a, -um, pleasing (to), agreeable (to) molestus, -a, -um,
annoying (to), troublesome (to)
fīnitimus, -a, -um, neighboring (to)
proximus, -a, -um, nearest, next (to)
145. EXERCISES

I. 1. Rōmānī terram idōneam agrī cultūrae habent. 2. Gallī cōpiīs Rōmānīs

inimīcī erant. 3. Cui dea Lātōna amīca non erat? 4. Dea Lātōna superbae
rēgīnae amīca nōn erat. 5. Cibus noster, Mārce, erit armātīs virīs grātus. 6.
Quid erat molestum populīs Italiae? 7. Bella longa cum Gallīs erant molesta
populīs Italiae. 8. Agrī Germānōrum fluviō Rhēnō fīnitimī erant. 9. Rōmānī
ad silvam oppidō proximam castra movēbant. 10. Nōn sōlum fōrma sed
etiam superbia rēgīnae erat magna. 11. Mox rēgīna pulchra erit aegra
trīstitiā. 12. Cūr erat Niobē, rēgīna Thēbānōrum, laeta? Laeta erat Niobē
multīs fīliīs et fīliābus.
II. 1. The sacrifices of the people will be annoying to the haughty queen. 2.
The sacrifices were pleasing not only to Latona but also to Diana. 3. Diana
will destroy those hostile to Latona. 4. The punishment of the haughty
queen was pleasing to the goddess Diana. 5. The Romans will move their
forces to a large field 1 suitable for a camp. 6. Some of the allies were
friendly to the Romans, others to the Gauls.
1. Why not the dative?

146. Cornelia and her Jewels

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 288.
Apud antīquās dominās, Cornēlia, Āfricānī fīlia, erat 2 maximē clāra. Fīliī
eius erant Tiberius Gracchus et Gāius Gracchus. Iī puerī cum Cornēliā in
oppidō Rōmā, clārō Italiae oppidō, habitābant. Ibi eōs cūrābat Cornēlia et
ibi magnō cum studiō eōs docēbat. Bona fēmina erat Cornēlia et bonam
disciplīnam maximē amābat.
Note. Can you translate the paragraph above? There are no new
words.
2. Observe that all the imperfects denote continued or progressive action, or describe a state of
affairs. (Cf. § 134.)
 LESSON XXIII
PRESENT ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF REGŌ AND

AUDIŌ

147. As we learned in § 126, the present stem of the third conjugation ends
in -ĕ, and of the fourth in -ī.

The inflection of the Present Indicative is as follows:

Conjugation III Conjugation IV

re´gō, re´gere (rule) au´diō, audī´re (hear)
Pres. Stem regĕ- Pres. Stem audī-
SINGULAR
1. re´gō, I rule au´diō, I hear
2. re´gis, you rule au´dīs, you hear
3. re´git, he (she, it) rules au´dit, he (she, it) hears
PLURAL
1. re´gimus, we rule audī´mus, we hear
2. re´gitis, you rule audī´tis, you hear
3. re´gunt, they rule au´diunt, they hear

1. The personal endings are the same as before.

2. The final short -e- of the stem regĕ- combines with the -ō in the first
person, becomes -u- in the third person plural, and becomes -ĭ- elsewhere.
The inflection is like that of erō, the future of sum.
3. In audiō the personal endings are added regularly to the stem audī-. In
the third person plural -u- is inserted between the stem and the personal
ending, as audi-u-nt. Note that the long vowel of the stem is shortened
before final -t just as in amō and moneō. (Cf. § 12. 2.) Note that -i- is
always short in the third conjugation and long in the fourth, excepting
where long vowels are regularly shortened.

(Cf. § 12. 1, 2.) 148. Like regō and audiō inflect the present active
indicative of the following verbs:

Indicative Present Infinitive Present

agō, I drive agere, to drive
dīcō, I say dīcere, to say
dūcō, I lead dūcere, to lead
mittō, I send mittere, to send
mūniō, I fortify mūnīre, to fortify
reperiō, I find reperīre, to find
veniō, I come venīre, to come

149. EXERCISES

I. 1. Quis agit? Cūr venit? Quem mittit? Quem dūcis? 2. Quid mittunt? Ad
quem veniunt? Cuius castra mūniunt? 3. Quem agunt?

Venīmus. Quid puer reperit? 4. Quem mittimus? Cuius equum dūcitis?

Quid dīcunt? 5. Mūnīmus, venītis, dīcit. 6. Agimus, reperītis,

mūnīs. 7. Reperis, ducitis, dīcis. 8. Agitis, audimus,

regimus.

II. 1. What do they find? Whom do they hear? Why does he come?

2. Whose camp are we fortifying? To whom does he say? What are we

saying? 3. I am driving, you are leading, they are hearing.

4. You send, he says, you fortify (sing. and plur.).

5. I am coming, we find, they send. 6. They lead, you drive,

he does fortify. 7. You lead, you find, you rule, (all plur.).

150. Cornelia and her Jewels (Concluded)

Proximum domicīliō Cornēliae erat pulchrae Campānae domicilium.

Campāna erat superba nōn sōlum fōrmā suā sed maximē ōrnāmentīs suīs.

Ea 1 laudābat semper. “Habēsne tū ūlla

ornāmenta, Cornēlia?”

inquit. “Ubi sunt tua ōrnāmenta?” Deinde Cornēlia fīliōs suōs Tiberium

et Gāium vocat. “Puerī meī,” inquit, “sunt mea ōrnāmenta. Nam bonī

līberī sunt semper bonae fēminae ōrnāmenta maximē clāra.”

Note. The only new words here are Campāna, semper, and tū.
1. Ea, accusative plural neuter.

“PUERI MEI SUNT MEA ORNAMENTA”

 LESSON XXIV
IMPERFECT ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF REGŌ AND AUDIŌ · THE DATIVE WITH
SPECIAL INTRANSITIVE VERBS

151. PARADIGMS

Conjugation III Conjugation IV

SINGULAR
1. regē´bam, I was ruling audiē´bam, I was hearing
2. regē´bās, you were riding audiē´bās, you were hearing
3. regē´bat, he was ruling audiē´bat, he was hearing
PLURAL
1. regēbā´mus, we were ruling audiēbā´mus, we were hearing
2. regēbā´tis, you were ruling audiēbā´tis, you were hearing
3. regē´bant, they were ruling audiē´bant, they were hearing
1. The tense sign is -bā-, as in the first two conjugations.
2. Observe that the final -ĕ- of the stem is lengthened before the tense sign -
bā-. This makes the imperfect of the third conjugation just like the
imperfect of the second (cf. monēbam and regēbam).
3. In the fourth conjugation -ē- is inserted between the stem and the tense
sign -bā- (audi-ē-ba-m).
4. In a similar manner inflect the verbs given in § 148.
152. EXERCISES

I. 1. Agēbat, veniēbat, mittēbat, dūcēbant. 2. Agēbant, mittēbant, dūcēbas,

mūniēbant. 3. Mittēbāmus, dūcēbātis, dīcēbant. 4. Mūniēbāmus, veniēbātis,
dīcēbās. 5. Mittēbās, veniēbāmus, reperiēbat. 6. Reperiēbās, veniēbās,
audiēbātis. 7. Agēbāmus, reperiēbātis, mūniēbat. 8. Agēbātis, dīcēbam,
mūniēbam.
II. 1. They were leading, you were driving (sing. and plur.), he was
fortifying. 2. They were sending, we were finding, I was coming. 3. You
were sending, you were fortifying, (sing. and plur.), he was saying. 4. They
were hearing, you were leading (sing. and plur.), I was driving. 5. We were
saying, he was sending, I was fortifying. 6. They were coming, he was
hearing, I was finding. 7. You were ruling (sing. and plur.), we were
coming, they were ruling.
153. The Dative with Special Intransitive Verbs. We learned above (§ 20.
a) that a verb which does not admit of a direct object is called an
intransitive verb. Many such verbs, however, are of such meaning that they
can govern an indirect object, which will, of course, be in the dative case (§
45). Learn the following list of intransitive verbs with their meanings. In
each case the dative indirect object is the person or thing to which a benefit,
injury, or feeling is directed. (Cf. § 43.)
crēdō, crēdere, believe (give belief to)
faveō, favēre, favor (show favor to)
noceō, nocēre, injure (do harm to)
pāreō, pārēre, obey (give obedience to)
persuādeō, persuādēre, persuade (offer persuasion to) resistō,
resistere, resist (offer resistance to) studeō, studēre, be eager
for (give attention to)
154. Rule. Dative with Intransitive Verbs. The dative of the indirect
object is used with the intransitive verbs crēdō, faveō, noceō, pāreō,
persuādeō, resistō, studeō, and others of like meaning.
155. EXERCISE

1. Crēdisne verbīs sociōrum? Multī verbīs eōrum nōn crēdunt. 2. Meī

fīnitimī cōnsiliō tuō nōn favēbunt, quod bellō student. 3. Tiberius et Gāius
disciplīnae dūrae nōn resistēbant et Cornēliae pārēbant. 4. Dea erat inimīca
septem fīliābus rēgīnae. 5. Dūra poena et perpetua trīstitia rēgīnae nōn
persuādēbunt. 6. Nūper ea resistēbat et nunc resistit potentiae Lātōnae. 7.
Mox sagittae volābunt et līberīs miserīs nocēbunt.
 LESSON XXV
FUTURE ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF REGŌ AND AUDIŌ

156. In the future tense of the third and fourth conjugations we meet with a
new tense sign. Instead of using -bi-, as in the first and second
conjugations, we use -ā- 1 in the first person singular and -ē- in the rest of
the tense. In the third conjugation the final -ĕ- of the stem is dropped before
this tense sign; in the fourth conjugation the final -ī- of the stem is
retained. 2
1. The -ā- is shortened before -m final, and -ē- before -t final and before -nt. (Cf. § 12. 2.)
2. The -ī- is, of course, shortened, being before another vowel. (Cf. § 12. 1.)

157. PARADIGMS

Conjugation III Conjugation IV

SINGULAR
1. re´gam, I shall rule au´diam, I shall hear
2. re´gēs, you will rule au´diēs, you will hear
3. re´get, he will rule au´diet, he will hear
PLURAL
1. regē´mus, we shall rule audiē´mus, we shall hear
2. regē´tis, you will rule audiē´tis, you will hear
3. re´gent, they will rule au´dient, they will hear
1. Observe that the future of the third conjugation is like the present of the
second, excepting in the first person singular.
2. In the same manner inflect the verbs given in § 148.
158. EXERCISES

I. 1. Dīcet, dūcētis, mūniēmus. 2. Dīcent, dīcētis, mittēmus. 3. Mūnient,

venient, mittent, agent. 4. Dūcet, mittēs, veniet, aget. 5. Mūniet, reperiētis,
agēmus. 6. Mittam, veniēmus, regent. 7. Audiētis, veniēs, reperiēs. 8.
Reperiet, agam, dūcēmus, mittet. 9. Vidēbitis, sedēbō, vocābimus.
II. 1. I shall find, he will hear, they will come. 2. I shall fortify, he will send,
we shall say. 3. I shall drive, you will lead, they will hear. 4. You will send,
you will fortify, (sing. and plur.), he will say. 5. I shall come, we shall find,
they will send.
6. Who 3 will believe the story? I 4 shall believe the story. 7. Whose friends
do you favor? We favor our friends. 8. Who will resist our weapons? Sextus
will resist your weapons. 9. Who will persuade him? They will persuade
him. 10. Why were you injuring my horse? I was not injuring your horse.
11. Whom does a good slave obey? A good slave obeys his master. 12. Our
men were eager for another battle.
3. Remember that quis, who, is singular in number.
4. Express by ego, because it is emphatic.
 LESSON XXVI
VERBS IN -IŌ OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION · THE IMPERATIVE MOOD

159. There are a few common verbs ending in -iō which do not belong to
the fourth conjugation, as you might infer, but to the third. The fact that
they belong to the third conjugation is shown by the ending of the infinitive.
(Cf. § 126.) Compare
audiō, audī´re (hear), fourth conjugation
capiō, ca´pere (take), third conjugation
160. The present, imperfect, and future active indicative of capiō are
inflected as follows:
capiō, capere, take
Pres. Stem cape-
Present Imperfect Future
SINGULAR
1. ca´piō capiē´bam ca´piam
2. ca´pis capiē´bās ca´piēs
3. ca´pit capiē´bat ca´piet
PLURAL
1. ca´pimus capiēbā´mus capiē´mus
2. ca´pitis capiēbā´tis capiē´tis
3. ca´piunt capiē´bant ca´pient
1. Observe that capiō and the other -iō verbs follow the fourth conjugation
wherever in the fourth conjugation two vowels occur in succession. (Cf.
capiō, audiō; capiunt, audiunt; and all the imperfect and future.) All other
forms are like the third conjugation. (Cf. capis, regis; capit, regit; etc.)
2. Like capiō, inflect
 faciō, facere, make, do
fugiō, fugere, flee
iaciō, iacere, hurl
rapiō, rapere, seize
161. The Imperative Mood. The imperative mood expresses a command;
as, come! send! The present tense of the imperative is used only in the
second person, singular and plural. The singular in the active voice is
regularly the same in form as the present stem. The plural is formed by
adding -te to the singular.
Conjugation Singular Plural
I. amā, love thou amā´te, love ye
II. monē, advise thou monē´te, advise ye
III. (a) rege, rule thou re´gite, rule ye
(b) cape, take thou ca´pite, take ye
IV. audī, hear thou audī´te, hear ye
sum (irregular) es, be thou este, be ye
1. In the third conjugation the final -ĕ- of the stem becomes -ĭ- in the plural.
2. The verbs dīcō, say; dūcō, lead; and faciō, make, have the irregular
forms dīc, dūc, and fac in the singular.
3. Give the present active imperative, singular and plural, of veniō, dūcō,
vocō, doceō, laudō, dīcō, sedeō, agō, faciō, mūniō, mittō, rapiō.
162. EXERCISES

I. 1. Fugient, faciunt, iaciēbat. 2. Dēlē, nūntiāte, fugiunt. 3. Venīte, dīc,

faciētis. 4. Dūcite, iaciam, fugiēbant. 5. Fac, iaciēbāmus, fugimus, rapite. 6.
Sedēte, reperī, docēte. 7. Fugiēmus, iacient, rapiēs. 8. Reperient, rapiēbātis,
nocent. 9. Favēte, resistē, pārēbitis.
10. Volā ad multās terrās et dā auxilium. 11. Ego tēla mea capiam et multās
ferās dēlēbō. 12. Quis fābulae tuae crēdet? 13. Este bonī, puerī, et audīte
verba grāta magistrī.
II. 1. The goddess will seize her arms and will hurl her weapons. 2. With
her weapons she will destroy many beasts. 3. She will give aid to the
weak. 1 4. She will fly to many lands and the beasts will flee. 5. Romans,
tell 2 the famous story to your children.
1. Plural. An adjective used as a noun. (Cf. § 99. II. 3.)
2. Imperative. The imperative generally stands first, as in English.

Third Review, Lessons XVIII-XXVI, §§ 510-512

 LESSON XXVII
THE PASSIVE VOICE · PRESENT, IMPERFECT, AND FUTURE INDICATIVE OF AMŌ
AND MONEŌ

163. The Voices. Thus far the verb forms have been in the active voice; that
is, they have represented the subject as performing an action; as,
The lion——> killed——> the hunter
A verb is said to be in the passive voice when it represents its subject as
receiving an action; as,
The lion <—— was killed <—— by the hunter
Note the direction of the arrows.
164. Passive Personal Endings. In the passive voice we use a different set
of personal endings. They are as follows:
1. -r, I 1. -mur, we
Sing. 2. -ris, -re, you Plur. 2. -minī, you
3. -tur, he, she, it 3. -ntur, they
a. Observe that the letter -r appears somewhere in all but one of the
endings. This is sometimes called the passive sign.
165. PARADIGMS

amō, amāre monēo, monēre

Pres. Stem amā- Pres. Stem monē-
PERSONAL
Present Indicative ENDINGS

Sing. a´mor, I am loved mo´neor, I am advised -or 1

amā´ris or amā´re, you monē´ris or monē´re, you -ris or -
are loved are advised re
 amā´tur, he is loved monē´tur, he is advised -tur
amā´mur, we are loved monē´mur, we are advised -mur
amā´minī, you are monē´minī, you are -mini
Plur. loved advised
aman´tur, they are monen´tur, they are -ntur
loved advised

Imperfect Indicative (Tense Sign -bā-)

amā´bar, I was being monē´bar, I was being -r
loved advised
amābā´ris or amābā´re, monēbā´ris or monēbā´re, -ris or -
Sing.
you were being loved you were being advised re
amābā´tur, he was monēbā´tur, he was being -tur
being loved advised
amābā´mur, we were monēbā´mur, we were -mur
being loved being advised
amābā´minī, you were monēbā´minī, you were -minī
Plur.
being loved being advised
amāban´tur, they were monēban´tur, they were -ntur
being loved being advised

Future (Tense Sign -bi-)

amā´bor, I shall be monē´bor, I shall be -r
loved advised
amā´beris or amā´bere, monē´beris or monē´bere, -ris or -
Sing.
you will be loved you will be advised re
amā´bitur, he will be monē´bitur, he will be -tur
loved advised
Plur. amā´bimur, we shall be monē´bimur, we shall be -mur
loved advised
 amābi´minī, you will be monēbi´minī, you will be -minī
loved advised
amābun´tur, they will monēbun´tur, they will be -ntur
be loved advised
1. In the present the personal ending of the first person singular is -or.

1. The tense sign and the personal endings are added as in the active.
2. In the future the tense sign -bi- appears as -bo- in the first person, -be- in
the second, singular number, and as -bu- in the third person plural.
3. Inflect laudō, necō, portō, moveō, dēleō, iubeō, in the present,
imperfect, and future indicative, active and passive.
166. Intransitive verbs, such as mātūrō, I hasten; habitō, I dwell, do not
have a passive voice with a personal subject.
167. EXERCISES

I. 1. Laudāris or laudāre, laudās, datur, dat. 2. Dabitur, dabit, vidēminī,

vidētis. 3. Vocābat, vocābātur, dēlēbitis, dēlēbiminī. 4. Parābātur, parābat,
cūrās, cūrāris or cūrāre. 5. Portābantur, portābant, vidēbimur, vidēbimus. 6.
Iubēris or iubēre, iubēs, laudābāris or laudābāre, laudābās. 7. Movēberis or
movēbere, movēbis, dabantur, dabant. 8. Dēlentur, dēlent, parābāmur,
parābāmus.
II. 1. We prepare, we are prepared, I shall be called, I shall call, you were
carrying, you were being carried. 2. I see, I am seen, it was being
announced, he was announcing, they will order, they will be ordered. 3. You
will be killed, you will kill, you move, you are moved, we are praising, we
are being praised. 4. I am called, I call, you will have, you are cared for. 5.
They are seen, they see, we were teaching, we were being taught, they will
move, they will be moved.
PERSEUS ANDROMEDAM SERVAT
168. Per´seus and Androm´eda
First learn the special vocabulary, p. 288.
Perseus fīlius erat Iovis, 2 maximī 3 deōrum. Dē eō multās fabulās nārrant
poētae. Eī favent deī, eī magica arma et ālās dant. Eīs tēlīs armātus et ālīs
frētus ad multās terrās volābat et mōnstra saeva dēlēbat et miserīs
īnfīrmīsque auxilium dabat. Aethiopia est terra Āfricae. Eam terram
Cēpheus 5 regēbat. Eī 6 Neptūnus, maximus aquārum deus, erat īrātus et
mittit 7 mōnstrum saevum ad Aethiopiam. Ibi mōnstrum nōn sōlum lātīs
pulchrīsque Aethiopiae agrīs nocēbat sed etiam domicilia agricolārum
dēlēbat, et multōs virōs, fēminās, līberōsque necābat. Populus ex agrīs
fugiēbat et oppida mūrīs validīs mūniēbat. Tum Cēpheus magnā trīstitiā
commōtus ad Iovis ōrāculum properat et ita dīcit: “Amīcī meī necantur; agrī
meī vāstantur. Audī verba mea, Iuppiter. Dā miserīs auxilium. Age
mōnstrum saevum ex patriā.”
2. Iovis, the genitive of Iuppiter.
3. Used substantively, the greatest. So below, l. 4, miserīs and īnfīrmīs are used substantively.
4. Pronounce in two syllables, Ce´pheus.
5. Eī, at him, dative with īrātus.
6. The present is often used, as in English, in speaking of a past action, in order to make the story
more vivid and exciting.
 LESSON XXVIII
PRESENT, IMPERFECT, AND FUTURE INDICATIVE PASSIVE OF REGŌ AND AUDIŌ

169. Review the present, imperfect, and future indicative active of regō and
audiō, and learn the passive of the same tenses (§§ 490, 491).
a. Observe that the tense signs of the imperfect and future are the same
as in the active voice, and that the passive personal endings (§ 164) are
added instead of the active ones.
b. Note the slight irregularity in the second person singular present of
the third conjugation. There the final -e- of the stem is not changed to -
i-, as it is in the active. We therefore have re´geris or re´gere, not re
´giris, re´gire.
c. Inflect agō, dīcō, dūcō, mūniō, reperiō, in the present, imperfect,
and future indicative, active and passive.
170. EXERCISES

I. 1. Agēbat, agēbātur, mittēbat, mittēbātur, dūcēbat. 2. Agunt, aguntur,

mittuntur, mittunt, mūniunt. 3. Mittor, mittar, mittam, dūcēre, dūcere. 4.
Dīcēmur, dīcimus, dīcēmus, dīcimur, mūniēbaminī. 5. Dūcitur, dūciminī,
reperīmur, reperiar, agitur. 6. Agēbāmus, agēbāmur, reperīris, reperiēminī.
7. Mūnīminī, veniēbam, dūcēbar, dīcētur. 8. Mittiminī, mittitis, mittēris,
mitteris, agēbāminī. 9. Dīcitur, dīcit, mūniuntur, reperient, audientur.
II. 1. I was being driven, I was driving, we were leading, we were being led,
he says, it is said. 2. I shall send, I shall be sent, you will find, you will be
found, they lead, they are led. 3. I am found, we are led, they are driven,
you were being led (sing. and plur.). 4. We shall drive, we shall be driven,
he leads, he is being led, they will come, they will be fortified. 5. They were
ruling, they were being ruled, you will send, you will be sent, you are sent,
(sing. and plur.). 6. He was being led, he will come, you are said (sing. and
plur.).
171. Perseus and Andromeda (Continued)
First learn the special vocabulary, p. 288.
Tum ōrāculum ita respondet: “Mala est fortūna tua. Neptūnus, magnus
aquārum deus, terrae Aethiopiae inimīcus, eās poenās mittit. Sed parā īrātō
deō sacrum idōneum et mōnstrum saevum ex patriā tuā agētur. Andromeda
fīlia tua est mōnstrō grāta. Dā eam mōnstrō. Servā cāram patriam et vītam
populī tuī.” Andromeda autem erat puella pulchra. Eam amābat Cēpheus
maximē.
 LESSON XXIX
PRESENT, IMPERFECT, AND FUTURE INDICATIVE PASSIVE OF -IŌ VERBS ·
PRESENT PASSIVE INFINITIVE AND IMPERATIVE

172. Review the active voice of capiō, present, imperfect, and future, and
learn the passive of the same tenses (§ 492).
a. The present forms capior and capiuntur are like audior,
audiuntur, and the rest of the tense is like regor.
b. In like manner inflect the passive of iaciō and rapiō.
173. The Infinitive. The infinitive mood gives the general meaning of the
verb without person or number; as, amāre, to love. Infinitive means
unlimited. The forms of the other moods, being limited by person and
number, are called the finite, or limited, verb forms.
174. The forms of the Present Infinitive, active and passive, are as follows:
Conj. Pres. Stem Pres. Infinitive Active Pres. Infinitive Passive
I. amā- amā´re, to love amā´rī, to be loved
II. monē- monē´re, to advise monē´rī, to be advised
III. rege- re´gere, to rule re´gī, to be ruled
cape- ca´pere, to take ca´pī, to be taken
IV. audī- audī´re, to hear audīrī, to be heard
1. Observe that to form the present active infinitive we add -re to the
present stem.
a. The present infinitive of sum is esse. There is no passive.
2. Observe that the present passive infinitive is formed from the active by
changing final -e to -ī, except in the third conjugation, which changes final -
ere to -ī.
3. Give the active and passive present infinitives of doceō, sedeō, volō,
cūrō, mittō, dūcō, mūniō, reperiō, iaciō, rapiō.
175. The forms of the Present Imperative, active and passive, are as
follows:
Active 1 Passive
CONJ. SING. PLUR. SING. PLUR.
I. a´mā amā´te amā´re, be thou loved amā´minī, be ye loved
II. mo monē monē´re, be thou monē´minī, be ye
´nē ´te advised advised
III. re´ge re´gite re´gere, be thou ruled regi´minī, be ye ruled
ca ca´pite ca´pere, be thou taken capi´minī, be ye taken
´pe
IV. au´dī audī´te audī´re, be thou heard audī´minī, be ye
heard
1. Observe that the second person singular of the present passive imperative
is like the present active infinitive, and that both singular and plural are like
the second person singular 2 and plural, respectively, of the present passive
indicative.
2. Give the present imperative, both active and passive, of the verbs in §
174. 3.
1. For the sake of comparison the active is repeated from § 161.
2. That is, using the personal ending -re. A form like amāre may be either indicative, infinitive, or
imperative.

176. EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 289.

I. 1. Tum Perseus ālīs ad terrās multās volabit. 2. Mōnstrum saevum per
aquās properat et mox agrōs nostrōs vāstābit. 3. Sī autem Cēpheus ad
ōrāculum properābit, ōrāculum ita respondēbit. 4. Quis tēlīs Perseī
superābitur? Multa mōnstra tēlīs eius superābuntur. 5. Cum cūrīs magnīs et
lacrimīs multīs agricolae ex domiciliīs cārīs aguntur. 6. Multa loca
vāstābantur et multa oppida dēlēbantur. 7. Mōnstrum est validum, tamen
superābitur. 8. Crēdēsne semper verbīs ōrāculī? Ego iīs non semper crēdam.
9. Pārēbitne Cēpheus ōrāculō? Verba ōrāculī eī persuādēbunt. 10. Si nōn
fugiēmus, oppidum capiētur et oppidānī necābuntur. 11. Vocāte puerōs et
nārrāte fābulam clāram dē mōnstrō saevō.
II. 1. Fly thou, to be cared for, be ye sent, lead thou. 2. To lead, to be led, be
ye seized, fortify thou. 3. To be hurled, to fly, send thou, to be found. 4. To
be sent, be ye led, to hurl, to be taken. 5. Find thou, hear ye, be ye ruled, to
be fortified.
 LESSON XXX
SYNOPSES IN THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS · THE ABLATIVE

DENOTING FROM

177. You should learn to give rapidly synopses of the verbs you have had,
as

follows: 1

Conjugation I Conjugation II
Indicative
ACTIVE PASSIVE ACTIVE PASSIVE
Pres. a´mō a´mor mo´neō mo´neor
Imperf. amā´bam amā´bar monē´bam monē´bar
Fut. amā´bo amā´bor monē´bo monē´bor
Imperative
Pres. a´mā amā´re mo´nē monē´re
Infinitive
Pres. amā´re amā´rī monē´re monē´rī
Conjugation III
Conjugation III (-iō verbs)

Indicative
ACTIVE PASSIVE ACTIVE PASSIVE
Pres. re´gō re´gor ca´piō ca´pior
Imperf. regē´bam regē´bar capiē´bam capiē´bar
Fut. re´gam re´gar ca´piam ca´piar
Imperative
Pres. re´ge re´gere ca´pe ca´pere
 Infinitive
Pres. re´gere re´gī ca´pere ca´pī

Conjugation IV
Indicative
ACTIVE PASSIVE
Pres. au´diō au´dior
Imperf. audiē´bam audiē´bar
Fut. au´diam au´diar
Imperative
Pres. au´dī audī´re
Infinitive
Pres. audī´re audī´rī

1. Synopses should be given not only in the first person, but in other

persons as well, particularly in the third singular and plural.

1. Give the synopsis of rapiō, mūniō, reperiō,

doceō, videō, dīcō, agō, laudō,

portō, and vary the person and number.

178. We learned in § 50 that one of the three

relations covered by the ablative case is expressed in English by the

preposition from. This is sometimes called the separative

ablative, and it has a number of special uses. You have already

grown familiar with the first mentioned below.

179. Rule. Ablative of the Place

From. The place from which is expressed by the ablative with the
prepositions ā or ab, dē, ē or

ex.

Agricolae ex agrīs veniunt, the farmers come from the

fields

a. ā or ab denotes from near a place;

ē or ex, out from it; and dē, down

from it. This may be represented graphically as follows:

180. Rule. Ablative of Separation. Words expressing separation or

deprivation require an ablative to

complete their meaning.

a. If the separation is actual and literal of one

material thing from another, the preposition ā or ab,

ē or ex, or dē is generally used. If no actual

motion takes place of one thing from another, no preposition is

necessary.

(a)
Perseus terram ā mōnstrīs līberat
 Perseus frees the land from monsters (literal separation—
actual motion is expressed)
(b)
Perseus terram trīstitiā līberat
Perseus frees the land from sorrow (figurative separation—
no actual motion is expressed)

181. Rule. Ablative of the Personal

Agent. The word expressing the person from whom an action starts,

when not the subject, is put in the ablative with the preposition

ā or ab.

a. In this construction the English translation of ā,

ab is by rather than from. This ablative is

regularly used with passive verbs to indicate the person by whom the act
was performed.

Mōnstrum ā Perseō necātur, the monster is being slain by (lit. from)

Perseus
b. Note that the active form of the above sentence would be

Perseus monstrum necat, Perseus is slaying the monster. In

the passive the object of the active verb becomes the

subject, and the subject of the active verb becomes the

ablative of the personal agent, with ā or ab.

c. Distinguish carefully between the ablative of means and the

ablative of the personal agent. Both are often translated into English

by the preposition by. (Cf. § 100.

b.) Means is a thing; the agent or actor is a

person. The ablative of means has no preposition. The

ablative of the personal agent has ā or ab. Compare

Fera sagittā necātur, the wild beast is killed by an

arrow

Fera ā Diānā necātur, the wild beast is killed by

Diana

Sagittā, in the first sentence, is the ablative of means; ā

Diānā, in the second, is the ablative of the personal agent.

182. EXERCISES

First learn the special

vocabulary, p. 289.

I. 1. Viri inopiā cibī dēfessī ab eō locō discēdent. 2. Germānī

castrīs Rōmānīs adpropinquābant, tamen lēgātus cōpiās ā proeliō

continēbat. 3. Multa Gallōrum oppida ab Rōmanīs capientur.

4. Tum Rōmānī tōtum populum eōrum oppidōrum gladiīs pīlīsque

interficient. 5. Oppidānī Rōmānīs resistent, sed defessī longō

proelīo fugient. 6. Multī ex Galliā fugiēbant et in Germānōrum

vicīs habitābant. 7. Miserī nautae vulnerantur ab inimīcīs 2 saevīs et cibō
egent. 8. Discēdite et date

virīs frūmentum et cōpiam vīnī. 9. Cōpiae nostrae ā proeliō

continēbantur ab Sextō lēgatō. 10. Id oppidum ab prōvinciā Rōmānā

longē aberat.

II. 1. The weary sailors were approaching a place dear to the goddess

Diana. 2. They were without food and without wine. 3. Then

Galba and seven other men are sent to the ancient island by Sextus.

4. Already they are not far away from the land, and they see armed

men on a high place. 5. They are kept from the land by the men with

spears and arrows. 6. The men kept hurling their weapons down from

the high place with great eagerness.

2. inimīcīs, here used as a noun. See vocabulary.
 LESSON XXXI
PERFECT, PLUPERFECT, AND FUTURE PERFECT OF SUM

183. Principal Parts. There are certain parts of the verb that are of so much
consequence in tense formation that we call them the principal parts.
The principal parts of the Latin verb are the present, the past, and the past
participle; as go, went, gone; see, saw, seen, etc.
The principal parts of the Latin verb are the first person singular of the
present indicative, the present infinitive, the first person singular of the
perfect indicative, and the perfect passive participle.
184. Conjugation Stems. From the principal parts we get three conjugation
stems, from which are formed the entire conjugation. We have already
learned about the present stem, which is found from the present infinitive
(cf. § 126. a). The other two stems are the perfect stem and the participial
stem.
185. The Perfect Stem. The perfect stem of the verb is formed in various
ways, but may always be found by dropping -ī from the first person singular
of the perfect, the third of the principal parts. From the perfect stem are
formed the following tenses:
The Perfect Active Indicative
The Pluperfect Active Indicative (English Past Perfect)
The Future Perfect Active Indicative
All these tenses express completed action in present, past, or future time
respectively.
186. The Endings of the Perfect. The perfect active indicative is inflected
by adding the endings of the perfect to the perfect stem. These endings are
different from those found in any other tense, and are as follows:
Sing. 1. -ī, I Plur. 1. -imus, we
 2. -istī, you 2. -istis, you
3. -it, he, she, it 3. -ērunt or -ēre, they
187. Inflection of sum in the perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect
indicative:
Pres. Indic. Pres. Infin. Perf. Indic.
Prin. Parts sum esse fuī

Perfect Stem fu-

Perfect
SINGULAR PLURAL
fu´ī, I have been, I was fu´imus, we have been, we were
fuis´tī, you have been, you fuis´tis, you have been, you were
were
fu´it, he has been, he was fuē´runt or fuē´re, they have been, they
were
Pluperfect (Tense Sign -erā-)
fu´eram, I had been fuerā´mus, we had been
fu´erās, you had been fuerā´tis, you had been
fu´erat, he had been fu´erant, they had been
Future Perfect (Tense Sign -erā-)
fu´erō, I shall have been fue´rimus, we shall have been
fu´eris, you will have been fue´ritis, you will have been
fu´erit, he will have been fu´erint, they will have been
1. Note carefully the changing accent in the perfect.
2. Observe that the pluperfect may be formed by adding eram, the
imperfect of sum, to the perfect stem. The tense sign is -erā-.
3. Observe that the future perfect may be formed by adding erō, the future
of sum, to the perfect stem. But the third person plural ends in -erint, not in
-erunt. The tense sign is -eri-.
4. All active perfects, pluperfects, and future perfects are formed on the
perfect stem and inflected in the same way.
188. DIALOGUE

The Boys Titus, Marcus, and Quintus

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 289.

M. Ubi fuistis, Tite et Quīnte?
T. Ego in meō lūdō fuī et Quīntus in suō lūdō fuit. Bonī puerī
fuimus. Fuitne Sextus in vīcō hodiē?
M. Fuit. Nūper per agrōs proximōs fluviō properābat. Ibi is et
Cornēlius habent nāvigium.
T. Nāvigium dīcis? Aliī 1 nārrā eam fābulam!
M. Vērō (Yes, truly), pulchrum et novum nāvigium!
Q. Cuius pecūniā 2 Sextus et Cornēlius id nāvigium parant? Quis iīs
pecūniam dat?
M. Amīcī Cornēlī multum habent aurum et puer pecūniā nōn eget.
T. Quō puerī nāvigābunt? Nāvigābuntne longē ā terrā?
M. Dubia sunt cōnsilia eōrum. Sed hodiē, crēdō, sī ventus erit
idōneus, ad maximam īnsulam nāvigābunt. Iam anteā ibi fuērunt.
Tum autem ventus erat perfidus et puerī magnō in perīculō erant.
Q. Aqua ventō commōta est inimīca nautīs semper, et saepe perfidus
ventus nāvigia rapit, agit, dēletque. Iī puerī, sī nōn fuerint maximē
attentī, īrātā aquā et validō ventō superābuntur et ita interficientur.
1. Dative case. (Cf. § 109.)
2. Ablative of means.

189. EXERCISE

1. Where had the boys been before? They had been in school. 2. Where had
Sextus been? He had been in a field next to the river. 3. Who has been with
Sextus to-day? Cornelius has been with him. 4. Who says so? Marcus. 5. If
the wind has been suitable, the boys have been in the boat. 6. Soon we shall
sail with the boys. 7. There 3 will be no danger, if we are (shall have been)
careful. 4
3. The expletive there is not expressed, but the verb will precede the subject, as in English.
4. This predicate adjective must be nominative plural to agree with we.
 LESSON XXXII
THE PERFECT ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF THE FOUR REGULAR

CONJUGATIONS

190. Meanings of the Perfect. The perfect tense has two distinct meanings.
The first of these is equivalent to the English present

perfect, or perfect with have, and denotes that the action of the verb is
complete at the time of speaking; as, I have finished my work. As this
denotes completed action at a definite time, it is

called the perfect definite.

The perfect is also used to denote an action that happened sometime in the
past; as, I finished my work. As no definite time is specified, this is called
the perfect indefinite. It corresponds to the ordinary use of the English past
tense.
a. Note carefully the difference between the following tenses:

was finishing
I my work (imperfect, § 134)
used to finish
I finished my work (perfect indefinite)

I have finished my work (perfect definite)

When telling a story the Latin uses the perfect indefinite to mark the
different forward steps of the narrative, and the imperfect to describe
situations and circumstances that attend these steps. If the following
sentences were Latin, what tenses

would be used?
“Last week I went to Boston. I was trying to find an old friend of mine, but
he was out of the city. Yesterday I returned home.”
191. Inflection of the Perfect. We learned in § 186 that any perfect is
inflected by adding the endings of the perfect to the perfect stem. The
inflection in the four

regular conjugations is then as follows:

Conj. I Conj. II Conj. III Conj. IV

amāvī monuī rēxī cēpī audīvī
I have loved I have I have I have I have heard
I loved or advised ruled taken I heard or
did love I advised I ruled I took did hear
or did or did or did
advise rule take
Perfect Stems
amāv- monu- rēx- cēp- audīv-
Singular
1. amā´vī mo´nuī rē´xī cē´pī audī´vī
2. amāvis´tī monuis´tī rēxis´tī cēpis´tī audīvis´tī
3. amā´vit mo´nuit rē´xit cē´pit audī´vit
Plural
1. amā´vimus monu´imus rē´ximus cē´pimus audī´vimus
2. amāvis´tis monuis´tis rēxis´tis cēpis´tis audīvis´tis
3. amāvē monuē´runt rēxē´runt cēpē´runt audīvē´runt
´runt or or monuē or rēxē or cēpē or audīvē
amāvē´re ´re ´re ´re ´re

1. The first person of the perfect is always given as the third of the

principal parts. From this we get the perfect stem. This shows the absolute
necessity of learning the principal parts thoroughly.
2. Nearly all perfects of the first conjugation are formed by adding -vī to the
present stem. Like amāvī inflect parāvī, vocāvī, cūrāvī, laudāvī.
3. Note carefully the changing accent in the perfect. Drill on it.
192. Learn the principal parts and inflect the perfects:

Pres. Indic. Pres. Infin. Perf. Indic.

dō dăre dedī give
dēleō dēlēre dēlēvī destroy
habeō habēre habuī have
moveō movēre mōvī move
pāreō pārēre pāruī obey
prohibeō prohibēre prohibuī restrain, keep from
videō vidēre vīdī see
dīcō dīcere dīxī say
discēdō discēdere discessī depart
dūcō dūcere dūxī lead
faciō facere fēcī make, do
mittō mittere mīsī send
mūniō mūnīre mūnīvī fortify
veniō venīre vēnī come

193. Perseus and Andromeda (Continued)

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 290.
Cēpheus, adversā fortūnā maximē commōtus, discessit et multīs cum
lacrimīs populō Aethiopiae verba ōrāculī nārrāvit. Fāta Andromedae,

puellae pulchrae, ā tōtō populō dēplōrābantur, tamen nūllum erat

auxilium. Deinde Cēpheus cum plēnō trīstitiae animō cāram suam fīliam ex
oppidī portā ad aquam dūxit et bracchia eius ad saxa dūra revīnxit. Tum
amīcī puellae miserae longē discessērunt et diū mōnstrum saevum
exspectāvērunt.

Tum forte Perseus, ālīs frētus, super Aethiopiam volābat. Vīdit populum,
Andromedam, lacrimās, et, magnopere attonitus, ad terram

dēscendit. Tum Cēpheus eī tōtās cūrās nārrāvit et ita dīxit: “Pārēbō

verbīs ōrāculī, et prō patriā fīliam meam dabō; sed sī id mōnstrum

interficiēs et Andromedam servābis, tibi (to you) eam dabō.”

 LESSON XXXIII
PLUPERFECT AND FUTURE PERFECT ACTIVE INDICATIVE ·

PERFECT ACTIVE INFINITIVE

194.

Conj. I Conj. II Conj. III Conj. IV

amō moneō regō capiō audiō
Perfect Stems amāv- monu- rēx- cēp- audīv-

Pluperfect Indicative Active

Tense Sign -erā-

SINGULAR
I had loved I had advised I had ruled I had taken I had heard
1. amā monu´eram rē´xeram cē´peram audī´veram
´veram
2. amā monu´erās rē´xerās cē´perās audī´verās
´verās
3. amā monu´erat rē´xerat cē´perat audī´verat
´verat
PLURAL
1. amāverā monuerā rēxerā´mus cēperā audīverā
´mus ´mus ´mus ´mus
2. amāverā monuerā´tis rēxerā´tis cēperā´tis audīverā´tis
´tis
3. amā monu´erant rē´xerant cē´perant audī´verant
´verant
Future Perfect Indicative Active
 Tense Sign -eri-
SINGULAR
I shall have I shall have I shall have I shall have I shall have
loved advised ruled taken heard
1. amā monu´erō rē´xerō cē´perō audī´verō
´verō
2. amā monu´eris rē´xeris cē´peris audī´veris
´veris
3. amā monu´erit rē´xerit cē´perit audī´verit
´verit
PLURAL
1. amāve monue rēxe´rimus cēpe´rimus audīve
´rimus ´rimus ´rimus
2. amāve monue´ritis rēxe´ritis cēpe´ritis audīve´ritis
´ritis
3. amā monu´erint rē´xerint cē´perint audī´verint
´verint

1. Observe that these are all inflected alike and the rules for formation given
in § 187. 2-4 hold good here.
2. In like manner inflect the pluperfect and future perfect indicative active
of dō, portō, dēleō, moveō, habeō, dīcō, discēdō, faciō, veniō, mūniō.
195. The Perfect Active Infinitive. The perfect active infinitive is formed
by adding -isse to the perfect stem.

Conj. Perfect Stem Perfect Infinitive

I. amāv- amāvis´se, to have loved
II. monu- monuis´se, to have advised
III. (a) rēx- rēxis´se, to have ruled
(b) cēp- cēpis´se, to have taken
IV. audīv- audīvis´se, to have heard
sum fu- fuis´se, to have been
1. In like manner give the perfect infinitive active of dō, portō, dēleō,
moveō, habeō, dīcō, discēdō, faciō, veniō, mūniō.
196. EXERCISES

I. 1. Habuistī, mōvērunt, miserant. 2. Vīdit, dīxeris, dūxisse.

3. Mīsistis, pāruērunt, discesserāmus. 4. Mūnīvit, dederam,

mīserō. 5. Habuerimus, dēlēvī, pāruit, fuisse. 6. Dederās,

mūnīveritis, vēnerātis, mīsisse. 7. Vēnerās, fēcisse, dederātis, portāveris.

8. Quem verba ōrāculī mōverant? Populum verba ōrāculī mōverant.

9. Cui Cēpheus verba ōrāculī nārrāverit? Perseō Cēpheus verba

ōrāculī nārrāverit. 10. Amīcī ab Andromedā discesserint.

11. Mōnstrum saevum domicilia multa dēlēverat. 12. Ubi

mōnstrum vīdistis? Id in aquā vīdimus. 13. Quid mōnstrum faciet?

Mōnstrum Andromedam interficiet.

II. 1. They have obeyed, we have destroyed, I shall have had.

2. We shall have sent, I had come, they have fortified. 3. I

had departed, he has obeyed, you have sent (sing. and plur.).

4. To have destroyed, to have seen, he will have given, they have carried. 5.
He had destroyed, he has moved, you have had (sing.

and plur.). 6. I have given, you had moved (sing. and plur.), we had said. 7.
You will have made (sing. and plur.), they will have led, to have given.

8. Who had seen the monster? Andromeda had seen it. 9. Why had the men
departed from 1 the towns? They had departed because the monster had
come. 10. Did Cepheus obey 2 the oracle 3? He did.
1. ex. What would ab mean?
2. Did ... obey, perfect tense.
3. What case?
 LESSON XXXIV
REVIEW OF THE ACTIVE VOICE

197. A review of the tenses of the indicative active shows the following

formation:

Present = First of the principal parts

Imperfect = Present stem + -ba-m

-bō, Conj. I and II
Future = Present stem
TENSES OF THE -a-m, Conj. III and
+
INDICATIVE IV

Perfect = Third of the principal parts

Pluperfect = Perfect stem + -era-m

Future Perfect = Perfect stem + -erō

198. The synopsis of the active voice of amō, as far as we have

learned the conjugation, is as follows:

Principal Parts amō, amāre, amāvī

Pres. Stem amā- Perf. Stem amāv-

Pres. amō Perf. amāvī
Indic. Imperf. amābam Indic. Pluperf. amāveram
Fut. amābō Fut. perf. amāverō
Pres. Imv. amā
Pres. Infin. amāre Perf. Infin. amāvisse
1. Learn to write in the same form and to give rapidly the principal

parts and synopsis of parō, dō, laudō,

dēleō, habeō, moveō, pāreō, videō,

dīcō, discēdō, dūcō, mittō, capiō,

muniō, veniō. 1
1. Learn to give synopses rapidly, and not only in the first person

singular but in any person of either number.

199. Learn the following principal parts: 2

Pres. Indic. Pres. Infin. Perf. Indic.

Irregular sum esse fuī be
Verbs ab´sum abes´se ā´fuī be away
dō dare dedī give
contineō continēre continuī hold in, keep
doceō docēre docuī teach
egeō egēre eguī need
faveō favēre fāvī favor
Conjugation iubeō iubēre iussī order
II noceō nocēre nocuī injure
persuādeō persuādēre persuāsī persuade
respondeō respondēre respondī reply
sedeō sedēre sēdī sit
studeō studēre studuī be eager
Conjugation agō agere ēgī drive
III crēdō crēdere crēdidī believe
fugiō fugere fūgī flee
iaciō iacere iēcī hurl
interficiō interficere interfēcī kill
 rapiō rapere rapuī seize
resis´tō resis´tere re´stitī resist

Conjugation repe´riō reperī´re rep´perī find

IV

2. These are all verbs that you have had before, and the perfect is the

only new form to be learned.

200. Perseus and Andromeda (Concluded)

First learn the special

vocabulary, p. 290. Read the whole story.

Perseus semper proeliō studēbat 3 et

respondit, 3 “Verba tua sunt maximē grāta,” et

laetus arma sua magica parāvit. 3 Subitō

mōnstrum vidētur; celeriter per aquam properat et Andromedae

adpropinquat. Eius amīcī longē absunt et misera puella est sōla. Perseus

autem sine morā super aquam volāvit. 3 Subitō

dēscendit 3 et dūrō gladiō saevum mōnstrum

graviter vulnerāvit. 3 Diū pugnātur, 4 diū proelium est dubium. Dēnique

autem Perseus

mōnstrum interfēcit 3 et victōriam

reportāvit. 3 Tum ad saxum vēnit 3 et Andromedam līberāvit 3 et

eam ad Cēpheum dūxit. 3 Is, nūper miser, nunc

laetus, ita dīxit 3: “Tuō auxiliō, mī amīce,

cāra fīlia mea est lībera; tua est Andromeda.” Diū Perseus cum Andromedā

ibi habitābat 3 et magnopere ā tōtō populō

amābātur. 3
3. See if you can explain the use of the perfects and imperfects in this

passage.

4. The verb pugnātur means, literally, it is fought; translate

freely, the battle is fought, or the contest rages. The

verb pugnō in Latin is intransitive, and so does not have a personal

subject in the passive. A verb with an indeterminate subject, designated

in English by it, is called impersonal.

 LESSON XXXV
THE PASSIVE PERFECTS OF THE INDICATIVE · THE PERFECT PASSIVE AND
FUTURE ACTIVE INFINITIVE

201. The fourth and last of the principal parts (§ 183) is the perfect passive
participle. From it we get the participial stem on which are formed the
future active infinitive and all the passive perfects.
1. Learn the following principal parts, which are for the first time given in
full:
Conj. Pres. Indic. Pres. Infin. Perf. Indic. Perf. Pass. Part
I. amō amā´-re amā´v-ī amā´t-us
This is the model for all regular verbs of the first conjugation.
II. mo´neō monē´-re mo´nu-ī mo´nit-us
III. regō re´ge-re rēx-ī rēct-us
ca´piō ca´pe-re cēp-ī capt-us
IV. au´diō audī´-re audī´v-ī audī´t-us
2. The base of the participial stem is found by dropping -us from the perfect
passive participle.
202. In English the perfect, past perfect, and future perfect tenses of the
indicative passive are made up of forms of the auxiliary verb to be and the
past participle; as, I have been loved, I had been loved, I shall have been
loved.
Very similarly, in Latin, the perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect passive
tenses use respectively the present, imperfect, and future of sum as an
auxiliary verb with the perfect passive participle, as
Perfect passive, amā´tus sum, I have been or was loved
Pluperfect passive, amā´tus eram, I had been loved
Future perfect passive, amā´tus erō, I shall have been loved
1. In the same way give the synopsis of the corresponding tenses of moneō,
regō, capiō, and audiō, and give the English meanings.
203. Nature of the Participle. A participle is partly verb and partly
adjective. As a verb it possesses tense and voice. As an adjective it is
declined and agrees with the word it modifies in gender, number, and case.
204. The perfect passive participle is declined like bonus, bona, bonum,
and in the compound tenses (§ 202) it agrees as a predicate adjective with
the subject of the verb.

Vir laudātus est, the man was praised, or has been praised
Examples Puella laudāta est, the girl was praised, or has been
in praised
Singular Cōnsilium laudātum est, the plan was praised, or has been
praised
Virī laudātī sunt, the men were praised, or have been
praised
Examples
Puellae laudātae sunt, the girls were praised, or have been
in
praised
Plural
Cōnsilia laudāta sunt, the plans were praised, or have been
praised

1. Inflect the perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect indicative passive of

amō, moneō, regō, capiō, and audiō (§§ 488-492).
205. The perfect passive infinitive is formed by adding esse, the present
infinitive of sum, to the perfect passive participle; as, amā´t-us (-a, -um)
esse, to have been loved; mo´nit-us (-a, -um) esse, to have been advised.
1. Form the perfect passive infinitive of regō, capiō, audiō, and give the
English meanings.
206. The future active infinitive is formed by adding esse, the present
infinitive of sum, to the future active participle. This participle is made by
adding -ūrus, -a, -um to the base of the participial stem. Thus the future
active infinitive of amō is amat-ū´rus (-a, -um) esse, to be about to love.
 a. Note that in forming the three tenses of the active infinitive we use
all three conjugation stems:
Present, amāre (present stem), to love
Perfect, amāvisse (perfect stem), to have loved
Future, amātūrus esse (participial stem), to be about to love
1. Give the three tenses of the active infinitive of laudō, moneō, regō,
capiō, audiō, with the English meanings.
207. EXERCISES

I. 1. Fābula Andromedae nārrāta est. 2. Multae fābulae ā magistrō nārrātae

sunt. 3. Ager ab agricolā validō arātus erat. 4. Agrī ab agricolīs validīs arātī
erant. 5. Aurum ā servō perfidō ad domicilium suum portātum erit. 6.
Nostra arma ā lēgātō laudāta sunt. Quis vestra arma laudāvit? 7. Ab ancillā
tuā ad cēnam vocātae sumus. 8. Andromeda mōnstrō nōn data est, quia
mōnstrum ā Perseō necātum erat.
II. 1. The provinces were laid waste, the field had been laid waste, the
towns will have been laid waste. 2. The oracles were heard, the oracle was
heard, the oracles had been heard. 3. The oracle will have been heard, the
province had been captured, the boats have been captured. 4. The fields
were laid waste, the man was advised, the girls will have been advised. 5.
The towns had been ruled, we shall have been captured, you will have been
heard.
 LESSON XXXVI
REVIEW OF PRINCIPAL PARTS · PREPOSITIONS YES-OR-NO QUESTIONS

208. The following list shows the principal parts of all the verbs you have
had excepting those used in the paradigms. The parts you have had before
are given for review, and the perfect participle is the only new form for you
to learn. Sometimes one or more of the principal parts are lacking, which
means that the verb has no forms based on that stem. A few verbs lack the
perfect passive participle but have the future active participle in -ūrus,
which appears in the principal parts instead.
Irregular Verbs

sum esse fuī futūrus be

absum abesse āfuī āfutūrus be away
dō 1 dare dedī datus give
1. dō is best classed with the irregular verbs because of the short a in the present and participial
stems.

Conjugation I
portō portāre portāvī portātus carry
So for all verbs of this conjugation thus far used.
Conjugation II
contineō continēre continuī contentus hold in, keep
dēleō dēlēre dēlēvī dēlētus destroy
doceō docēre docuī doctus teach
egeō egēre eguī —— lack
faveō favēre fāvī fautūrus favor
iubeō iubēre iussī iussus order
moveō movēre mōvī mōtus move
noceō nocēre nocuī nocitūrus injure
pāreō pārēre pāruī —— obey
persuādeō persuādēre persuāsī persuāsus persuade (from)
prohibeō prohibēre prohibuī prohibitus restrain, keep
respondeō respondēre respondī respōnsus reply
sedeō sedēre sēdī -sessus sit
studeō studēre studuī —— be eager
videō vidēre vīdī vīsus see
Conjugation III

agō agere ēgī āctus drive

crēdō crēdere crēdidī crēditus believe
dīcō dīcere dīxī dictus say
discēdō discēdere discessī discessus depart
dūcō dūcere dūxī ductus lead
faciō 2 facere fēcī factus make
fugiō fugere fūgī fugitūrus flee
iaciō iacere iēcī iactus hurl
interficiō interficere interfēcī interfectus kill
mittō mittere mīsī missus send
 rapiō rapere rapuī raptus seize
resistō resistere restitī —— resist
Conjugation IV

mūniō mūnīre mūnīvī mūnītus fortify

reperiō reperīre rep´perī repertus find
veniō venīre vēnī ventus come
2. faciō has an irregular passive which will be presented later.

209. Prepositions. 1. We learned in §§ 52, 53 that only the accusative and

the ablative are used with prepositions, and that prepositions expressing
ablative relations govern the ablative case. Those we have had are here
summarized. The table following should be learned.
ā or ab, from, by
cum, with
dē, down from, concerning
ē or ex, out from, out of
prō, before, in front of; for, in behalf of
sine, without
2. Prepositions not expressing ablative relations must govern the accusative
(§ 52). Of these we have had the following:
ad, to
apud, among
per, through
There are many others which you will meet as we proceed.
3. The preposition in when meaning in or on governs the ablative; when
meaning to, into, against (relations foreign to the ablative) in governs the
accusative.
210. Yes-or-No Questions. Questions not introduced by some interrogative
word like who, why, when, etc., but expecting the answer yes or no, may
take one of three forms:
1. Is he coming? (Asking for information. Implying nothing as to
 the answer expected.)
2. Is he not coming? (Expecting the answer yes.)
3. He isn´t coming, is he? (Expecting the answer no.)
These three forms are rendered in Latin as follows:
1. Venitne? is he coming?
2. Nōnne venit? is he not coming?
3. Num venit? he isn´t coming, is he?
a. -ne, the question sign, is usually added to the verb, which then
stands first.
b. We learned in § 56. b that yes-or-no questions are usually answered
by repeating the verb, with or without a negative. Instead of this, ita,
vērō, certē, etc. (so, truly, certainly, etc.) may be used for yes, and
nōn, minimē, etc. for no if the denial is emphatic, as, by no means, not
at all.
211. EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 290.

I. 1. Nōnne habēbat Cornēlia ōrnāmenta aurī? Habēbat. 2. Num Sextus
lēgātus scūtum in dextrō bracchiō gerēbat? Nōn in dextrō, sed sinistrō in
bracchiō Sextus scūtum gerēbat. 3. Frūstrā bella multa ab Gallīs gesta erant.
4. Ubi oppidum ā perfidō Sextō occupātum est, oppidānī miserī gladiō
interfectī sunt. 5. Id oppidum erat plēnum frūmentī. 6. Nōnne Sextus ab
oppidānīs frūmentum postulāvit? Vērō, sed iī recūsāvērunt frūmentum dare.
7. Cūr oppidum ab Sextō dēlētum est? Quia frūmentum recūsātum est. 8. Ea
victōria nōn dubia erat. 9. Oppidānī erant dēfessī et armīs egēbant. 10. Num
fugam temptāvērunt? Minimē.
II. 1. Where was Julia standing? She was standing where you had ordered.
2. Was Julia wearing any ornaments? She had many ornaments of gold. 3.
Did she not attempt flight when she saw the danger? She did. 4. Who
captured her? Galba captured her without delay and held her by the left
arm. 5. She didn´t have the lady’s gold, did she? No, the gold had been
taken by a faithless maid and has been brought back.
Fourth Review, Lessons XXVII-XXXVI, §§ 513-516
 LESSON XXXVII
CONJUGATION OF POSSUM · THE INFINITIVE USED AS IN ENGLISH

212. Learn the principal parts of possum, I am able, I can, and its inflection
in the indicative and infinitive. (Cf. § 495.)
a. Possum, I can, is a compound of potis, able, and sum, I am.
213. The Infinitive with Subject Accusative. The infinitive (cf. § 173) is a
verbal noun. Used as a noun, it has the constructions of a noun. As a verb it
can govern a case and be modified by an adverb. The uses of the infinitive
are much the same in Latin as in English.
1. In English certain verbs of wishing, commanding, forbidding, and the like
are used with an object clause consisting of a substantive in the objective
case and an infinitive, as, he commanded the men to flee. Such object
clauses are called infinitive clauses, and the substantive is said to be the
subject of the infinitive.
Similarly in Latin, some verbs of wishing, commanding, forbidding, and the
like are used with an object clause consisting of an infinitive with a subject
in the accusative case, as, Is virōs fugere iussit, he commanded the men to
flee.
214. Rule. Subject of the Infinitive. The subject of the infinitive is in the
accusative.
215. The Complementary Infinitive. In English a verb is often followed
by an infinitive to complete its meaning, as, the Romans are able to
conquer the Gauls. This is called the complementary infinitive, as the
predicate is not complete without the added infinitive.
Similarly in Latin, verbs of incomplete predication are completed by the
infinitive. Among such verbs are possum, I am able, I can; properō,
mātūrō, I hasten; temptō, I attempt; as
Rōmānī Gallōs superāre possunt, the Romans are able to (or can)
 conquer the Gauls
Bellum gerere mātūrant, they hasten to wage war
a. A predicate adjective completing a complementary infinitive agrees
in gender, number, and case with the subject of the main verb.
Malī puerī esse bonī nōn possunt, bad boys are not able to (or cannot) be
good.
Observe that bonī agrees with puerī.
216. The Infinitive used as a Noun. In English the infinitive is often used
as a pure noun, as the subject of a sentence, or as a predicate nominative.
For example, To conquer (= conquering) is pleasing; To see (= seeing) is to
believe (= believing). The same use of the infinitive is found in Latin,
especially with est, as
Superāre est grātum, to conquer is pleasing
Vidēre est crēdere, to see is to believe
a. In the construction above, the infinitive often has a subject, which
must then be in the accusative case, as
Galbam superāre inimīcōs est grātum multīs,
for Galba to conquer his enemies is pleasing to many
b. An infinitive used as a noun is neuter singular. Thus, in the sentence
superāre est grātum, the predicate adjective grātum is in the neuter
nominative singular to agree with superāre the subject.
217. EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 291.

I. 1. Magister lūdī līberōs cum dīligentiā labōrāre iussit. 2. Egēre cibō et
vinō est virīs molestum. 3. Virī armātī vetuērunt Gallōs castra ibi pōnere. 4.
Estne lēgātus in castellō an in mūrō? Is est prō portā. 5. Ubi nostrī 1 fugere
incēpērunt, lēgātus ab vestrīs 1 captus est. 6. Gallī castellum ibi
oppugnāverant ubi praesidium erat īnfīrmum. 7. Aliī pugnāre temptābant,
aliī portās petēbant. 8. Fēminae prō domiciliīs sedēbant neque resistere
validīs Gallīs poterant. 9. Bellum est saevum, nec īnfīrmīs nec miserīs favet.
10. Sed virī arma postulābant et studēbant Gallōs dē mūrīs agere. 11. Id
castellum ab Gallīs occupārī Rōmānīs nōn grātum erit. 12. Gallī ubi ā
Rōmānīs victī sunt, esse līberī 2 cessāvērunt. 13. Diū sine aquā vīvere nōn
potestis.
1. Supply men. nostri, vestrī, and suī are often used as nouns in this way.
2. Not children. The Romans used līberī either as an adjective, meaning free, or as a noun, meaning
the free, thereby signifying their free-born children. The word was never applied to children of
slaves.

II. 1. The girl began daily to carry water from the river to the gates. 2. The
Gauls had pitched their camp in a place suitable for a battle. 3. For a long
time they tried in vain to seize the redoubt. 4. Neither did they cease to hurl
weapons against 3 the walls. 5. But they were not able to (could not) take
the town.
3. in with the accusative.

218. The Faithless Tarpe´ia

Sabīnī ōlim cum Rōmānīs bellum gerēbant et multās victōriās
reportāverant. Iam agrōs proximōs mūrīs vāstābant, iam oppidō
adpropinquābant. Rōmānī autem in Capitōlium fūgerant et longē perīculō
aberant. Mūrīs validīs et saxīs altīs crēdēbant. Frūstrā Sabīnī tēla iaciēbant,
frūstrā portās dūrās petēbant; castellum occupāre nōn poterant. Deinde
novum cōnsilium cēpērunt. 4
Tarpēia erat puella Rōmāna pulchra et superba. Cotīdiē aquam cōpiīs
Rōmānīs in Capitōlium portābat. Eī 5 nōn nocēbant Sabīnī, quod ea sine
armīs erat neque Sabīnī bellum cum fēminīs līberīsque gerēbant. Tarpēia
autem maximē amābat ōrnāmenta aurī. Cotīdiē Sabīnōrum ōrnāmenta
vidēbat et mox ea dēsīderāre incipiēbat. Eī ūnus ex 6 Sabīnīs dīxit, “Dūc
cōpiās Sabīnās intrā portās, Tarpēia, et maxima erunt praemia tua.”
4. cōnsilium capere, to make a plan. Why is the perfect tense used here and the imperfect in the
preceding sentences? Explain the use of tenses in the next paragraph.
5. Dative with nocēbant. (Cf. § 154.)
6. ex, out of, i.e. from the nuumber of; best translated of.
TARPEIA PUELLA PERFIDA
 LESSON XXXVIII
THE RELATIVE PRONOUN AND THE INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN

219. Sentences are simple, compound, or complex.

a. A simple sentence is a sentence containing but one statement, that is,
one subject and one predicate: The Romans approached the town.
b. A compound sentence is a sentence containing two or more
independent statements: The Romans approached the town | and | the
enemy fled.
Note. An independent statement is one that can stand alone; it does not
depend upon another statement.
c. A complex sentence is a sentence containing one independent
statement and one or more dependent statements: When the Romans
approached the town | the enemy fled.
Note. A dependent or subordinate statement is one that depends on or
qualifies another statement; thus the enemy fled is independent, and
when the Romans approached the town is dependent or subordinate.
d. The separate statements in a compound or complex sentence are
called clauses. In a complex sentence the independent statement is
called the main clause and the dependent statement the subordinate
clause.
220. Examine the complex sentence
The Romans killed the men who were taken
Here are two clauses:
a. The main clause, The Romans killed the men
b. The subordinate clause, who were taken
The word who is a pronoun, for it takes the place of the noun men. It also
connects the subordinate clause who were taken with the noun men. Hence
the clause is an adjective clause. A pronoun that connects an adjective
clause with a substantive is called a relative pronoun, and the substantive
for which the relative pronoun stands is called its antecedent. The relative
pronouns in English are who, whose, whom, which, what, that.
221. The relative pronoun in Latin is quī, quae, quod, and it is declined as
follows:
Singular Plural
MASC. FEM. NEUT. MASC. FEM. NEUT.
Nom. quī quae quod quī quae quae
Gen. cuius cuius cuius quōrum quārum quōrum
Dat. cui cui cui quibus quibus quibus
Acc. quem quam quod quōs quās quae
Abl. quō quā quō quibus quibus quibus
1. Review the declension of is, § 114, and note the similarity in the endings.
The forms quī, quae, and quibus are the only forms showing new endings.
Note. The genitive cuius and the dative cui are pronounced co͝ oi´yo͝ os
(two syllables) and co͝ oi (one syllable).
222. The Relative Pronoun is translated as follows: 1
Masc. and Fem. Neut.
Nom. who, that which, what, that
Gen. of whom, whose of which, of what, whose
Dat. to or for whom to or for which, to or for what
Acc. whom, that which, what, that
Abl. from, etc., whom from, etc., which or what
1. This table of meanings need not be memorized. It is inserted for reference when translating.

a. We see from the table above that quī, when it refers to a person, is
translated by some form of who or by that; and that when it refers to
anything else it is translated by which, what, or that.
223. Note the following sentences:
The Romans killed the men who were taken
The Romans killed the woman who was taken
Rōmānī interfēcērunt virōs quī captī sunt
Rōmānī interfēcērunt fēminam quae capta est
In the first sentence who (quī) refers to the antecedent men (virōs), and is
masculine plural. In the second, who (quae) refers to woman (fēminam),
and feminine singular. From this we learn that the relative must agree with
its antecedent in gender and number. In neither of the sentences are the
antecedents and relatives in the same case. Virōs and fēminam are
accusatives, and quī and quae are nominatives, being the subjects of the
subordinate clauses. Hence
224. Rule. Agreement of the Relative. A relative pronoun must agree with
its antecedent in gender and number; but its case is determined by the way
it is used in its own clause.
225. Interrogative Pronouns. An interrogative pronoun is a pronoun that
asks a question. In English the interrogatives are who? which? what? In
Latin they are quis? quid? (pronoun) and quī? quae? quod? (adjective).
226. Examine the sentences
a. Who is the man? Quis est vir?
b. What man is leading them? Quī vir eōs dūcit?
In a, who is an interrogative pronoun. In b, what is an interrogative
adjective. Observe that in Latin quis, quid is the pronoun and quī, quae,
quod is the adjective.
227. 1. The interrogative adjective quī, quae, quod is declined just like the
relative pronoun. (See § 221.)
2. The interrogative pronoun quis, quid is declined like quī, quae, quod in
the plural. In the singular it is declined as follows:
Masc. and Fem. Neut.
Nom. quis, who? quid, what? which?
 Gen. cuius, whose? cuius, whose?
Dat. cui, to or for whom? cui, to or for what or which?
Acc. quem, whom? quid, what? which?
Abl. quō, from, etc., whom? quō, from, etc., which or what?
Note. Observe that the masculine and feminine are alike and that all
the forms are like the corresponding forms of the relative, excepting
quis and quid.
228. EXERCISES

I. 1. Quis est aeger? Servus quem amō est aeger. 2. Cuius scūtum habēs?
Scūtum habeō quod lēgātus ad castellum mīsit. 3. Cui lēgātus suum scūtum
dabit? Fīliō meō scūtum dabit. 4. Ubi Germānī antīquī vīvēbant? In terrā
quae est proxima Rhēnō Germānī vīvēbant. 5. Quibuscum 2 Germānī
bellum gerēbant? Cum Rōmānīs, qui eōs superāre studēbant, Germānī
bellum gerēbant. 6. Quī virī castra pōnunt? Iī sunt virī quōrum armīs
Germānī victī sunt. 7. Quibus tēlīs cōpiae nostrae eguērunt? Gladiīs et telīs
nostrae cōpiae eguērunt. 8. Ā quibus porta sinistra tenēbātur? Ā sociīs porta
sinistra tenēbātur. 9. Quae prōvinciae ā Rōmānīs occupātae sunt? Multae
prōvinciae ā Rōmānīs occupātae sunt. 10. Quibus virīs deī favēbunt? Bonīs
virīs deī favēbunt.
2. cum is added to the ablative of relative, interrogative, and personal pronouns instead of being
placed before them.
GERMANI ANTIQUI
II. 1. What victory will you announce? 2. I will announce to the people the
victory which the sailors have won. 3. The men who were pitching camp
were eager for battle. 4. Nevertheless they were soon conquered by the
troops which Sextus had sent. 5. They could not resist our forces, but fled
from that place without delay.
229. The Faithless Tarpeia (Concluded) 3
Tarpēia, commōta ōrnamentīs Sabīnōrum pulchrīs, diū resistere nōn potuit
et respondit: “Date mihi 4 ōrnāmenta quae in sinistrīs bracchīs geritis, et
celeriter cōpiās vestrās in Capitōlium dūcam.” Nec Sabīnī recūsāvērunt, sed
per dūrās magnāsque castellī portās properāvērunt quō 5 Tarpēia dūxit et
mox intrā validōs et altōs mūrōs stābant. Tum sine morā in 6 Tarpēiam scūta
graviter iēcērunt; nam scūta quoque in sinistrīs bracchiīs gerēbant. Ita
perfida puella Tarpēia interfecta est; ita Sabīnī Capitōlium occupāvērunt.
3. Explain the use of the tenses in this selection.
4. to me.
5. quō = whither, to the place where. Here quo is the relative adverb. We have had it used before as
the interrogative adverb, whither? to what place?
6. upon.
 LESSON XXXIX
THE THIRD DECLENSION · CONSONANT STEMS

230. Bases and Stems. In learning the first and second declensions we saw
that the different cases were formed by adding the case terminations to the
part of the word that did not change, which we called the

base. If to the base we add -ā in the first declension, and -o in the second,
we get what is called the stem. Thus porta has the base port- and the stem
portā-; servus has the base serv- and the stem servo-.

These stem vowels, -ā- and -o-, play so important a part in the formation of
the case terminations that these declensions

are named from them respectively the Ā- and

O-Declensions.

231. Nouns of the Third Declension. The third declension is called the
Consonant or I-Declension, and its nouns are classified according to the
way the stem ends. If the last letter of the stem is a consonant, the word is
said to have a consonant stem; if the stem ends in -i-, the word is said to
have an i-stem.

In consonant stems the stem is the same as the base. In i-stems the stem is
formed by adding -i-to the base. The presence of the i makes a difference
in certain of the cases, so the distinction is a very important one.

232. Consonant stems are divided into two classes:

I. Stems that add -s to the base to form the nominative singular.
II. Stems that add no termination in the nominative singular.

CLASS I
233. Stems that add -s to the base in the nominative singular are either
masculine or feminine and are declined as follows:

prīnceps, m., mīles, m., lapis, m.,

chief soldier stone
Bases
or prīncip- mīlit- lapid-
Stems
TERMINATIONS
Singular M. AND F.
Nom. prīnceps mīles lapis -s
Gen. prīn´cipis mīlitis lapidis -is
Dat. prīn´cipī mīlitī lapidī -ī
Acc. prīn´cipem mīlitem lapidem -em
Abl. prīn´cipe mīlite lapide -e
Plural
Nom. prīn´cipēs mīlitēs lapidēs -ēs
Gen. prīn´cipum mīlitum lapidum -um
Dat. prīnci´pibus mīlitibus lapidibus -ibus
Acc. prīn´cipēs mīlitēs lapidēs -ēs
Abl. prīnci´pibus mīlitibus lapidibus -ibus

rēx, m., king iūdex, m., virtūs, f.,

judge manliness
Bases
or rēg- iūdic- virtūt-
Stems
Nom. rēx iūdex virtūs -s
Gen. rēgis iūdicis virtū´tis -is
Dat. rēgī iūdicī virtū´tī -ī
Acc. rēgem iūdicem virtū´tem -em
Abl. rēge iūdice virtū´te -e
Plural
 Nom. rēgēs iūdicēs virtū´tēs -ēs
Gen. rēgum iūdicum virtū´tum -um
Dat. rēgibus iūdicibus virtū´tibus -ibus
Acc. rēgēs iūdicēs virtū´tēs -ēs
Abl. rēgibus iūdicibus virtū´tibus -ibus

1. The base or stem is found by dropping -is in the genitive singular.

2. Most nouns of two syllables, like prīnceps (prīncip-), mīles (mīlit-),
iūdex (iūdic-), have i in the base, but e in the nominative.
a. lapis is an exception to this rule.
3. Observe the consonant changes of the base or stem in the
nominative:
a. A final -t or -d is dropped before -s; thus mīles for mīlets, lapis
for lapids, virtūs for virtūts.
b. A final -c or -g unites with -s and forms -x; thus iūdec + s =
iūdex, rēg +

s = rēx.

4. Review § 74 and apply the rules to this declension.

In like manner decline dux, ducis, m., leader; eques, equitis, m.,
horseman; pedes, peditis, m., foot soldier; pēs, pedis, m.,foot.
234. EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 291.

I. 1. Neque peditēs neque equitēs occupāre castellum Rōmānum
poterant. 2. Summā virtūte mūrōs altōs cotīdiē oppugnābant.

3. Pedes mīlitum lapidibus quī dē mūrō iaciēbantur saepe

vulnerābantur. 4. Quod novum cōnsilium dux cēpit? 5. Is

perfidam puellam pulchrīs ōrnāmentīs temptāvit. 6. Quid puella

fēcit? 7. Puella commōta aurō mīlitēs per portās dūxit.

8. Tamen praemia quae summō studiō petīverat nōn reportāvit.

9. Apud Rōmānōs antīquōs Tarpēia nōn est laudāta.

II. 1. What ship is that which I see? That (illud) ship is the Victory. It is
sailing now with a favorable wind and will soon approach Italy. 2. The
judges commanded the savages to be seized

and to be killed. 3. The chiefs of the savages suddenly began to

flee, but were quickly captured by the horsemen. 4. The king led

the foot soldiers to the wall from which the townsmen were hurling

stones with the greatest zeal.

NAVIGIUM
 LESSON XL
THE THIRD DECLENSION · CONSONANT STEMS

(Continued)

CLASS II

235. Consonant stems that add no termination in the nominative are

declined in the other cases exactly like those that add -s. They may be
masculine, feminine, or neuter.
236. PARADIGMS

Masculines and Feminines

cōnsul, m., legiō, f., ōrdō, m., pater,
consul legion row m.,
father
Bases
or cōnsul- legiōn- ōrdin- patr-
Stems
TERMINATIONS
Singular M. AND F.
Nom. cōnsul legiō ōrdō pater —
Gen. cōnsulis legiōnis ōrdinis patris -is
Dat. cōnsulī legiōnī ōrdinī patrī -ī
Acc. cōnsulem legiōnem ōrdinem patrem -em
Abl. cōnsule legiōne ōrdine patre -e
Plural
Nom. cōnsulēs legiōnēs ōrdinēs patrēs -ēs
Gen. cōnsulum legiōnum ōrdinum patrum -um
Dat. cōnsulibus legiōnibus ōrdinibus patribus -ibus
Acc. cōnsulēs legiōnēs ōrdinēs patrēs -ēs
 Abl. cōnsulibus legiōnibus ōrdinibus patribus -ibus

1. With the exception of the nominative, the terminations are exactly the
same as in Class I, and the base or stem is found in the same way.
2. Masculines and feminines with bases or stems in -in- and -ōn- drop -n-
and end in -ō in the nominative, as legiō (base or stem legiōn-), ōrdō (base
or stem ōrdin-).
3. Bases or stems in -tr- have -ter in the nominative, as pater (base or stem
patr-).
4. Note how the genitive singular gives the clue to the whole declension.
Always learn this with the nominative.
237. EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 291.

I. 1. Audīsne tubās, Mārce? Nōn sōlum tubās audiō sed etiam ōrdinēs
militum et carrōs impedīmentōrum plēnōs vidēre possum. 2. Quās

legiōnēs vidēmus? Eae legiōnēs nūper ex Galliā vēnērunt. 3. Quid

ibi fēcērunt? Studēbantne pugnāre an sine virtūte erant? 4. Multa

proelia fēcērunt 1 et magnās victōriās et

multōs captīvōs reportāvērunt. 5. Quis est imperātor eārum

legiōnum? Caesar, summus Rōmānōrum imperātor. 6. Quis est eques quī

pulchram corōnam gerit? Is eques est frāter meus. Eī corōna ā cōnsule data
est quia summā virtūte pugnāverat et ā barbarīs patriam

servāverat.

II. 1. Who has seen my father to-day? 2. I saw him just now (nūper). He
was hastening to your dwelling with your mother and sister. 3. When men
are far from the fatherland and lack food, they cannot be restrained 2 from
wrong 3. 4. The safety of the soldiers is dear to Cæsar, the general. 5. The
chiefs were eager to storm a town full of grain

which was held by the consul. 6. The king forbade the baggage of

the captives to be destroyed.

1. proelium facere = to fight a battle.
2. contineō. Cf. § 180.
3. Abl. iniūriā.
 LESSON XLI
THE THIRD DECLENSION · CONSONANT STEMS

(Concluded)

238. Neuter consonant stems add no termination in the nominative and are
declined as follows:

flūmen, tempus, n., opus, n., caput,

n., river time work n., head
Bases
or flūmin- tempor- oper- capit-
Stems
Singular TERMINATIONS
Nom. flūmen tempus opus caput —
Gen. flūminis temporis operis capitis - -is
is
Dat. flūminī temporī operī capitī -ī
Acc. flūmen tempus opus caput —
Abl. flūmine tempore opere capite -e
Plural
Nom. flūmina tempora opera capita -a
Gen. flūminum temporum operum capitum -um
Dat. flūminibus temporibus operibus capitibus -ibus
Acc. flūmina tempora opera capita -a
Abl. flūminibus temporibus operibus capitibus -ibus

1. Review § 74 and apply the rules to this declension.

2. Bases or stems in -in- have -e- instead of -i- in the nominative, as flūmen,
base or stem flūmin-.
3. Most bases or stems in -er- and -or- have -us in the nominative, as opus,
base or stem oper-; tempus, base or stem tempor-.
239. EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 292.

I. 1. Barbarī ubi Rōmam cēpērunt, maxima rēgum opera dēlēvērunt.

2. Rōmānī multās calamitātēs ā barbarīs accēpērunt. 3. Ubi

erat summus terror apud oppidānōs, animī dubiī eōrum ab ōrātōre clarō

cōnfīrmāti sunt. 4. Rōma est in rīpīs fiūminis magnī. 5. Ubi

Caesar imperātor mīlitēs suōs arma capere iussit, iī ā proeliō continērī

nōn potuērunt. 6. Ubi proelium factum est, imperātor reperīrī nōn potuit. 7.
Imperātor sagittā in capite vulnerātus erat et stāre nōn poterat. 8. Eum
magnō labōre pedes ex proeliō portāvit. 9. Is

bracchiīs suīs imperātōrem tenuit et eum ex perīculīs summīs servāvit.

10. Virtūte suā bonus mīles ab imperātōre corōnam accēpit.

II. 1. The consul placed a crown on the head of the victor.

2. Before the gates he was received by the townsmen. 3. A

famous orator praised him and said, “By your labors you have saved the
fatherland from disaster.” 4. The words of the orator were pleasing to the
victor. 5. To save the fatherland was a great task.
CORONA
 LESSON XLII
REVIEW LESSON

240. Review the paradigms in §§ 233, 236, 238; and decline all nouns of the
third declension in this selection.

Terror Cimbricus 1

Ōlim Cimbrī et Teutonēs, populī Germāniae, cum fēminīs līberīsque Italiae

adpropinquāverant et cōpiās Rōmānās maximō proeliō vīcerant. Ubi fuga
legiōnum nūntiāta est, summus erat terror tōtīus Rōmae, et Rōmānī, graviter
commōtī, sacra crēbra deīs faciēbant et salūtem petēbant.
Tum Mānlius ōrātor animōs populī ita cōnfīrmāvit:—“Magnam
calamitātem accēpimus. Oppida nostra ā Cimbrīs Teutonibusque capiuntur,
agricolae interficiuntur, agrī vāstantur, cōpiae barbarōrum Rōmae
adpropinquant. Itaque, nisi novīs animīs proelium novum faciēmus et
Germānōs ex patriā nostrā sine morā agēmus, erit nūlla salūs fēminīs nostrīs
līberīsque. Servāte līberōs! Servāte patriam! Anteā superātī sumus quia
imperātōrēs nostrī fuērunt īnfīrmī. Nunc Marius, clārus imperātor, quī iam
multās aliās victōriās reportāvit, legiōnēs dūcet et animōs nostrōs terrōre
Cimbricō līberāre mātūrābit.”
Marius tum in Āfricā bellum gerēbat. Sine morā ex Āfricā in Italiam
vocātus est. Cōpiās novās nōn sōlum tōtī Italiae sed etiam prōvinciīs
sociōrum imperāvit. 2 Disciplīnā autem dūrā labōribusque perpetuīs mīlitēs
exercuit. Tum cum peditibus equitibusque, quī iam proeliō studēbant, ad
Germānōrum castra celeriter properāvit. Diū et ācriter pugnātum est. 3
Dēnique barbarī fūgērunt et multī in fugā ab equitibus sunt interfectī.
Marius pater patriae vocātus est.
1. About the year 100 B.C. the Romans were greatly alarmed by an invasion of barbarians from the
north known as Cimbri and Teutons. They were traveling with wives and children, and had an army
of 300,000 fighting men. Several Roman armies met defeat, and the city was in a panic. Then the
Senate called upon Marius, their greatest general, to save the country. First he defeated the Teutons in
Gaul. Next, returning to Italy, he met the Cimbri. A terrible battle ensued, in which the Cimbri were
utterly destroyed; but the terror Cimbricus continued to haunt the Romans for many a year thereafter.
2. He made a levy (of troops) upon, imperāvit with the acc. and the dat.
3. Cf. § 200. II. 2.
 LESSON XLIII
THE THIRD DECLENSION · I-STEMS

241. To decline a noun of the third declension correctly we must know

whether

or not it is an i-stem. Nouns with i-stems are

1. Masculines and feminines:
a. Nouns in -ēs and -īs with the same number of

syllables in the genitive as in the nominative. Thus caedēs,

caedis, is an i-stem, but mīles, mīlitis, is a

consonant stem.

b. Nouns in -ns and -rs.

c. Nouns of one syllable in -s or -x preceded by a

consonant.

2. Neuters in -e, -al, and -ar.

242. The declension of i-stems is nearly the same as that of consonant

stems. Note the following differences:

a. Masculines and feminities have -ium in the genitive

plural and -īs or -ēs in the accusative plural.

b. Neuters have -ī in the ablative singular, and an

-i- in every form of the plural.

243. Masculine and Feminine I-Stems. Masculine and feminine

i-stems are declined as follows:

caedēs, f., hostis, urbs, cliēns, m.,

slaughter m., f., city retainer
enemy
Stems caedi- hosti- urbi- clienti-
 Bases caed- host- urb- client-
TERMINATIONS
Singular M. AND F.
Nom. caedēs hostis urbs cliēns 1 -s, -is, or -ēs
Gen. caedis hostis urbis clientis -is
Dat. caedī hostī urbī clientī -ī
Acc. caedem hostem urbem clientem -em (-im)
Abl. caede hoste urbe cliente -e (-ī)
Plural
Nom. caedēs hostēs urbēs clientēs -ēs
Gen. caedium hostium urbium clientium -ium
Dat. caedibus hostibus urbibus clientibus -ibus
Acc. caedīs, -ēs hostīs, -ēs urbīs, clientīs, -ēs -īs, -ēs
-ēs
Abl. caedibus hostibus urbibus clientibus -ibus

1. Observe that the vowel before -ns is long, but that it is

shortened before -nt. Cf. § 12.

2, 3.

1. avis, cīvis, fīnis, ignis,

nāvis have the ablative singular in -ī or -e.

2. turris has accusative turrim and ablative

turrī or turre.

244. Neuter I-Stems. Neuter i-stems are declined as

follows:

īnsigne, n., animal, n., calcar, n.,

decoration animal spur
Stems
 īnsigni- animāli- calcāri-
Bases īnsign- animāl- calcār-
Singular TERMINATIONS
Nom. īnsigne animal calcar -e or—
Gen. īnsignis animālis calcāris -is
Dat. īnsignī animālī calcārī -ī
Acc. īnsigne animal calcar -e or—
Abl. īnsignī animālī calcārī -ī
Plural
Nom. īnsignia animālia calcāria -ia
Gen. īnsignium animālium calcārium -ium
Dat. īnsignibus animālibus calcāribus -ibus
Acc. īnsignia animālia calcāria -ia
Abl. īnsignibus animālibus calcāribus -ibus

1. Review § 74 and see how it applies to

this declension.

2. The final -i- of the stem is usually dropped in the

nominative. If not dropped, it is changed to -e.

3. A long vowel is shortened before final -l or -r.

(Cf. § 12. 2.)

245. EXERCISES

First learn the special

vocabulary, p. 292.

I. 1. Quam urbem vidēmus? Urbs quam vidētis est Rōma. 2. Cīvēs

Rōmānī urbem suam turribus altīs et mūrīs longīs mūnīverant.

3. Ventī nāvīs longās prohibēbant fīnibus hostium adpropinquāre.

4. Imperātor a clientibus suīs calcāria aurī et alia īnsignia

accēpit. 5. Mīlitēs Rōmānī cum hostibus bella saeva gessērunt et

eōs caede

magnā superāvērunt. 6. Alia animālia terram, alia mare amant.

7. Nāvēs longae quae auxilium ad imperātōrem portābant ignī ab

hostibus dēlētae sunt. 8. In eō marī avis multās vīdimus quae longē

ā terrā volāverant. 9. Nōnne vīdistis nāvīs longās hostium et ignīs

quibus urbs nostra vāstābātur? Certē, sed nec caedem cīvium nec fugam

clientium vīdimus. 10. Avēs et alia animālia, ubi ignem vīdērunt,

salūtem fugā petere celeriter incēpērunt. 11. Num. iūdex in peditum

ōrdinibus stābat? Minimē, iūdex erat apud equitēs et equus eius īnsigne

pulchrum gerēbat.
 NAVES LONGAE

II. 1. Because of the lack of grain the animals of the village were

not able to live. 2. When the general 2 heard the rumor, he quickly sent a
horseman to the village. 3. The

horseman had a beautiful horse and wore spurs of gold. 4. He said

to the citizens, “Send your retainers with horses and wagons to our

camp, and you will receive an abundance of grain.” 5. With happy

hearts they hastened to obey his words. 3

2. Place first.
3. Not the accusative. Why?
 LESSON XLIV
IRREGULAR NOUNS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION · GENDER IN THE THIRD
DECLENSION

246. PARADIGMS

The “Stems” are missing in the printed

book. They have been supplied from the
inflectional table in the Appendix.

vīs, f., force iter, n., march

Stems vī- and vīri- iter- and itiner-
Bases v- and vīr- iter- and itiner-
Singular
Nom. vīs iter
Gen. vīs (rare) itineris
Dat. vī (rare) itinerī
Acc. vim iter
Abl. vī itinere
Plural
Nom. vīrēs itinera
Gen. vīrium itinerum
Dat. vīribus itineribus
Acc. vīrīs, or -ēs itinera
Abl. vīribus itineribus
247. There are no rules for gender in the third declension that do not present
numerous exceptions. 1 The following rules, however, are of great service,
and should be thoroughly mastered:
1. Masculine are nouns in -or, -ōs, -er, -ĕs (gen. -itis).
a. arbor, tree, is feminine; and iter, march, is neuter.
2. Feminine are nouns in -ō, -is, -x, and in -s preceded by a consonant or by
any long vowel but ō.
a. Masculine are collis (hill), lapis, mēnsis (month), ōrdō, pēs, and
nouns in -nis and -guis—as ignis, sanguis (blood)—and the four
monosyllables

dēns, a tooth
mōns, a mountain
pōns, a bridge
fōns, a fountain
3. Neuters are nouns in -e, -al, -ar, -n, -ur, -ŭs, and caput.
1. Review § 60. Words denoting males are, of course, masculine, and those denoting females,
feminine.

248. Give the gender of the following nouns and the rule by which it is
determined:
animal calamitās flūmen lapis nāvis
avis caput ignis legiō opus
caedēs eques īnsigne mare salūs
calcar fīnis labor mīles urbs
249. EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 292.

I. The First Bridge over the Rhine. Salūs sociōrum erat semper cāra
Rōmānīs. Ōlim Gallī, amīcī Rōmānōrum, multās iniūriās ab Germānīs quī
trāns flūmen Rhēnum vivēbant accēperant. Ubi lēgātī ab iīs ad Caesarem
imperātōrem Rōmānum vēnērunt et auxilium postulāvērunt, Rōmānī
magnīs itineribus ad hostium fīnīs properāvērunt. Mox ad rīpās magnī
flūminis vēnērunt. Imperātor studēbat cōpiās suās trāns fluvium dūcere, sed
nūllā viā 2 poterat. Nūllās nāvīs habēbat. Alta erat aqua. Imperātor autem,
vir clārus, numquam adversā fortūnā commōtus, novum cōnsilium cēpit.
Iussit suōs 3 in 4 lātō flūmine facere pontem. Numquam anteā pōns in Rhēnō
vīsus erat. Hostēs ubi pontem quem Rōmānī fēcerant vīdērunt, summō
terrōre commōtī, sine morā fugam parāre incēpērunt.
II. 1. The enemy had taken (possession of) the top of the mountain. 2. There
were many trees on the opposite hills. 3. We pitched our camp near (ad) a
beautiful spring. 4. A march through the enemies’ country is never without
danger. 5. The time of the month was suitable for the march. 6. The teeth of
the monster were long. 7. When the foot soldiers 4 saw the blood of the
captives, they began to assail the fortifications with the greatest violence. 5
2. Abl. of manner.
3. suōs, used as a noun, his men.
4. We say build a bridge over; the Romans, make a bridge on.
5. Place first.

Fifth Review, Lessons XXXVII-XLIV, §§ 517-520

 LESSON XLV
ADJECTIVES OF THE THIRD DECLENSION ·

I-STEMS

250. Adjectives are either of the first and second declensions (like

bonus, aeger, or līber), or they are of the third declension.

251. Nearly all adjectives of the third declension have

i-stems, and they are declined almost like nouns with i-stems.

252. Adjectives learned thus far have had a different form in the nominative
for each gender, as, bonus, m.; bona, f.; bonum, n.

Such an adjective is called an adjective of three endings.

Adjectives of the third declension are of the following classes:

I. Adjectives of three endings—

a different form in the nominative for each gender.
II. Adjectives of two endings—
masculine and feminine nominative alike, the neuter
different.
III. Adjectives of one ending—
masculine, feminine, and neuter nominative all alike.

253. Adjectives of the third declension in -er have three endings; those in -
is have two endings; the others have one ending.

CLASS I
254. Adjectives of Three Endings are declined as follows:

ācer, ācris, ācre, keen, eager

Stem ācri- Base ācr-
Singular Plural
MASC. FEM. NEUT. MASC. FEM. NEUT.
Nom. ācer ācris ācre ācrēs ācrēs ācria
Gen. ācris ācris ācris ācrium ācrium ācrium
Dat. ācrī ācrī ācrī ācribus ācribus ācribus
Acc. ācrem ācrem ācre ācrīs, -ēs ācrīs, -ēs ācria
Abl. ācrī ācrī ācrī ācribus ācribus ācribus

CLASS II

255. Adjectives of Two Endings are declined as follows:

omnis, omne, every, all 1

Stem omni- Base omn-
Singular Plural
MASC. AND FEM. NEUT. MASC. AND FEM. NEUT.
Nom. omnis omne omnēs omnia
Gen. omnis omnis omnium omnium
Dat. omnī omnī omnibus omnibus
Acc. omnem omne omnīs, ēs omnia
Abl. omnī omnī omnibus omnibus

1. omnis is usually translated every in the singular and all in the plural.

CLASS III

256. Adjectives of One Ending are declined as follows:

pār, equal
 Stem pari- Base par-
Singular Plural
MASC. AND FEM. NEUT. MASC. AND FEM. NEUT.
Nom. pār pār parēs paria
Gen. paris paris parium parium
Dat. parī parī paribus paribus
Acc. parem pār parīs, ēs paria
Abl. parī parī paribus paribus

1. All i-stem adjectives have -ī in the ablative singular.

2. Observe that the several cases of adjectives of one ending have the same
form for all genders excepting in the accusative singular and in the
nominative and accusative plural.
3. Decline vir ācer, legiō ācris, animal ācre, ager omnis, scūtum omne,
proelium pār.
257. There are a few adjectives of one ending that have consonant stems.
They are declined exactly like nouns with consonant stems.
258. EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 293.

I. The Romans invade the Enemy’s Country. Ōlim peditēs Rōmānī

cum equitibus vēlōcibus in hostium urbem iter faciēbant. Ubi nōn longē

āfuērunt, rapuērunt agricolam, quī eīs viam brevem et facilem

dēmōnstrāvit. Iam Rōmānī moenia alta, turrīs validās aliaque opera urbis
vidēre poterant. In moenibus stābant multī prīncipēs. Prīncipēs ubi

vīdērunt Rōmānōs, iussērunt cīvīs lapidēs aliaque tēla dē mūrīs iacere.

Tum mīlitēs fortēs continērī ā proeliō nōn poterant et ācer imperātor signum
tubā darī iussit. Summā vī omnēs mātūrāvērunt. Imperātor Sextō
lēgātō impedīmenta omnia mandāvit. Sextus impedīmenta in summō colle
conlocāvit. Grave et ācre erat proelium, sed hostēs nōn parēs Rōmānīs
erant. Aliī interfectī, aliī captī sunt. Apud captīvōs erant māter

sororque rēgis. Paucī Rōmānōrum ab hostibus vulnerātī sunt. Secundum

proelium Rōmānīs erat grātum. Fortūna fortibus semper favet.

II. 1. Some months are short, others are long. 2. To seize the top of the
mountain was difficult. 3. Among the hills of Italy are

many beautiful springs. 4. The soldiers were sitting where the

baggage had been placed because their feet were weary. 5. The city

which the soldiers were eager to storm had been fortified by strong

walls and high towers. 6. Did not the king intrust a heavy crown of

gold and all his money to a faithless slave? Yes, but the slave had

never before been faithless.

AQUILA LEGIONIS
 LESSON XLVI
THE FOURTH OR U-DECLENSION

259. Nouns of the fourth declension are either masculine or neuter.

260. Masculine nouns end in -us, neuters in -ū. The genitive ends in -ūs.
a. Feminine by exception are domus, house; manus, hand; and a few
others.
PARADIGMS

The “Stems” are missing in the printed

book. They have been supplied from the
inflectional table in the Appendix.

adventus, m., arrival cornū, n., horn

Stems adventu- cornu-
Bases advent- corn-
TERMINATIONS
Singular MASC. NEUT.
Nom. adventus cornū -us -ū
Gen. adventūs cornūs -ūs -ūs
Dat. adventuī (ū) cornū -uī (ū) -ū
Acc. adventum cornū -um -ū
Abl. adventū cornū -ū -ū
Plural
Nom. adventūs cornua -ūs -ua
Gen. adventuum cornuum -uum -uum
Dat. adventibus cornibus -ibus -ibus
Acc. adventūs cornua -ūs -ua
 Abl. adventibus cornibus -ibus -ibus

1. Observe that the base is found, as in other declensions, by dropping the

ending of the genitive singular.
2. lacus, lake, has the ending -ubus in the dative and ablative plural;
portus, harbor, has either -ubus or -ibus.
3. cornū is the only neuter that is in common use.
261. EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 293.

I. 1. Ante adventum Caesaris vēlōcēs hostium equitēs ācrem impetum in
castra fēcērunt. 2. Continēre exercitum ā proeliō nōn facile erat.

3. Post adventum suum Caesar iussit legiōnēs ex castrīs

dūcī. 4. Prō castrīs cum hostium equitātū pugnātum est. 5. Post

tempus breve equitātus trāns flūmen fūgit ubi castra hostium posita erant. 6.
Tum victor imperātor agrōs vāstāvit et vīcōs hostium cremāvit. 7. Castra
autem nōn oppugnāvit quia mīlitēs erant dēfessī

et locus difficilis. 8. Hostēs nōn cessāvērunt iacere tēla, quae paucīs

nocuērunt. 9. Post adversum proelium principēs Gallōrum lēgātōs ad
Caesarem mittere studēbant, sed populō persuādēre nōn poterant.

II. 1. Did you see the man-of-war on the lake? 2. I did not see it (fem.) on
the lake, but I saw it in the harbor.

3. Because of the strong wind the sailor forbade his brother to sail. 4. Cæsar
didn´t make an attack on the cavalry on the right wing, did he? 5. No, he
made an attack on the left wing.

6. Who taught your swift horse to obey? 7. I trained my horse with my

(own) hands, nor was the task difficult. 8. He is a

beautiful animal and has great strength.

 LESSON XLVII
EXPRESSIONS OF PLACE · THE DECLENSION OF DOMUS

262. We have become thoroughly familiar with expressions like the

following:
Galba ad (or in) oppidum properat
Galba ab (dē or ex) oppidō properat
 Galba in oppidō habitat

From these expressions we may deduce the following rules:

263. Rule. Accusative of the Place to. The place to which is expressed by
ad or in with the accusative. This answers the question Whither?
264. Rule. Ablative of the Place from. The place from which is expressed
by ā or ab, dē, ē or ex, with the separative ablative. This answers the
question Whence? (Cf. Rule, § 179.) 265. Rule. Ablative of the Place at or
in. The place at or in which is expressed by the ablative with in. This
answers the question Where?
a. The ablative denoting the place where is called the locative ablative
(cf. locus, place).
266. Exceptions. Names of towns, small islands, 1 domus, home, rūs,
country, and a few other words in common use omit the prepositions in
expressions of place, as,
Galba Athēnās properat, Galba hastens to Athens
Galba Athēnīs properat, Galba hastens from Athens
Galba Athēnīs habitat, Galba lives at (or in) Athens
Galba domum properat, Galba hastens home
Galba rūs properat, Galba hastens to the country
Galba domō properat, Galba hastens from home
Galba rūre properat, Galba hastens from the country
Galba rūrī (less commonly rūre) habitat, Galba lives in the country
a. Names of countries, like Germānia, Italia, etc., do not come under
these exceptions. With them prepositions must not be omitted.
1. Small islands are classed with towns because they generally have but one town, and the name of
the town is the same as the name of the island.

267. The Locative Case. We saw above that the place-relation expressed
by at or in is regularly covered by the locative ablative. However, Latin
originally expressed this relation by a separate form known as the locative
case. This case has been everywhere merged in the ablative excepting in the
singular number of the first and second declensions. The form of the
locative in these declensions is like the genitive singular, and its use is
limited to names of towns and small islands, domī, at home, and a few
other words.
268. Rule. Locative and Locative Ablative. To express the place in which
with names of towns and small islands, if they are singular and of the first
or second declension, use the locative; otherwise use the locative ablative
without a preposition; as,
Galba Rōmae habitat, Galba lives at Rome
Galba Corinthī habitat, Galba lives at Corinth
Galba domī habitat, Galba lives at home
Here Rōmae, Corinthī, and domī are locatives, being singular and of the
first and second declensions respectively. But in
Galba Athēnīs habitat, Galba lives at Athens,
Galba Pompēiīs habitat, Galba lives at Pompeii
Athēnīs and Pompēiīs are locative ablatives. These words can have no
locative case, as the nominatives Athēnae and Pompēiī are plural and there
is no plural locative case form.
269. The word domus, home, house, has forms of both the second and the
fourth declension. Learn its declension (§ 468).
270. EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 293.

I. 1. Corinthī omnia īnsignia aurī ā ducibus victōribus rapta erant. 2. Caesar
Genāvam exercitum magnīs itineribus dūxit. 3. Quem pontem hostēs
cremāverant? Pontem in Rhēnō hostēs cremāverant. 4. Pompēiīs multās
Rōmānōrum domōs vidēre poteritis. 5. Rōmā cōnsul equō vēlōcī rūs
properāvit. 6. Domī cōnsulis hominēs multī sedēbant. 7. Imperātor iusserat
lēgātum Athēnās cum multīs nāvibus longīs nāvigāre. 8. Ante moenia urbis
sunt ōrdinēs arborum altārum. 9. Propter arborēs altās nec lacum nec
portum reperīre potuimus. 10. Proeliīs crēbrīs Caesar legiōnēs suās quae
erant in Galliā exercēbat. 11. Cotīdiē in locō idoneō castra pōnēbat et
mūniēbat.
II. 1. Cæsar, the famous general, when he had departed from Rome,
hastened to the Roman province on a swift horse. 2 2. He had heard a rumor
concerning the allies at Geneva. 3. After his arrival Cæsar called the
soldiers together and commanded them to join battle. 4. The enemy
hastened to retreat, some because 3 they were afraid, others because 3 of
wounds. 5. Recently I was at Athens and saw the place where the judges
used to sit. 4 6. Marcus and Sextus are my brothers; the one lives at Rome,
the other in the country.
2. Latin says “by a swift horse.” What construction?
3. Distinguish between the English conjunction because (quia or quod) and the preposition because
of (propter).
4. used to sit, express by the imperfect.
 DAEDALUS ET ICARUS

271. Daed´alus and Ic´arus

Crēta est īnsula antīqua quae aquā altā magnī maris pulsātur. Ibi ōlim Mīnōs
erat rēx. Ad eum vēnit Daedalus quī ex Graeciā patriā fugiēbat. Eum Mīnōs
rēx benignīs verbīs accēpit et eī domicilium in Crētā dedit. 5Quō in locō
Daedalus sine cūrā vīvebat et rēgī multa et clāra opera faciēbat. Post tempus
longum autem Daedalus patriam cāram dēsīderāre incēpit. Domum
properāre studēbat, sed rēgī persuādēre nōn potuit et mare saevum fugam
vetābat.
5. And in this place; quō does not here introduce a subordinate relative clause, but establishes the
connection with the preceding sentence. Such a relative is called a connecting relative, and is
translated by and and a demonstrative or personal pronoun.
 LESSON XLVIII
THE FIFTH OR Ē-DECLENSION · THE ABLATIVE OF

TIME

272. Gender. Nouns of the fifth declension are feminine except diēs, day,
and merīdiēs, midday, which are usually masculine.
273. PARADIGMS

The “Stems” are missing in the printed

book. They have been supplied from the
inflectional table in the Appendix.

diēs, m., day rēs, f. thing

Stems diē- rē-
Bases di- r-
Singular TERMINATIONS
Nom. diēs rēs -ēs
Gen. diēī reī -ē̆ī
Dat. diēī reī -ē̆ī
Acc. diem rem -em
Abl. diē rē -ē
Plural
Nom. diēs rēs -ēs
Gen. diērum rērum -ērum
Dat. diēbus rēbus -ēbus
Acc. diēs rēs -ēs
Abl. diēbus rēbus -ēbus
1. The vowel e which appears in every form is regularly long. It is
shortened in the ending -eī after a consonant, as in r-ĕī; and before -m in the
accusative singular, as in di-em. (Cf. § 12. 2.) 2. Only diēs and rēs are
complete in the plural. Most other nouns of this declension lack the plural.
Aciēs, line of battle, and spēs, hope, have the nominative and accusative
plural.
274. The ablative relation (§ 50) which is expressed by the prepositions at,
in, or on may refer not only to place, but also to time, as at noon, in
summer, on the first day. The ablative which is used to express this relation
is called the ablative of time.
275. Rule. The Ablative of Time. The time when or within which
anything happens is expressed by the ablative without a preposition.
a. Occasionally the preposition in is found.

Compare the English Next day we started and On the next day we started.

276. EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 294.

I. Galba the Farmer. Galba agricola rūrī vīvit. Cotīdiē prīmā

lūce labōrāre incipit, nec ante noctem in studiō suō cessat. Merīdiē

Iūlia fīlia eum ad cēnam vocat. Nocte pedēs dēfessōs domum vertit.

Aestāte fīliī agricolae auxilium patrī dant. Hieme agricola eōs in lūdum
mittit. Ibi magister pueris multās fābulās dē rēbus gestīs Caesaris

nārrat. Aestāte fīliī agricolae perpetuīs labōribus exercentur nec grave agrī
opus est iīs molestum. Galba sine ūllā cūrā vivit nec rēs adversās timet.

II. 1. In that month there were many battles in Gaul. 2. The cavalry of the
enemy made an attack upon Cæsar’s line of battle.

3. In the first hour of the night the ship was overcome by the
billows. 4. On the second day the savages were eager to come under

Cæsar’s protection. 5. The king had joined battle, moved by the

hope of victory. 6. That year a fire destroyed many birds and other

animals. 7. We saw blood on the wild beast’s teeth.

277. Daed´alus and Ic´arus (Continued)

Tum Daedalus gravibus cūrīs commōtus fīliō suō Īcarō ita dixit: “Animus
meus, Īcare, est plēnus trīstitiae nec oculī lacrimīs egent.

Discēdere ex Crētā, Athēnās properāre, maximē studeō; sed rēx recūsat

audīre verba mea et omnem reditūs spem ēripit. Sed numquam rēbus

adversīs vincar. Terra et mare sunt inimīca, sed aliam fugae viam

reperiam.” Tum in artīs ignōtās animum dīmittit et mīrum capit

cōnsilium. Nam pennās in ōrdine pōnit et vērās ālās facit.

 LESSON XLIX
PRONOUNS CLASSIFIED · PERSONAL AND REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS

278. We have the same kinds of pronouns in Latin as in English. They are
divided into the following eight classes:
1. Personal pronouns, which show the person speaking, spoken to, or
spoken of; as, ego, I; tū, you; is, he. (Cf. § 279. etc.)
2. Possessive pronouns, which denote possession; as, meus, tuus, suus,
etc. (Cf. § 98.)
3. Reflexive pronouns, used in the predicate to refer back to the subject; as,
he saw himself. (Cf. § 281.)
4. Intensive pronouns, used to emphasize a noun or pronoun; as, I myself
saw it. (Cf. § 285.)
5. Demonstrative pronouns, which point out persons or things; as, is, this,
that. (Cf. § 112.)
6. Relative pronouns, which connect a subordinate adjective clause with an
antecedent; as, quī, who. (Cf. § 220.)
7. Interrogative pronouns, which ask a question; as, quis, who? (Cf. §
225.)
8. Indefinite pronouns, which point out indefinitely; as, some one, any
one, some, certain ones, etc. (Cf. § 296.)
279. The demonstrative pronoun is, ea, id, as we learned in § 115, is
regularly used as the personal pronoun of the third person (he, she, it, they,
etc.).
280. The personal pronouns of the first person are ego, I; nōs, we; of the
second person, tū, thou or you; vōs, ye or you. They are declined as follows:
Singular
 FIRST PERSON SECOND PERSON
Nom. ego, I tū, you
Gen. meī, of me tuī, of you
Dat. mihi, to or for me tibi, to or for you
Acc. mē, me tē, you
Abl. mē, with, from, etc., me tē, with, from, etc., you
Plural
Nom. nōs, we vōs, you
Gen. nostrum or nostrī, of us vestrum or vestrī, of you
Dat. nōbīs, to or for us vōbīs, to or for you
Acc. nōs, us vōs, you
Abl. nōbīs, with, from, etc., us vōbīs, with, from, etc., you
1. The personal pronouns are not used in the nominative excepting for
emphasis or contrast.
281. The Reflexive Pronouns. 1. The personal pronouns ego and tū may
be used in the predicate as reflexives; as,
videō mē, I see myself vidēmus nōs, we see ourselves
vidēs tē, you see yourself vidētis vōs, you see yourselves
2. The reflexive pronoun of the third person (himself, herself, itself,
themselves) has a special form, used only in these senses, and declined alike
in the singular and plural.
Singular and Plural
Gen. suī Acc. sē
Dat. sibi Abl. sē

Puer sē videt, the boy sees himself

Puella sē videt, the girl sees herself
Examples
Animal sē videt, the animal sees itself
Iī sē vident, they see themselves
a. The form sē is sometimes doubled, sēsē, for emphasis.
3. Give the Latin for
I teach myself We teach ourselves
You teach yourself You teach yourselves
He teaches himself They teach themselves
282. The preposition cum, when used with the ablative of ego, tū, or suī, is
appended to the form, as, mēcum, with me; tēcum, with you; nōbīscum,
with us; etc.
283. EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 294.

I. 1. Mea māter est cāra mihi et tua māter est cāra tibi. 2. Vestrae litterae
erant grātae nōbis et nostrae litterae erant grātae vōbīs. 3. Nūntius rēgis quī
nōbīscum est nihil respondēbit. 4. Nūntiī pācem amīcitiamque sibi et suīs
sociīs postulāvērunt. 5. Sī tū arma sūmēs, ego rēgnum occupābō. 6. Uter
vestrum est cīvis Rōmānus? Neuter nostrum. 7. Eō tempore multī
supplicium dedērunt quia rēgnum petierant. 8. Sūme supplicium, Caesar, dē
hostibus patriae ācribus. 9. Prīmā lūce aliī metū commōtī sēsē fugae
mandāvērunt; aliī autem magnā virtūte impetum exercitūs nostrī
sustinuērunt. 10. Soror rēgis, ubi dē adversō proeliō audīvit, sēsē Pompēiīs
interfēcit.
II. 1. Whom do you teach? I teach myself. 2. The soldier wounded himself
with his sword. 3. The master praises us, but you he does not praise. 4.
Therefore he will inflict punishment on you, but we shall not suffer
punishment. 5. Who will march (i.e. make a march) with me to Rome? 6. I
will march with you to the gates of the city. 7. Who will show us 1 the way?
The gods will show you 1 the way.
1. Not accusative.

Daed´alus and Ic´arus (Concluded)

284. Puer Īcarus ūnā 2 stābat et mīrum patris opus vidēbat. Postquam manus
ultima 3 ālīs imposita est, Daedalus eās temptāvit et similis avī in aurās
volāvit. Tum ālās umerīs fīlī adligāvit et docuit eum volāre et dīxit, “Tē
vetō, mī fīlī, adpropinquāre aut sōlī aut marī. Sī fluctibus
adpropinquāveris, 4 aqua ālīs tuīs nocēbit, et sī sōlī adpropinquāveris, 4 ignis
eās cremābit.” Tum pater et filius iter difficile incipiunt. Ālās movent et
aurae sēsē committunt. Sed stultus puer verbīs patris nōn pāret. Sōlī
adpropinquat. Ālae cremantur et Īcarus in mare dēcidit et vitam āmittit.
Daedalus autem sine ūllō perīculō trāns fluctūs ad īnsulam Siciliam volāvit.
2. Adverb, see vocabulary.
3. manus ultima, the finishing touch. What literally?
4. Future perfect. Translate by the present.
 LESSON L
THE INTENSIVE PRONOUN IPSE AND THE DEMONSTRATIVE ĪDEM

285. Ipse means -self (him-self, her-self, etc.) or is translated by even or

very. It is used to emphasize a noun or pronoun, expressed or understood,
with which it agrees like an adjective.
a. Ipse must be carefully distinguished from the reflexive suī. The
latter is always used as a pronoun, while ipse is regularly adjective.
Compare
Homō sē videt, the man sees himself (reflexive)
Homō ipse perīculum videt, the man himself (intensive) sees the
danger
Homō ipsum perīculum videt, the man sees the danger itself
(intensive)
286. Except for the one form ipse, the intensive pronoun is declined exactly
like the nine irregular adjectives (cf. §§ 108, 109). Learn the declension (§
481).
287. The demonstrative īdem, meaning the same, is a compound of is. It is
declined as follows:
Singular Plural
MASC. FEM. NEUT. MASC. FEM. NEUT.
e iī´dem eae
Nom. īdem idem e´adem
´adem eī´dem ´dem
Gen. eius eius eius eōrun eārun eōrun
´dem ´dem ´dem ´dem ´dem ´dem
eī eī iīs´dem iīs´dem iīs´dem
Dat. eī´dem
´dem ´dem eīs´dem eīs´dem eīs´dem
Acc. eun ean idem eōs eās e´adem
´dem ´dem ´dem ´dem
 Dat. eī eī eī´dem iīs´dem iīs´dem iīs´dem
´dem ´dem eīs´dem eīs´dem eīs´dem
a. From forms like eundem (eum + -dem), eōrundem (eōrum + -
dem), we learn the rule that m before d is changed to n.
b. The forms iīdem, iīsdem are often spelled and pronounced with one
ī.
288. EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 295.

I. 1. Ego et tū 1 in eādem urbe vīvimus. 2. Iter ipsum nōn timēmus sed ferās
saevās quae in silvā dēnsā esse dīcuntur. 3. Ōlim nōs ipsī idem iter fēcimus.
4. Eō tempore multās ferās vīdimus. 5. Sed nōbīs nōn nocuērunt. 6. Caesar
ipse scūtum dē manibus mīlitis ēripuit et in ipsam aciem properāvit. 7.
Itaque mīlitēs summā virtūte tēla in hostium corpora iēcērunt. 8. Rōmānī
quoque gravia vulnera accēpērunt. 9. Dēnique hostēs terga vertērunt et
ommīs in partīs 2 fūgērunt. 10. Eādem hōrā litterae Rōmam ab imperātōre
ipsō missae sunt. 11. Eōdem mēnse captīvī quoque in Italiam missī sunt. 12.
Sed multī propter vulnera iter difficile trāns montīs facere recūsābant et
Genāvae esse dīcēbantur.
1. Observe that in Latin we say I and you, not you and I.
2. Not parts, but directions.

II. 1. At Pompeii there is a wonderful mountain. 2. When I was in that

place, I myself saw that mountain. 3. On the same day many cities were
destroyed by fire and stones from that very mountain. 4. You have not heard
the true story of that calamity, have you? 3 5. On that day the very sun could
not give light to men. 6. You yourself ought to tell (to) us that story.
3. Cf. § 210.

289. How Horatius held the Bridge 4

Tarquinius Superbus, septimus et ultimus rēx Rōmānōrum, ubi in exsilium
ab īrātīs Rōmānīs ēiectus est, ā Porsenā, rēge Etrūscōrum, auxilium petiit.
Mox Porsena magnīs cum cōpiīs Rōmam vēnit, et ipsa urbs summō in
perīculō erat. Omnibus in partibus exercitus Rōmānus victus erat. Iam rēx
montem Iāniculum 5 occupāverat. Numquam anteā Rōmānī tantō metū
tenēbantur. Ex agrīs in urbem properābant et summō studiō urbem ipsam
mūniēbant.
4. The story of Horatius has been made familiar by Macaulay’s well-known poem “Horatius” in his
Lays of Ancient Rome. Read the poem in connection with this selection.
5. The Janiculum is a high hill across the Tiber from Rome.
 LESSON LI
THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS HIC, ISTE, ILLE

290. We have already learned the declension of the demonstrative pronoun

is and its use. (Cf. Lesson XVII.) That pronoun refers to persons or things
either far or near, and makes no definite reference to place or time. If we
wish to point out an object definitely in place or time, we must use hic, iste,
or ille. These demonstratives, like is, are used both as pronouns and as
adjectives, and their relation to the speaker may be represented graphically
thus:

a. In dialogue hic refers to a person or thing near the speaker; iste, to a

person or thing near the person addressed; ille, to a person or thing
remote from both. These distinctions are illustrated in the model
sentences, § 293, which should be carefully studied and imitated.
291. Hic is declined as follows:
Singular Plural
MASC. FEM. NEUT. MASC. FEM. NEUT.
Nom. hic haec hoc hī hae haec
Gen. huius huius huius hōrum hārum hōrum
Dat. huic huic huic hīs hīs hīs
Acc. hunc hanc hoc hōs hās haec
Abl. hōc hāc hōc hīs hīs hīs
a. Huius is pronounced ho͝ o´yo͝ os, and huic is pronounced ho͝ oic (one
syllable).
292. The demonstrative pronouns iste, ista, istud, and ille, illa, illud,
except for the nominative and accusative singular neuter forms istud and
illud, are declined exactly like ipse, ipsa, ipsum. (See § 481.)
293. MODEL SENTENCES

Is this horse (of mine) strong? Estne hic equus validus?

That horse (of yours) is strong, but that one Iste equus est validus,
(yonder) is weak sed ille est īnfīrmus
Are these (men by me) your friends? Suntne hī amīcī tuī?
Those (men by you) are my friends, but Istī sunt amīcī meī, sed
those (men yonder) are enemies illī sunt inimīcī
294. EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 295.

I. A German Chieftain addresses his Followers. Ille fortis Germānōrum dux
suōs convocāvit et hōc modō animōs eōrum cōnfirmāvit. “Vōs, quī in hīs
fīnibus vīvitis, in hunc locum convocāvī 1 quia mēcum dēbētis istōs agrōs et
istās domōs ab iniūriīs Rōmānōrum liberāre. Hoc nōbīs nōn difficile erit,
quod illī hostēs hās silvās dēnsās, ferās saevās quārum vestīgia vident,
montēs altōs timent. Sī fortēs erimus, deī ipsī nōbīs viam salūtis
dēmonstrābunt. Ille sōl, istī oculī calamītātēs nostrās vīdērunt. 1 Itaque
nōmen illīus reī pūblicae Rōmānae nōn sōlum nōbis, sed etiam omnibus
hominibus quī lībertātem amant, est invīsum. Ad arma vōs vocō. Exercēte
istam prīstinam virtūtem et vincētis.”
II. 1. Does that bird (of yours) 2 sing? 2. This bird (of mine) 2 sings both 3 in
summer and in winter and has a beautiful voice. 3. Those birds (yonder) 2 in
the country don´t sing in winter. 4. Snatch a spear from the hands of that
soldier (near you) 2 and come home with me. 5. With those very eyes (of
yours) 2 you will see the tracks of the hateful enemy who burned my
dwelling and made an attack on my brother. 6. For (propter) these deeds
(rēs) we ought to inflict punishment on him without delay. 7. The enemies
of the republic do not always suffer punishment.
1. The perfect definite. (Cf. § 190.)
2. English words in parentheses are not to be translated. They are inserted to show what
demonstratives should be used. (Cf. § 290.)
3. both ... and, et ... et.

HORATIUS PONTEM DEFENDIT

295. How Horatius held the Bridge (Continued)

Altera urbis pars mūrīs, altera flūmine satis mūnīrī vidēbātur. Sed erat pōns
in flūmine quī hostibus iter paene dedit. Tum Horātius Cocles, fortis vir,
magnā vōce dīxit, “Rescindite pontem, Rōmānī! Brevī tempore Porsena in
urbem cōpiās suās trādūcet.” Iam hostēs in ponte erant, sed Horātius cum
duōbus (cf. § 479) comitibus ad extrēmam pontis partem properāvit, et hi
sōli aciem hostium sustinuērunt. Tum vērō cīvēs Rōmānī pontem ā tergō
rescindere incipiunt, et hostēs frūstrā Horātium superāre temptant.
 LESSON LII
THE INDEFINITE PRONOUNS

296. The indefinite pronouns are used to refer to some person or some
thing, without indicating which particular one is meant. The pronouns quis
and quī, which we have learned in their interrogative and relative uses, may
also be indefinite; and nearly all the other indefinite pronouns are
compounds of quis or quī and declined almost like them. Review the
declension of these words, §§ 221, 227.
297. Learn the declension and meaning of the following indefinites:
Masc. Fem. Neut.
quis quid, some one, any one (substantive)
quī qua or quod, some, any (adjective), § 483
quae
aliquis aliquid, some one, any one (substantive), § 487
aliquī aliqua aliquod, some, any (adjective), § 487
quīdam quaedam quoddam, quiddam, a certain, a certain one, §
485
quisquam quicquam or quidquam (no plural), any one (at
all) (substantive), § 486
quisque quidque, each one, every one (substantive), §
484
quisque quaeque quodque, each, every (adjective), § 484

Transcriber’s Note:
In the original text, the combined forms
(masculine/feminine) were printed in the
“masculine” column.
 Note. The meanings of the neuters, something, etc., are easily inferred
from the masculine and feminine.
a. In the masculine and neuter singular of the indefinites, quis-forms
and quid-forms are mostly used as substantives, quī-forms and quod-
forms as adjectives.
b. The indefinites quis and quī never stand first in a clause, and are
rare excepting after sī, nisi, nē, num (as, sī quis, if any one; sī quid, if
anything; nisi quis, unless some one). Generally aliquis and aliquī are
used instead.
c. The forms qua and aliqua are both feminine nominative singular
and neuter nominative plural of the indefinite adjectives quī and aliquī
respectively. How do these differ from the corresponding forms of the
relative quī?
d. Observe that quīdam (quī + -dam) is declined like quī, except that
in the accusative singular and genitive plural m of quī becomes n (cf.
§ 287. a): quendam, quandam, quōrundam, quārundam; also that
the neuter has quiddam (substantive) and quoddam (adjective) in the
nominative and accusative singular. Quīdam is the least indefinite of
the indefinite pronouns, and implies that you could name the person or
thing referred to if you cared to do so.
e. Quisquam and quisque (substantive) are declined like quis.
f. Quisquam, any one (quicquam or quidquam, anything), is always
used substantively and chiefly in negative sentences. The
corresponding adjective any is ūllus, -a, -um (§ 108).
298. EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 295.

I. 1. Aliquis dē ponte in flūmen dēcidit sed sine ūllō perīculō servātus est. 2.
Est vērō in vītā cuiusque hominis aliqua bona fortūna. 3. Nē mīlitum
quidem 1 quisquam in castrīs mānsit. 4. Sī quem meae domī vidēs, iubē eum
discēdere. 5. Sī quis pontem tenet, nē tantus quidem exercitus capere urbem
potest. 6. Urbs nōn satis mūnīta erat et merīdiē rēx quīdam paene cōpiās
suās trāns pontem trādūxerat. 7. Dēnique mīles quīdam armātus in fluctūs
dēsiluit et incolumis ad alteram rīpam oculōs vertit. 8. Quisque illī fortī
mīlitī aliquid dare dēbet. 9. Tanta vērō virtūs Rōmānīs semper placuit. 10.
Ōlim Corinthus erat urbs satis magna et paene par Rōmae ipsī; nunc vērō
moenia dēcidērunt et pauca vestīgia urbis illīus reperīrī possunt. 11.
Quisque lībertātem amat, et aliquibus vērō nōmen rēgis est invīsum.
II. 1. If you see a certain Cornelius at Corinth, send him to me. 2. Almost all
the soldiers who fell down into the waves were unharmed. 3. Not even at
Pompeii did I see so great a fire. 4. I myself was eager to tell something to
some one. 5. Each one was praising his own work. 6. Did you see some one
in the country? I did not see any one. 7. Unless some one will remain on the
bridge with Horatius, the commonwealth will be in the greatest danger.
1. Observe that quīdam and quidem are different words.

299. How Horatius held the Bridge (Concluded)

Mox, ubi parva pars pontis mānsit, Horātius iussit comitēs discēdere et
sōlus mīrā cōnstantiā impetum illius tōtius exercitūs sustinēbat. Dēnique
magnō fragōre pōns in flūmen dēcīdit. Tum vērō Horātius tergum vertit et
armātus in aquās dēsiluit. In eum hostēs multa tēla iēcērunt; incolumis
autem per fluctūs ad alteram rīpam trānāvit. Eī propter tantās rēs gestās
populus Rōmānus nōn sōlum alia magna praemia dedit sed etiam statuam
Horāti in locō pūblicō posuit.

Sixth Review, Lessons XLV-LII, §§ 521-523

 LESSON LIII
REGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES

300. The quality denoted by an adjective may exist in either a higher or a

lower degree, and this is expressed by a form of inflection called
comparison. The mere presence of the quality is expressed by the positive
degree, its presence in a higher or lower degree by the comparative, and in
the highest or lowest of all by the superlative. In English the usual way of
comparing an adjective is by using the suffix -er for the comparative and -
est for the superlative; as, positive high, comparative higher, superlative
highest. Less frequently we use the adverbs more and most; as, positive
beautiful, comparative more beautiful, superlative most beautiful.
In Latin, as in English, adjectives are compared by adding suffixes or by
using adverbs.
301. Adjectives are compared by using suffixes as follows:
Positive Comparative Superlative
clārus, -a, -um clārior, clārīus clārissimus, -a, -um
(bright) (brighter) (brightest)
(Base clār-)
brevis, breve brevior, brevius brevissimus, -a, -um
(short) (shorter) (shortest)
(Base brev-)
vēlōx (swift) vēlōcior, vēlōcius vēlōcissimus, -a, -um
(Base veloc-) (swifter) (swiftest)
a. The comparative is formed from the base of the positive by adding -
ior masc. and fem., and -ius neut.; the superlative by adding -issimus,
-issima, -issimum.
302. Less frequently adjectives are compared by using the adverbs magis,
more; maximē, most; as, idōneus, suitable; magis idōneus, more suitable;
maximē idōneus, most suitable.
303. Declension of the Comparative. Adjectives of the comparative
degree are declined as follows:
Singular Plural
MASC. AND FEM. NEUT. MASC. AND FEM. NEUT.
Nom. clārior clārīus clāriōrēs clāriōra
Gen. clāriōris clāriōris clāriōrum clāriōrum
Dat. clāriōrī clāriōrī clāriōribus clāriōribus
Acc. clāriōrem clārius clāriōrēs clāriōra
Abl. clāriōre clāriōre clāriōribus clāriōribus
a. Observe that the endings are those of the consonant stems of the
third declension.
b. Compare longus, long; fortis, brave; recēns (base, recent-), recent;
and decline the comparative of each.
304. Adjectives in -er form the comparative regularly, but the superlative is
formed by adding -rimus, -a, -um to the nominative masculine of the
positive; as,
Positive Comparative Superlative
ācer, ācris, ācre ācrior, ācrius ācerrimus, -a, -um
(Base acr-)
pulcher, pulchra, pulchrior, pulcherrimus, -a, -
pulchrum pulchrius um
(Base pulchr-)
līber, lībera, līberum līberior, līberius līberrimus, -a, -um
(Base līber-)
a. In a similar manner compare miser, aeger, crēber.
305. The comparative is often translated by quite, too, or somewhat, and the
superlative by very; as, altior, quite (too, somewhat) high; altissimus, very
high.
306. EXERCISES
First learn the special vocabulary, p. 296.
I. 1. Quid explōrātōrēs quaerēbant? Explōrātōrēs tempus opportūnissimum
itinerī quaerēbant. 2. Mediā in silvā ignīs quam crēberrimōs fēcimus, quod
ferās tam audācis numquam anteā vīderāmus. 3. Antīquīs temporibus
Germānī erant fortiōrēs quam Gallī. 4. Caesar erat clārior quam inimīcī 1
quī eum necāvērunt. 5. Quisque scūtum ingēns et pīlum longius gerēbat. 6.
Apud barbarōs Germānī erant audācissimī et fortissimī. 7. Mēns hominum
est celerior quam corpus. 8. Virī aliquārum terrārum sunt miserrimī. 9.
Corpora Germānōrum erant ingentiōra quam Rōmānōrum. 10. Ācerrimī
Gallōrum prīncipēs sine ūllā morā trāns flūmen quoddam equōs
vēlōcissimōs trādūxērunt. 11. Aestāte diēs sunt longiōrēs quam hieme. 12.
Imperātor quīdam ab explōrātōribus dē recentī adventū nāvium longārum
quaesīvit.
II. 1. Of all birds the eagle is the swiftest. 2. Certain animals are swifter
than the swiftest horse. 3. The Roman name was most hateful to the
enemies of the commonwealth. 4. The Romans always inflicted the
severest 2 punishment on faithless allies. 5. I was quite ill, and so I hastened
from the city to the country. 6. Marcus had some friends dearer than
Cæsar. 3 7. Did you not seek a more recent report concerning the battle? 8.
Not even after a victory so opportune did he seek the general’s friendship.
1. Why is this word used instead of hostēs?
2. Use the superlative of gravis.
3. Accusative. In a comparison the noun after quam is in the same case as the one before it.

N.B. Beginning at this point, the selections for reading will be found
near the end of the volume. (See p. 197.)
 LESSON LIV
IRREGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES · THE ABLATIVE WITH
COMPARATIVES WITHOUT QUAM

307. The following six adjectives in -lis form the comparative regularly; but
the superlative is formed by adding -limus to the base of the positive. Learn
the meanings and comparison.
Positive Comparative Superlative
facilis, -e, easy facilior, -ius facillimus, -a, -um
difficilis, -e, hard difficilior, -ius difficillimus, -a, -um
similis, -e, like similior, -ius simillimus, -a, -um
dissimilis, -e, unlike dissimilior, -ius dissimillimus, -a, -um
gracilis, -e, slender gracilior, -ius gracillimus, -a, -um
humilis, -e, low humilior, -ius humillimus, -a, -um
308. From the knowledge gained in the preceding lesson we should
translate the sentence Nothing is brighter than the sun
Nihil est clārius quam sōl
But the Romans, especially in negative sentences, often expressed the
comparison in this way,
Nihil est clārius sōle
which, literally translated, is Nothing is brighter away from the sun; that is,
starting from the sun as a standard, nothing is brighter. This relation is
expressed by the separative ablative sōle. Hence the rule
309. Rule. Ablative with Comparatives. The comparative degree, if quam
is omitted, is followed by the separative ablative.
310. EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 296.

I. 1. Nēmō mīlitēs alacriōrēs Rōmānīs vīdit. 2. Statim imperātor iussit
nūntiōs quam celerrimōs litterās Rōmam portāre. 3. Multa flūmina sunt
lēniōra Rhēnō. 4. Apud Rōmanōs quis erat clārior Caesare? 5. Nihil
pulchrius urbe Rōmā vīdī. 6. Subitō multitūdo audacissima magnō clamōre
proelium ācrius commīsit. 7. Num est equus tuus tardus? Nōn vērō tardus,
sed celerior aquilā. 8. Ubi Romae fuī, nēmō erat mihi amicior Sextō. 9.
Quaedam mulierēs cibum mīlitibus dare cupīvērunt. 10. Rēx vetuit cīvis ex
urbe noctū discēdere. 11. Ille puer est gracilior hāc muliere. 12. Explōrātor
duās (two) viās, alteram facilem, alteram difficiliōrem, dēmōnstrāvit.
II. 1. What city have you seen more beautiful than Rome? 2. The Gauls
were not more eager than the Germans. 3. The eagle is not slower than the
horse. 4. The spirited woman did not fear to make the journey by night. 5.
The mind of the multitude was quite gentle and friendly. 6. But the king’s
mind was very different. 7. The king was not like (similar to) his noble
father. 8. These hills are lower than the huge mountains of our territory.
Reading Selection
ARMA ROMANA
 LESSON LV
IRREGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES

(Continued)

311. Some adjectives in English have irregular comparison, as good, better,

best; many, more, most. So Latin comparison presents some irregularities.
Among the adjectives that are compared irregularly are

Positive Comparative Superlative

bonus, -a, -um, good melior, melius optimus, -a, -um
magnus, -a, -um, great maior, maius maximus, -a, -um
malus, -a, -um, bad peior, peius pessimus, -a, -um
multus, -a, -um, much ——, plūs plūrimus, -a, -um
multī, -ae, -a, many plūrēs, plūra plūrimī, -ae, -a
parvus, -a, -um, small minor, minus minimus, -a, -um

312. The following four adjectives have two superlatives. Unusual forms
are placed in parentheses.

extrēmus, -a, -
um
exterus, -a, -um, (exterior, -ius, outermost,
(extimus, -a, -
outward outer) last
um)

īnfimus, -a, -
īnferus, -a, -um, īnferior, -ius,
um lowest
low lower
īmus, -a, -um
posterus, -a, -um, (posterior, -ius, postrēmus, -a, last
next later) -um
 (postumus, -a,
-um)

suprēmus, -a, -
superus, -a, -um, superior, -ius, um
highest
above higher summus, -a, -
um

313. Plūs, more (plural more, many, several), is declined as follows:

Singular Plural
MASC. AND FEM. NEUT. MASC. AND FEM. NEUT.
Nom. —— plūs plūrēs plūra
Gen. —— plūris plūrium plūrium
Dat. —— —— plūribus plūribus
Acc. —— plūs plūrīs, -ēs plūra
Abl. —— plūre plūribus plūribus

a. In the singular plūs is used only as a neuter substantive.

314. EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 296.

I. 1. Reliquī hostēs, quī ā dextrō cornū proelium commīserant, dē

superiōre locō fūgērunt et sēsē in silvam maximam recēpērunt. 2. In

extrēmā parte silvae castra hostium posita erant. 3. Plūrimī

captīvī ab equitibus ad Caesarem ductī sunt. 4. Caesar vērō iussit eōs in

servitūtem trādī. 5. Posterō diē magna multitūdō mulierum ab Rōmānīs in
valle īmā reperta est. 6. Hae mulierēs maximē

perterritae adventū Caesaris sēsē occīdere studēbant. 7. Eae quoque plūrīs

fābulās dē exercitūs Rōmānī sceleribus audīverant. 8. Fāma illōrum mīlitum
optima nōn erat. 9. In barbarōrum aedificiīs maior cōpia frūmentī reperta
est. 10. Nēmō crēbrīs proeliīs contendere sine aliquō perīculō potest.
II. 1. The remaining women fled from their dwellings and hid themselves.
2. They were terrified and did not wish to be captured and given over into
slavery. 3. Nothing can be worse than slavery.

4. Slavery is worse than death. 5. In the Roman empire a great

many were killed because they refused to be slaves. 6. To surrender the

fatherland is the worst crime.
Reading Selection
 LESSON LVI
IRREGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES (Concluded) · ­ABLATIVE OF THE
MEASURE OF DIFFERENCE

315. The following adjectives are irregular in the formation of the

superlative and have no positive. Forms rarely used are in parentheses.
Comparative Superlative
citerior, hither (citimus, hithermost)
interior, inner (intimus, inmost)
prior, former prīmus, first
propior, nearer proximus, next, nearest
ulterior, further ultimus, furthest
316. In the sentence Galba is a head taller than Sextus, the phrase a head
taller expresses the measure of difference in height between Galba and
Sextus. The Latin form of expression would be Galba is taller than Sextus
by a head. This is clearly an ablative relation, and the construction is called
the ablative of the measure of difference.
Galba est altior capite quam Sextus
Galba is a head taller (taller by a head) than Sextus.
Examples
Illud iter ad Italiam est multō brevius
That route to Italy is much shorter (shorter by much)
317. Rule. Ablative of the Measure of Difference. With comparatives and
words implying comparison the ablative is used to denote the measure of
difference.
a. Especially common in this construction are the neuter ablatives
eō, by this, by that
hōc, by this
multō, by much
 nihilō, 1 by nothing
paulō, by a little
1. nihil was originally nihilum and declined like pīlum. There is no plural.

318. EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 297.

I. 1. Barbarī proelium committere statuērunt eō magis quod Rōmānī īnfīrmī
esse vidēbantur. 2. Meum cōnsilium est multō melius quam tuum quia
multō facilius est. 3. Haec via est multō lātior quam illa. 4. Barbarī erant
nihilō tardiōrēs quam Rōmānī. 5. Tuus equus est paulō celerior quam meus.
6. Iī quī paulō fortiōrēs erant prohibuērunt reliquōs aditum relinquere. 7.
Inter illās cīvitātēs Germānia mīlitēs habet optimōs. 8. Propior via quae per
hanc vallem dūcit est inter portum et lacum. 9. Servī, quī agrōs citeriōrēs
incolēbant, priōrēs dominōs relinquere nōn cupīvērunt, quod eōs amābant.
10. Ultimae Germāniae partēs numquam in fidem Rōmānōrum vēnērunt.
11. Nam trāns Rhēnum aditus erat multō difficilior exercituī Rōmānō.
II. 1. Another way much more difficult (more difficult by much) was left
through hither Gaul. 2. In ancient times no state was stronger than the
Roman empire. 3. The states of further Gaul did not wish to give hostages
to Cæsar. 4. Slavery is no better (better by nothing) than death. 5. The best
citizens are not loved by the worst. 6. The active enemy immediately
withdrew into the nearest forest, for they were terrified by Cæsar’s recent
victories.
Reading Selection
 LESSON LVII
FORMATION AND COMPARISON OF ADVERBS

319. Adverbs are generally derived from adjectives, as in English (e.g. adj.

sweet, adv. sweetly). Like adjectives, they can be compared; but they have
no declension.

320. Adverbs derived from adjectives of the first and second declensions
are formed and compared as follows:

Positive Comparative Superlative

Adj. cārus, dear cārior cārissimus
Adv. cārē, dearly cārius cārissimē
Adj. pulcher, beautiful pulchrior pulcherrimus
Adv. pulchrē, beautifully pulchrius pulcherrimē
Adj. līber, free līberior līberrimus
Adv. līberē, freely līberius līberrimē

a. The positive of the adverb is formed by adding -ē to the base of the

positive of the adjective. The superlative of the adverb is formed from
the superlative of the adjective in the same way.
b. The comparative of any adverb is the neuter accusative singular of
the comparative of the adjective.
321. Adverbs derived from adjectives of the third declension are formed
like those described above in the comparative and superlative. The positive
is usually formed by adding -iter to the base of adjectives of three endings
or of two endings, and -ter to the base of those of one ending; 1 as,

Positive Comparative Superlative

Adj. fortis, brave fortior fortissimus
 Adv. fortiter, bravely fortius fortissimē
Adj. audāx, bold audācior audācissimus
Adv. audācter, boldly audācius audācissimē

1. This is a good working rule, though there are some exceptions to it.

322. Case Forms as Adverbs. As we learned above, the neuter accusative

of comparatives is used adverbially. So in the positive or superlative some
adjectives, instead of following the usual formation, use the accusative or
the ablative singular neuter adverbially; as,

Adj. facilis, easy prīmus, first

Adv. facile (acc.), easily prīmum (acc.), first
prīmō (abl.), at first
Adj. multus, many plūrimus, most
Adv. multum (acc.), much plūrimum (acc.), most
multō (abl.), by much

323. Learn the following irregular comparisons:

bene, well melius, better optimē, best

diū, long (time) diūtius, longer diūtissimē, longest
magnopere, greatly magis, more maximē, most
parum, little minus, less minimē, least
prope, nearly, near propius, nearer proximē, nearest
saepe, often saepius, oftener saepissimē, oftenest

324. Form adverbs from the following adjectives, using the regular rules,
and compare them: laetus, superbus, molestus, amīcus, ācer, brevis,
gravis,
recēns.
325. Rule. Adverbs. Adverbs modify verbs, adjectives, and other adverbs.
326. EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 297.

I. 1. Nūlla rēs melius gesta est quam proelium illud 2 ubi Marius multō
minōre exercitū multō maiōrēs cōpiās Germānōrum in fugam dedit. 2.
Audācter in Rōmānōrum cohortīs hostēs impetūs fēcērunt 3. Marius autem
omnēs hōs fortissimē sustinuit.

4. Barbarī nihilō fortiōrēs erant quam Rōmānī. 5. Prīmō

barbarī esse superiōrēs vidēbantur, tum Rōmānī ācrius contendērunt.

6. Dēnique, ubi iam diūtissimē paene aequō proeliō pugnātum est, barbarī
fugam petiērunt. 7. Quaedam Germānōrum gentēs, simul atque rūmōrem
illīus calamitātis audīvērunt, sēsē in ultimīs regiōnibus fīnium suōrum
abdidērunt.

8. Rōmānī saepius quam hostēs vīcērunt, quod meliōra arma habēbant.

9. Inter omnīs gentīs Rōmānī plūrimum valēbant. 10. Hae

cohortēs simul atque in aequiōrem regiōnem sē recēpērunt, castra sine ūllā

difficultāte posuērunt.

II. 1. Some nations are easily overcome by their enemies.

2. Germany is much larger than Gaul. 3. Were not the Romans

the most powerful among the tribes of Italy? 4. On account of (his) wounds
the soldier dragged his body from the ditch with the greatest difficulty. 5.
He was able neither to run nor to fight. 6. Who
saved him? A certain horseman boldly undertook the matter. 7. The rumors
concerning the soldier’s death were not true.
2. ille standing after its noun means that well-known, that famous.

Reading Selection
 LESSON LVIII
NUMERALS · THE PARTITIVE GENITIVE

327. The Latin numeral adjectives may be classified as follows:

1. Cardinal Numerals, answering the question how many? as, ūnus, one; duo,
two; etc.
2. Ordinal Numerals, derived in most cases from the cardinals and answering
the question in what order? as, prīmus, first; secundus, second; etc.
3. Distributive Numerals, answering the question how many at a time? as,
singulī, one at a time.
328. The Cardinal Numerals. The first twenty of the cardinals are as follows:
1, ūnus 6, sex 11, ūndecim 16, sēdecim
2, duo 7, septem 12, duodecim 17,
septendecim
3, trēs 8, octō 13, tredecim 18,
duodēvīgintī
4, 9, novem 14, 19,
quattuor quattuordecim ūndēvīgintī
5, quīnque 10, decem 15, quīndecim 20, vīgintī
a. Learn also centum = 100, ducentī = 200, mīlle = 1000.
329. Declension of the Cardinals. Of the cardinals only ūnus, duo, trēs, the
hundreds above one hundred, and mīlle used as a noun, are declinable.
a. ūnus is one of the nine irregular adjectives, and is declined like nūllus
(cf. §§ 109, 470). The plural of ūnus is used to agree with a plural noun of
a singular meaning, as, ūna castra, one camp; and with other nouns in the
sense of only, as, Gallī ūnī, only the Gauls.
b. Learn the declension of duo, two; trēs, three; and mīlle, a thousand. (§
479.)
 c. The hundreds above one hundred are declined like the plural of bonus;
as,
ducentī, -ae, -a
ducentōrum, -ārum, -ōrum
etc. etc. etc.
330. We have already become familiar with sentences like the following:

Omnium avium aquila est vēlōcissima

Of all birds the eagle is the swiftest
 Hoc ōrāculum erat omnium clārissimum
This oracle was the most famous of all
In such sentences the genitive denotes the whole, and the word it modifies
denotes a part of that whole. Such a genitive, denoting the whole of which a
part is taken, is called a partitive genitive.
331. Rule. Partitive Genitive. Words denoting a part are often used with the
genitive of the whole, known as the partitive genitive.
a. Words denoting a part are especially pronouns, numerals, and other
adjectives. But cardinal numbers excepting mīlle regularly take the
ablative with ex or dē instead of the partitive genitive.
b. Mīlle, a thousand, in the singular is usually an indeclinable adjective
(as, mīlle mīlitēs, a thousand soldiers), but in the plural it is a declinable
noun and takes the partitive genitive (as, decem mīlia mīlitum, ten
thousand soldiers).
Examples:

Fortissimī hōrum sunt Germānī

The bravest of these are the Germans
 Decem mīlia hostium interfecta sunt
Ten thousand (lit. thousands) of the enemy were slain
Ūna ex captīvīs erat soror rēgis
One of the captives was the king’s sister
332. EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 297.

I. 1. Caesar maximam partem aedificiōrum incendit. 2. Magna pars mūnītiōnis
aquā flūminis dēlēta est. 3. Gallī huius regiōnis quīnque mīlia hominum
coēgerant. 4. Duo ex meīs frātribus eundem rūmōrem audīvērunt. 5. Quis
Rōmānōrum erat clarior Caesare? 6. Quīnque cohortēs ex illā legiōne castra
quam fortissimē dēfendēbant. 7. Hic locus aberat aequō spatiō 1 ab castrīs
Caesaris et castrīs Germānōrum. 8. Caesar simul atque pervēnit, plūs
commeātūs ab sociīs postulāvit. 9. Nōnne mercātōrēs magnitūdinem īnsulae
cognōverant? Longitūdinem sed nōn lātitūdinem cognōverant. 10. Paucī
hostium obtinēbant collem quem explōrātōrēs nostrī vīdērunt.
II. 1. I have two brothers, and one of them lives at Rome. 2. Cæsar stormed that
very town with three legions. 3. In one hour he destroyed a great part of the
fortification. 4. When the enemy could no longer 2 defend the gates, they
retreated to a hill which was not far distant. 3 5. There three thousand of them
bravely resisted the Romans. 4
1. Ablative of the measure of difference.
2. Not longius. Why?
3. Latin, was distant by a small space.
4. Not the accusative.

Reading Selection
 LESSON LIX
NUMERALS (Continued) · THE ACCUSATIVE OF EXTENT

333. Learn the first twenty of the ordinal numerals (§ 478). The ordinals are
all declined like bonus.
334. The distributive numerals are declined like the plural of bonus. The
first three are
singulī, -ae, -a, one each, one by one
bīnī, -ae, -a, two each, two by two
ternī, -ae, -a, three each, three by three
335. We have learned that, besides its use as object, the accusative is used to
express space relations not covered by the ablative. We have had such
expressions as per plūrimōs annōs, for a great many years; per tōtum
diem, for a whole day. Here the space relation is one of extent of time. We
could also say per decem pedēs, for ten feet, where the space relation is
one of extent of space. While this is correct Latin, the usual form is to use
the accusative with no preposition, as,
Vir tōtum diem cucurrit, the man ran for a whole day
Caesar mūrum decem pedēs mōvit, Cæsar moved the wall ten feet
336. Rule. Accusative of Extent. Duration of time and extent of space are
expressed by the accusative.
a. This accusative answers the questions how long? how far?
b. Distinguish carefully between the accusative of time how long and
the ablative of time when, or within which.
Select the accusatives of time and space and the ablatives of time in the
following:
When did the general arrive? He arrived at two o’clock. How long had he
been marching? For four days. How far did he march? He marched sixty-
five miles. Where has he pitched his camp? Three miles from the river, and
he will remain there several days. The wall around the camp is ten feet
high. When did the war begin? In the first year after the king’s death.
337. EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 298.

I. Cæsar in Gaul. Caesar bellum in Gallia septem annōs gessit. Prīmō annō
Helvētiōs vīcit, et eōdem annō multae Germanōrum gentēs eī sēsē
dēdidērunt. Multōs iam annōs Germānī Gallōs vexabant 1 et ducēs Germānī
cōpiās suās trāns Rhēnum saepe trādūcēbant. 1 Nōn singulī veniēbant, sed
multa milia hominum in Galliam contendēbant. Quā dē causā prīncipēs
Galliae concilium convocāvērunt atque statuērunt legates ad Caesarem
mittere. Caesar, simul atque hunc rūmōrem audīvit, cōpiās suās sine morā
coēgit. Primā lūce fortiter cum Germanīs proelium commīsit. Tōtum diem
ācriter pugnātum est. Caesar ipse ā dextrō cornū acicm dūxit. Magna pars
exercitūs Germānī cecidit. Post magnam caedem paucī multa milia passuum
ad flūmen fūgērunt.
II. 1. Cæsar pitched camp two miles from the river. 2. He fortified the camp
with a ditch fifteen feet wide and a rampart nine feet high. 3. The camp of
the enemy was a great way off (was distant by a great space). 4. On the next
day he hastened ten miles in three hours. 5. Suddenly the enemy with all
their forces made an attack upon (in with acc.) the rear. 6. For two hours the
Romans were hard pressed by the barbarians. 7. In three hours the
barbarians were fleeing.
1. Translate as if pluperfect.

Reading Selection
 LESSON LX
DEPONENT VERBS

338. A number of verbs are passive in form but active in meaning; as,
hortor, I encourage; vereor, I fear. Such verbs are called deponent
because they have laid aside (dē-pōnere, to lay aside) the active forms.
a. Besides having all the forms of the passive, deponent verbs have
also the future active infinitive and a few other active forms which will
be noted later. (Sec§§ 375, 403.b.)
339. The principal parts of deponents are of course passive in form, as,
Conj. I hortor, hortārī, hortātus sum, encourage
Conj. II vereor, verērī, veritus sum, fear
Conj. III (a) sequor, sequī, secūtus sum, follow
(b) patior, patī, passus sum, suffer, allow
Conj. IV partior, partīrī, partītus sum, share, divide
Learn the synopses of these verbs. (See § 493.) Patior is conjugated like the
passive of capiō (§ 492).
340. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE
The prepositions with the accusative that occur most frequently are
ante, before intrā, within
apud, among ob, on account of (quam
circum, around ob rem, wherefore,
contrā, against, contrary therefore)
to per, through, by means of
extrā, outside of post, after, behind
in, into, in, against, upon propter, on account of,
inter, between, among because of
trāns, across, over
 a. Most of these you have had before. Review the old ones and learn
the new ones. Review the list of prepositions governing the ablative, §
209.
341. EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 298.

I. 1. Trēs ex lēgātīs, contrā Caesaris opīniōnem, iter facere per hostium fīnīs
verēbantur. 2. Quis eōs hortātus est? Imperātor eōs hortātus est et iīs
persuādēre cōnātus est, sed nōn potuit. 3. Quid lēgātōs perterruit? Aut timor
hostium, quī undique premēbant, aut longitūdō viae eōs perterruit. 4. Tamen
omnēs ferē Caesarem multō magis quam hostīs veritī sunt. 5. Fortissimae
gentēs Galliae ex Germānīs oriēbantur. 6. Quam ob rem tam fortēs erant?
Quia nec vīnum nec alia quae virtūtem dēlent ad sē portārī patiēbantur. 7.
Caesar ex mercātōribus dē īnsulā Britanniā quaesīvit, sed nihil cognōscere
potuit. 8. Itaque ipse statuit hanc terram petere, et mediā ferē aestāte cum
multīs nāvibus longīs profectus est. 9. Magnā celeritāte iter confēcit et in
opportūnissimō locō ēgressus est. 10. Barbarī summīs vīribus eum ab īnsulā
prohibēre cōnātī sunt. 11. Ille autem barbarōs multa mīlia passuum
īnsecūtus est; tamen sine equitātū eōs cōnsequī nōn potuit.
II. 1. Contrary to our expectation, the enemy fled and the cavalry followed
close after them. 2. From all parts of the multitude the shouts arose of those
who were being wounded. 3. Cæsar did not allow the cavalry to pursue too
far. 1 4. The cavalry set out at the first hour and was returning 2 to camp at
the fourth hour. 5. Around the Roman camp was a rampart twelve feet high.
6. Cæsar will delay three days because of the grain supply. 7. Nearly all the
lieutenants feared the enemy and attempted to delay the march.
1. Comparative of longē.
2. Will this be a deponent or an active form?

Seventh Review, Lessons LIII-LX, §§ 524-526

 PART III

CONSTRUCTIONS

INTRODUCTORY NOTE

The preceding part of this book has been concerned chiefly with forms and
vocabulary. There remain still to be learned the forms of the Subjunctive
Mood, the Participles, and the Gerund of the regular verb, and the
conjugation of the commoner irregular verbs. These will be taken up in
connection with the study of constructions, which will be the chief subject
of our future work. The special vocabularies of the preceding lessons
contain, exclusive of proper names, about six hundred words. As these are
among the commonest words in the language, they must be mastered. They
properly form the basis of the study of words, and will be reviewed and
used with but few additions in the remaining lessons.
For practice in reading and to illustrate the constructions presented, a
continued story has been prepared and may be begun at this point (see p.
204). It has been divided into chapters of convenient length to accompany
progress through the lessons, but may be read with equal profit after the
lessons are finished. The story gives an account of the life and adventures
of Publius Cornelius Lentulus, a Roman boy, who fought in Cæsar’s
campaigns and shared in his triumph. The colored plates illustrating the
story are faithful representations of ancient life and are deserving of careful
study.
Reading Selection
 LESSON LXI
THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD

342. In addition to the indicative, imperative, and infinitive moods, which

you have learned, Latin has a fourth mood called the subjunctive. The
tenses of the subjunctive are
Present
Imperfect
Active and Passive
Perfect
Pluperfect
343. The tenses of the subjunctive have the same time values as the
corresponding tenses of the indicative, and, in addition, each of them may
refer to future time. No meanings of the tenses will be given in the
paradigms, as the translation varies with the construction used.
344. The present subjunctive is inflected as follows:
Conj. I Conj. II Conj. III Conj. IV
Active Voice
SINGULAR
1. a´mem mo´neam re´gam ca´piam au´diam
2. a´mēs mo´neās re´gās ca´piās au´diās
3. a´met mo´neat re´gat ca´piat au´diat
PLURAL
1. amē´mus moneā´mus regā´mus capiā´mus audiā´mus
2. amē´tis moneā´tis regā´tis capiā´tis audiā´tis
3. a´ment mo´neant re´gant ca´piant au´diant
Passive Voice
SINGULAR
1. a´mer mo´near re´gar ca´piar au´diar
 2. amē´ris (- moneā´ris (- regā´ris (- capiā´ris (- audiā´ris (-
re) re) re) re) re)
3. amē´tur moneā´tur regā´tur capiā´tur audiā´tur
PLURAL
1. amē´mur moneā´mur regā´mur capiā´mur audiā´mur
2. amē´minī moneā´minī regā´minī capiā´minī audiā´minī
3. amen´tur monean´tur regan´tur capian´tur audian´tur
a. The present subjunctive is formed from the present stem.
b. The mood sign of the present subjunctive is -ē- in the first
conjugation and -ā- in the others. It is shortened in the usual places (cf.
§ 12), and takes the place of the final vowel of the stem in the first and
third conjugations, but not in the second and fourth.
c. The personal endings are the same as in the indicative.
d. In a similar way inflect the present subjunctive of cūrō, iubeō,
sūmō, iaciō, mūniō.
345. The present subjunctive of the irregular verb sum is inflected as
follows:
1. sim 1. sīmus
Sing. 2. sīs Plur. 2. sītis
3. sit 3. sint
346. The Indicative and Subjunctive Compared. 1. The two most
important of the finite moods are the indicative and the subjunctive. The
indicative deals with facts either real or assumed. If, then, we wish to assert
something as a fact or to inquire after a fact, we use the indicative.
2. On the other hand, if we wish to express a desire or wish, a purpose, a
possibility, an expectation, or some such notion, we must use the
subjunctive. The following sentences illustrate the difference between the
indicative and the subjunctive ideas.
Indicative Ideas Subjunctive Ideas
1. He is brave 1. May he be brave
 Fortis sit (idea of wishing)
Fortis est
2. We set out at once 2. Let us set out at once
Statim proficīscāmur (idea of
willing)
 Statim
proficīscimur
3. You hear him every day 3. You can hear him every day
Cotīdiē eum audiās (idea of
possibility)
 Cotīdiē eum
audīs
4. He remained until the 4. He waited until the ship should
ship arrived arrive
Exspectāvit dum nāvis
pervenīret 1 (idea of
expectation)
 Mānsit dum
nāvis pervēnit
5. Cæsar sends men who 5. Cæsar sends men who are to find
find the bridge (or to find) the bridge
Caesar mittit hominēs Caesar hominēs mittit quī
quī pontem reperiunt pontem reperiant (idea of
purpose)
1. pervenīret, imperfect subjunctive.

Note. From the sentences above we observe that the subjunctive may
be used in either independent or dependent clauses; but it is far more
common in the latter than in the former.
347. EXERCISE

Which verbs in the following paragraph would be in the indicative and

which in the subjunctive in a Latin translation?
There have been times in the history of our country when you might be
proud of being an American citizen. Do you remember the day when
Dewey sailed into Manila Bay to capture or destroy the enemy’s fleet? You
might have seen the admiral standing on the bridge calmly giving his
orders. He did not even wait until the mines should be removed from the
harbor’s mouth, but sailed in at once. Let us not despair of our country
while such valor exists, and may the future add new glories to the past.
Reading Selection
 LESSON LXII
THE SUBJUNCTIVE OF PURPOSE

348. Observe the sentence

Caesar hominēs mittit quī pontem reperiant,
Cæsar sends men to find the bridge
The verb reperiant in the dependent clause is in the subjunctive because it
tells us what Cæsar wants the men to do; in other words, it expresses his
will and the purpose in his mind. Such a use of the subjunctive is called the
subjunctive of purpose.
349. Rule. Subjunctive of Purpose. The subjunctive is used in a dependent
clause to express the purpose of the action in the principal clause.
350. A clause of purpose is introduced as follows:
I. If something is wanted, by
quī, the relative pronoun (as above)
ut, conj., in order that, that quō (abl. of quī, by which), in order
that, that, used when the purpose clause contains a
comparative. The ablative quō expresses the measure of
difference. (Cf. § 317.)
II. If something is not wanted, by
nē, conj., in order that not, that not, lest
351. EXAMPLES

1. Caesar cōpiās cōgit quibus hostīs īnsequātur

Cæsar collects troops with which to pursue the foe
2.
Pācem petunt ut domum revertantur
 They ask for peace in order that they may return home
3. Pontem faciunt quō facilius oppidum capiant
They build a bridge that they may take the town more easily
(lit. by which the more easily)
4.
Fugiunt nē vulnerentur
They flee that they may not (or lest they) be wounded
352. Expression of Purpose in English. In English, purpose clauses are
sometimes introduced by that or in order that, but much more frequently
purpose is expressed in English by the infinitive, as We eat to live, She
stoops to conquer. In Latin prose, on the other hand, purpose is never
expressed by the infinitive. Be on your guard and do not let the English
idiom betray you into this error.
353. EXERCISES

I.

dūcant, mittant, videant, audiant, dūcantur,

1. Veniunt ut
mittantur, videantur, audiantur.
capiāmur, trādāmur, videāmus, necēmur, rapiāmur,
2. Fugimus nē
resistāmus.
dicant, audiant, veniant, nārrent, audiantur, in
3. Mittit nūntiōs quī
conciliō sedeant.
4. Castra mūniunt sēsē dēfendant, impetum sustineant, hostīs vincant,
quō facilius salūtem petant.

II. 1. The Helvetii send ambassadors to seek 1 peace. 2. They are setting out
at daybreak in order that they may make a longer march before night. 3.
They will hide the women in the forest (acc. with in) that they may not be
captured. 4. The Gauls wage many wars to free 1 their fatherland from
slavery. 5. They will resist the Romans 2 bravely lest they be destroyed.
1. Not infinitive.
2. Not accusative.

Reading Selection
 LESSON LXIII
INFLECTION OF THE IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE THE SEQUENCE

OF TENSES

354. The imperfect subjunctive may be formed by adding the personal

endings

to the present active infinitive.

Conj. I Conj. II Conj. III Conj. IV

ACTIVE
1. amā´rem monē´rem re´gerem ca´perem audī´rem
2. amā´rēs monē´rēs re´gerēs ca´perēs audī´rēs
3. amā´ret monē´ret re´geret ca´peret audī´ret
1. amārē monērē regerē caperē audīrē´mus
´mus ´mus ´mus ´mus
2. amārē´tis monērē´tis regerē´tis caperē´tis audīrē´tis
3. amā´rent monē´rent re´gerent ca´perent audī´rent
PASSIVE
1. amā´rer monē´rer re´gerer ca´perer audī´rer
2. amārē monērē regerē caperē audīrē´ris(-
´ris(-re) ´ris(-re) ´ris(-re) ´ris(-re) re)
3. amārē´tur monērē´tur regerē´tur caperē´tur audīrē´tur
1. amārē monērē regerē caperē audīrē´mur
´mur ´mur ´mur ´mur
2. amārē monērē regerē caperē audīrē
´minī ´minī ´minī ´minī ´minī
3. amāren monēren regeren caperen audīren
´tur ´tur ´tur ´tur ´tur
 a. In a similar way inflect the imperfect subjunctive, active and
passive, of cūrō, iubeō, sūmō, iaciō, mūniō.
355. The imperfect subjunctive of the irregular verb sum is inflected as
follows:

1. es´sem 1. essē´mus
Sing. 2. es´sēs Plur. 2. essē´tis
3. es´set 3. es´sent

356. The three great distinctions of time are present, past, and future. All
tenses referring to present or future time are called primary tenses, and
those referring to past time are called secondary tenses. Now it is a very
common law of language that in a complex sentence the tense in the
dependent clause should be of the same kind as the tense in the principal
clause. In the sentence He says that he is coming, the principal verb, says, is
present, that is, is in a primary tense; and is coming, in the dependent
clause, is naturally also primary. If I

change he says to he said,—in other words, if I make the principal verb

secondary in character,—I feel it natural to

change the verb in the dependent clause also, and I say, He said that he was
coming. This following of a tense by another of the same kind is called
tense sequence, from sequī, “to follow.”

In Latin the law of tense sequence is obeyed with considerable regularity,

especially when an indicative in the principal clause is

followed by a subjunctive in the dependent clause. Then a primary tense of

the indicative is followed by a primary tense of the subjunctive, and a
secondary tense of the indicative is followed by a secondary tense of the
subjunctive. Learn the following table:

357. Table for Sequence of Tenses

Principal Verb in the Dependent Verbs in the Subjunctive

 Indicative
Incomplete or
Completed Action
Continuing Action
P
r Present
i
Future
m Present Perfect
a Future perfect
r
y

S
e
c Imperfect
o
Perfect
n Imperfect Pluperfect
d Pluperfect
a
r
y

358. Rule. Sequence of Tenses. Primary tenses are followed by primary

tenses and secondary by secondary.
359. EXAMPLES

I. Primary tenses in principal and dependent clauses:

Mittit
Mittet hominēs ut agrōs vāstent
Mīserit
sends that they may
He will send men in order to lay waste the fields
will have sent to

II. Secondary tenses in principal and dependent clauses:

Mittēbat
Mīsit hominēs ut agrōs vāstārent
Mīserat
 He was sending men that they might lay waste the fields
sent or has sent in order to
had sent to

360. EXERCISES

I.

dūcerent, mitterent, vidērent, audīrent,

dūcerentur, mitterentur,
1. Vēnerant ut
vidērentur, audirentur

caperētur, trāderētur, vidērētur,

necārētur, raperētur,
2. Fugiēbat nē
resiteret.

dīcerent, audīrent, venīrent, nārrārent,

audīrentur, in conciliō
3. Misit nūntiōs quī
sedērent.

sēsē dēfenderent, impetum sustinērent,

4. Castra hostīs vincerent,

mūnīvērunt quō salūtem peterent.

facilius

II. 1. Cæsar encouraged the soldiers in order that they might fight more
bravely. 2. The Helvetii left their homes to wage war.

3. The scouts set out at once lest they should be captured by the

Germans. 4. Cæsar inflicted punishment on them in order that the

others might be more terrified. 5. He sent messengers to Rome to

announce the victory.

Reading Selection
 LESSON LXIV
THE PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE SUBSTANTIVE

CLAUSES OF PURPOSE

361. The perfect and the pluperfect subjunctive active are inflected as

follows:

Conj. I Conj. II Conj. III Conj. IV

Perfect Subjunctive Active
SINGULAR
1. amā´verim monu´erim rē´xerim cē´perim audī´verim
2. amā´veris monu´eris rē´xeris cē´peris audī´veris
3. amā´verit monu´erit rē´xerit cē´perit audī´verit
PLURAL
1. amāve monue rēxe cēpe audīve
´rimus ´rimus ´rimus ´rimus ´rimus
2. amāve´ritis monue´ritis rēxe´ritis cēpe´ritis audīve´ritis
3. amā´verint monu´erint rē´xerint cē´perint audī´verint
Pluperfect Subjunctive Active
SINGULAR
1. amāvis´sem monuis´sem rēxis´sem cēpis´sem audīvis´sem
2. amāvis´sēs monuis´sēs rēxis´sēs cēpis´sēs audīvis´sēs
3. amāvis´set monuis´set rēxis´set cēpis´set audīvis´set
PLURAL
1. amāvissē monuissē rēxissē cēpissē audīvissē
´mus ´mus ´mus ´mus ´mus
2. amāvissē monuissē´tis rēxissē´tis cēpissē´tis audīvissē´tis
´tis
 3. amāvis´sent monuis´sent rēxis´sent cēpis´sent audīvis´sent

a. Observe that these two tenses, like the corresponding ones in

the indicative, are formed from the perfect stem.

b. Observe that the perfect subjunctive active is like the future

perfect indicative active, excepting that the first person singular ends

in -m and not in -ō.

c. Observe that the pluperfect subjunctive active may be formed

by adding -issem, -issēs, etc. to the perfect stem.

d. In a similar way inflect the perfect and pluperfect

subjunctive active of cūrō, iubeō, sūmō,

iaciō, mūniō.

362. The passive of the perfect subjunctive is formed by combining the

perfect passive participle with sim, the present subjunctive of

sum.
Conj. I Conj. II Conj. III Conj. IV
Perfect Subjunctive Passive
SINGULAR
1. amā´tus mo´nitus rēc´tus cap´tus audī´tus
sim sim sim sim sim
2. amā´tus sīs mo´nitus sīs rēc´tus sīs cap´tus sīs audī´tus sīs
3. amā´tus sit mo´nitus sit rēc´tus sit cap´tus sit audī´tus sit
PLURAL
1. amā´tī mo´nitī rēc´tī cap´tī audī´tī
sīmus sīmus sīmus sīmus sīmus
2. amā´tī sītis mo´nitī sītis rēc´tī sītis cap´tī sītis audī´tī sītis
3. amā´tī sint mo´nitī sint rēc´tī sint cap´tī sint audī´tī sint

363. The passive of the pluperfect subjunctive is formed by combining the

perfect passive participle with essem, the imperfect subjunctive

of sum.

Conj. I Conj. II Conj. III Conj. IV

Pluperfect Subjunctive Passive
SINGULAR
1. amātus monitus rēctus captus audītus
essem essem essem essem essem
2. amātus monitus rēctus captus audītus
essēs essēs essēs essēs essēs
3. amātus monitus rēctus captus audītus
esset esset esset esset esset
PLURAL
1. amātī monitī rēctī captī audītī
essēmus essēmus essēmus essēmus essēmus
 2. amātī monitī rēctī captī audītī
essētis essētis essētis essētis essētis
3. amātī monitī rēctī captī audītī
essent essent essent essent essent

a. In a similar way inflect the perfect and pluperfect

subjunctive passive of cūrō, iubeō, sūmō,

iaciō, mūniō.

364. The perfect and pluperfect subjunctive of the irregular verb sum are
inflected as follows:

Perfect Pluperfect
fu´erim fue´rimus fuis´sem fuissē´mus
fu´eris fue´ritis fuis´sēs fuissē´tis
fu´erit fu´erint fuis´set fuis´sent

365. A substantive clause is a clause used like a noun, as,

That the men are afraid is clear enough (clause as subject)

He ordered them to call on him (clause as object)

We have already had many instances of infinitive clauses used in this

way (cf. § 213), and have noted the

similarity between Latin and English usage in this respect. But the

Latin often uses the subjunctive in substantive clauses, and this

marks an important difference between the two languages.

366. Rule. Substantive Clauses of

Purpose. A substantive clause of purpose with the subjunctive is

used as the object of verbs of commanding, urging,

asking, persuading, or advising, where in English

we should usually have the infinitive.

EXAMPLES

1. The general ordered the

soldiers to run Imperātor mīlitibus
imperāvit ut currerent
2. He urged them to resist
bravely Hortātus est ut fortiter
resisterent
3. He asked them to give
the children food Petīvit ut līberīs cibum
darent
4. He will persuade us not
to set out Nōbīs persuādēbit nē
proficīscāmur
5. He advises us to remain
at home Monet ut domī maneāmus

a. The object clauses following these verbs all express the

purpose or will of the principal subject that something be done or not

done. (Cf. § 348.)

367. The following verbs are used with object clauses of purpose. Learn the

list and the principal parts of the new ones.

hortor, urge petō, quaerō, rogō, ask,

imperō, order (with the seek
dative of the person persuādeō, persuade (with
ordered and a the same construction as
subjunctive clause of the
thing ordered imperō)

done) postulō, demand, require

suādeō, advise (cf.
moneō, advise persuādeō)

N.B. Remember that iubeō, order, takes the infinitive as

in English. (Cf. § 213. 1.) Compare

the sentences

Iubeō eum venīre, I order him to come

Imperō eī ut veniat, I give orders to him that he is to

come

We ordinarily translate both of these sentences like the first, but the

difference in meaning between iubeō and imperō in the Latin requires the

infinitive in the one case and the subjunctive in the

other.
368. EXERCISES

I. 1. Petit atque hortātur ut ipse dīcat. 2. Caesar Helvētiīs

imperāvit nē per prōvinciam iter facerent. 3. Caesar nōn iussit

Helvētiōs per prōvinciam iter facere. 4. Ille cīvibus persuāsit ut

dē fīnibus suīs discēderent. 5. Caesar prīncipēs monēbit nē

proelium committant. 6. Postulāvit nē cum Helvētiīs aut cum eōrum

sociīs bellum gererent. 7. Ab iīs quaesīvī nē proficīscerentur.

8. Iīs persuādēre nōn potuī ut domī manērent.

II. 1. Who ordered Cæsar to make the march? (Write this sentence

both with imperō and with iubeō.) 2. The

faithless scouts persuaded him to set out at daybreak. 3. They will

ask him not to inflict punishment. 4. He demanded that they come to

the camp. 5. He advised them to tell everything (omnia).

Note. Do not forget that the English

infinitive expressing purpose must be rendered by a Latin subjunctive.

Review § 352.

Reading Selection
LEGIO ITER FACIT
 LESSON LXV
THE SUBJUNCTIVE OF POSSUM · VERBS OF FEARING

369. Learn the subjunctive of possum (§ 495), and note especially the
position of the accent.
370. Subjunctive after Verbs of Fearing. We have learned that what we
want done or not done is expressed in Latin by a subjunctive clause of
purpose. In this class belong also clauses after verbs of fearing, for we fear
either that something will happen or that it will not, and we either want it to
happen or we do not. If we want a thing to happen and fear that it will not,
the purpose clause is introduced by ut. If we do not want it to happen and
fear that it will, nē is used. Owing to a difference between the English and
Latin idiom we translate ut after a verb of fearing by that not, and nē by
that or lest.
371. EXAMPLES

timeō veniat
timēbō ut
timuerō vēnerit
I fear, shall fear, shall have feared, that he will not come, has not come
timēbam venīret
timuī ut
timueram vēnisset
I was fearing, feared, had feared, that he would not come, had not come
The same examples with nē instead of ut would be translated I fear that or
lest he will come, has come, etc.
372. Rule. Subjunctive after Verbs of Fearing. Verbs of fearing are
followed by a substantive clause of purpose introduced by ut (that not) or
nē (that or lest).
373. EXERCISES

I. 1. Caesar verēbātur ut supplicium captīvōrum Gallīs placēret. 2. Rōmānī

ipsī magnopere verēbantur nē Helvētiī iter per prōvinciam facerent. 3.
Timēbant ut satis reī frūmentāriae mittī posset. 4. Vereor ut hostium
impetum sustinēre possim. 5. Timuit nē impedīmenta ab hostibus capta
essent. 6. Caesar numquam timuit nē legiōnēs vincerentur. 7. Legiōnēs
pugnāre nōn timuērunt. 1
1. Distinguish between what one is afraid to do (complementary infinitive as here) and what one is
afraid will take place or has taken place (substantive clause with the subjunctive).

II. 1. We fear that they are not coming. 2. We fear lest they are coming. 3.
We feared that they had come. 4. We feared that they had not come. 5. They
feared greatly that the camp could not be defended. 6. Almost all feared 1 to
leave the camp.
Reading Selection
 LESSON LXVI
THE PARTICIPLES

374. The Latin verb has the following Participles: 1

Conj. I Conj. II Conj. III Conj. IV

ACTIVE

Present
amāns monēns regēns capiēns audiēns
loving advising ruling taking hearing
amātūrus monitūrus rēctūrus captūrus audītūrus
Future about to about to about to about to about to
love advise rule take hear
PASSIVE

amātus monitus rēctus captus audītus

loved, advised, ruled, taken, heard,
Perfect having having been having having having
been advised been been been
loved ruled taken heard
amandus monendus regendus capiendus audiendus
Future 2 to be to be to be to be to be
loved advised ruled taken heard
1. Review § 203.
2. The future passive participle is often called the gerundive.

a. The present active and future passive participles are formed from
the present stem, and the future active and perfect passive participles
are formed from the participial stem.
b. The present active participle is formed by adding -ns to the present
stem. In -iō verbs of the third conjugation, and in the fourth
conjugation, the stem is modified by the addition of -ē-, as capi-ē-ns,
 audi-ē-ns. It is declined like an adjective of one ending of the third
declension. (Cf. § 256.)
amāns, loving
Base amant- Stem amanti-
Singular Plural
MASC. AND NEUT. MASC. AND NEUT.
FEM. FEM.
Nom. amāns amāns amantēs amantia
Gen. amantis amantis amantium amantium
Dat. amantī amantī amantibus amantibus
Acc. amantem amāns amantīs or amantia
-ēs
Abl. amantī or -e amantī or - amantibus amantibus
e
(1) When used as an adjective the ablative singular ends in -ī; when used as
a participle or as a substantive, in -e.
(2) In a similar way decline monēns, regēns, capiēns, audiēns.
c. The future active participle is formed by adding -ūrus to the base of
the participial stem. We have already met this form combined with
esse to produce the future active infinitive. (Cf. § 206.)
d. For the perfect passive participle see § 201. The future passive
participle or gerundive is formed by adding -ndus to the present stem.
e. All participles in -us are declined like bonus.
f. Participles agree with nouns or pronouns like adjectives.
g. Give all the participles of the following verbs: cūrō, iubeō, sūmō,
iaciō, mūniō.
375. Participles of Deponent Verbs. Deponent verbs have the participles
of the active voice as well as of the passive; consequently every deponent
verb has four participles, as,
Pres. Act. hortāns, urging
 Fut. Act. hortātūrus, about to urge
Perf. Pass. (in form) hortātus, having urged
Fut. Pass. (Gerundive) hortandus, to be urged
a. Observe that the perfect participle of deponent verbs is passive in
form but active in meaning. No other verbs have a perfect active
participle. On the other hand, the future passive participle of deponent
verbs is passive in meaning as in other verbs.
b. Give the participles of cōnor, vereor, sequor, patior, partior.
376. Tenses of the Participle. The tenses express time as follows:
1. The present active participle corresponds to the English present active
participle in -ing, but can be used only of an action occurring at the same
time as the action of the main verb; as, mīlitēs īnsequentēs cēpērunt
multōs, the soldiers, while pursuing, captured many. Here the pursuing and
the capturing are going on together.
2. The perfect participle (excepting of deponents) is regularly passive and
corresponds to the English past participle with or without the auxiliary
having been; as, audītus, heard or having been heard.
3. The future active participle, translated about to, etc., denotes time after
the action of the main verb.
377. Review §§ 203, 204, and, note the following model sentences:
1. Mīlitēs currentēs erant dēfessī, the soldiers who were running (lit.
running) were weary.
2. Caesar profectūrus Rōmam nōn exspectāvit, Cæsar, when about to set
out (lit. about to set out) for Rome, did not wait.
3. Oppidum captum vīdimus, we saw the town which had been captured
(lit. captured town).
4. Imperātor trīduum morātus profectus est, the general, since (when, or
after) he had delayed (lit. the general, having delayed) three days, set out.
5. Mīlitēs vīctī terga nōn vertērunt, the soldiers, though they were
conquered (lit. the soldiers conquered), did not retreat.
In each of these sentences the literal translation of the participle is given in
parentheses. We note, however, that its proper translation usually requires a
clause beginning with some conjunction (when, since, after, though, etc.), or
a relative clause. Consider, in each case, what translation will best bring out
the thought, and do not, as a rule, translate the participle literally.
378. EXERCISES

I. 1. Puer timēns nē capiātur fugit. 2. Aquila īrā commōta avīs reliquās

interficere cōnāta erat. 3. Mīlitēs ab hostibus pressī tēla iacere nōn
potuērunt. 4. Caesar decimam legiōnem laudātūrus ad prīmum agmen
prōgressus est. 5. Imperātor hortātus equitēs ut fortiter pugnārent signum
proeliō dedit. 6. Mīlitēs hostīs octō milia passuum īnsecūtī multīs cum
captīvīs ad castra revertērunt. 7. Sōl oriēns multōs interfectōs vīdit. 8.
Rōmānī cōnsilium audāx suspicātī barbaris sēsē nōn commīsērunt. 9. Nāvis
ē portū ēgressa nūllō in perīculō erat.
II. 3 1. The army was in very great danger while marching through the
enemy’s country. 2. Frightened by the length of the way, they longed for
home. 3. When the scouts were about to set out, they heard the shouts of
victory. 4. When we had delayed many days, we set fire to the buildings and
departed. 5. While living at Rome I heard orators much better than these. 6.
The soldiers who are fighting across the river are no braver than we.
3. In this exercise use participles for the subordinate clauses.

Reading Selection
 LESSON LXVII
THE IRREGULAR VERBS VOLŌ, NŌLŌ, MĀLŌ · THE ABLATIVE WITH A PARTICIPLE,
OR ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE

379. Learn the principal parts and conjugation of volō, wish; nōlō (ne +
volō), be unwilling; mālō (magis + volō), be more willing, prefer (§ 497).
Note the irregularities in the present indicative, subjunctive, and infinitive,
and in the imperfect subjunctive. (Cf. § 354.)
a. These verbs are usually followed by the infinitive with or without a
subject accusative; as, volunt venīre, they wish to come; volunt
amīcōs venīre, they wish their friends to come. The English usage is
the same. 1
1. Sometimes the subjunctive of purpose is used after these verbs. (See § 366.)

380. Observe the following sentences:

1. Magistrō laudante omnēs puerī dīligenter labōrant, with the teacher
praising, or since the teacher praises, or the teacher praising, all the boys
labor diligently.
2. Caesare dūcente nēmō prōgredī timet, with Cæsar leading, or when
Cæsar leads, or if Cæsar leads, or Cæsar leading, no one fears to advance.
3. Hīs rēbus cognitīs mīlitēs fūgērunt, when this was known, or since this
was known, or these things having been learned, the soldiers fled.
4. Proeliō commissō multī vulnerātī sunt, after the battle had begun, or
when the battle had begun, or the battle having been joined, many were
wounded.
a. One of the fundamental ablative relations is expressed in English by
the preposition with (cf. § 50). In each of the sentences above we have
a noun and a participle in agreement in the ablative, and the translation
shows that in each instance the ablative expresses attendant
circumstance. For example, in the first sentence the circumstance
 attending or accompanying the diligent labor of the boys is the praise
of the teacher. This is clearly a with relation, and the ablative is the
case to use.
b. We observe, further, that the ablative and its participle are absolutely
independent grammatically of the rest of the sentence. If we were to
express the thought in English in a similar way, we should use the
nominative independent or absolute. In Latin the construction is called
the Ablative Absolute, or the Ablative with a Participle. This form of
expression is exceedingly common in Latin, but rather rare in English,
so we must not, as a rule, employ the English absolute construction to
translate the ablative abolute. The attendant circumstance may be one
of time (when or after), or one of cause (since), or one of concession
(though), or one of condition (if). In each case try to discover the
precise relation, and translate the ablative and its participle by a clause
which will best express the thought.
381. Rule. Ablative Absolute. The ablative of a noun or pronoun with a
present or perfect participle in agreement is used to express attendant
circumstance.
Note 1. The verb sum has no present participle. In consequence we
often find two nouns or a noun and an adjective in the ablative
absolute with no participle expressed; as, tē duce, you (being) leader,
with you as leader; patre īnfirmō, my father (being) weak.
Note 2. Be very careful not to put in the ablative absolute a noun and
participle that form the subject or object of a sentence. Compare
a. The Gauls, having been conquered by Cæsar, returned home
b. The Gauls having been conquered by Cæsar, the army returned home
In a the subject is The Gauls having been conquered by Cæsar, and we
translate,
Gallī ā Caesare victi domum revertērunt
In b the subject is the army. The Gauls having been conquered by
Cæsar is nominative absolute in English, which requires the ablative
absolute in Latin, and we translate,
 Gallīs ā Caesare victīs exercitus domum revertit
Note 3. The fact that only deponent verbs have a perfect active
participle (cf. § 375. a) often compels a change of voice when
translating from one language to the other. For example, we can
translate Cæsar having encouraged the legions just as it stands,
because hortor is a deponent verb. But if we wish to say Cæsar
having conquered the Gauls, we have to change the voice of the
participle to the passive because vincō is not deponent, and say, the
Gauls having been conquered by Cæsar (see translation above).
382. EXERCISES

I. 1. Māvīs, nōn vīs, vultis, nōlumus. 2. Ut nōlit, ut vellēmus, ut mālit. 3.

Nōlī, velle, nōluisse, mālle. 4. Vult, māvultis, ut nōllet, nōlīte. 5. Sōle
oriente, avēs cantāre incēpērunt. 6. Clāmōribus audītīs, barbarī prōgredī
recūsābant. 7. Caesare legiōnēs hortātō, mīlitēs paulō fortius pugnāvērunt.
8. Hīs rēbus cognitīs, Helvētiī fīnitimīs persuāsērunt ut sēcum iter facerent.
9. Labōribus cōnfectīs, mīlitēs ā Caesare quaerēbant ut sibi praemia daret.
10. Conciliō convocātō, prīncipēs ita respondērunt. 11. Dux plūrīs diēs in
Helvētiōrum fīnibus morāns multōs vīcōs incendit. 12. Magnitūdine
Germānōrum cognitā, quīdam ex Rōmānis timēbant. 13. Mercātōribus
rogātīs, Caesar nihilō plūs reperīre potuit.
II. 1. He was unwilling, lest they prefer, they have wished. 2. You prefer,
that they might be unwilling, they wish. 3. We wish, they had preferred, that
he may prefer. 4. Cæsar, when he heard the rumor (the rumor having been
heard), commanded (imperāre) the legions to advance more quickly. 5.
Since Cæsar was leader, the men were willing to make the journey. 6. A
few, terrified 2 by the reports which they had heard, preferred to remain at
home. 7. After these had been left behind, the rest hastened as quickly as
possible. 8. After Cæsar had undertaken the business (Cæsar, the business
having been undertaken), he was unwilling to delay longer. 3
2. Would the ablative absolute be correct here?
3. Not longius. Why?

Reading Selection
 LESSON LXVIII
THE IRREGULAR VERB FĪŌ · THE SUBJUNCTIVE OF RESULT

383. The verb fīō, be made, happen, serves as the passive of faciō, make, in
the present system. The rest of the verb is formed regularly from faciō.
Learn the principal parts and conjugation (§ 500). Observe that the i is long
except before -er and in fit.
a. The compounds of facio with prepositions usually form the passive
regularly, as,
Active cōnficiō, cōnficere, cōnfēcī, cōnfectus
Passive cōnficior, cōnficī, cōnfectus sum
384. Observe the following sentences:
1. Terror erat tantus ut omnēs fugerent, the terror was so great that all
fled.
2. Terror erat tantus ut nōn facile mīlitēs sēsē reciperent, the terror was
so great that the soldiers did not easily recover themselves.
3. Terror fēcit ut omnēs fugerent, terror caused all to flee (lit. made that
all fled).
a. Each of these sentences is complex, containing a principal clause
and a subordinate clause.
b. The principal clause names a cause and the subordinate clause states
the consequence or result of this cause.
c. The subordinate clause has its verb in the subjunctive, though it is
translated like an indicative. The construction is called the subjunctive
of consequence or result, and the clause is called a consecutive or
result clause.
d. In the last example the clause of result is the object of the verb fēcit.
 e. The conjunction introducing the consecutive or result clause is ut =
so that; negative, ut nōn = so that not.
385. Rule. Subjunctive of Result. Consecutive clauses of result are
introduced by ut or ut nōn and have the verb in the subjunctive.
386. Rule. Object clauses of result with ut or ut nōn are found after verbs
of effecting or bringing about.
387. Purpose and Result Clauses Compared. There is great similarity in
the expression of purpose and of result in Latin. If the sentence is
affirmative, both purpose and result clauses may be introduced by ut; but if
the sentence is negative, the purpose clause has nē and the result clause ut
nōn. Result clauses are often preceded in the main clause by such words as
tam, ita, sic (so), and these serve to point them out. Compare
a. Tam graviter vulnerātus est He was so severely wounded that
ut caperētur he was captured
b. He was severely wounded in order
Graviter vulnerātus that he might be captured

est ut caperētur

Which sentence contains a result clause, and how is it pointed out?

388. EXERCISES

I. 1. Fit, fīet, ut fīat, fīēbāmus. 2. Fīō, fīēs, ut fierent, fierī, fīunt. 3. Fīētis, ut
fīāmus, fīs, fīemus. 4. Mīlitēs erant tam tardī ut ante noctem in castra nōn
pervenīrent. 5. Sōl facit ut omnia sint pulchra. 6. Eius modī perīcula erant ut
nēmō proficīscī vellet. 7. Equitēs hostium cum equitātū nostrō in itinere
contendērunt, ita tamen 1 ut nostrī omnibus in partibus superiōrēs essent. 8.
Virtūs mīlitum nostrōrum fēcit ut hostēs nē ūnum quidem 2 impetum
sustinērent. 9. Hominēs erant tam audācēs ut nūllō modō continērī possent.
10. Spatium erat tam parvum ut mīlitēs tēla iacere nōn facile possent. 11.
Hōc proeliō factō barbarī ita perterritī sunt ut ab ultimīs gentibus lēgātī ad
Caesarem mitterentur. 12. Hoc proelium factum est nē lēgātī ad Caesarem
mitterentur.
1. ita tamen, with such a result however.
2. nē ... quidem, not even. The emphatic word is placed between.

II. 1. It will happen, they were being made, that it may happen. 2. It
happens, he will be made, to happen. 3. They are made, we were being
made, lest it happen. 4. The soldiers are so brave that they conquer. 5. The
soldiers are brave in order that they may conquer. 6. The fortification was
made so strong that it could not be taken. 7. The fortification was made
strong in order that it might not be taken. 8. After the town was taken, 3 the
townsmen feared that they would be made slaves. 9. What state is so weak
that it is unwilling to defend itself?
3. Ablative absolute.

Reading Selection
 LESSON LXIX
THE SUBJUNCTIVE OF CHARACTERISTIC OR DESCRIPTION · THE PREDICATE
ACCUSATIVE

389. Akin to the subjunctive of consequence or result is the use of the

subjunctive in clauses of characteristic or description.
This construction is illustrated in the following sentences:
1. Quis est quī suam domum nōn amet? who is there who does not love
his own home?
2. Erant quī hoc facere nōllent, there were (some) who were unwilling to
do this.
3. Tū nōn is es quī amīcōs trādās, you are not such a one as to, or you are
not the man to, betray your friends.
4. Nihil videō quod timeam, I see nothing to fear (nothing of such as
character as to fear it).
a. Each of these examples contains a descriptive relative clause which
tells what kind of a person or thing the antecedent is. To express this
thought the subjunctive is used. A relative clause that merely states a
fact and does not describe the antecedent uses the indicative. Compare
the sentences
Cæsar is the man who is leading us, Caesar est is quī nōs dūcit
(mere statement of fact, no description, with the indicative)
Cæsar is the man to lead us, Caesar est is quī nōs dūcat
(descriptive relative clause with the subjunctive)
b. Observe that in this construction a demonstrative pronoun and a
relative, as is quī, are translated such a one as to, the man to.
c. In which of the following sentences would you use the indicative
and in which the subjunctive?
 These are not the men who did this
These are not the men to do this
390. Rule. Subjunctive of Characteristic. A relative clause with the
subjunctive is often used to describe an antecedent. This is called the
subjunctive of characteristic or description.
391. Observe the sentences
1. Rōmānī Caesarem cōnsulem fēcērunt, the Romans made Cæsar
consul.
2. Caesar cōnsul ā Rōmānīs factus est, Cæsar was made consul by the
Romans.
a. Observe in 1 that the transitive verb fēcērunt, made, has two
objects: (1) the direct object, Caesarem; (2) a second object,
cōnsulem, referring to the same person as the direct object and
completing the predicate. The second accusative is called a Predicate
Accusative.
b. Observe in 2 that when the verb is changed to the passive both of
the accusatives become nominatives, the direct object becoming the
subject and the predicate accusative the predicate nominative.
392. Rule. Two Accusatives. Verbs of making, choosing, calling, showing,
and the like, may take a predicate accusative along with the direct object.
With the passive voice the two accusatives become nominatives.
393. The verbs commonly found with two accusatives are
creo, creāre, creāvī, creātus, choose
appellō, appellāre, appellāvī, appellātus
nōminō, nōmināre, nōmināvī, nōminātus call
vocō, vocāre, vocāvī, vocātus
faciō, facere, fēcī, factus, make
394. EXERCISES

I. 1. In Germāniae silvis sunt 1 multa genera ferārum quae reliquīs in locīs

nōn vīsa sint. 2. Erant 1 itinera duo quibus Helvētiī domō discēdere possent.
3. Erat 1 manus nūlla, nūllum oppidum, nūllum praesidium quod sē armīs
dēfenderet. 4. Tōtō frūmentō raptō, domī nihil erat quō mortem prohibēre
possent. 5. Rōmānī Galbam ducem creāvērunt et summā celeritāte profectī
sunt. 6. Neque erat 1 tantae multitūdinis quisquam quī morārī vellet. 7.
Germānī nōn iī sunt quī adventum Caesaris vereantur. 8. Cōnsulibus occīsīs
erant quī 2 vellent cum rēgem creāre. 9. Pāce factā erat nēmō quī arma
trādere nōllet. 10. Inter Helvētiōs quis erat quī nōbilior illō esset?
II. 1. The Romans called the city Rome. 2. The city was called Rome by the
Romans. 3. The better citizens wished to choose him king. 4. The brave
soldier was not the man to run. 5. There was no one 3to call me friend. 6.
These are not the men to 4 betray their friends. 7. There were (some) who
called him the bravest of all.
1. Remember that when the verb sum precedes its subject it is translated there is, there are, there
were, etc.
2. erant quī, there were (some) who. A wholly indefinite antecedent of quī does not need to be
expressed.
3. A relative clause of characteristic or description.
4. See § 389.b.

Reading Selection

Eighth Review, Lessons LXI-LXIX, §§ 527-528

 LESSON LXX
THE CONSTRUCTIONS WITH THE CONJUNCTION CUM · THE ABLATIVE OF
SPECIFICATION

395. The conjunction cum has the following meanings and constructions:
cum temporal = when, followed by the indicative or the
subjunctive
cum causal = since, followed by the subjunctive
cum concessive = although, followed by the subjunctive
As you observe, the mood after cum is sometimes indicative and sometimes
subjunctive. The reason for this will be made clear by a study of the
following sentences:
1. Caesarem vīdī tum cum in Galliā eram, I saw Cæsar at the time when I
was in Gaul.
2. Caesar in eōs impetum fēcit cum pācem peterent, Cæsar made an
attack upon them when they were seeking peace.
3. Hoc erat difficile cum paucī sine vulneribus essent, this was difficult,
since only a few were without wounds.
4. Cum prīmī ōrdinēs fūgissent, tamen reliquī fortiter cōnsistēbant,
though the front ranks had fled, yet the rest bravely stood their ground.
a. The underlying principle is one already familiar to you (cf. § 389.a).
When the cum clause states a fact and simply fixes the time at which
the main action took place, the indicative mood is used. So, in the first
example, cum in Galliā eram fixes the time when I saw Cæsar.
b. On the other hand, when the cum clause describes the
circumstances under which the main act took place, the subjunctive
mood is used. So, in the second example, the principal clause states
that Cæsar made an attack, and the cum clause describes the
circumstances under which this act occurred. The idea of time is also
 present, but it is subordinate to the idea of description. Sometimes the
descriptive clause is one of cause and we translate cum by since;
sometimes it denotes concession and cum is translated although.
396. Rule. Constructions with Cum. The conjunction cum means when,
since, or although. It is followed by the subjunctive unless it means when
and its clause fixes the time at which the main action took place.
Note. Cum in clauses of description with the subjunctive is much
more common than its use with the indicative.
397. Note the following sentences:
1. Oppidum erat parvum magnitūdine sed magnum multitūdine
hominum, the town was small in size but great in population.
2. Homō erat corpore īnfīrmus sed validus animō, the man was weak in
body but strong in courage.
a. Observe that magnitūdine, multitūdine, corpore, and animō tell in
what respect something is true. The relation is one covered by the
ablative case, and the construction is called the ablative of
specification.
398. Rule. Ablative of Specification. The ablative is used to denote in
what respect something is true.
399. IDIOMS

aliquem certiōrem facere, to inform some one (lit. to make some

one more certain)
certior fierī, to be informed (lit. to be made more certain)
iter dare, to give a right of way, allow to pass
obsidēs inter sē dare, to give hostages to each other
400. EXERCISES

I. 1. Helvētiī cum patrum nostrōrum tempore domō prefectī essent, cōnsulis

exercitum in fugam dederant. 2. Cum Caesar in Galliam vēnit, Helvētiī
aliōs agrōs petēbant. 3. Caesar cum in citeriōre Gallia esset, tamen dē
Helvētiōrum cōnsiliīs certior fīēbat. 4. Cum Helvētiī bellō clārissimī essent,
Caesar iter per prōvinciam dare recūsāvit. 5. Lēgātus cum haec audīvisset,
Caesarem certiōrem fecit. 6. Cum principēs inter sē obsidēs darent, Rōmānī
bellum parāvērunt. 7. Caesar, cum id nūntiātum esset, mātūrat ab urbe
proficīscī. 8. Nē virtūte quidem Gallī erant parēs Germānis. 9. Caesar neque
corpore neque animō īnfīrmus erat. 10. Illud bellum tum incēpit cum Caesar
fuit cōnsul.
Observe in each case what mood follows cum, and try to give the
reasons for its use. In the third sentence the cum clause is concessive,
in the fourth and sixth causal.
II. 1. That battle was fought at the time when (tum cum) I was at Rome. 2.
Though the horsemen were few in number, nevertheless they did not retreat.
3. When the camp had been sufficiently fortified, the enemy returned home.
4. Since the tribes are giving hostages to each other, we shall inform Cæsar.
5. The Gauls and the Germans are very unlike in language and laws.
Reading Selection
 LESSON LXXI
VOCABULARY REVIEW · THE GERUND AND GERUNDIVE · THE PREDICATE
GENITIVE

401. Review the word lists in §§ 510, 511.

402. The Gerund. Suppose we had to translate the sentence
By overcoming the Gauls Cæsar won great glory
We can see that overcoming here is a verbal noun corresponding to the
English infinitive in -ing, and that the thought calls for the ablative of means.
To translate this by the Latin infinitive would be impossible, because the
infinitive is indeclinable and therefore has no ablative case form. Latin,
however, has another verbal noun of corresponding meaning, called the
gerund, declined as a neuter of the second declension in the genitive, dative,
accusative, and ablative singular, and thus supplying the cases that the
infinitive lacks. 1 Hence, to decline in Latin the verbal noun overcoming, we
should use the infinitive for the nominative and the gerund for the other
cases, as follows:

overcoming
Nom. superāre Infinitive
to overcome
Gen. superandī, of overcoming
Dat. superandō, for overcoming
Gerund
Acc. superandum, overcoming
Abl. superandō, by overcoming

Like the infinitive, the gerund governs the same case as the verb from which
it is derived. So the sentence given above becomes in Latin
Superandō Gallōs Caesar magnam glōriam reportāvit
1. Sometimes, however, the infinitive is used as an accusative.

403. The gerund 2 is formed by adding -ndī, -ndō, -ndum, -ndō, to the
present stem, which is shortened or otherwise changed, as shown below:
 Paradigm of the Gerund
CONJ. I CONJ. II CONJ. III CONJ. IV
Gen. amandī monendī regendī capiendī audiendī
Dat. amandō monendō regendō capiendō audiendō
Acc. amandum monendum regendum capiendum audiendum
Abl. amandō monendō regendō capiendō audiendō
a. Give the gerund of cūrō, dēleō, sūmō, iaciō, veniō.
b. Deponent verbs have the gerund of the active voice (see § 493). Give
the gerund of cōnor, vereor, sequor, patior, partior.
2. The gerund is the neuter singular of the future passive participle used as a noun, and has the same
formation. (Cf. § 374. d.)

404. The Gerundive. The gerundive is the name given to the future passive
participle (§ 374. d) when the participle approaches the meaning of a verbal
noun and is translated like a gerund. It is the adjective corresponding to the
gerund. For example, to translate the plan of waging war, we may use the
gerund with its direct object and say cōnsilium gerendī bellum; or we may
use the gerundive and say cōnsilium bellī gerendī, which means, literally,
the plan of the war to be waged, but which came to have the same force as
the gerund with its object, and was even preferred to it.
405. Compare the following parallel uses of the gerund and gerundive:
Gerund Gerundive
Gen.
Spēs faciendī pācem Spēs faciendae pācis
The hope of making peace The hope of making peace

Dat.
Locus idōneus Locus idōneus
pugnandō castrīs pōnendīs
 A place suitable for A place suitable for pitching
fighting camp

Acc.
Mīsit equitēs ad Mīsit equitēs ad
īnsequendum īnsequendōs hostīs
He sent horsemen to He sent horsemen to pursue the
pursue enemy

Abl.
Nārrandō fābulās Nārrandīs fābulīs
magister puerīs magister puerīs
placuit placuit
The teacher pleased the boys The teacher pleased the boys
by telling stories by telling stories
a. We observe
(1) That the gerund is a noun and the gerundive an adjective.
(2) That the gerund, being a noun, may stand alone or with an object.
(3) That the gerundive, being an adjective, is used only in agreement
with a noun.
406. Rule. Gerund and Gerundive. 1. The Gerund is a verbal noun and is
used only in the genitive, dative, accusative, and ablative singular. The
constructions of these cases are in general the same as those of other nouns.
2. The Gerundive is a verbal adjective and must be used instead of gerund +
object excepting in the genitive and in the ablative without a preposition.
Even in these instances the gerundive construction is more usual.
407. Rule. Gerund or Gerundive of Purpose. The accusative of the gerund
or gerundive with ad, or the genitive with causā 3 (= for the sake of), is used
to express purpose.
Gerund Gerundive
Ad audiendum vēnērunt or Ad urbem videndam vēnērunt or
 Audiendī causā Urbis videndae causā
vēnērunt vēnērunt
They came to hear They came to see the city

3. causā always follows the genitive.

Note. These sentences might, of course, be written with the subjunctive

of purpose,—vēnērunt ut audīrent; vēnērunt ut urbem vidērent. In
short expressions, however, the gerund and gerundive of purpose are
rather more common.
408. We have learned that the word denoting the owner or possessor of
something is in the genitive, as, equus Galbae, Galba’s horse. If, now, we
wish to express the idea the horse is Galba’s, Galba remains the possessor,
and hence in the genitive as before, but now stands in the predicate, as,
equus est Galbae. Hence this is called the predicate genitive.
409. Rule. Predicate Genitive. The possessive genitive often stands in the
predicate, especially after the forms of sum, and is then called the predicate
genitive.
410. IDIOMS

alīcui negōtium dare, to employ someone (lit. to give business to

some one)
novīs rēbus studēre, to be eager for a revolution (lit. to be eager
for new things)
reī mīlitāris perītissimus, very skillful in the art of war
sē suaque omnia, themselves and all their possessions
411. EXERCISES

I. 1. Caesar cum in Galliā bellum gereret, militibus decimae legiōnis maximē

fāvit quia reī mīlitāris perītissimī erant. 2. Sociīs negōtium dedit reī
frumentāriae cūrandae. 3. Lēgāti nōn sōlum audiendī causā sed etiam dicendī
causā vēnērunt. 4. Imperātor iussit explōrātōres locum idōneum mūnindō
reperīre. 5. Nuper hae gentēs novīs rēbus studēbant; mox iīs persuādēbō ut
Caesarī sē suaque omnia dēdant. 6. Iubēre est regīnae 1 et pārēre est
multitūdinis. 4 7. Hōc proeliō factō quīdam ex hostibus ad pācem petendam
venērunt. 8. Erant quī arma trādere nōllent. 9. Hostēs tam celeriter prōgressī
sunt ut spatium pīla in hostīs iaciendī non darētur. 10. Spatium neque arma
capiendī 5 neque auxilī petendī 2 datum est.
II. 1. These ornaments 6belong to Cornelia. 2. Men very skillful in the art of
war were sent 7to capture the town. 3. The scouts found a hill suitable for
fortifying very near to the river. 4. Soon the cavalry will come 8to seek
supplies. 5. The mind of the Gauls is eager for revolution and for
undertaking wars. 6. To lead the line of battle 8belongs to the general. 7.
10Whom shall we employ to look after the grain supply?

4. Predicate genitive.
5. Which of these expressions is gerund and which gerundive?
6. belong to = are of.
7. Use the gerundive with ad.
8. Use the genitive with causā. Where should causā stand?
9. Compare the first sentence.
10. Compare the second sentence in the Latin above.

Reading Selection
 LESSON LXXII
THE IRREGULAR VERB EŌ · INDIRECT STATEMENTS

412. Learn the principal parts and the conjugation of eō, go (§ 499).
a. Notice that ī-, the root of eō, is changed to e- before a vowel,
excepting in iēns, the nominative of the present participle. In the
perfect system -v- is regularly dropped.
413. Learn the meaning and principal parts of the following compounds of
eō with prepositions:
ad´eō, adī´re, ad´iī, ad´itus, go to, visit, with the accusative
ex´eō, exī´re, ex´iī, ex´itus, go forth, with ex or dē and the
ablative of the place from which
in´eō, inī´re, in´iī, in´itus, begin, enter upon, with the accusative
red´eō, redī´re, red´iī, red´itus, return, with ad or in and the
accusative of the place to which
trāns´eō, trānsī´re, trāns´iī, trāns´itus, cross, with the
accusative
414. Indirect Statements in English. Direct statements are those which the
speaker or writer makes himself or which are quoted in his exact language.
Indirect statements are those reported in a different form of words from that
used by the speaker or writer. Compare the following direct and indirect
statements:

Direct statements 1. The Gauls are brave

2. The Gauls were brave
 3. The Gauls will
be brave

1. He says that the Gauls

are brave
Indirect statements after a verb in 2. He says that the Gauls
the present tense were brave
3. He says that the Gauls
will be brave
1. He said that the Gauls
were brave
Indirect statements after a verb in a 2. He said that the Gauls
past tense had been brave
3. He said that the Gauls
would be brave

We see that in English

a. The indirect statement forms a clause introduced by the conjunction
that.
b. The verb is finite (cf. § 173) and its subject is in the nominative.
c. The tenses of the verbs originally used are changed after the past
tense, He said.
415. Indirect Statements in Latin. In Latin the direct and indirect
statements above would be as follows:

1. Gallī sunt fortēs

Direct
2. Gallī erant fortēs
Statements
3. Gallī erunt fortēs
Indirect 1. Dīcit or Dīxit Gallōs esse fortīs (He says or He said the
Statements Gauls to be brave) 1
 2. Dīcit or Dīxit Gallōs fuisse fortīs (He says or He said
the Gauls to have been brave) 1
3. Dīcit or Dīxit Gallōs futūrōs esse fortīs (He says or He
said the Gauls to be about to be brave) 1
1. These parenthetical renderings are not inserted as translations, but merely to show the literal
meaning of the Latin.

Comparing these Latin indirect statements with the English in the preceding
section, we observe three marked differences:
a. There is no conjunction corresponding to that.
b. The verb is in the infinitive and its subject is in the accusative.
c. The tenses of the infinitive are not changed after a past tense of the
principal verb.
416. Rule. Indirect Statements. When a direct statement becomes indirect,
the principal verb is changed to the infinitive and its subject nominative
becomes subject accusative of the infinitive.
417. Tenses of the Infinitive. When the sentences in § 415 were changed
from the direct to the indirect form of statement, sunt became esse, erant
became fuisse, and erunt became futūrōs esse.
418. Rule. Infinitive Tenses in Indirect Statements. A present indicative
of a direct statement becomes present infinitive of the indirect, a past
indicative becomes perfect infinitive, and a future indicative becomes future
infinitive.
Note. When translating into Latin an English indirect statement, first
decide what tense of the indicative would have been used in the direct
form. That will show you what tense of the infinitive to use in the
indirect.
419. Rule. Verbs followed by Indirect Statements. The accusative-with-
infinitive construction in indirect statements is found after verbs of saying,
telling, knowing, thinking, and perceiving.
420. Verbs regularly followed by indirect statements are:
a. Verbs of saying and telling:
 dīcō, dīcere, dīxī, dictus, say
negō, negāre, negāvī, negātus, deny, say not
nūntiō, nūntiāre, nūntiāvī, nūntiātus, announce
respondeō, respondēre, respondī, respōnsus, reply
b. Verbs of knowing:
cognōscō, cognōscere, cognōvī, cognitus, learn, (in the
perf.) know
sciō, scīre, scīvī, scītus, know
c. Verbs of thinking:
arbitror, arbitrārī, arbitrātus sum, think, consider
exīstimō, exīstimāre, exīstimāvī, exīstimātus, think,
believe
iūdicō, iūdicāre, iūdicāvi, iūdicātus, judge, decide putō,
putāre, putāvī, putātus, reckon, think
spērō, spērāre, spērāvi, spērātus, hope
d. Verbs of perceiving:
audiō, audīre, audīvī, audītus, hear
sentiō, sentīre, sēnsī, sēnsus, feel, perceive
videō, vidēre, vīdī, vīsus, see
intellegō, intellegere, intellēxī, intellēctus, understand,
perceive
Learn such of these verbs as are new to you.
421. IDIOMS

postrīdiē eius diēī, on the next day (lit. on the next day of that
day)
initā aestāte, at the beginning of summer
memoriā tenēre, to remember (lit. to hold by memory)
per explōrātōrēs cognōscere, to learn through scouts
422. EXERCISES

I. 1. It, īmus, īte, īre. 2. Euntī, iisse or īsse, ībunt, eunt. 3. Eundi, ut eant,
ībitis, īs. 4. Nē īrent, ī, ībant, ierat. 5. Caesar per explorātores cognōvit
Gallōs flūmen trānsīsse. 6. Rōmānī audīvērunt Helvētiōs initā aestāte dē
fīnibus suīs exitūrōs esse. 7. Legātī respondērunt nēminem ante Caesarem
illam īnsulam adīsse. 8. Prīncipēs Gallōrum dīcunt sē nūllum cōnsilium
contrā Caesaris imperium initūrōs esse. 9. Arbitrāmur potentiam rēgīnae
esse maiōrem quam cīvium. 10. Rōmānī negant se lībertātem Gallīs
ēreptūrōs esse. 11. Hīs rēbus cognitīs sēnsimus lēgātōs non vēnisse ad
pācem petendam. 12. Helvētii sciunt Rōmānōs priōrēs victōriās memoriā
tenēre. 13. Sociī cum intellegerent multōs vulnerārī, statuērunt in suōs fīnīs
redīre. 14. Aliquis nūntiāvit Mārcum cōnsulem creātum esse.
II. 1. The boy is slow. He says that the boy is, was, (and) will be slow. 2.
The horse is, has been, (and) will be strong. He judged that the horse was,
had been, (and) would be strong. 3. We think that the army will go forth
from the camp at the beginning of summer. 4. The next day we learned
through scouts that the enemy’s town was ten miles off. 2 5. The king
replied that the ornaments belonged to 3 the queen.
2. to be off, to be distant, abesse.
3. Latin, were of (§ 409).

Reading Selection

TUBA
 LESSON LXXIII
VOCABULARY REVIEW · THE IRREGULAR VERB FERŌ · THE DATIVE WITH
COMPOUNDS

423. Review the word lists in §§ 513, 514.

424. Learn the principal parts and conjugation of the verb ferō, bear (§
498).
1. Learn the principal parts and meanings of the following compounds of
ferō, bear:
ad´ferō, adfer´re, at´tulī, adlā´tus, bring to; report
cōn´ferō, cōnfer´re, con´tulī, conlā´tus, bring together, collect
dē´ferō, dēfer´re, dē´tulī, dēlā´tus, bring to; report; grant,
confer
īn´ferō, īnfer´re, in´tulī, inlā´tus, bring in, bring against
re´ferō, refer´re, ret´tulī, relā´tus, bear back, report
425. The dative is the case of the indirect object. Many intransitive verbs
take an indirect object and are therefore used with the dative (cf. § 153).
Transitive verbs take a direct object in the accusative; but sometimes they
have an indirect object or dative as well. The whole question, then, as to
whether or not a verb takes the dative, depends upon its capacity for
governing an indirect object. A number of verbs, some transitive and some
intransitive, which in their simple form would not take an indirect object,
when compounded with certain prepositions, have a meaning which calls
for an indirect object. Observe the following sentences:
1. Haec rēs exercituī magnam calamitātem attulit, this circumstance
brought great disaster to the army.
2. Germānī Gallīs bellum īnferunt, the Germans make war upon the
Gauls.
3. Hae cōpiae proeliō nōn intererant, these troops did not take part in
the battle.
 4. Equitēs fugientibus hostibus occurrunt, the horsemen meet the
fleeing enemy.
5. Galba cōpiīs fīlium praefēcit, Galba put his son in command of the
troops.
In each sentence there is a dative, and in each a verb combined with a
preposition. In no case would the simple verb take the dative.
426. Rule. Dative with Compounds. Some verbs compounded with ad,
ante, con, dē, in, inter, ob, post, prae, prō, sub, super, admit the dative of
the indirect object. Transitive compounds may take both an accusative and
a dative.
Note 1. Among such verbs are 1
ad´ferō, adfer´re, at´tulī, adlā´tus, bring to; report
ad´sum, ades´se, ad´fuī, adfutū´rus, assist; be present
dē´ferō, dēfer´re, dē´tulī, dēlātus, report; grant, confer
dē´sum, dees´se, dē´fuī, ——, be wanting, be lacking
īn´ferō, īnfer´re, in´tulī, inlā´tus, bring against, bring upon
inter´sum, interes´se, inter´fuī, interfutū´rus, take part in
occur´rō, occur´rere, occur´rī, occur´sus, run against, meet
praefi´ciō, praefi´cere, praefē´cī, praefec´tus, appoint over,
place in command of
prae´sum, praees´se, prae´fuī, ——, be over, be in command
1. But the accusative with ad or in is used with some of these, when the idea of motion to or against
is strong.

427. IDIOMS

graviter or molestē ferre, to be annoyed at, to be indignant at,

followed by the accusative and infinitive
sē cōnferre ad or in, with the accusative, to betake one’s self to
alicui bellum īnferre, to make war upon some one
pedem referre, to retreat (lit. to bear back the foot)
428. EXERCISES

I. 1. Fer, ferent, ut ferant, ferunt. 2. Ferte, ut ferrent, tulisse, tulerant. 3.

Tulimus, ferēns, lātus esse, ferre. 4. Cum nāvigia insulae adpropinquārent,
barbarī terrōre commōtī pedem referre cōnātī sunt. 5. Gallī molestē ferēbant
Rōmānōs agrōs vastāre. 6. Caesar sociīs imperāvit nē fīnitimis suīs bellum
īnferrent. 7. Explorātōrēs, qui Caesarī occurrērunt, dīxērunt exercitum
hostium vulneribus dēfessum sēsē in alium locum contulisse. 8. Hostes
sciēbant Rōmānōs frūmentō egēre et hanc rem Caesarī summum perīculum
adlātūram esse. 9. Impedīmentīs in ūnum locum conlātis, aliquī mīlitum
flūmen quod nōn longē aberat trānsiērunt. 10. Hōs rēx hortātus est ut
ōrāculum adīrent et rēs audītās ad sē referrent. 11. Quem imperātor illī
legiōnī praefēcit? Pūblius illī legiōnī pracerat. 12. Cum esset Caesar in
citeriōre Galliā, crēbrī ad eum 2 rūmōrēs adferēbantur litterīsque quoque
certior fīēbat Gallōs obsidēs inter sē dare.
II. 1. The Gauls will make war upon Cæsar’s allies. 2. We heard that the
Gauls would make war upon Cæsar’s allies. 3. Publius did not take part in
that battle. 4. We have been informed that Publius did not take part in that
battle. 5. The man who was in command of the cavalry was wounded and
began to retreat. 6. Cæsar did not place you in command of the cohort to
bring 3 disaster upon the army.
2. Observe that when adferō denotes motion to, it is not followed by the dative; cf. footnote, p. 182.
3. Not the infinitive. (Cf. § 352.)

Reading Selection
 LESSON LXXIV
VOCABULARY REVIEW · THE SUBJUNCTIVE IN INDIRECT QUESTIONS

429. Review the word lists in §§ 517, 518.

430. When we report a statement instead of giving it directly, we have an
indirect statement. (Cf. § 414.) So, if we report a question instead of asking
it directly, we have an indirect question.
Direct Question Indirect Question
Who conquered the Gauls? He asked who conquered the Gauls
a. An indirect question depends, usually as object, upon a verb of
asking (as petō, postulō, quaerō, rogō) or upon some verb or
expression of saying or mental action. (Cf. § 420.)
431. Compare the following direct and indirect questions:

Direct Indirect
a.
Rogat quis Gallōs vincat
He asks who is conquering the Gauls
Quis Gallōs vincit?
Who is conquering the b.
Gauls? Rogavit quis Gallōs
vinceret
He asked who was conquering the Gauls
Ubī est Rōma? a.
Where is Rome? Rogat ubi sit Rōma
 He asks where Rome is

b.
Rogāvit ubi esset Rōma
He asked where Rome was

a.
Rogat num Caesar Gallōs
vīcerit
He asks whether Cæsar conquered the
Caesarne Gallōs vīcit? Gauls
Did Cæsar conquer the
Gauls? b.
Rogāvit num Caesar Gallōs
vīcisset
He asked whether Cæsar had conquered
the Gauls

a. The verb in a direct question is in the indicative mood, but the mood
is subjunctive in an indirect question.
b. The tense of the subjunctive follows the rules for tense sequence.
c. Indirect questions are introduced by the same interrogative words as
introduce direct questions, excepting thatyes-or-no direct questions (cf.
§ 210) on becoming indirect are usually introduced by num, whether.
432. Rule. Indirect Questions. In an indirect question the verb is in the
subjunctive and its tense is determined by the law for tense sequence.
433. IDIOMS

dē tertiā vigiliā, about the third watch

 iniūriās alicui īnferre, to inflict injuries upon some one
facere verba prō, with the ablative, to speak in behalf of
in reliquum tempus, for the future
434. EXERCISES

I. 1. Rēx rogāvit quid lēgātī postulārent et cūr ad sē vēnissent. 2. Quaesīvit

quoque num nec recentīs iniūriās nec dubiam Rōmānōrum amīcitiam
memoriā tenērent. 3. Vidētisne quae oppida hostēs oppugnāverint? 4.
Nōnne scītis cūr Gallī sub montem sēse contulerint? 5. Audīvimus quās
iniūrias tibi Germānī intulissent. 6. Dē tertiā vigiliā imperātor mīsit hominēs
quī cognōscerent quae esset nātūra montis. 7. Prō hīs ōrātor verba fēcit et
rogāvit cūr cōnsulēs nāvīs ad plēnem summī perīculī locum mittere vellent.
8. Lēgātīs convocātīs dēmōnstrāvit quid fierī vellet. 9. Nūntius referēbat
quid in Gallōrum conciliō dē armīs trādendīs dictum esset. 10. Moneō nē in
reliquum tempus peditēs et equitēs trāns flūmen dūcās.
II. 1. What hill did they seize? I see what hill they seized. 2. Who has
inflicted these injuries upon our dependents? 3. They asked who had
inflicted those injuries upon their dependents. 4. Whither did you go about
the third watch? You know whither I went. 5. At what time did the boys
return home? I will ask at what time the boys returned home.
Reading Selection
 LESSON LXXV
VOCABULARY REVIEW · THE DATIVE OF PURPOSE, OR END FOR WHICH

435. Review the word lists in §§ 521, 522.

436. Observe the following sentences:
1. Explōrātōrēs locum castrīs dēlēgērunt, the scouts chose a place for
a camp.
2. Hoc erat magnō impedīmentō Gallīs, this was (for) a great
hindrance to the Gauls.
3. Duās legiōnēs praesidiō castrīs relīquit, he left two legions as (lit.
for) a guard to the camp.
In each of these sentences we find a dative expressing the purpose or end
for which something is intended or for which it serves. These datives are
castrīs, impedīmentō, and praesidiō. In the second and third sentences we
find a second dative expressing the person or thing affected (Gallīs and
castrīs). As you notice, these are true datives, covering the relations of for
which and to which. (Cf. § 43.)
437. Rule. Dative of Purpose or End. The dative is used to denote the
purpose or end for which, often with another dative denoting the person or
thing affected.
438. IDIOMS

cōnsilium omittere, to give up a plan

locum castrīs dēligere, to choose a place for a camp
alicui magnō ūsuī esse, to be of great advantage to some one
(lit. for great advantage to some one)
439. EXERCISES

I. 1. Rogāvit cūr illae cōpiae relictae essent. Respondērunt illās cōpiās esse
praesidiō castrīs. 2. Caesar mīsit explōrātōrēs ad locum dēligendum castrīs.
3. Quisque exīstimāvit ipsum nōmen Caesaris magnō terrōrī barbarīs
futūrum esse. 4. Prīmā lūce īdem exercitus proelium ācre commīsit, sed
gravia suōrum vulnera magnae cūrae imperātōrī erant. 5. Rēx respondit
amīcitiam populī Rōmānī sibi ōrnāmentō et praesidiō dēbēre esse. 6. Quis
praeerat equitātuī quem auxiliō Caesarī sociī mīserant? 7. Aliquibus rēs
secundae sunt summae calamitātī et rēs adversae sunt mīrō ūsuī. 8. Gallīs
magnō ad pugnam erat impedīmentō quod equitātus ā dextrō cornū
premēbat. 9. Memoria prīstinae virtūtis nōn minus quam metus hostium erat
nostrīs magnō ūsuī. 10. Tam dēnsa erat silva ut prōgredī nōn possent.
II. 1. I advise you 1to give up the plan 2of making war upon the brave
Gauls. 2. Do you know 3where the cavalry has chosen a place for a camp?
3. The fear of the enemy will be of great advantage to you. 4. Cæsar left
three cohorts as (for) a guard to the baggage. 5. In winter the waves of the
lake are so great 4that they are (for) a great hindrance to ships. 6. Cæsar
inflicted severe 5 punishment on those who burned the public buildings.
1. Subjunctive of purpose. (Cf. § 366.)
2. Express by the genitive of the gerundive.
3. Indirect question.
4. A clause of result.
5. gravis, -e.

Reading Selection
 LESSON LXXVI
VOCABULARY REVIEW · THE GENITIVE AND ABLATIVE OF QUALITY OR
DESCRIPTION

440. Review the word lists in §§ 524, 525.

441. Observe the English sentences
(1) A man of great courage, or (2) A man with great courage
(3) A forest of tall trees, or (4) A forest with tall trees
Each of these sentences contains a phrase of quality or description. In the
first two a man is described; in the last two a forest. The descriptive phrases
are introduced by the prepositions of and with.
In Latin the expression of quality or description is very similar.
The prepositions of and with suggest the genitive and the ablative
respectively, and we translate the sentences above
(1) Vir magnae virtūtis, or (2) Vir magnā virtūte
(3) Silva altārum arborum, or (4) Silva altīs arboribus
There is, however, one important difference between the Latin and the
English. In English we may say, for example, a man of courage, using the
descriptive phrase without an adjective modifier. In Latin, however, an
adjective modifier must always be used, as above.
a. Latin makes a distinction between the use of the two cases in that
numerical descriptions of measure are in the genitive and descriptions
of physical characteristics are in the ablative. Other descriptive
phrases may be in either case.
442. EXAMPLES

1. Fossa duodecim pedum, a ditch of twelve feet.

 2. Homō magnīs pedibus et parvō capite, a man with big feet
and a small head.
3. Rēx erat vir summā audāciā or rēx erat vir summae
audāciae, the king was a man of the greatest boldness.
443. Rule. Genitive of Description. Numerical descriptions of measure are
expressed by the genitive with a modifying adjective.
444. Rule. Ablative of Description. Descriptions of physical
characteristics are expressed by the ablative with a modifying adjective.
445. Rule. Genitive or Ablative of Description. Descriptions involving
neither numerical statements nor physical characteristics may be expressed
by either the genitive or the ablative with a modifying adjective.
446. IDIOMS

Helvētiīs in animō est, the Helvetii intend, (lit. it is in mind to

the Helvetians)
in mātrimōnium dare, to give in marriage
nihil posse, to have no power
fossam perdūcere, to construct a ditch (lit. to lead a ditch
through)
447. EXERCISES

I. 1. Mīlitēs fossam decem pedum per eōrum fīnīs perdūxērunt. 2. Prīnceps

Helvētiōrum, vir summae audāciae, prīncipibus gentium fīnitimārum
sorōrēs in mātrimōnium dedit. 3. Eōrum amīcitiam cōnfīrmāre voluit quō
facilius Rōmānīs bellum īnferret. 4. Germanī et Gallī nōn erant eiusdem
gentis. 5. Omnēs ferē Germānī erant magnīs corporum vīribus. 1 6. Gallī qui
oppidum fortiter dēfendēbant saxa ingentis magnitūdinis dē mūrō iaciēbant.
7. Cum Caesar ab explōrātōribus quaereret quī illud oppidum incolerent,
explōrātōrēs respondērunt eōs esse homines summā virtūte et magnō
cōnsiliō. 8. Moenia vīgintī pedum ā sinistrā parte, et ā dextrā parte flūmen
magnae altitūdinis oppidum dēfendēbant. 9. Cum Caesar in Galliam
pervēnisset, erat rūmor Helvētiīs in animō esse iter per prōvinciam
Rōmānam facere. 10. Caesar, ut eōs ab fīnibus Rōmānis prohibēret,
mūnītiōnem 2multa mīlia passuum longam fēcit.
II. 1. Cæsar was a general of much wisdom and great boldness, and very
skillful in the art of war. 2. The Germans were of great size, and thought
that the Romans had no power. 3. Men of the highest courage were left in
the camp as (for) a guard to the baggage. 4. The king’s daughter, who was
given in marriage to the chief of a neighboring state, was a woman of very
beautiful appearance. 5. The soldiers will construct a ditch of nine feet
around the camp. 6. A river of great width was between us and the enemy.
1. From vīs. (Cf. § 468.)
2. Genitives and ablatives of description are adjective phrases. When we use an adverbial phrase to
tell how long or how high or how deep anything is, we must use the accusative of extent. (Cf. § 336.)
For example, in the sentence above multa mīlia passuum is an adverbial phrase (accusative of
extent) modifying longam. If we should omit longam and say a fortification of many miles, the
genitive of description (an adjective phrase) modifying mūnītiōnem would be used, as mūnītiōnem
multōrum mīlium passuum.

Reading Selection
GLADII
 LESSON LXXVII
REVIEW OF AGREEMENT, AND OF THE GENITIVE, DATIVE, AND ACCUSATIVE

448. There are four agreements:

1. That of the predicate noun or of the appositive with the noun to which it
belongs (§§ 76, 81).
2. That of the adjective, adjective pronoun, or participle with its noun (§
65).
3. That of a verb with its subject (§ 28).
4. That of a relative pronoun with its antecedent (§ 224).
449. The relation expressed by the genitive is, in general, denoted in
English by the preposition of. It is used to express
a. As attributive (§ 38).
1. Possession
b. In the predicate (§ 409).
2. The whole of which a part is taken (partitive genitive) (§ 331).
3. Quality or description (§§ 443, 445).
450. The relation expressed by the dative is, in general, denoted in English
by the prepositions to or for when they do not imply motion through space.
It is used to express
a. With intransitive verbs and with transitive verbs in
1. The connection with a direct object in the accusative (§ 45).
indirect b. With special intransitive verbs (§ 154).
object c. With verbs compounded with ad, ante, con, dē, in,
inter, ob, post, prae, prō, sub, super (§ 426).
2. The object to which the quality of an adjective is directed (§ 143).
3. The purpose, or end for which, often with a second dative denoting
the person or thing affected (§ 437).
451. The accusative case corresponds, in general, to the English objective.
It is used to express
1. The direct object of a transitive verb (§ 37).
2. The predicate accusative together with the direct object after verbs of
making, choosing, falling, showing, and the like (§ 392).
3. The subject of the infinitive (§ 214).
4. The object of prepositions that do not govern the ablative (§ 340).
5. The duration of time and the extent of space (§ 336).
6. The place to which (§§ 263, 266).
452. EXERCISES

I. 1. Mīlitēs quōs vīdimus dīxērunt imperium bellī esse Caesaris

imperātōris. 2. Helvētiī statuērunt quam 1 maximum numerum equōrum et
carrōrum cōgere. 3. Tōtīus Galliae Helvētiī plūrimum valuērunt. 4. Multās
hōrās ācriter pugnātum est neque quisquam poterat vidēre hostem
fugientem. 5. Virī summae virtūtis hostīs decem mīlia passuum īnsecūtī
sunt. 6. Caesar populō Rōmānō persuāsit ut sē cōnsulem creāret. 7. Victōria
exercitūs erat semper imperātōrī grātissima. 8. Trīduum iter fēcērunt et
Genāvam, in oppidum 2 hostium, pervēnērunt. 9. Caesar audīvit Germānōs
bellum Gallīs intulisse. 10. Magnō ūsuī mīlitibus Caesaris erat quod
priōribus proeliīs sēsē exercuerant.
II. 1. One 3 of the king’s sons and many of his men were captured. 2. There
was no one who wished 4 to appoint her queen. 3. The grain supply was
always a care (for a care) to Cæsar, the general. 4. I think that the camp is
ten miles distant. 5. We marched for three hours through a very dense
forest. 6. The plan 5of making war upon the allies was not pleasing to the
king. 7. When he came to the hill he fortified it 6by a twelve-foot wall.
1. What is the force of quam with superlatives?
2. urbs or oppidum, appositive to a name of a town, takes a preposition.
3. What construction is used with numerals in preference to the partitive genitive?
4. What mood? (Cf. § 390.)
5. Use the gerund or gerundive.
6. Latin, by a wall of twelve feet.
 LESSON LXXVIII
REVIEW OF THE ABLATIVE

453. The relations of the ablative are, in general, expressed in English by

the prepositions with (or by), from (or by), and in (or at). The constructions
growing out of these meanings are
I. Ablative rendered with (or by):
1. Cause (§ 102)
2. Means (§ 103)
3. Accompaniment (§ 104)
4. Manner (§ 105)
5. Measure of difference (§ 317) 6. With a participle (ablative
absolute) (§ 381) 7. Description or quality (§§ 444, 445) 8.
Specification (§ 398)
II. Ablative rendered from (or by):
1. Place from which (§§ 179, 264) 2. Ablative of separation (§
180) 3. Personal agent with a passive verb (§ 181) 4.
Comparison without quam (§ 309)
III. Ablative rendered in (or at):
1. Place at or in which (§§ 265, 266) 2. Time when or within
which (§ 275)
454. EXERCISES

I. 1. Gallī locīs superiōribus occupātīs itinere exercitum prohibēre cōnantur.

2. Omnēs oppidānī ex oppidō ēgressī salūtem fugā petere incēpērunt. 3.
Caesar docet sē mīlitum vītam suā salūte habēre multō cāriōrem. 4. Cum
celerius omnium opīniōne pervēnisset, hostēs ad eum obsidēs mīsērunt 5.
Vīcus in valle positus montibus altissimīs undique continētur. 6. Plūrimum
inter Gallōs haec gēns et virtūte et hominum numerō valēbat. 7. Secundā
vigiliā nūllō certō ōrdine neque imperiō ē castrīs ēgressī sunt. 8. Duābus
legiōnibus Genāvae relictīs, proximō diē cum reliquīs domum profectus est.
9. Erant itinera duo quibus itineribus Helvētiī domō exīre possent. 10. Rēx
erat summā audāciā et magnā apud populum potentiā. 11. Gallī timōre
servitūtis commōtī bellum parābant. 12. Caesar monet lēgātōs ut contineant
militēs, nē studiō pugnandī aut spē praedae longius 1 prōgrediantur. 13.
Bellum ācerrimum ā Caesare in Gallōs gestum est.
II. 1. The lieutenant after having seized the mountain restrained his (men)
from battle. 2. All the Gauls differ from each other in laws. 3. This tribe is
much braver than the rest. 4. This road is 2ten miles shorter than that. 5. In
summer Cæsar carried on war in Gaul, in winter he returned to Italy. 6. At
midnight the general set out from the camp with three legions. 7. I fear that
you cannot protect 3 yourself from these enemies. 8. 4After this battle was
finished peace was made by all the Gauls.
1. longius, too far. (Cf. § 305.) 2. Latin, by ten thousands of paces.
3. dēfendere.
4. Ablative absolute.
 LESSON LXXIX
REVIEW OF THE GERUND AND GERUNDIVE, THE INFINITIVE, AND THE
SUBJUNCTIVE

455. The gerund is a verbal noun and is used only in the genitive, dative,
accusative, and ablative singular. The constructions of these cases are in
general the same as those of other nouns (§§ 402; 406.1).
456. The gerundive is a verbal adjective and must be used instead of gerund
+ object, excepting in the genitive and in the ablative without a preposition.
Even in these instances the gerundive construction is more usual (§ 406.2).
457. The infinitive is used:
I. As in English.
a. As subject or predicate nominative (§ 216).
b. To complete the predicate with verbs of incomplete predication
(complementary infinitive) (§ 215).
c. As object with subject accusative after verbs of wishing,
commanding, forbidding, and the like (§ 213).
II. In the principal sentence of an indirect statement after verbs of saying
and mental action. The subject is in the accusative (§§ 416, 418, 419).
458. The subjunctive is used:
1. To denote purpose (§§ 349, 366, 372).
2. To denote consequence or result (§§ 385, 386).
3. In relative clauses of characteristic or description (§ 390).
4. In cum clauses of time, cause, and concession (§ 396).
5. In indirect questions (§ 432).
459. EXERCISES
I. 1. Caesar, cum pervēnisset, militēs hortābātur nē cōnsilium oppidī
capiendi omitterent. 2. Rēx, castrīs prope oppidum positīs, mīsit
explōrātōrēs quī cognōscerent ubi exercitus Rōmanus esset. 3. Nēmo
relinquēbātur quī arma ferre posset. 4. Nūntiī vīdērunt ingentem armōrum
multitudinem dē mūrō in fossani iactam esse. 5. Dux suōs trānsīre flūmen
iussit. Trānsīre autem hoc flūmen erat difficillimum. 6. Rōmānī cum hanc
calamitātem molestē ferrant, tamen terga vertere recūsāvērunt. 7. Hōc
rūmōre audītō, tantus terror omnium animōs occupāvit ut nē fortissimī
quidem proelium committere vellent. 8. Erant quī putārent tempus annī
idōneum nōn esse itinerī faciendō. 9. Tam ācriter ab utraque parte
pugnābātur ut multa mīlia hominum occīderentur. 10. Quid timēs? Timeō nē
Rōmānīs in animō sit tōtam Galliam superāre et nōbīs iniūriās inferre.
II. 1. Do you not see who is standing on the wall? 2. We hear that the plan
of taking the town has been given up. 3. Since the Germans thought that the
Romans could not cross the Rhine, Cæsar ordered a bridge to be made. 4.
When the bridge was finished, the savages were so terrified that they hid
themselves. 5. They feared that Cæsar would pursue them. 6. Cæsar 1asked
the traders what the size of the island was. 7. The traders advised him not
2to cross the sea. 8. He sent scouts 3to choose a place for a camp.

1. quaerere ab.
2. Not infinitive.
3. Use the gerundive with ad.
 READING MATTER

INTRODUCTORY SUGGESTIONS

How to Translate. You have already had considerable practice in

translating simple Latin, and have learned that the guide to the meaning lies
in the endings of the words. If these are neglected, no skill can make sense
of the Latin. If they are carefully noted and accurately translated, not many
difficulties remain. Observe the following suggestions:
1. Read the Latin sentence through to the end, noting endings of nouns,
adjectives, verbs, etc.
2. Read it again and see if any of the words you know are nominatives or
accusatives. This will often give you what may be called the backbone of
the sentence; that is, subject, verb, and object.
3. Look up the words you do not know, and determine their use in the
sentence from their endings.
4. If you cannot yet translate the sentence, put down the English meanings
of all the words in the same order as the Latin words. You will then
generally see through the meaning of the sentence.
5. Be careful to
a. Translate adjectives with the nouns to which they belong.
b. Translate together prepositions and the nouns which they govern.
c. Translate adverbs with the words that they modify.
d. Make sense. If you do not make sense, you have made a mistake.
One mistake will spoil a whole sentence.
6. When the sentence is correctly translated, read the Latin over again, and
try to understand it as Latin, without thinking of the English translation.
The Parts of a Sentence. You will now meet somewhat longer sentences
than you have had before. To assist in translating them, remember, first of
all, that every sentence conveys a meaning and either tells us something,
asks a question, or gives a command. Every sentence must have a subject
and a verb, and the verb may always have an adverb, and, if transitive, will
have a direct object.
However long a sentence is, you will usually be able to recognize its
subject, verb, and object or predicate complement without any difficulty.
These will give you the leading thought, and they must never be lost sight
of while making out the rest of the sentence. The chief difficulty in
translating arises from the fact that instead of a single adjective, adverb, or
noun, we often have a phrase or a clause taking the place of one of these;
for Latin, like English, has adjective, adverbial, and substantive clauses and
phrases. For example, in the sentence The idle boy does not study, the word
idle is an adjective. In The boy wasting his time does not study, the words
wasting his time form an adjective phrase modifying boy. In the sentence
The boy who wastes his time does not study, the words who wastes his time
form an adjective clause modifying boy, and the sentence is complex. These
sentences would show the same structure in Latin.
In translating, it is important to keep the parts of a phrase and the parts of a
clause together and not let them become confused with the principal
sentence. To distinguish between the subordinate clauses and the principal
sentence is of the first importance, and is not difficult if you remember that
a clause regularly contains a word that marks it as a clause and that this
word usually stands first. These words join clauses to the words they
depend on, and are called subordinate conjunctions. They are not very
numerous, and you will soon learn to recognize them. In Latin they are the
equivalents for such words as when, while, since, because, if, before, after,
though, in order that, that, etc. Form the habit of memorizing the Latin
subordinate conjunctions as you meet them, and of noting carefully the
mood of the verb in the clauses which they introduce.

HERCULES

THE LABORS OF HERCULES

 Hercules, a Greek hero celebrated for his great strength, was pursued
throughout his life by the hatred of Juno. While yet an infant he
strangled some serpents sent by the goddess to destroy him. During his
boyhood and youth he performed various marvelous feats of strength,
and on reaching manhood he succeeded in delivering the Thebans
from the oppression of the Minyæ. In a fit of madness, sent upon him
by Juno, he slew his own children; and, on consulting the Delphic
oracle as to how he should cleanse himself from this crime, he was
ordered to submit himself for twelve years to Eurystheus, king of
Tiryns, and to perform whatever tasks were appointed him. Hercules
obeyed the oracle, and during the twelve years of his servitude
accomplished twelve extraordinary feats known as the Labors of
Hercules. His death was caused, unintentionally, by his wife Deiani´ra.
Hercules had shot with his poisoned arrows a centaur named Nessus,
who had insulted Deianira. Nessus, before he died, gave some of his
blood to Deianira, and told her it would act as a charm to secure her
husband’s love. Some time after, Deianira, wishing to try the charm,
soaked one of her husband’s garments in the blood, not knowing that it
was poisoned. Hercules put on the robe, and, after suffering terrible
torments, died, or was carried off by his father Jupiter.

LIII. 1 THE INFANT HERCULES AND THE SERPENTS

Dī 2 grave supplicium sūmmit de malīs, sed iī

quī lēgibus 3 deōrum pārent, etiam post mortem
cūrantur. Illa vīta dīs 2 erat grātissima quae
hominibus miserīs ūtilissima fuerat. Omnium
autem praemiōrum summum erat immortālitās.
Illud praemium Herculī datum est.
Herculis pater fuit Iuppiter, māter Alcmēna, et
omnium hominum validissimus fuisse dīcitur.
Sed Iūnō, rēgīna deōrum, eum, adhūc īnfantem,
interficere studēbat; nam eī 4 et 5 Herculēs et
Alcmēna erant invīsī. Itaque mīsit duās
serpentīs, utramque saevissimam, quae mediā HERCULES ET SERPENTES
nocte domum 6 Alcmēnae vēnērunt. Ibi
Herculēs, cum frātre suō, nōn in lectulō sed in scūtō ingentī dormiēbat. Iam
audācēs serpentēs adpropinquāverant, iam scūtum movēbant. Tum frāter,
terrōre commōtus, magnā vōce mātrem vocāvit, sed Herculēs ipse, fortior
quam frāter, statim ingentīs serpentīs manibus suīs rapuit et interfēcit.
1. This number refers to the lesson after which the selection may be read.
2. Dī and dīs are from deus. Cf. § 468.
3. lēgibus, § 501. 14.
4. eī, to her, referring to Juno.
5. et ... et, both ... and.
6. domum, § 501. 20.

LIV. HERCULES CONQUERS THE MINYÆ

Herculēs ā puerō 1 corpus suum gravissimīs et difficillimīs labōribus

exercēbat et hōc modō vīrēs 2 suās cōnfirmāvit. Iam adulēscēns Thēbīs 3
habitābat. Ibi Creōn quīdam erat rēx. Minyae, gēns validissima, erant
fīnitimī Thēbānīs, et, quia ōlim Thēbānōs vīcerant, quotannīs lēgātōs
mittēbant et vectīgal postulābant. Herculēs autem cōnstituit cīvīs suōs hōc
vectīgālī līberāre et dixit rēgī, “Dā mihi exercitum tuum et ego hōs superbōs
hostīs superābō.” Hanc condiciōnem rēx nōn recūsāvit, et Herculēs nūntiōs
in omnīs partis dīmīsit et cōpiās coēgit. 4 Tum tempore opportūnissimō
proelium cum Minyīs commīsit. Diū pugnātum est, sed dēnique illī
impetum Thēbānōrum sustinēre nōn potuērunt et terga vertērunt fugamque
cēpērunt.
1. ā puerō, from boyhood.
2. virēs, from vīs. Cf. § 468.
3. Thēbīs, § 501. 36. 1.
4. coēgit, from cōgō.

HE COMMITS A CRIME AND GOES TO THE DELPHIAN ORACLE TO SEEK EXPIATION

Post hoc proelium Creōn rēx, tantā victōriā laetus, fīliam suam Herculī in
mātrimōnium dedit. Thēbīs Herculēs cum uxōre suā diū vīvēbat et ab
omnibus magnopere amābātur; sed post multōs annōs subitō 1in furōrem
incidit et ipse suā manū līberōs suōs interfēcit. Post breve tempus 2ad
sānitātem reductus tantum scelus expiāre cupiēbat et cōnstituit ad ōrāculum
Delphicum iter facere. Hoc autem ōrāculum erat omnium clārissimum. Ibi
sedēbat fēmina quaedam quae Pȳthia appellābātur. Ea cōnsilium dabat iīs
quī ad ōrāculum veniēbant.
1. in furōrem incidit, went mad.
2. ad sānitātem reductus, lit. led back to sanity. What in good English?

HERCULES LEONEM SUPERAT

LV. HERCULES BECOMES SUBJECT TO EURYSTHEUS 1 · HE STRANGLES THE NEME´AN

LION

Itaque Herculēs Pȳthiae tōtam rem dēmonstrāvit nec scelus suum abdidit.
Ubi iam Herculēs fīnem fēcit, Pȳthia iussit eum ad urbem Tīryntha 2
discēdere et ibi rēgī Eurystheō sēsē committere. Quae 3 ubi audīvit,
Herculēs ad illam urbem statim contendit et Eurystheō sē in servitūtem
trādidit et dīxit, “Quid prīmum, Ō rēx, mē facere iubēs?” Eurystheus, quī
perterrēbātur vī et corpore ingentī Herculis et eum occidī 4 studēbat, ita
respondit: “Audī, Herculēs! Multa mira 5 nārrantur dē leōne saevissimō quī
hōc tempore in valle Nemaeā omnia vāstat. Iubeō tē, virōrum omnium
fortissimum, illō mōnstrō hominēs līberāre.” Haec verba Herculī maximē
placuērunt. “Properābo,” inquit, “et parēbō imperiō 6 tuō.” Tum in silvās in
quibus leō habitābat statim iter fēcit. Mox feram vīdit et plūrīs impetūs
fēcit; frūstrā tamen, quod neque sagittīs neque ūllō aliō tēlō mōnstrum
vulnerāre potuit. Dēnique Herculēs saevum leōnem suīs ingentibus
bracchiīs rapuit et faucīs eius omnibus vīribus compressit. Hōc modō brevī
tempore eum interfēcit. Tum corpus leōnis ad oppidum in umerīs reportāvit
et pellem posteā prō 7 veste gerēbat. Omnēs autem quō eam regiōnem
incolēbant, ubi fāmam dē morte leōnis ingentis accēpērunt, erant laetissimī
et Herculem laudābant verbīs amplissimīs.
1. Eu-rys´theus (pronounced U-ris´thūs) was king of Tī´ryns, a Grecian city, whose foundation goes
back to prehistoric times.
2. Tīryntha, the acc. case of Tīryns, a Greek noun.
3. Quae, obj. of audīvit. It is placed first to make a close connection with the preceding sentence.
This is called a connecting relative.
4. occīdī, pres. pass. infin.
5. mīra, marvelous things, the adj. being used as a noun. Cf. omnia, in the next line.
6. imperiō, § 501. 14.
7. prō, for, instead of.

LVI. SLAYING THE LERNE´AN HYDRA

Deinde Herculēs ab Eurystheō iussus est Hydram occīdere. Itaque cum

amīcō Iolāō 1 contendit ad palūdem Lernaeam ubi Hydra incolēbat. Hoc
autem mōnstrum erat serpēns ingēns quae novem capita habēbat. Mox is
mōnstrum repperit et summō 2 cum perīculō collum eius sinistrā manū
rapuit et tenuit. Tum dextrā manū capita novem abscīdere incēpit, sed
frūstrā labōrābat, quod quotiēns hoc fēcerat totiēns alia nova capita vidēbat.
Quod 3 ubi vīdit, statuit capita ignī cremāre. Hōc modō octō capita dēlēvit,
sed extrēmum caput vulnerārī nōn potuit, quod erat immortāle. Itaque illud
sub ingentī saxō Herculēs posuit et ita victōriam reportāvit.
1. Iolāō, abl. of I-o-lā´us, the hero’s best friend.
2. Note the emphatic position of this adjective.
3. Quod ubi, when he saw this, another instance of the connecting relative. Cf. p. 199, l. 3.

LVII. THE ARCADIAN STAG AND THE ERYMANTHIAN BOAR

Postquam Eurystheō mors Hydrae nuntiata est, summus terror animum eius
occupavit. Itaque iussit Herculem capere et ad sē reportāre cervum
quendam; nam minimē cupīvit tantum virum in rēgnō suō tenēre. Hie autem
cervus dīcēbātur aurea cornua et pedēs multō 1 celeriōrēs ventō 2 habēre.
Prīmum Herculēs vestīgia animālis petīvit, deinde, ubi cervum ipsum vīdit,
omnibus vīribus currere incēpit. Per plūrimōs diēs contendit nec noctū
cessāvit. Dēnique postquam per tōtum annum cucurrerat—ita dīcitur—
cervum iam dēfessum cēpit et ad Eurystheum portāvit.
Tum vērō iussus est Herculēs aprum quendam capere quī illō tempore agrōs
Erymanthiōs vāstābat et hominēs illīus locī magnopere perterrēbat.
Herculēs laetē negōtium suscēpit et in Arcadiam celeriter sē recēpit. Ibi
mox aprum repperit. Ille autem; simul atque Herculem vīdit, statim quam 3
celerrimē fūgit et metū perterritus in fossam altam sēsē abdidit. Herculēs
tamen summā cum difficultāte eum extrāxit, nec aper ūllō modō sēsē
līberāre potuit, et vīvus ad Eurystheum portātus est.
1. multō, § 501. 27.
2. ventō, § 501. 34.
3. quam. What is the force of quam with a superlative?

LVIII. HERCULES CLEANS THE AUGE´AN STABLES AND KILLS THE STYMPHALIAN
BIRDS

Deinde Eurystheus Herculī hunc labōrem multō graviōrem imperāvit.

Augēās 1 quīdam, quī illō tempore rēgnum Ēlidis 2 obtinēbat, tria mīlia
boum 3 habēbat. Hī 4 ingentī stabulō continēbantur. Hoc stabulum, quod per
trīgintā annōs nōn pūrgātum erat, Herculēs intrā spatium ūnīus diēī pūrgāre
iussus est. llle negōtium alacriter suscēpit, et prīmum labōre gravissimō
maximam fossam fōdit per quam flūminis aquam dē montibus ad mūrum
stabulī dūxit. Tum partem parvam mūrī dēlēvit et aquam in stabulum
immīsit. Hōc modō fīnm operis fēcit ūnō diē facillimē.
Post paucōs diēs Herculēs ad oppidum Stymphālum iter fēcit; nam
Eurystheus iusserat eum avis Stymphālidēs occīdere. Hae avēs rōstra ferrea
habēbant et hominēs miserōs dēvorābant. Ille, postquam ad locum pervēnit,
lacum vīdit in quō avēs incolēbant. Nūllō tamen modō Herculēs avibus
adpropinquāre potuit; lacus enim nōn ex aquā sed ē līmō cōnstitit. 5 Dēnique
autem avēs 6dē aliquā causā perterritae in aurās volāvērunt et magna pars
eārum sagittīs Herculis occīsa est.
1. Augēās, pronounced in English Aw-jē´as.
2. Ēlidis, gen. case of Ēlis, a district of Greece.
3. boum, gen. plur. of bōs. For construction see § 501. 11.
4. ingentī stabulō, abl. of means, but in our idiom we should say in a huge stable.
5. cōnstitit, from consto.
6. dē aliquā causā perterritae, frightened for some reason.

HERCULES ET TAURUS

LIX. HERCULES CAPTURES THE CRETAN BULL AND CARRIES HIM LIVING TO
EURYSTHEUS

Tum Eurystheus iussit Herculem portāre vīvum ex īnsulā Crētā taurum

quendam saevissimum. Ille igitur nāvem cōnscendit—nam ventus erat
idōneus—atque statim solvit. Postquam trīduum nāvigavit, incolumis
īnsulae adpropinquāvit. Deinde, postquam omnia parāta sunt, contendit ad
eam regiōnem quam taurus vexābat. Mox taurum vīdit ac sine ūllō metū
cornua eius corripuit. Tum ingentī labōre mōnstrum ad nāvem trāxit atque
cum hāc praedā ex īnsulā discessit.

THE FLESH-EATING HORSES OF DIOME´DES

Postquam ex īnsulā Crētā domum pervēnit, Hercules ab Eurystheō in

Thrāciam missus est. Ibi Diomēdēs quīdam, vir saevissimus, rēgnum
obtinēbat et omnīs ā fīnibus suīs prohibēbat. Herculēs iussus erat equōs
Diomedis rapere et ad Eurystheum dūcere. Hī autem equī hominēs
miserrimōs dēvorābant dē quibus rēx supplicium sūmere cupiēbat. Herculēs
ubi pervēnit, prīmum equōs ā rēge postulāvit, sed rēx eōs dēdere recūsāvit.
Deinde ille īrā commōtus rēgem occīdit et corpus eius equīs trādidit. Itaque
is quī anteā multōs necāverat, ipse eōdem suppliciō necātus est. Et equī,
nūper saevissima animālia, postquam dominī suī corpus dēvorāvērunt,
mānsuētī erant.

LX. THE BELT OF HIPPOL´YTE, QUEEN OF THE AMAZONS

Gēns Amāzonum 1 dīcitur 2 omnīnō ex mulieribus fuisse. Hae cum virīs

proelium committere nōn verēbantur. Hippolytē, Amāzonum rēgīna,
balteum habuit pulcherrimum. Hunc balteum possidēre fīlia Eurystheī
vehementer cupiēbat. Itaque Eurystheus iussit Herculem impetum in
Amāzonēs facere. Ille multīs cum cōpiīs nāvem cōnscendīt et paucis diēbus
in Amāzonum fīnīs pervēnit, ac balteum postulāvit. Eum trādere ipsa
Hipporytē quidem cupīvit; reliquīs tamen Amazonibus 3 persuādēre nōn
potuit. Postrīdiē Herculēs proelium commīsit. Multās hōrās utrimque quam
fortissimē pugnātum est Dēnique tamen mulieres terga vertērunt et fugā
salūtem petiērunt. Multae autem captae sunt, in quō numerō erat ipsa
Hippolytē. Herculēs postquam balteum accēpit, omnibus captīvīs lībertātem
dedit.
1. A fabled tribe of warlike women living in Asia Minor.
2. omnīnō, etc., to have consisted entirely of women.
3. Amāzonibus, § 501. 14.

THE DESCENT TO HADES AND THE DOG CER´BERUS

Iamque ūnus modo ē duodecim labōribus relinquēbātur sed inter omnīs hic
erat difficillimus. Iussus est enim canem Cerberum 4 ex Orcō in lūcem
trahere. Ex Orcō autem nēmō anteā reverterat. Praetereā Cerberus erat
mōnstrum maximē horribile et tria capita habēbat. Herculēs postquam
imperia Eurystheī accēpit, statim profectus est et in Orcum dēscendit. Ibi
vērō nōn sine summō periculō Cerberum manibus rapuit et ingentī cum
labōre ex Orcō in lūcem et adurbem Eurystheī trāxit.
Sic duodecim laborēs illī 5 intrā duodecim annōs cōnfectī sunt. Dēmum post
longam vītam Herculēs ā deīs receptus est et Iuppiter fīliō suō dedit
immortālitātem.
4. The dog Cerberus guarded the gate of Orcus, the abode of the dead.
5. illī, those famous.

HERCULES ET CERBERUS

P. CORNELIUS LENTULUS: THE STORY OF A ROMAN BOY 1

LXI. PUBLIUS IS BORN NEAR POMPE´II

P. Cornēlius Lentulus, 2 adulēscēns Rōmānus, amplissimā familiā 3 nātus

est; nam pater eius, Mārcus, erat dux perītissimus, cuius virtūte 4 et cōnsiliō
multae victōriae reportātae erant; atque mater eius, lūlia, ā clārissimīs
maiōribus orta est. Nōn vērō in urbe sed rūrī 5 Pūblius nātus est, et cum
mātre habitābat in vīllā quae in maris lītore et sub radīcibus magnī montis
sita erat. Mōns autem erat Vesuvius et parva urbs Pompēiī octō mīlia 6
passuum 7 aberat. In Italiā antīquā erant plūrimae quidem villae et pulchrae,
sed inter hās omnīs nūlla erat pulchrior quam villa Mārcī Iūliaeque. Frōns
vīllae mūrō a maris fluctibus mūniēbātur. Hinc mare et lītora et īnsulae
longē lātēque cōnspicī 8 ac saepe nāvēs longae et onerāriae poterant. Ā tergō
et ab utrōque latere agrī ferācissimī patēbant. Undique erat magna variōrum
flōrum cōpia et multa ingentium arborum genera quae aestāte 9 umbram
dēfessīs agricolīs grātissimam adferēbant. Praetereā erant 1 in agrīs
stabulīsque multa animālium genera, nōn sōlum equī et bovēs sed etiam
rārae avēs. Etiam erat 10 magna piscīna plēna piscium; nam Rōmānī piscīs
dīligenter colēbant.

PUERI ROMANI

1. This story is fiction with certain historical facts in Cæsar’s career as a setting. However, the events
chronicled might have happened, and no doubt did happen to many a Roman youth.
2. A Roman had three names, as, Pūblius (given name), Cornēlius (name of the gēns or clan),
Lentulus (family name).
3. Abl. of source, which is akin to the abl. of separation (§ 501. 32).
4. virtūte, § 501. 24.
5. rūrī, § 501. 36. 1.
6. mīlia, § 501. 21.
7. passuum, § 501. 11.
8. cōnspicī, infin. with poterant, § 215. Consult the map of Italy for the approximate location of the
villa.
9. aestāte, § 501. 35.
10. How are the forms of sum translated when they precede the subject?

LXII. HIS LIFE ON THE FARM

Huius vīllae Dāvus, servus Mārcī, est vīlicus 1 et cum Lesbiā uxōre omnia
cūrat. Vīlicus et uxor in casā humilī, mediīs in agrīs sitā, habitant. Ā prīmā
lūce ūsque ad vesperum sē 2 gravibus labōribus exercent ut omnī rēs bene
gerant. 3 Plūrima enim sunt officia Dāvī et Lesbiae. Vīlicus servōs regit nē
tardī sint 4; mittit aliōs quī agrōs arent, 4 aliōs quī hortōs inrigent, 4 et opera
in 5 tōtum diem impōnit. Lesbia autem omnibus vestīmenta parat, cibum
coquit, pānem facit.
Nōn longē ab hōrum casā et in summō colle situm surgēbat domicilium
ipsīus dominī dominaeque amplissimum. Ibi plūrīs annōs 6 Pūblius cum
mātre vītam fēlīcem agēbat; nam pater
eius, Mārcus, in terrīs longinquīs gravia
reī pūblicae bella gerēbat nec domum 7
revertī poterat. Neque puerō quidem
molestum est rūrī 8 vīvere. Eum multae
rēs dēlectant. Magnopere amat silvās,
agrōs, equōs, bovēs, gallīnās, avīs,
reliquaque animālia. Saepe plūrīs hōrās 9
ad mare sedet quō 9 melius fluctūs et
nāvīs spectet. Nec omnīnō sine
comitibus erat, quod Lȳdia, Dāvī fīlia, CASA ROMANA

quae erat eiusdem aetātis, cum eō adhūc

infante lūdēbat, inter quōs cum annīs
amīcitia crēscēbat. Lȳdia nūllum alium ducem dēligēbat et Pūblius ab
puellae latere rārō discēdēbat. Itaque sub clārō Italiae sōle Pūblius et Lȳdia,
amīcī fidēlissimī, per campōs collīsque cotīdiē vagābantur. Modo in silvā
fīnitimā lūdebant ubi Pūblius sagittīs 10 celeribus avis dēiciēbat et Lȳdia
corōnīs variōrum flōrum comās suās ōrnābat; modo aquam et cibum
portābant ad Dāvum servōsque dēfessōs quī agrōs colēbant: modo in casā
parvā aut hōrās lactās in lūdō cōnsūmēbant aut auxilium dabant Lesbiae,
quae cibum virō et servīs parābat vel aliās rēs domesticās agēbat.
1. The vīlicus was a slave who acted as overseer of a farm. He directed the farming operations and
the sale of the produce.
2. se, reflexive pron., object of exercent.
3. For the construction, see § 501. 40.
4. in, for.
5. annōs, § 501. 21.
6. domum, § 501. 20.
7. rūrī, § 501. 36. 1.
8. hōrās, cf. annōs, line 17.
9. quō ... spectet, §§ 349, 350.
10. sagittis, § 501. 24.

LXIII. MARCUS LENTULUS, THE FATHER OF PUBLIUS, IS SHIPWRECKED · JULIA

RECEIVES A LETTER FROM HIM
Iam Pūblius 1 decem annōs habēbat cum M. Cornēlius Lentulus, pater eius,
quī quīnque annōs 2 grave bellum in Asiā gerēbat, non sine glōriā domum 3
revertēbātur. Namque multa secunda proelia fēcerat, maximās hostium
cōpiās dēlēverat, multās urbīs populo 4 Rōmānō inimīcās cēperat. Primum
nūntius pervēnit quī ā Lentulō 5 missus erat 6 ut profectiōnem suam
nūntiāret. Deinde plūrīs diēs 7 reditum virī optimī māter fīliusque
exspectābant et animīs 8 sollicitis deōs immortālīs frūstrā colēbant. Tum
dēmum hās litterās summo cum gaudiō accēpērunt:
9“Mārcus Iūliae suac salūtem dīcit. Sī valēs, bene est; ego valeō. Ex
Graeciā, quō 10 praeter spem et opīniōnem hodiē pervēnī, hās litterās ad tē
scribō. Namque nāvis nostra frācta est; nōs autem— 11dīs est gratia—
incolumes sumus. Ex Asiae 12 portū nāvem lēnī ventō solvimus.
Postquam 13 altum mare tenuimus 14nec iam ūllae terrae appāruērunt,
caelum undique et undique fluctūs, subitō magna tempestās coorta est et
nāvem vehementissimē adflīxit. Ventīs fluctibusque adflīctātī 15 nec sōlem
discernere nec cursum tenēre poterāmus et omnia praesentem mortem
intentābant. Trīs diēs 16 et trīs noctīs 16 sine rēmīs vēlīsque agimur. Quārtō
diē 17 prīmum terra vīsa est et violenter in saxa, quae nōn longē ā lītore
aberant, dēiectī sumus. Tum vērō maiōra perīcula timēbāmus; sed nauta
quīdam, vir fortissimus, ex nāve in fluctūs īrātōs dēsiluit 18ut fūnem ad lītus
portāret; quam rem summō labōre vix effēcit. Ita omnēs servātī sumus.
Grātiās igitur et honōrem Neptūnō dēbēmus, quī deus nōs ē perīculō ēripuit.
Nunc Athēnīs 19 sum, quō cōnfūgī ut mihi paucās hōrās ad quiētem
darem. 20 Quam prīmum autem aliam nāvem condūcam ut iter ad Italiam
reliquum cōnficiam et domum 21 ad meōs cārōs revertar. Salūtā nostrum
Pūblium amīcissimē et valētūdinem tuam cūrā dīligenter. 22Kalendīs
Mārtiīs.”
1. was ten years old.
2. annōs, § 501. 21.
3. domum, § 501. 20.
4. populō, dat. with inimīcās, cf. § 501. 16.
5. Lentulō, § 501. 33.
6. ut ... nūntiāret, § 501. 40.
7. diēs, cf. annōs, 1. 9.
8. animīs, abl. of manner. Do you see one in line 15?
9. This is the usual form for the beginning of a Latin letter. First we have the greeting, and then the
expression Sī valēs, etc. The date of the letter is usually given at the end, and also the place of
writing, if not previously mentioned in the letter.
10. quō, where.
11. dīs est grātia, thank God, in our idiom.
12. Asia refers to the Roman province of that name in Asia Minor.
13. altum mare tenuimus, we were well out to sea.
14. nec iam, and no longer.
16. adflīctātī, perf. passive part. tossed about.
16. What construction?
17. diē, § 501. 35.
18. ut ... portāret, § 501. 40.
19. Athēnīs, § 501. 36. 1.
20. darem, cf. portāret, l. 6.
21. Why not ad domum?
22. Kalendīs Mārtiīs, the Calends or first of March; abl. of time, giving the date of the letter.

LXIV. LENTULUS REACHES HOME · PUBLIUS VISITS POMPEII WITH HIS FATHER

Post paucōs diēs nāvis M. Cornēlī Lentulī portum Mīsēnī 1 petiit, quī portus
nōn longē ā Pompēiīs situs est; quō in portū classis Rōmānā pōnēbātur et ad
pugnās nāvālīs ōrnābātur. Ibi nāvēs omnium generum cōnspicī poterant.
Iamque incrēdibilī celeritāte nāvis longa quā Lentulus vehēbātur lītorī
adpropinquāvit; nam nōn sōlum ventō sed etiam rēmīs impellēbātur. In altā
puppe stābat gubernātor et nōn procul aliquī mīlitēs Rōmānī cum armīs
splendidīs, inter quōs clārissimus erat Lentulus. Deinde servī rēmīs
contendere cessāvērunt 2; nautae vēlum contrāxērunt et ancorās iēcērunt.
Lentulus statim ē nāvī ēgressus est et 3 ad villam suam properāvit. Eum
Iūlia, Pūblius, tōtaque familia excēpērunt. 4Quī complexūs, quanta gaudia
fuērunt!
Postrīdiē eius diēī Lentulus fīliō suō dīxit, “Venī, mī Pūblī, mēcum.
Pompēiōs iter hodiē faciam. Māter tua suādet 5 ut frūctūs et cibāria emam.
Namque plūrīs amīcōs ad cēnam vocāvimus et multīs rēbus 6 egēmus. Ea
hortātur ut quam prīmum proficīscāmur.” “Libenter, mī pater,” inquit
Pūblius. “Tēcum esse mihi semper est grātum; nec Pompēiōs umquam vīdī.
Sine morā proficīscī parātus sum.” Tum celeriter currum cōnscendērunt et
ad urbis mūrōs vectī sunt. Stabiānā portā 7 urbem ingressī sunt. Pūblius
strātās viās mīrātur et saxa altiōra quae in mediō disposita erant et altās
orbitās quās rotae inter haec saxa fēcerant. Etiam strepitum mīrātur,
multitūdinem, carrōs, fontīs, domōs, tabernās, forum 8 cum statuīs, templīs,
reliquīsque aedificiīs pūblicīs.
1. Misenum had an excellent harbor, and under the emperor Augustus became the chief naval station
of the Roman fleet. See map of Italy.
2. Why is the infinitive used with cessāvērunt?
3. See Plate I, Frontispiece.
4. Observe that these words are exclamatory.
5. What construction follows suādeō? § 501. 41.
6. rēbus, § 501. 32.
7. This is the abl. of the way by which motion takes place, sometimes called the abl. of route. The
construction comes under the general head of the abl. of means. For the scene here described, see
Plate II, p. 53, and notice especially the stepping-stones for crossing the street (saxa quae in mediō
disposita erant).
8. The forum of Pompeii was surrounded by temples, public halls, and markets of various sorts.
Locate Pompeii on the map.

LXV. A DAY AT POMPEII

Apud forum ē currū dēscendērunt et Lentulus dīxit, “Hīc sunt multa

tabernārum genera, mī Pūblī. Ecce, trāns viam est popīna! 1Hoc genus
tabernārum cibāria vēndit. Frūctūs quoque ante iānuam stant. Ibi cibāria
mea emam.” “Optimē,” respondit Pūblius. “At ubi, mī pater, crūstula emere
possumus? Namque māter nōbīs imperāvit 2ut haec quoque parārēmus.
Timeō ut 3 ista popīna vēndat crūstula.” “Bene dīcis,” inquit Lentulus. “At
nōnne vidēs illum fontem ā dextrā ubi aqua per leōnis caput fluit? In illō
ipsō locō est taberna pīstōris quī sine dubiō vēndit crūstula.”
Brevī tempore 4 omnia erant parāta, iamque 5quīnta hōra erat. Deinde
Lentulus et fīlius ad caupōnam properāvērunt, quod famē 6 et sitī 7
urgēbantur. Ibi sub arboris umbrā sēdērunt et puerō imperāvērunt ut sibi 8
cibum et vīnum daret. Huic imperiō 9 puer celeriter pāruit. Tum laetī sē 10 ex
labōre refēcērunt.
Post prandium prefectī sunt ut alia urbis spectācula vidērent. Illō tempore
fuērunt Pompēiīs 11 multa templa, duo theātra, thermae magnumque
amphitheātrum, quae omnia post paucōs annōs flammīs atque incendiīs
Vesuvī et terrae mōtū dēlēta sunt. Ante hanc calamitātem autem hominēs
1nihil dē monte veritī sunt. In amphitheātrō quidem Pūblius morārī cupīvit
ut spectācula gladiātōria vidēret, quae in 13 illum ipsum diem prōscrīpta
erant et iam 15rē vērā incēperant. Sed Lentulus dīxit, “Morārī, Pūblī,
16vereor ut possīmus. Iam decima hōra est et via est longa. Tempus suādet
ut quam prīmum domum revertāmur.” Itaque servō imperāvit ut equōs
iungeret, et sōlis occāsū 16 ad vīllam pervēnērunt.
1. We say, this kind of shop; Latin, this kind of shops.
2. ut ... parārēmus, § 501. 41.
3. How is ut translated after a verb of fearing? How nē? Cf. § 501. 42.
4. tempore, § 501. 35.
5. quīnta hōra. The Romans numbered the hours of the day consecutively from sunrise to sunset,
dividing the day, whether long or short, into twelve equal parts.
6. famē shows a slight irregularity in that the abl. ending -e is long.
7. sitis, thirst, has -im in the acc. sing., -ī in the abl. sing., and no plural.
8. Observe that the reflexive pronoun sibi does not here refer to the subject of the subordinate clause
in which it stands, but to the subject of the main clause. This so-called indirect use of the reflexive is
often found in object clauses of purpose.
9. What case? Cf. § 501. 14.
10. sē, cf. p. 205, l. 7, and note.
11. Pompēiīs, § 501. 36. 1.
12. nihil ... veritī sunt, had no fears of the mountain.
13. in, for.
14. rē vērā, in fact.
15. vereor ut, § 501. 42.
16. occāsū, § 501. 35.

LXVI. LENTULUS ENGAGES A TUTOR FOR HIS SON

Ā prīmīs annīs quidem Iūlia ipsa fīlium suum docuerat, et Pūblius nōn
sōlum 1pūrē et Latīnē loquī poterat sed etiam commodē legēbat et
scrībēbat. Iam Ennium 2 aliōsque poētās lēgerat. Nunc vērō Pūblius
3duodecim annōs habēbat; itaque eī pater bonum magistrum, 4virum omnī
doctrīnā et virtūte ōrnātissimum, parāvit, 5quī Graeca, mūsicam, aliāsque
artīs docēret. 6Namque illīs temporibus omnēs ferē gentēs Graecē
loquēbantur. Cum Pūbliō aliī puerī, Lentulī amīcōrum fīliī, 7 discēbant. Nam
saepe apud Rōmānōs mōs erat 8nōn in lūdum fīliōs mittere sed domī per
magistrum docēre. Cotīdiē discipulī cum magistrō in peristȳlō 9 Mārcī
domūs sedēbant. Omnēs puerī bullam auream, orīginis honestae signum, in
collō gerēbant, et omnēs togā praetextā amictī erant, 10quod nōndum
sēdecim annōs 11 nātī sunt.
1. pūrē ... poterat, freely, could speak Latin well. What is the literal translation?
2. Ennium, the father of Latin poetry.
3. duodecim ... habēbat, cf. p. 206, l. 8, and note.
4. virum, etc., a very well-educated and worthy man. Observe the Latin equivalent.
5. quī ... docēret, a relative clause of purpose. Cf. §§ 349, 350.
6. In Cæsar’s time Greek was spoken more widely in the Roman world than any other language.
7. fīliī, in apposition with puerī.
8. nōn ... mittere. This infinitive clause is the subject of erat. Cf. § 216. The same construction is
repeated in the next clause, domī ... docēre. The object of docēre is fīliōs understood.
9. The peristyle was an open court surrounded by a colonnade.
10. At the age of sixteen a boy laid aside the bulla and the toga praetexta and assumed toga virīlis or
manly gown.
11. annōs, § 501. 21. The expression nōndum sēdecim annōs nātī sunt means literally, they were
born not yet sixteen years. This is the usual expression for age. What is the English equivalent?

SCENE IN SCHOOL · AN EXERCISE IN COMPOSITION

Discipulī. Salvē, magister.

Magister. Vōs quoque omnēs, salvēte.
1Tabulāsne portāvistis et stilōs?

D. Portāvimus.
M. Iam fābulam Aesōpī 2 discēmus. Ego legam,
vōs in tabulīs scrībite. Et tū, Pūblī, dā mihi ē
capsā 3 Aesōpī volūmen. 4 Iam audīte omnēs:
Vulpēs et Ūva. TABULA ET STILUS

Vulpēs ōlim famē coācta ūvam dēpendentem

vīdit. Ad ūvam saliēbat, sūmere cōnāns. Frūstrā diū cōnāta, tandem īrāta
erat et salīre cessāns dīxit: “Illa ūva est acerba; acerbam ūvam 5nihil
moror.”
Omnia´ne scrīpsistis, puerī?
D. Omnia, magister.
1. Tablets were thin boards of wood smeared with wax. The writing was done with a stylus, a pointed
instrument like a pencil, made of bone or metal, with a knob at the other end. The knob was used to
smooth over the wax in making erasures and corrections.
2. Aesōpī, the famous Greek to whom are ascribed most of the fables current in the ancient world.
3. A cylindrical box for holding books and papers, shaped like a hatbox.
4. Ancient books were written on rolls made of papy´rus.
5. nihil moror, I care nothing for.

LXVII. PUBLIUS GOES TO ROME TO FINISH HIS EDUCATION

Iamque Pūblius, 1quīndecim annōs nātus, 2prīmīs litterārum elementīs

cōnfectīs, Rōmam petere voluit ut scholās grammaticōrum et
philosophōrum frequentāret. Et facillimē patrī 3 suō, qui ipse philosophiae
studiō tenēbātur, persuāsit. Itaque 4omnibus rēbus ad profectiōnem
comparātīs, pater fīliusque equīs animōsīs vectī 5 ad magnam urbem
profectī sunt. Eōs proficīscentīs Iūlia tōtaque familia vōtīs precibusque
prōsecūtae sunt. Tum per loca 6 plāna et collis silvīs vestītōs viam ingressī
sunt ad Nōlam, quod oppidum eōs hospitiō modicō excēpit. Nōlae 7 duās
hōrās morātī sunt, quod sōl merīdiānus ārdēbat. Tum rēctā viā 8 circiter
vīgintī mīlia 9 passuum 9 Capuam, 9 ad īnsignem Campāniae urbem,
contendērunt. Eō 10 multā nocte dēfessī pervēnērunt. 11Postrīdiē eius diēī,
somnō et cibō recreātī, Capuā discessērunt et 13viam Appiam ingressī, quae
Capuam tangit et ūsque ad urbem Rōmam dūcit, ante merīdiem Sinuessam
pervēnērunt, quod oppidum tangit mare. Inde prīmā lūce proficīscentēs
Formiās 13 properāvērunt, ubi Cicerō, ōrātor clarissimus, quī forte apud
vīllam suam erat, eōs benignē excēpit. Hinc 14itinere vīgintī quīnque
mīlium passuum factō, Tarracīnam, oppidum in saxīs altissimīs situm,
vīdērunt. Iamque nōn longē aberant palūdēs magnae, quae multa mīlia
passuum undique patent. Per eās pedestris via est gravis et in nāve viātōrēs
vehuntur. Itaque 15equīs relictīs Lentulus et Pūblius nāvem cōnscendērunt,
et, ūnā nocte in trānsitū cōnsūmptā, Forum Appī vēnērunt. Tum brevī
tempore Arīcia eōs excēpit. Hoc oppidum, in colle situm, ab urbe Romā
sēdecim mīlia passuum abest. Inde dēclivis via ūsque ad latum campum
dūcit ubi Rōma stat. Quem ad locum ubi Pūblius vēnit et Rōmam adhūc
remōtam, maximam tōtīus orbis terrārum urbem, cōnspēxit, summā
admīrātiōne et gaudiō adfectus est. Sine morā dēscendērunt, et, mediō
intervāllō quam celerrimē superātō, urbem portā Capēnā ingressī sunt.
1. quīndecim, etc., cf. p. 210, l. 5, and note.
2. prīmīs ... cōnfectīs, abl. abs. Cf. § 501. 28.
3. patrī, dat. with persuāsit.
4. omnibus ... comparātīs, cf. note 2.
5. vectī, perf. pass. part. of vehō.
6. What is there peculiar about the gender of this word?
7. Nōlae, locative case, § 501. 36.2.
8. viā, cf. portā, p. 208, l. 7, and note.
9. What construction?
10. Eō, adv. there.
11. Postrīdiē eius diēī, on the next day.
12. viam Appiam, the most famous of all Roman roads, the great highway from Rome to Tarentum
and Brundisium, with numerous branches. Locate on the map the various towns that are mentioned in
the lines that follow.
13. Formiās, Formiæ, one of the most beautiful spots on this coast, and a favorite site for the villas
of rich Romans.
14. itinere ... factō, abl. abs. The gen. mīlium modifies itinere.
15. equīs relictīs. What construction? Point out a similar one in the next line.

LXVIII. PUBLIUS PUTS ON THE TOGA VIRILIS

Pūblius iam tōtum annum Rōmae morābātur 1

multaque urbis spectācula vīderat et multōs sibi 2
amīcōs parāverat. Eī 3 omnēs favēbant; 4dē eō
omnēs bene spērāre poterant. Cotīdiē Pūblius
scholas philosophōrum et grammaticōrum tantō
studiō frequentābat 5ut aliīs clārum exemplum
praebēret. Saepe erat cum patre in cūriā 6; quae rēs
effēcit 7ut summōs reī pūblicae virōs et audīret et
vidēret. Ubi 8sēdecim annōs natus est, bullam 9
auream et togam praetextam mōre Rōmānō dēposuit
atque virīlem togam sūmpsit. Virīlis autem toga erat
BULLA
omnīnō alba, sed praetexta clāvum purpureum in
margine habēbat. 10Dēpōnere togam praetextam et
sūmere togam virīlem erat rēs grātissima puerō Rōmānō, quod posteā vir et
cīvis Rōmānus habēbātur.
11Hīs rēbus gestīs Lentulus ad uxōrem suam hās litterās scrīpsit:
12“Mārcus Iūliae suae salūtem dīcit. Sī valēs, bene est; ego valeō. Accēpī
tuās litterās. Hās nunc Rōmā per servum fidēlissimum mittō ut dē Pūbliō
nostrō quam celerrimē sciās. Nam hodiē eī togam virīlem dedī. Ante lucem
surrēxī 13 et prīmum bullam auream dē collō eius remōvī. Hāc Laribus 14
cōnsecrātā et sacrīs factīs, eum togā virīlī vestīvī. Interim plūrēs amīcī cum
multitūdine optimōrum cīvium et honestōrum clientium pervēnerant 15quī
Pūblium domō in forum dēdūcerent. Ibi in cīvitātem receptus est et nōmen,
Pūblius Cornēlius Lentulus, apud cīvīs Rōmānōs ascrīptum est. Omnēs eī
amīcissimī fuērunt et magna 16 de eō praedīcunt. Sapientior enim
aequālibus 17 est et magnum ingenium habet. 18Cūrā ut valeās.”
1. morābātur, translate as if pluperfect.
2. sibi, for himself.
3. Eī, why dat.?
4. dē ... poterant, in English, all regarded him as a very promising youth; but what does the Latin
say?
5. ut ... praebēret, § 501. 43.
6. cūriā, a famous building near the Roman Forum.
7. ut ... audīret et vidēret, § 501. 44.
8. sēdecim, etc., cf. p. 210, l. 5, and note.
9. bullam, cf. p. 210, l. 3, and note 4.
10. These infinitive clauses are the subject of erat. Cf. § 216.
11. Hīs rēbus gestīs, i.e. the assumption of the toga virilis and attendant ceremonies.
12. Compare the beginning of this letter with the one on page 206.
13. surrēxī, from surgō.
14. The Lares were the spirits of the ancestors, and were worshiped as household gods. All that the
house contained was confided to their care, and sacrifices were made to them daily.
15. quī ... dēdūcerent, § 350.
16. magna, great things, a neuter adj. used as a noun.
17. aequālibus, § 501. 34.
18. Cūrā ut valeās, take good care of your health. How does the Latin express this idea?

LXIX. PUBLIUS JOINS CÆSAR’S ARMY IN GAUL

Pūblius iam adulēscēns postquam togam virīlem sūmpsit, aliīs rēbus studēre
incēpit et praesertim ūsū 1 armōrum sē 2 dīligenter exercuit. Magis magisque
amāvit illās artīs quae mīlitārem animum dēlectant. Iamque erant 3quī eī
cursum mīlitārem praedīcerent. Nec sine causā, quod certē patris īsigne
exemplum 4ita multum trahēbat. 5Paucīs ante annīs C. Iūlius Caesar,
ducum Rōmānōrum maximus, cōnsul creātus erat et hōc tempore in Galliā
bellum grave gerēbat. Atque in exercitū eius plūrēs adulēscentēs mīlitābant,
apud quōs erat amīcus quīdam Pūblī. Ille Pūblium crēbrīs litterīs
vehementer hortābātur 6ut iter in Galliam faceret. Neque Pūblius recūsāvit,
et, multīs amīcīs ad portam urbis prōsequentibus, ad Caesaris castra
profectus est. Quārtō diē postquam iter ingressus est, ad Alpīs, montīs
altissimōs, pervēnit. Hīs summā difficultāte superātīs, tandem Gallōrum in
fīnibus erat. Prīmō autem veritus est ut 7 castrīs Rōmānīs adpropinquāre
posset, quod Gallī, maximīs cōpiīs coāctīs, Rōmānōs obsidēbant et viās
omnīs iam clauserant. Hīs rēbus commōtus Pūblius vestem Gallicam induit
nē ā Gallīs caperētur, et ita per hostium cōpiās incolumis ad castra pervenīre
potuit. Intrā mūnītiōnes acceptus, ā Caesare benignē exceptus est. Imperātor
fortem adulēscentem amplissimīs verbīs laudāvit et eum 8tribūnum mīlītum
creāvit.
1. Abl. of means.
2. sē, reflexive object of exercuit.
3. quī ... praedīcerent, § 501. 45.
4. ita multum trahēbat, had a great influence in that direction.
5. Paucīs ante annīs, a few years before; in Latin, before by a few years, ante being an adverb and
annīs abl. of degree of difference.
6. ut ... faceret, § 501. 41.
7. ut, how translated here? See § 501. 42.
8. The military tribune was a commissioned officer nearly corresponding to our rank of colonel. The
tribunes were often inexperienced men, so Cæsar did not allow them much responsibility.
 IMPEDIMENTA

HOW THE ROMANS MARCHED AND CAMPED

Exercitus quī in hostium fīnibus bellum genit multīs perīcuīs circumdatus

est. 1Quae perīcula ut vītāret, Rōmāni summam cūram adhībēre solēbant.
Adpropinquanteēs cōpiīs hostium agmen ita dispōnēbant 2ut imperātor ipse
cum plāribus legiōnibus expedītīs 3 prīmum agmen dūceret. Post eās cōpiās
impedīmenta 4 tōtīus exercitūs conlocābant. 5Tum legiōnēs quae proximē
cōnscrīptae erant tōtum agmen claudēbant. Equitēs quoque in omnīs partīs
dīmittēbantur quī loca explōrārent; et centuriōnēs praemittēbantur ut locum
castrīs idōneum dēligerent. Locus habēbatur idōneus castrīs 6quī facile
dēfendī posset et prope aquam esset. Quā dē causā castra 7 in colle ab
utrāque parte arduō, ā fronte lēniter dēclīvī saepe pōnēbantur; vel locus
palūdibus cīnctus vel in flūminis rīpīs situs dēligēbātur. Ad locum postquam
exercitus pervēnit, aliī mīlitum 8in armīs erant, aliī castra mūnīre
incipiēbant. Nam 9quō tūtiōrēs ab hostibus mīlitēs essent, nēve incautī et
imparātī opprimerentur, castra fossā lātā et vāllō altō mūniēbant. In castrīs
portae quattuor erant ut ēruptiō mīlitum omnīs in partīs fierī posset. In
angulīs castrōrum erant turrēs dē quibus tēla in hostīs coniciēbantur.
10Tālibus in castrīs quālia dēscrīpsimus Pūblius ā Caesare exceptus est.
1. Quae perīcula, object of vītārent. It is placed first to make a proper connection with the
preceding sentence.
2. ut ... dūceret, § 501. 43.
3. expedītīs, i.e. without baggage and ready for action.
4. impedīmenta. Much of the baggage was carried in carts and on beasts of burden, as is shown
above; but, besides this, each soldier (unless expedītus) carried a heavy pack. See also picture, p.
159.
5. The newest legions were placed in the rear, because they were the least reliable.
6. quī ... posset ... esset, § 501. 45.
7. castra, subject of pōnēbantur.
8. in armīs erant, stood under arms.
9. quō ... essent. When is quō used to introduce a purpose clause? See § 350. I.
10. Tālibus in castrīs quālia, in such a camp as. It is important to remember the correlatives tālis ...
quālis, such ... as.

LXX. THE RIVAL CENTURIONS

Illīs in castrīs erant duo centuriōnēs, 1 fortissimī virī,

T. Pullō et L. Vorēnus, quōrum neuter alterī virtūte 2
cēdere volēbat. Inter eōs iam multōs annōs īnfēnsum
certāmen gerēbātur. Tum dēmum fīnis contrōversiae
hōc modō 3 factus est. Diē tertiō postquam Pūblius
pervēnit, hostēs, maiōribus cōpiīs coāctīs, ācerrimum
impetum in castra fēcērunt. Tum Pullō, 4cum Rōmānī
tardiōrēs 5 vidērentur, “Cūr dubitās,” inquit, “Vorēne?
Quam commodiōrem occāsiōnem exspectās? Hic diēs
dē virtūte nostrā iūdicābit.” Haec 6 cum dīxisset, extrā
mūnītiōnēs prōcessit et in eam hostium partem quae
cōfertissima 7vidēbātur inrūpit. Neque Vorēnus
quidem tum vāllō 8 sēsē continet, sed Pullōnem
subsequitur. Tum Pullō pīlum in hostīs immittit atque
CENTURIO
ūnum ex multitūdine prōcurrentem trāicit. Hunc
percussum et exanimātum hostēs scūtīs prōtegunt et
in Pullōnem omnēs tēla coniciunt. Eius scūtum
trānsfīgitur et tēlum in balteō dēfīgitur. Hic cāsus vāgīnam āvertit et
dextram manum eius gladium ēdūcere cōnantis 9 morātur. Eum ita
impedītum hostēs circumsistunt.
Tum vēro 10eī labōrantī Vorēnus, cum sit inimīcus, tamen auxilium dat. Ad
hunc cōnfestim 11ā Pullōne omnis multitūdō sē convertit. Gladiō comminus
pugnat Vorēnus, atque, ūnō interfectō, reliquōs paulum prōpellit. Sed
īnstāns cupidius 12 īnfēlīx, 13pede sē fallente, concidit.
Huic rūrsus circumventō auxilium dat Pullō, atque ambō incolumēs,
plūribus interfectīs, summā cum laude intrā mūnītiōnēs sē recipiunt. Sic
inimīcōrum alter alterī auxilium dedit nec de eōrum virtūte quisquam
iūdicāre potuit.
1. A centurion commanded a company of about sixty men. He was a common soldier who had been
promoted from the ranks for his courage and fighting qualities. The centurions were the real leaders
of the men in battle. There were sixty of them in a legion. The centurion in the picture (p. 216) has in
his hand a staff with a crook at one end, the symbol of his authority.
2. virtūte, § 501. 30.
3. Abl. of manner.
4. cum ... vidērentur, § 501. 46.
5. tardiōrēs, too slow, a not infrequent translation of the comparative degree.
6. Haec, obj. of dīxisset. It is placed before cum to make a close connection with the preceding
sentence. What is the construction of dīxisset?
7. vidēbatur, inrūpit. Why is the imperfect used in one case and the perfect in the other? Cf. § 190.
8. vāllō, abl. of means, but in English we should say within the rampart. Cf. ingentī stabulō, p. 201,
l. 13, and note.
9. cōnantis, pres. part. agreeing with eius.
10. eī labōrantī, indir. obj. of dat.
11. ā Pullōne, from Pullo, abl. of separation.
12. cupidius, too eagerly.
13. pede sē fallente, lit. the foot deceiving itself; in our idiom, his foot slipping.

LXXI. THE ENEMY BESIEGING THE CAMP ARE REPULSED

Cum iam sex hōrās pugnatum esset 1 ac nōn sōlum vīrēs sed etiam tēla
Rōmānōs dēficerent 1, atque hostēs ācrius instārent, 1 et vāllum scindere
fossamque complēre incēpissent, 1 Caesar, vir reī mīlitāris perītissimus, suīs
imperāvit ut proelium paulisper intermitterent, 2 et, signō datō, ex castrīs
ērumperent. 2 3Quod iussī sunt faciunt, et subitō ex omnibus portīs
ērumpunt. Atque tam celeriter mīlitēs concurrērunt et tam propinquī erant
hostēs 4 ut spatium pīla coniciendī 5 nōn darētur. Itaque reiectīs pīlīs
6comminus gladiīs pugnātum est. Diū et audācter hostēs restitērunt et in
extrēmā spē salūtis tantam virtūtem praestitērunt ut ā dextrō cornū
vehementer 7multitūdine suōrum aciem Rōmanam premerent. 8Id
imperātor cum animadvertisset, Pūblium adulēscentem cum equitātū mīsit
quī labōrantibus 9 auxilium daret. Eius impetum sustinēre nōn potuērunt
hostēs 10 et omnēs terga vertērunt. Eōs in fugam datōs Pūblius subsecūtus
est ūsque ad flūmen Rhēnum, quod ab eō locō quīnque mīlia passuum
aberat. Ibi paucī salūtem sibi repperērunt. Omnibus reliquīs interfectīs,
Pūblius et equitēs in castra sēsē recēpērunt. Dē hāc calamitāte fīnitimae
gentēs cum certiōrēs factae essent, ad Caesarem lēgātōs mīsērunt et sē
suaque omnia dēdidērunt.
1. pugnātum esset, dēficerent, īnstārent, incēpissent. These are all subjunctives with cum. Cf. §
501. 46.
2. intermitterent, ērumperent. What use of the subjunctive?
3. Quod, etc., they do as ordered. The antecedent of quod is id understood, which would be the
object of faciunt.
4. ut ... darētur. Is this a clause of purpose or of result?
5. coniciendī, § 402.
6. comminus gladiīs pugnātum est, a hand-to-hand conflict was waged with swords.
7. multitūdine suōrum, by their numbers. suōrum is used as a noun. What is the literal translation
of this expression?
8. Id imperātor. Id is the obj. and imperātor the subj. of animadvertisset.
9. labōrantibus. This participle agrees with iīs understood, the indir. obj. of daret; qui ... daret is a
purpose clause, § 501. 40.
10. hostēs, subj. of potuērunt.

LXXII. PUBLIUS GOES TO GERMANY · ITS GREAT FORESTS AND STRANGE ANIMALS

Initā aestāte Caesar litterīs certior fīēbat et per explōrātōrēs cognōscēbat

plūrīs cīvitātēs Galliae novīs rēbus studēre, 1 et contrā populum Rōmānum
coniūrāre 1 obsidēsque 2inter sē dare, 1 atque cum hīs Germānōs quōsdam
quoque sēsē coniūnctūrōs esse. 1 Hīs litterīs nūntiīsque commōtus Caesar
cōnstituit quam celerrimē in Gallōs proficīscī, 3 ut eōs inopīnantīs
opprimeret, et Labiēnum lēgātum cum duābus legiōnibus peditum et duōbus
mīlibus equitum in Germānōs mittere. 3 4Itaque rē frūmentāriā comparātā
castra mōvit. Ab utrōque 5 rēs bene gesta est; nam Caesar tam celeriter in
hostium fīnīs pervēnit ut spatium 6cōpiās cōgendī nōn darētur 7; et Labiēnus
dē Germānīs tam grave supplicium sūmpsit ut nēmō ex eā gente in reliquum
tempus Gallīs auxilium dare audēret. 7
Hoc iter in Germāniam Pūblius quoque fēcit et, 8cum ibi morārētur, multa
mīrābilia vīdit. Praesertim vērō ingentem silvam mīrābātur, quae tantae
magnitūdinis esse dīcēbātur 9ut nēmō eam trānsīre posset, nec quisquam
scīret aut initium aut fīnem. Quā dē rē plūra cognōverat ā mīlite quōdam quī
ōlim captus ā Germānīs multōs annōs ibi incoluit. Ille 10 dē silvā dīcēns,
“Īnfīnītae magnitūdinis est haec silva,” inquit; “nee quisquam est 11huius
Germāniae 12quī initium eius sciat aut ad fīnem adierit. Nāscuntur illīc
multa tālia animālium genera quālia reliquīs in locīs nōn inveniuntur. Sunt
bovēs quī ūnum 13 cornū habent; sunt etiam animālia quae appellantur alcēs.
Hae nūllōs crūrum 14 articulōs habent. Itaque, sī forte concidērunt, sēsē
ērigere nūllō modō possunt. Arborēs habent prō 15 cubīlibus; ad eās sē
applicant atque ita reclīnātae quiētem capiunt. Tertium est genus eōrum quī
ūrī appellantur. Hī sunt paulō minōrēs elephantīs. 16 Magna vis eōrum est et
magna vēlōcitās. Neque hominī neque ferae parcunt. 17”
1. Observe that all these infinitives are in indirect statements after certior fīēbat, he was informed,
and cognōscēbat, he learned. Cf. § 501.48, 49.
2. inter sē, to each other.
3. proficīscī, mittere. These infinitives depend upon cōnstituit.
4. Before beginning a campaign, food had to be provided. Every fifteen days grain was distributed.
Each soldier received about two pecks. This he carried in his pack, and this constituted his food,
varied occasionally by what he could find by foraging.
5. Abl. of personal agent, § 501. 33.
6. cōpiās cōgendī, § 501. 37. 1.
7. darētur, audēret, § 501. 43. audēret is not from audiō.
8. cum ... morārētur, § 501. 46.
9. ut ... posset, ... scīret, § 501. 43.
10. Ille, subj. of inquit.
11. huius Germāniae, of this part of Germany.
12. quī ... scīat ... adierit, § 501. 45.
13. ūnum, only one.
14. crūrum, from crūs.
15. prō, for, in place of.
16. elephantīs, § 501. 34.
17. parcunt. What case is used with this verb?
 LXXIII. THE STORMING OF A CITY

Pūblius plūrīs diēs in Germāniā morātus 1 in Galliam rediit, et ad Caesaris

castra sē contulit. Ille quia molestē ferēbat Gallōs 2 eius regiōnis obsidēs
dare recūsāvisse et exercituī frūmentum praebēre nōluisse, cōnstituit eīs 3
bellum īnferre. Agrīs vāstātīs, vīcīs incēnsīs, pervēnit ad oppidum
validissimum quod et nātūrā et arte mūnītum erat. Cingēbātur mūrō vīgintī
quīnque pedēs 4 altō. Ā lateribus duōsitum, praeruptō fastīgiō ad plānitiem
vergēgat; ā quārtō tantum 5 latere aditus erat facilis. Hoc oppidum
oppugnāre, 6cum opus esset difficillimum, tamen cōnstituit Caesar. Et
castrīs mūnītīs Pūbliō negōtium dedit ut rēs 7ad oppugnandum necessāriās
parāret.
Rōmānōrum autem oppugnātiō est
haec. 8 Prīmum turrēs aedificantur
quibus mīlitēs in summum mūrum
ēvādere possint 9; vīneae 10 fīunt
quibus tēctī mīlitēs ad mūrum
succēdant; pluteī 11 parantur post
quōs mīlitēs tormenta 12
administrent; sunt quoque arietēs
quī mūrum et portās discutiant.
Hīs omnibus rēbus comparātīs,
VINEA
deinde 13agger ab eā parte ubi
aditus est facillimus exstruitur et
cum vīneīs ad ipsum oppidum agitur. Tum turris in aggere prōmovētur;
arietibus quī sub vīneīs conlocātī erant mūrus et portae discutiuntur;
ballistīs, catapultīs, reliquīsque tormentīs lapidēs et tēla in oppidum
coniciuntur. Postrēmō cum iam turris et agger altitūdinem mūrī adaequant et
arietēs moenia perfrēgērunt, 14 signō datō mīlitēs inruunt et oppidum
expugnant.
1. morātus. Is this part. active or passive in meaning?
2. Gallōs, subj. acc. of the infins. recūsāvisse and nōluisse. The indirect statement depends upon
molestē ferēbat.
3. eīs, § 501. 15.
4. pedēs, § 501. 21.
5. tantum, adv. only.
6. cum ... esset, a clause of concession, § 501. 46.
7. ad oppugnandum, a gerund expressing purpose.
8. haec, as follows.
9. possint, subjv. of purpose. Three similar constructions follow.
10. vīneae. These vīneae were wooden sheds, open in front and rear, used to protect men who were
working to take a fortification. They were about eight feet high, of like width, and double that length,
covered with raw hides to protect them from being set on fire, and moved on wheels or rollers.
11. pluteī, large screens or shields with small wheels attached to them. These were used to protect
besiegers while moving up to a city or while serving the engines of war.
12. tormenta. The engines of war were chiefly the catapult for shooting great arrows, and the
ballista, for hurling large stones. They had a range of about two thousand feet and were very
effective.
13. The agger, or mound, was of chief importance in a siege. It was begun just out of reach of the
missiles of the enemy, and then gradually extended towards the point to be attacked. At the same
time its height gradually increased until on a level with the top of the wall, or even higher. It was
made of earth and timber, and had covered galleries running through it for the use of the besiegers.
Over or beside the agger a tower was moved up to the wall, often with a battering-ram (aries) in the
lowest story. (See picture, p. 221.)
14. perfrēgērunt, from perfringō.

LXXIV. THE CITY IS TAKEN · THE CAPTIVES ARE QUESTIONED

Omnibus rēbus necessāriīs ad

oppugnandum ā Pūbliō
comparātīs, dēlīberātur in
conciliō quod cōnsilium 1oppidī
expugnandī ineant. 2 Tum ūnus 3
ex centuriōnibus, vir reī mīlitāris
perītissimus, “Ego suādeō,”
inquit, “ut ab eā parte, ubi aditus
sit 4 facillimus, aggerem
exstruāmus 5 et turrim
prōmoveāmus 5 atque ariete
admōtō simul mūrum discutere
cōnēmur. 5” 6Hoc cōnsilium cum BALLISTA
omnibus placēret, Caesar
concilium dīmīsit. Deinde mīlitēs
hortātus ut priōrēs victōriās memoriā 7 tenērent, iussit aggerem exstruī,
turrim et arietem admovērī. Neque oppidānīs 8 cōnsilium dēfuit. Aliī ignem
et omne genus tēlōrum dē mūrō in turrim coniēcērunt, aliī ingentia saxa in
vīneās et arietem dēvolvērunt. Diū utrimque ācerrimē pugnātum est. Nē
vulnerātī quidem pedem rettulērunt. Tandem, 9dē tertiā vigiliā, Pūblius,
quem Caesar illī operī 10 praefēcerat, nūntiāvit partem 11 mūrī ictibus arietis
labefactam concidisse. Quā rē audītā Caesar signum dat; mīlitēs inruunt et
magnā cum caede hostium oppidum capiunt.
1. oppidī expugnandī. Is this a gerund or a gerundive construction? Cf. § 501. 37.
2. ineant. § 501. 50.
3. ūnus. subj. of inquit.
4. sit. This is a so-called subjunctive by attraction, which means that the clause beginning with ubi
stands in such close connection with the subjv. clause beginning with ut, that its verb is attracted into
the same mood.
5. All these verbs are in the same construction.
6. Hoc cōnsilium, subj. of placēret. For the order cf. Haec cum, etc., p. 215, l. 22, and note; Id
imperātor cum, p. 217, l. 8.
7. memoriā, abl. of means.
8. oppidānīs, § 501. 15.
9. Between twelve and three o’clock in the morning. The night was divided into four watches.
10. operī, § 501. 15.
11. partem, subj. acc. of concidisse.

Postrīdiē eius diēī, hōc oppidō

expugnātō, 12captīvōrum quī
nōbilissimī sunt ad imperātōrem ante
praetōrium 13 addūcuntur. Ipse, lōrīcā
aurātā et paludāmentō purpureō
īnsignis, captīvōs per interpretem in
hunc modum interrogat: 14 Vōs quī
estis 15?
Interpres. Rogat imperātor quī sītis.
TURRES, ARIETES, VINEA
Captīvī. Fīliī rēgis sumus.
Interpres. Dīcunt sē fīliōs esse rēgis.
Imperātor. Cūr mihi tantās iniūriās intulistis?
Interpres. Rogat cūr sibi tantās iniūriās intuleritis.
Captīvī. Iniūriās eī nōn intulimus sed prō patriā bellum gessimus. Semper
voluimus Rōmānīs esse amīcī, sed Rōmānī sine causā nōs domō patriāque
expellere cōnātī sunt.
Interpres. 16Negant sē iniūriās tibi intulisse, sed prō patriā bellum gessisse.
17Semper sē voluisse amīcōs Rōmānīs esse, sed Rōmānōs sine causā sē
domō patriāque expellere cōnātōs esse.
Imperātor. 18Manēbitisne in reliquum tempus in fidē, hāc rebelliōne
condōnātā?
Tum vērō captīvī multīs cum lacrimīs iūrāvērunt sē in fidē mānsūrōs esse,
et Caesar eōs incolumīs domum dīmīsit.
12. captīvōrum ... sunt, the noblest of the captives.
13. The general’s headquarters.
14. Study carefully these direct questions, indirect questions, and indirect statements.
15. See Plate III, p. 148.
16. Negant, etc., they say that they have not, etc. Negant is equivalent to dīcunt nōn, and the
negative modifies intulisse, but not the remainder of the indirect statement.
17. Semper, etc., that they have always, etc.
18. Manēbitisne in fidē, will you remain loyal?

LXXV. CIVIL WAR BREAKS OUT BETWEEN CÆSAR AND POMPEY · THE BATTLE OF
PHARSALIA

Nē cōnfectō 1 quidem bellō Gallicō, 2bellum cīvīle inter Caesarem et

Pompēium exortum est. Nam Pompēius, quī summum imperium petēbat,
senātuī persuāserat ut Caesarem reī pūblicae hostem 3 iūdicāret et exercitum
eius dīmittī iubēret. Quibus cognitīs rēbus Caesar exercitum suum dīmittere
recūsāvit, atque, hortātus mīlitēs ut ducem totiēns victōrem ab inimīcōrum
iniūriīs dēfenderent, imperāvit ut sē Rōmam sequerentur. Summā cum
alacritāte mīlitēs pāruērunt, et trānsitō Rubicōne 4 initium bellī cīvīlis
factum est.
Italiae urbēs quidem omnēs ferē 5rēbus Caesaris favēbant et eum benignē
excēpērunt. Quā rē commōtus Pompēius ante Caesaris adventum Rōmā
excessit et Brundisium 6 pervēnit, inde 7paucīs post diēbus cum omnibus
cōpiīs ad Ēpīrum mare trānsiit. Eum Caesar cum septem legiōnibus et
quīngentīs equitibus secūtus est, et īnsignis inter Caesaris comitātum erat
Pūblius.
Plūribus leviōribus proeliīs factīs, tandem cōpiae adversae ad Pharsālum 8 in
Thessaliā sitam castra posuērunt. Cum Pompeī exercitus esset bis tantus
quantus Caesaris, tamen erant multī quī veterānās legiōnēs quae Gallōs et
Germānōs superāverant vehementer timēbant. Quōs 9 10ante proelium
commissum Labiēnus 11 lēgātus, quī ab Caesare nūper dēfēcerat, ita
adlocūtus est: “ 12Nōlīte exīstimāre hunc esse exercitum veterānōrum
mīlitum. Omnibus interfuī proeliīs 13 neque temerē incognitam rem
prōnūntiō. Perexigua pars illīus exercitūs quī Gallōs superāvit adhūc
superest. Magna pars occīsa est, multī domum discessērunt, multī sunt
relictī in Italiā. Hae cōpiae quās vidētis in 14citeriōre Galliā nūper
cōnscrīptae sunt.” Haec 15 cum dīxisset, iūrāvit sē nisi victōrem in castra
nōn reversūrum esse. 16Hoc idem Pompēius et omnēs reliquī iūrāvērunt, et
magnā spē et laetitiā, sīcut certam ad victōriam, cōpiae ē castrīs exiērunt.
Item Caesar, animō 17 ad dīmicandum parātus, exercitum suum ēdūxit et
septem cohortibus 18praesidiō castrīs relictīs cōpiās triplicī aciē īnstrūxit.
Tum, mīlitibus studiō pugnae ārdentibus, tubā signum dedit. Mīlitēs
prōcurrērunt et pīlīs missīs gladiōs strīnxērunt. Neque vērō virtūs hostibus
dēfuit. Nam et tēla missa sustinuērunt et impetum gladiōrum excēpērunt et
ōrdinēs cōnservāvērunt. Utrimque diū et ācriter pugnātum est nec quisquam
pedem rettulit. Tum equitēs Pompēī aciem Caesaris circumīre cōnātī sunt.
Quod 19 ubi Caesar animadvertit, tertiam aciem, 20 quae ad id tempus quiēta
fuerat, prōcurrere iussit. Tum vērō integrōrum impetum 21 dēfessī hostēs
sustinēre nōn potuērunt et omnēs terga vertērunt. Sed Pompēius dē fortūnīs
suīs dēspērāns sē in castra equō contulit, inde mox cum paucīs equitibus
effūgit.
1. With nē ... quidem the emphatic word stands between the two.
2. The Civil War was caused by the jealousy and rivalry between Cæsar and Pompey. It resulted in
the defeat and subsequent death of Pompey and the elevation of Cæsar to the lordship of the Roman
world.
3. hostem, predicate accusative, § 501. 22.
4. The Rubicon was a small stream in northern Italy that marked the boundary of Cæsar’s province.
By crossing it with an armed force Cæsar declared war upon Pompey and the existing government.
Cæsar crossed the Rubicon early in the year 49 B.C.
5. rēbus Caesaris favēbant, favored Cæsar’s side. In what case is rēbus?
6. Brundisium, a famous port in southern Italy whence ships sailed for Greece and the East. See
map.
7. paucīs post diēbus, a few days later; literally, afterguards by a few days. Cf. paucīs ante annīs, p.
213, l. 12, and note.
7. The battle of Pharsalia was fought on August 9, 48 B.C. In importance it ranks as one of the great
battles of the world.
8. Quōs, obj. of adlocūtus est.
10. ante proelium commissum, before the beginning of the

battle.

11. Labiēnus, Cæsar’s most faithful and skillful lieutenant in

the Gallic War. On the outbreak of the Civil War, in 49 B.C., he

deserted Cæsar and joined Pompey. His defection caused the greatest joy

among the Pompeian party; but he disappointed the expectations of his

new friends, and never accomplished anything of importance. He fought

against his old commander in several battles and was slain at the battle

of Munda in Spain, 45 B.C.

12. Nōlīte exīstimāre, don´t think.

13. proeliīs, § 501. 15.
14. citeriōre Galliā. This name is applied to Cisalpine Gaul, or

Gaul south of the Alps.

15. Haec, obj. of dīxisset.

16. Hoc idem, obj. of iūrāvērunt.
17. animō, § 501. 30.
18. praesidiō castrīs, § 501. 17.
19. Quod, obj. of animadvertit.
20. aciem, subj. of prōcurrere.
21. impetum, obj. of sustinēre.

LXXVI. THE TRIUMPH OF CAESAR

Pompēiō amīcīsque eius superātīs atque omnibus hostibus ubīque victīs,

Caesar imperātor Rōmam rediit et 1extrā

moenia urbis in campō Mārtiō castra posuit. Tum vērō amplissimīs

honōribus adfectus est. Dictātor creātus est, et eī triumphus ā senātū

est dēcrētus. 2Quō diē de Gallīs triumphum

 ēgit, tanta multitūdō hominum in urbem undique
cōnflūxit 3ut omnia loca essent cōnferta. Templa
patēbant, ārae

fūmābant, columnae sertīs ōrnātae erant. 4Cum

vērō pompa urbem intrāret, quantus hominum fremitus

ortus est! Prīmum

per portam ingressī sunt senātus et magistrātūs. Secūtī

sunt tībīcinēs,

signiferī, peditēs laureā corōnātī canentēs: “Ecce Caesar

nunc

SIGNIFER triumphat, quī subēgit Galliam,” et “Mīlle, mīlle, mīlle,

mīlle Gallōs

trucīdāvimus.” Multī praedam captārum urbium portābant, arma, omnia

bellī īnstrūmenta. Secūtī sunt equitēs, animōsīs atque splendidissimē

ōrnātīs equīs vectī, inter quōs Pūblius adulēscēns fortissimus

habēbātur. Addūcēbantur taurī, arietēs, 5quī

dīs immortālibus immolārentur. Ita longō agmine prōgrediēns exercitus

6sacrā viā per forum in Capitōlium

perrēxit.

Imperātor ipse cum urbem intrāret, undique laetō clāmōre multitūdinis

salūtātus est. Stābat in currū aureō quem quattuor albī equī vehēbant.

Indūtus 7togā pictā, alterā manū habēnās et

lauream

tenēbat, alterā eburneum

scēptrum. Post eum servus in
currū stāns auream

corōnam super caput eius

tenēbat. Ante currum miserrimī
captīvī, rēgēs

prīncipēsque superātārum
gentium, catēnīs vīnctī,
prōgrediēbantur; et

vīgintī quattuor līctōrēs 8

laureatās fascīs

ferentēs et signiferī currum

Caesaris comitābantur. Conclūdit
agmen
LICTORES CUM FASCIBUS
multitūdō captīvōrum, quī, in
servitūtem redāctī, 9 dēmissō
vultū, vīnctīs 10 bracchiīs, sequuntur; quibuscum veniunt longissimō ōrdine
mīlitēs, etiam

hī praedam vel insignia mīlitāria ferentēs.

Caesar cum Capitōlium ascendisset, in templō Iovī Capitōlīnō sacra

fēcit. Simul 11 captivōrum quī nōbilissimī

erant, abductī in carcerem, 12 interfectī

sunt. Sacrīs factīs Caesar dē Capitōliō dēscendit et in forō mīitibus

suīs honōrēs mīlitārīs dedit eīsque pecūniam ex bellī praedā

distribuit.
Hīs omnibus rēbus cōnfectīs, Pūblius Caesarem valēre 13 iussit et quam
celerrimē ad vīllam contendit ut patrem

mātremque salūtāret.

15Dē rēbus gestīs P. Cornēlī Lentulī

hāctenus.
1. A victorious general with his army was not allowed to enter the city

until the day of his triumph. A triumph was the greatest of all military

honors.

2. Quō diē, on the day that, abl. of time.

3. ut ... essent, § 501. 43.
4. Cum ... intrāret, § 501. 46.
5. quī ... immolārentur, § 501. 40.
6. The Sacred Way was a noted street running along one side of the Forum

to the base of the Capitoline Hill, on whose summit stood the

magnificent temple of Jupiter Capitolinus. This route was always

followed by triumphal processions.

7. The toga picta worn by a general in his triumph was a splendid

robe of Tyrian purple covered with golden stars. See Plate IV, p. 213.

8. The lictors were a guard of honor that attended the higher

magistrates and made a way for them through the streets. On their

shoulders they carried the fasces, a bundle of rods with an ax in

the middle, symbolizing the power of the law.

9. dēmissō vultū, with downcast countenance.

10. vīnctīs, from vinciō.
12. Simul, etc., At the same time those of the captives who

were the noblest.

12. The prison was a gloomy dungeon on the lower slopes of the
Capitoline Hill.

13. valēre iussit, bade farewell to.

14. This sentence marks the end of the story.

APPENDIX I

DECLENSIONS, CONJUGATIONS, NUMERALS, ETC.

NOUNS

460. Nouns are inflected in five declensions, distinguished by the final

letter of the stem and by the termination of the genitive singular.

First Declension—Ā-stems,

Gen. Sing. -ae

Second Declension—O-stems,

Gen. Sing. -ī

Third Declension—Consonant stems

and I-stems, Gen. Sing. -is

Fourth Declension—U-stems,

Gen. Sing. -ūs

Fifth Declension—Ē-stems,

Gen. Sing. -ē̆ī

461. FIRST DECLENSION. Ā-STEMS

 domina, lady

Stem dominā-

Base domin-

Singular Plural
TERMINATIONS TERMINATIONS
Nom. domina -a dominae -ae
Gen. dominae -ae dominārum -ārum
Dat. dominae -ae dominīs -īs
Acc. dominam -am dominās -ās
Abl. dominā -ā dominīs -īs

a. Dea and fīlia have the termination -ābus in the dative and ablative
plural.
462. SECOND DECLENSION. O-STEMS

a. Masculines in -us

dominus, master

Stem domino-

Base domin-

Singular Plural
TERMINATIONS TERMINATIONS
Nom. dominus -us dominī -ī
Gen. dominī -ī dominōrum -ōrum
Dat. dominō -ō dominīs -īs
Acc. dominum -um dominōs -ōs
Abl. dominō -ō dominīs -īs

1. Nouns in -us of the second declension have the termination

-e´ in the vocative singular, as domine.

2. Proper names in -ius, and filius, end in -ī in the vocative singular, and the
accent rests on the penult, as

Vergi´lī, fīlī.

b. Neuters in -um

pīlum, spear

Stem

pīlo- Base pīl-

Singular Plural
TERMINATIONS TERMINATIONS
Nom. pīlum -um pīla -a
Gen. pīlī -ī pīlōrum -ōrum
Dat. pīlō -ō pīlīs -īs
Acc. pīlum -um pīla -a
Abl. pīlō -ō pīlīs -īs

1. Masculines in -ius and neuters in -ium end in

-ī in the genitive singular, not in -iī, and the

accent rests on the penult.

c. Masculines in -er AND -ir

puer, boy ager, field vir, man

Stems puero- agro- viro-
Bases puer- agr- vir-
Singular TERMINATIONS
 Nom. puer ager vir —
Gen. puerī agrī virī -ī
Dat. puerō agrō virō -ō
Acc. puerum agrum virum -um
Abl. puerō agrō virō -ō
Plural
Nom. puerī agrī virī -ī
Gen. puerōrum agrōrum virōrum -ōrum
Dat. puerīs agrīs virīs -īs
Acc. puerōs agrōs virōs -ōs
Abl. puerīs agrīs virīs -īs

463. THIRD DECLENSION.

1. Stems that add -s to the base to

form the nominative singular:

masculines and feminines only.

I.
CLASSIFICATION Consonant 2. Stems that add no termination in
Stems
the nominitive singular: a.
masculines and feminines; b.
neuters.

II. I-Stems. Masculines, feminines, and neuters.

464. I. CONSONANT STEMS

1. Nouns that add -s to the base to form the nominative

singular: masculines and feminines only

prīnceps, m., mīles, m., lapis, m., stone

 chief soldier
Bases
or prīncip- mīlit- lapid-
Stems
Singular TERMINATIONS
Nom. prīnceps mīles lapis -s
Gen. prīn´cipis mīlitis lapidis -is
Dat. prīn´cipī mīlitī lapidī -ī
Acc. prīn´cipem mīlitem lapidem -em
Abl. prīn´cipe mīlite lapide -e
Plural
Nom. prīn´cipēs mīlitēs lapidēs -ēs
Gen. prīn´cipum mīlitum lapidum -um
Dat. prīnci´pibus mīlitibus lapidibus -ibus
Acc. prīn´cipēs mīlitēs lapidēs -ēs
Abl. prīnci´pibus mīlitibus lapidibus -ibus

rēx, m., king iūdex, m., virtūs, f.,

judge manliness
Bases
or rēg- iūdic- virtūt-
Stems
Nom. rēx iūdex virtūs -s
Gen. rēgis iūdicis virtū´tis -is
Dat. rēgī iūdicī virtū´tī -ī
Acc. rēgem iūdicem virtū´tem -em
Abl. rēge iūdice virtū´te -e
Plural
Nom. rēgēs iūdicēs virtū´tēs -ēs
Gen. rēgum iūdicum virtū´tum -um
Dat. rēgibus iūdicibus virtū´tibus -ibus
Acc. rēgēs iūdicēs virtū´tēs -ēs
 Abl. rēgibus iūdicibus virtū´tibus -ibus

Note. For consonant changes in the

nominative singular, cf.

§ 233. 3.

2. Nouns that have no termination in the nominative

singular

a. Masculines and Feminines

cōnsul, m., legiō, f., ōrdō, m., pater,

consul legion row m.,
father
Bases
or cōnsul- legiōn- ōrdin- patr-
Stems
Singular TERMINATIONS
Nom. cōnsul legiō ōrdō pater —
Gen. cōnsulis legiōnis ōrdinis patris -is
Dat. cōnsulī legiōnī ōrdinī patrī -ī
Acc. cōnsulem legiōnem ōrdinem patrem -em
Abl. cōnsule legiōne ōrdine patre -e
Plural
Nom. cōnsulēs legiōnēs ōrdinēs patrēs -ēs
Gen. cōnsulum legiōnum ōrdinum patrum -um
Dat. cōnsulibus legiōnibus ōrdinibus patribus -ibus
Acc. cōnsulēs legiōnēs ōrdinēs patrēs -ēs
Abl. cōnsulibus legiōnibus ōrdinibus patribus -ibus

Note. For vowel and consonant changes

in the nominative singular, cf.

§ 236. 1-3.

b. Neuters

flūmen, tempus, n., opus, n., caput,

n., river time work n., head
Bases
or flūmin- tempor- oper- capit-
Stems
Singular TERMINATIONS
Nom. flūmen tempus opus caput —
Gen. flūminis temporis operis capitis - -is
is
Dat. flūminī temporī operī capitī -ī
Acc. flūmen tempus opus caput —
Abl. flūmine tempore opere capite -e
Plural
Nom. flūmina tempora opera capita -a
Gen. flūminum temporum operum capitum -um
Dat. flūminibus temporibus operibus capitibus -ibus
Acc. flūmina tempora opera capita -a
Abl. flūminibus temporibus operibus capitibus -ibus

Note. For vowel and consonant changes

in the nominative singular, cf.

§ 238. 2, 3.

465. II. I-STEMS

a. Masculines and Feminines
 caedēs, f., hostis, urbs, cliēns, m.,
slaughter m., f., city retainer
enemy
Stems caedi- hosti- urbi- clienti-
Bases caed- host- urb- client-
Singular TERMINATIONS
Nom. caedēs hostis urbs cliēns -s, -is, or -ēs
Gen. caedis hostis urbis clientis -is
Dat. caedī hostī urbī clientī -ī
Acc. caedem hostem urbem clientem -em (-im)
Abl. caede hoste urbe cliente -e (-ī)
Plural
Nom. caedēs hostēs urbēs clientēs -ēs
Gen. caedium hostium urbium clientium -ium
Dat. caedibus hostibus urbibus clientibus -ibus
Acc. caedīs, -ēs hostīs, -ēs urbīs, clientīs, -ēs -īs, -ēs
-ēs
Abl. caedibus hostibus urbibus clientibus -ibus

1. Avis, cīvis, fīnis, ignis,

nāvis, have the abl. sing. in -ī or -e.

2. Turris has accusative turrim and ablative

turrī or turre.

b. Neuters

īnsigne, n., animal, n., calcar, n.,

decoration animal spur
Stems īnsigni- animāli- calcāri-
Bases īnsign- animāl- calcār-
 Singular TERMINATIONS

Nom. īnsigne animal calcar -e or —

Gen. īnsignis animālis calcāris -is
Dat. īnsignī animālī calcārī -ī
Acc. īnsigne animal calcar -e or —
Abl. īnsignī animālī calcārī -ī
Plural
Nom. īnsignia animālia calcāria -ia
Gen. īnsignium animālium calcārium -ium
Dat. īnsignibus animālibus calcāribus -ibus
Acc. īnsignia animālia calcāria -ia
Abl. īnsignibus animālibus calcāribus -ibus

466. THE FOURTH DECLENSION. U-STEMS

adventus, m., arrival cornū, n., horn

Stems adventu- cornu-
Bases advent- corn-
TERMINATIONS
Singular MASC. NEUT.
Nom. adventus cornū -us -ū
Gen. adventūs cornūs -ūs -ūs
Dat. adventuī (ū) cornū -uī (ū) -ū
Acc. adventum cornū -um -ū
Abl. adventū cornū -ū -ū
Plural
Nom. adventūs cornua -ūs -ua
Gen. adventuum cornuum -uum -uum
Dat. adventibus cornibus -ibus -ibus
Acc. adventūs cornua -ūs -ua
Abl. adventibus cornibus -ibus -ibus
467. THE FIFTH DECLENSION. Ē-STEMS

diēs, m., day rēs, f. thing

Stems diē- rē-
Bases di- r-
Singular TERMINATIONS
Nom. diēs rēs -ēs
Gen. diēī reī -ē̆ī
Dat. diēī reī -ē̆ī
Acc. diem rem -em
Abl. diē rē -ē
Plural
Nom. diēs rēs -ēs
Gen. diērum rērum -ērum
Dat. diēbus rēbus -ēbus
Acc. diēs rēs -ēs
Abl. diēbus rēbus -ēbus

468. SPECIAL PARADIGMS

deus, m., domus, f., vīs, f., iter, n., way

god house strength
Stems
deo- domu- vī- and vīri- iter- and
itiner-
Bases
de- dom- v- and vīr- iter- and
itiner-
Singular
Nom. deus domus vīs iter
Gen. deī domūs vīs (rare) itineris
Dat. deō domuī, -ō vī (rare) itinerī
Acc. deum domum vim iter
 Abl. deō domō, -ū vī itinere
Plural
Nom. deī, dī domūs vīrēs itinera
Gen. deōrum, domuum, vīrium itinerum
deum -ōrum
Dat. deīs, dīs domibus vīribus itineribus
Acc. deōs domōs, -ūs vīrīs, -ēs itinera
Abl. deīs, dīs domibus vīribus itineribus

a. The vocative singular of deus is like the

nominative.

b. The locative of domus is domī.

ADJECTIVES

469. FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS. O- AND

Ā-STEMS

a. Adjectives in -us

bonus, good

Stems bono- m. and n.,

bona- f.

Base bon-

Singular
MASC. FEM. NEUT.
Nom. bonus bona bonum
Gen. bonī bonae bonī
 Dat. bonō bonae bonō
Acc. bonum bonam bonum
Abl. bonō bonā bonō
Plural
Nom. bonī bonae bona
Gen. bonōrum bonārum bonōrum
Dat. bonīs bonīs bonīs
Acc. bonōs bonās bona
Abl. bonīs bonīs bonīs

b. Adjectives in -er

līber, free

Stems lībero- m. and n.,

līberā- f.

Base līber-

Singular
MASC. FEM. NEUT.
Nom. līber lībera līberum
Gen. līberī līberae līberī
Dat. līberō līberae līberō
Acc. līberum līberam līberum
Abl. līberō līberā līberō
Plural
Nom. līberī līberae lībera
Gen. līberōrum līberārum līberōrum
Dat. līberīs līberīs līberīs
Acc. līberōs līberās lībera
 Abl. līberīs līberīs līberīs

pulcher, pretty

Stems pulchro- m. and n.,

pulchrā- f.

Base pulchr-

Singular
MASC. FEM. NEUT.
Nom. pulcher pulchra pulchrum
Gen. pulchrī pulchrae pulchrī
Dat. pulchrō pulchrae pulchrō
Acc. pulchrum pulchram pulchrum
Abl. pulchrō pulchrā pulchrō
Plural
Nom. pulchrī pulchrae pulchra
Gen. pulchrōrum pulchrārum pulchrōrum
Dat. pulchrīs pulchrīs pulchrīs
Acc. pulchrōs pulchrās pulchra
Abl. pulchrīs pulchrīs pulchrīs

470. THE NINE IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES

alius, another

Stems alio- m. and n.,

aliā- f.

Base ali-
 Singular Plural
MASC. FEM. NEUT. MASC. FEM. NEUT.
Nom. alius alia aliud aliī aliae alia
Gen. alīus alīus alīus aliōrum aliārum aliōrum
Dat. aliī aliī aliī aliīs aliīs aliīs
Acc. alium aliam aliud aliōs aliās alia
Abl. aliō aliā aliō aliīs aliīs aliīs
ūnus, one, only

Stems ūno- m. and n.,

ūnā- f.

Base ūn-

MASC. FEM. NEUT. MASC. FEM. NEUT.

Nom. ūnus ūna ūnum ūnī ūnae ūna
Gen. ūnīus ūnīus ūnīus ūnōrum ūnārum ūnōrum
Dat. ūnī ūnī ūnī ūnīs ūnīs ūnīs
Acc. ūnum ūnam ūnum ūnōs ūnās ūna
Abl. ūnō ūnā ūnō ūnīs ūnīs ūnīs

a. For the complete list see

§ 108.

471. ADJECTIVES OF THE THIRD DECLENSION.

I-STEMS

I. THREE ENDINGS

ācer, ācris, ācre, keen, eager Stem ācri-

Base ācr-
 Singular Plural
MASC. FEM. NEUT. MASC. FEM. NEUT.
Nom. ācer ācris ācre ācrēs ācrēs ācria
Gen. ācris ācris ācris ācrium ācrium ācrium
Dat. ācrī ācrī ācrī ācribus ācribus ācribus
Acc. ācrem ācrem ācre ācrīs, -ēs ācrīs, -ēs ācria
Abl. ācrī ācrī ācrī ācribus ācribus ācribus

II. TWO ENDINGS

omnis, omne, every, all Stem omni-

Base omn-

Singular Plural
MASC. AND FEM. NEUT. MASC. AND FEM. NEUT.
Nom. omnis omne omnēs omnia
Gen. omnis omnis omnium omnium
Dat. omnī omnī omnibus omnibus
Acc. omnem omne omnīs, -ēs omnia
Abl. omnī omnī omnibus omnibus

III. ONE ENDING

pār, equal

Stem pari-

Base par-

Singular Plural
MASC. AND FEM. NEUT. MASC. AND FEM. NEUT.
Nom. pār pār parēs paria
 Gen. paris paris parium parium
Dat. parī parī paribus paribus
Acc. parem pār parīs, -ēs paria
Abl. parī parī paribus paribus
1. Observe that all i-stem adjectives have -ī in the ablative

singular.

This sentence appears to be a footnote, but

there is no footnote tag

on the page.

472. PRESENT ACTIVE PARTICIPLES

amāns, loving

Stem amanti-

Base amant-

Singular Plural
MASC. AND FEM. NEUT. MASC. AND FEM. NEUT.
Nom. amāns amāns amantēs amantia
Gen. amantis amantis amantium amantium
Dat. amantī amantī amantibus amantibus
Acc. amantem amāns amantīs, -ēs amantia
Abl. amante, -ī amante, -ī amantibus amantibus
iēns, going

Stem ienti-, eunti-

Base ient-, eunt-

 Nom. iēns iēns euntēs euntia
Gen. euntis euntis euntium euntium
Dat. euntī euntī euntibus euntibus
Acc. euntem iēns euntīs, -ēs euntia
Abl. eunte, -ī eunte, -ī euntibus euntibus

473. REGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES

Positive Comparative Superlative

MASC. MASC. AND NEUT. MASC. FEM. NEUT.
FEM.
altus (alto-) altior altius altissimus -a -um
līber (lībero-) līberior līberius līberrimus -a -um
pulcher pulchrior pulchrius pulcherrimus -a -um
(pulchro-)
audāx audācior audācius audācissimus -a -um
(audāci-)
brevis (brevi-) brevior brevius brevissimus -a -um
ācer (ācri-) ācrior ācrius ācerrimus -a -um

474. DECLENSION OF COMPARATIVES

altior, higher
Singular Plural
MASC. AND FEM. NEUT. MASC. AND FEM. NEUT.
Nom. altior altius altiōrēs altiōra
Gen. altiōris altiōris altiōrum altiōrum
Dat. altiōrī altiōrī altiōribus altiōribus
Acc. altiōrem altius altiōrēs altiōra
Abl. altiōre altiōre altiōribus altiōribus
plūs, more
 Nom. —— plūs plūrēs plūra
Gen. —— plūris plūrium plūrium
Dat. —— —— plūribus plūribus
Acc. —— plūs plūrīs (-ēs) plūra
Abl. —— plūre plūribus plūribus

475. IRREGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES

Positive Comparative Superlative

bonus, -a, -um, good melior, melius, optimus, -a, -um, best
better
malus, -a, -um, bad peior, peius, worse pessimus, -a, -um,
worst
magnus, -a, -um, maior, maius, maximus, -a, -um,
great greater greatest
multus, -a, -um, ——, plūs, more plūrimus, -a, -um, most
much
parvus, -a, -um, minor, minus, minimus, -a, -um,
small smaller smallest
senex, senis, old senior maximus nātū
iuvenis, -e, young iūnior minimus nātū
vetus, veteris, old vetustior, -ius veterrimus, -a, -um
facilis, -e, easy facilior, -ius facillimus, -a, -um
difficilis, -e, difficult difficilior, -ius difficillimus, -a, -um
similis, -e, similar similior, -ius simillimus, -a, -um
dissimilis, -e, dissimilior, -ius dissimillimus, -a, -um
dissimilar
humilis, -e, low humilior, -ius humillimus, -a, -um
gracilis, -e, slender gracilior, -ius gracillimus, -a, -um
exterior, outer, extrēmus outermost,
exterus, outward
exterior extimus last
īnferus, below īnferior, lower īnfimus lowest
 īmus
postrēmus
posterus, following posterior, later last
postumus
suprēmus
superus, above superior, higher highest
summus
[cis, citrā, on this citerior, hither citimus, hithermost
side]
[in, intrā, in, within] interior, inner intimus, inmost
[prae, prō, before] prior, former prīmus, first
[prope, near] propior, nearer proximus, next
[ultrā, beyond] ulterior, further ultimus, furthest

476. REGULAR COMPARISON OF ADVERBS

Positive Comparative Superlative

cārē (cārus), dearly cārius cārissimē
miserē (miser), wretchedly miserius miserrimē
ācriter (ācer), sharply ācrius ācerrimē
facile (facilis), easily facilius facillimē

477. IRREGULAR COMPARISON OF ADVERBS

Positive Comparative Superlative

diū, long, a long time diūtius diūtissimē
bene (bonus), well melius, better optimē, best
male (malus), ill peius, worse pessimē, worst
magnopere, greatly magis, more maximē, most
multum (multus), much plūs, more plūrimum, most
parum, little minus, less minimē, least
saepe, often saepīus saepissimē

478. NUMERALS
The cardinal numerals are indeclinable excepting ūnus, duo,

trēs, the hundreds above one hundred, and mīlle used as a

noun. The ordinals are declined like bonus, -a, -um.

Cardinals Ordinals
(How many) (In what order)

1, ūnus, -a, -um, one prīmus, -a, -um first

2, duo, duae, duo two secundus (or alter) second
3, trēs, tria three, tertius third,
4, quattuor etc. quārtus etc.
5, quīnque quīntus
6, sex sextus
7, septem septimus
8, octō octāvus
9, novem nōnus
10, decem decimus
11, ūndecim ūndecimus
12, duodecim duodecimus
13, tredecim (decem (et) trēs) tertius decimus
14, quattuordecim quārtus decimus
15, quīndecim quīntus decimus

16, sēdecim sextus decimus

17, septendecim septimus decimus
18, duodēvīgintī (octōdecim) duodēvīcēnsimus
19, ūndēvīgintī (novendecim) ūndēvīcēnsimus
20, vīgintī vīcēnsimus
21, vīgintī ūnus or vīcēnsimus prīmus
ūnus et vīgintī, etc.
 or
ūnus et vīcēnsimus, etc.

30, trīgintā trīcēnsimus

40, quadrāgintā quadrāgēnsimus
50, quīnquāgintā quīnquāgēnsimus
60, sexāgintā sexāgēnsimus
70, septuāgintā septuāgēnsimus
80, octōgintā octōgēnsimus
90, nōnāgintā nōnāgēnsimus
100, centum centum
101, centum (et) ūnus, etc. centum (et) ūnus, etc.
120, centum (et) vīgintī centum (et) vīgintī
121, centum (et) vīgintī ūnus, etc. centum (et) vīgintī ūnus, etc.
200, ducentī, -ae, -a ducentī, -ae, -a
300, trecentī trecentī
400, quadringentī quadringentī
500, quīngentī quīngentī
600, sescentī sescentī
700, septingentī septingentī
800, octingentī octingentī
900, nōngentī nōngentī
1000, mīlle mīlle

479. Declension of duo, two, trēs, three, and

mīlle, a thousand.

M.
Masc. Fem. Neut. Neut. Sing. Plur.
and F.

N. duo duae duo trēs trīa mīlle mīlia

 G. duōrum duārum duōrum trium trium mīlle mīlium
D. duōbus duābus duōbus tribus tribus mīlle mīlibus
A. duōs or duās duo trīs or tria mīlle mīlia
duo trēs
A. duōbus duābus duōbus tribus tribus mīlle mīlibus

Note. Mīlle is used in the

plural as a noun with a modifying genitive, and is occasionally so used

in the nominative and accusative singular. For the declension of

ūnus cf. § 470.

PRONOUNS

480. PERSONAL

ego, I tū, you suī,

of himself, etc.

Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur.

Nom. ego nōs tū vōs —— ——
Gen. meī nostrum, -trī tuī vestrum, -trī suī suī
Dat. mihi nōbīs tibi vōbīs sibi sibi
Acc. mē nōs tē vōs sē, sēsē sē, sēsē
Abl. mē nōbīs tē vōbīs sē, sēsē sē, sēsē

Note that suī is always reflexive.

481. DEMONSTRATIVE

Demonstratives belong to the first and second declensions, but have

the pronominal endings -ī̆us and -ī in the gen. and dat.

sing.

ipse, self
Singular Plural
MASC. FEM. NEUT. MASC. FEM. NEUT.
Nom. ipse ipsa ipsum ipsī ipsae ipsa
Gen. ipsī´us ipsī´us ipsī´us ipsōrum ipsārum ipsōrum
Dat. ipsī ipsī ipsī ipsīs ipsīs ipsīs
Acc. ipsum ipsam ipsum ipsōs ipsās ipsa
Abl. ipsō ipsā ipsō ipsīs ipsīs ipsīs
hic, this (here), he
Nom. hic haec hoc hī hae haec
Gen. huius huius huius hōrum hārum hōrum
Dat. huic huic huic hīs hīs hīs
Acc. hunc hanc hoc hōs hās haec
Abl. hōc hāc hōc hīs hīs hīs
iste, this, that (of yours), he
Nom. iste ista istud istī istae ista
Gen. istī´us istī´us istī´us istōrum istārum istōrum
Dat. istī istī istī istīs istīs istīs
Acc. istum istam istud istōs istās ista
Abl. istō istā istō istīs istīs istīs
ille, that (yonder), he
Nom. ille illa illud illī illae illa
Gen. illī´us illī´us illī´us illōrum illārum illōrum
Dat. illī illī illī illīs illīs illīs
Acc. illum illam illud illōs illās illa
Abl. illō illā illō illīs illīs illīs
is, this, that, he
 Nom. is ea id iī, eī eae ea
Gen. eius eius eius eōrum eārum eōrum
Dat. eī eī eī iīs, eīs iīs, eīs iīs, eīs
Acc. eum eam id eōs eās ea
Abl. eō eā eō iīs, eīs iīs, eīs iīs, eīs
īdem, the same
iī´dem
Nom. īdem e´adem idem eae´dem e´adem
eī´dem
Gen. eius eius eius eōrun eārun eōrun
´dem ´dem ´dem ´dem ´dem ´dem
iīs´dem iīs´dem iīs´dem
Dat. eī´dem eī´dem eī´dem
eīs´dem eīs´dem eīs´dem
Acc. eun ean idem eōs´dem eās´dem e´adem
´dem ´dem
iīs´dem iīs´dem iīs´dem
Abl. eō´dem eā´dem eō´dem
eīs´dem eīs´dem eīs´dem

Note. In the plural of is and

īdem the forms with two i’s are preferred, the two i’s being

pronounced as one.

482. RELATIVE

quī, who, which, that

Singular Plural
MASC. FEM. NEUT. MASC. FEM. NEUT.
Nom. quī quae quod quī quae quae
Gen. cuius cuius cuius quōrum quārum quōrum
Dat. cui cui cui quibus quibus quibus
Acc. quem quam quod quōs quās quae
Abl. quō quā quō quibus quibus quibus
483. INTERROGATIVE

quis, substantive, who, what

Singular Plural
MASC. AND FEM. NEUT. MASC. FEM. NEUT.
Nom. quis quid qui quae quae
Gen. cuius cuius quōrum quārum quōrum
Dat. cui cui quibus quibus quibus
Acc. quem quid quōs quās quae
Abl. quō quō quibus quibus quibus

The interrogative adjective quī, quae, quod, is declined like

the relative.

484. INDEFINITES

quis and quī, as declined above, 1 are used also as indefinites (some, any).
The

other indefinites are compounds of quis and quī.

quisque, each
Substantive Adjective
MASC. AND FEM. NEUT. MASC. FEM. NEUT.
Nom. quisque quidque quisque quaeque quodque
Gen. cuius´que cuius´que cuius´que cuius´que cuius´que
Dat. cuique cuique cuique cuique cuique
Acc. quemque quidque quemque quamque quodque
Abl. quōque quōque quōque quāque quōque

1. qua is generally used instead of quae in the feminine

nominative singular and in the neuter nominative and accusative

plural.
485. quīdam, a certain one, a

certain

Observe that in the neuter singular the adjective has quoddam and the
substantive quiddam.

Singular
MASC. FEM. NEUT.
quoddam
Nom. quīdam quaedam
quiddam (subst.)
Gen. cuius´dam cuius´dam cuius´dam
Dat. cuidam cuidam cuidam
quoddam
Acc. quendam quandam
quiddam (subst.)
Abl. quōdam quādam quōdam
Plural
Nom. quīdam quaedam quaedam
Gen. quōrun´dam quārun´dam quōrun´dam
Dat. quibus´dam quibus´dam quibus´dam
Acc. quōsdam quāsdam quaedam
Abl. quibus´dam quibus´dam quibus´dam

486. quisquam, substantive, any one (at all)

MASC. AND FEM. NEUT.

Nom. quisquam quicquam (quidquam)
Gen. cuius´quam cuius´quam
Dat. cuiquam cuiquam
Acc. quemquam quicquam (quidquam)
Abl. quōquam quōquam

487. aliquis, substantive, some one.

aliquī, adjective, some

Singular
Substantive Adjective
MASC. AND FEM. NEUT. MASC. FEM. NEUT.
Nom. aliquis aliquid aliquī aliqua aliquod
Gen. alicu´ius alicu´ius alicu´ius alicu´ius alicu´ius
Dat. alicui alicui alicui alicui alicui
Acc. aliquem aliquid aliquem aliquam aliquod
Abl. aliquō aliquō aliquō aliquā aliquō

Plural for both Substantive and Adjective

MASC. FEM. NEUT.

Nom. aliquī aliquae aliqua
Gen. aliquō´rum aliquā´rum aliquō´rum
Dat. ali´quibus ali´quibus ali´quibus
Acc. aliquōs aliquās aliqua
Abl. ali´quibus ali´quibus ali´quibus

a. quis (quī), any one, any, is the least

definite (§ 297. b). aliquis (aliquī), some one, some, is more definite than

quis. quisquam, any one (at all), and its adjective

ūllus, any, occur mostly with a negative, expressed or

implied, and in clauses of comparison.

REGULAR VERBS

488. FIRST CONJUGATION. Ā-VERBS.

AMŌ
 Principal Parts amō, amāre, amāvī,

amātus

Pres. Stem amā-

Perf. Stem amāv-

Part. Stem amāt-

ACTIVE PASSIVE
INDICATIVE
PRESENT
I love, am loving, do love, etc. I am loved, etc.
amō amāmus amor amāmur
amās amātis amāris, -re amāminī
amat amant amātur amantur
IMPERFECT
I loved, was loving, did love, I was loved, etc.
etc.
amābam amābāmus amābar amābāmur
amābās amābātis amābāris, -re amābāminī
amābat amābant amābātur amābantur
FUTURE
I shall love, etc. I shall be loved, etc.
amābō amābimus amābor amābimur
amābis amābitis amāberis, -re amābiminī
amābit amābunt amābitur amābuntur
PERFECT
I have loved, loved, did love, I have been (was) loved, etc.
etc.
amāvi amāvimus amātus, - sum amātī, - sumus
amāvistī amāvistis a, -um es ae, -a estis
amāvit amāvērunt, -re est sunt
PLUPERFECT
I had loved, etc. I had been loved, etc.
amāveram amāverāmus eram erāmus
amātus, - amātī, -
amāverās amāverātis erās erātis
a, -um ae, -a
amāverat amāverant erat erant
FUTURE PERFECT
I shall have loved, etc. I shall have been loved, etc.
amāverō amāverimus erō erimus
amātus, - amātī, -
amāveris amāveritis eris eritis
a, -um ae, -a
amāverit amāverint erit erunt
SUBJUNCTIVE
PRESENT
amem amēmus amer amēmur
amēs amētis amēris, -re amēminī
amet ament amētur amentur
IMPERFECT
amārem amāremus amārer amārēmur
amārēs amārētis amārēris, -re amārēminī
amāret amārent amārētur amārentur
PERFECT
amāverim amāverimus sim sīmus
amātus, - amātī, -
amāveris amāveritis sīs sītis
a, -um ae, -a
amāverit amāverint sit sint
PLUPERFECT
amāvissem amāvissēmus essem essēmus
amātus, - amātī, -
amāvissēs amāvissētis essēs essētis
a, -um ae, -a
amāvisset amāvissent esset essent
IMPERATIVE

PRESENT
amā, love thou amāre, be thou loved
 amāte, love ye amāminī, be ye loved
FUTURE
amātō, thou shalt love amātor, thou shalt be loved
amātō, he shall love amātor, he shall be loved
amātōte, you shall love ——
amantō, they shall love amantor, they shall be loved
INFINITIVE
Pres. amāre, to love amārī, to be loved
Perf. amāvisse, to have loved amātus, -a, -um esse, to have been
loved
Fut. amātūrus, -a, -um esse, [amātum īrī], to be about to be loved
to be about to

love

PARTICIPLES
Pres. amāns, -antis, loving Pres. ——
Fut. amātūrus, -a, -um, Gerundive 1 amandus, -a, -um, to be
about to love
loved

Perf. —— Perf. amātus, -a, -um, having been

loved,

loved

GERUND
Nom. —— SUPINE (Active Voice)
Gen. amandī, of loving Acc. [amātum], to love
Dat. amandō, for loving Abl. [amātū], to love, in the loving
Acc. amandum, loving
Abl. amandō, by loving

1. Sometimes called the future passive participle.

489. SECOND CONJUGATION. Ē-VERBS.

MONEŌ

Principal Parts moneō, monēre, monuī, monitus

Pres. Stem monē-

Perf. Stem monu-

Part. Stem monit-

ACTIVE PASSIVE
INDICATIVE
PRESENT
I advise, etc., I am advised, etc.
moneō monēmus moneor monēmur
monēs monētis monēris, -re monēminī
monet monent monētur monentur
IMPERFECT
I was advising, etc., I was advised, etc.
monēbam monēbāmus monēbar monēbāmur
monēbās monēbātis monēbāris, -re monēbāminī
monēbat monēbant monēbātur monēbāntur
FUTURE
I shall advise, etc., I shall be advised, etc.
monēbō monēbimus monēbor monēbimur
monēbis monēbitis monēberis, -re monēbiminī
monēbit monēbunt monēbitur monēbuntur
PERFECT
I have advised, I advised, etc. I have been (was) advised, etc.
monuī monuimus monitus, sum monitī, sumus
monuistī monuistis -a, es -ae, -a estis
monuit monuērunt, -re -um est sunt
 PLUPERFECT
I had advised, etc., I had been advised, etc.
monueram monuerāmus monitus, eram erāmus
-a, monitī, eratis
monuerās monuerātis eras
-ae, -a
-um
monuerat monuerant erat erant
FUTURE PERFECT
I shall have advised, etc. I shall have been advised, etc.
monuerō monuerimus monitus, erō erimus
-a, monitī, eritis
monueris monuerītis eris
-ae, -a
monuerit monuerīnt -um erit erunt
SUBJUNCTIVE
PRESENT
moneam moneāmus monear moneāmur
moneās moneātis moneāris, -re moneāminī
moneat moneant moneātur moneantur
IMPERFECT
monērem monērēmus monērer monērēmur
monērēs monērētis monērēris, -re monērēminī
monēret monērent monērētur monērentur
PERFECT
monuerim monuerimus monitus, sim sīmus
-a, monitī,
monueris monueritis sīs sītis
-ae, -a
monuerit monuerint -um sit sint
PLUPERFECT
monuissem monuissēmus monitus, essem monitī, essēmus
-a, -ae, -a
monuissēs monuissētis essēs essētis
monuisset monuissent -um esset essent
 IMPERATIVE
PRESENT
monē, advise thou monēre, be thou advised
monēte, advise ye monēminī, be ye advised
FUTURE
monētō, thou shall advise monētor, thou shalt be advised
monētō, he shall advise monētor, he shall be advised
monētōte, you shall advise ——
monentō, they shall advise monentor, they shall be advised
INFINITIVE
Pres. monēre, to advise monērī, to be advised
Perf. monuisse, to have monitus, -a, -um esse, to have been
advised advised
Fut. monitūrus, -a, -um esse, [monitum īrī], to be about to be
to be about to advised

advise

PARTICIPLES
Pres. monēns, -entis, advising Pres. ——
Fut. monitūrus, -a, -um, Ger. monendus, -a, -um, to be advised
about to advise
Perf. —— Perf. monitus, -a, -um, having been
advised,

advised

GERUND
Nom. —— SUPINE (Active Voice)
Gen. monendī, of advising Acc. [monitum], to advise
Dat. monendō, for advising Abl. [monitū], to advise, in the
advising
 Acc. monendum, advising
Abl. monendō, by advising

490. THIRD CONJUGATION. Ĕ-VERBS.

REGŌ

Principal Parts regō, regere, rexī, rēctus

Pres. Stem rege-

Perf. Stem rēx-

Part. Stem rēct-

ACTIVE PASSIVE
INDICATIVE
PRESENT
I rule, etc. I am ruled, etc.
regō regimus re´gor re´gimur
regis regitis re´geris, -re regi´minī
regit regunt re´gitur regun´tur
IMPERFECT
I was ruling, etc. I was ruled, etc.
regēbam regēbāmus regē´bar regēbā´mur
regēbās regēbātis regēbā´ris, -re regēbā´minī
regēbat regēbant regēbā´tur regēban´tur
FUTURE
I shall rule, etc. I shall be ruled, etc.
regam regēmus re´gar regē´mur
regēs regētis regē´ris, -re regē´minī
reget regent regē´tur regen´tur
PERFECT
I have ruled, etc. I have been ruled, etc.
rēxī rēximus rēctus, -a, sum rēctī, - sumus
rēxistī rēxistis -um es ae, -a estis
rēxit rēxērunt, -re est sunt
PLUPERFECT
I had ruled, etc. I had been ruled, etc.
rēxeram rēxerāmus eram erāmus
rēctus, -a, rēctī, -
rēxerās rēxerātis erās erātis
-um ae, -a
rēxerat rēxerant erat erant
FUTURE PERFECT
I shall have ruled, etc. I shall have been ruled, etc.
rēxerō rēxerimus erō erimus
rēctus, -a, rēctī, -
rēxeris rēxeritis eris eritis
-um ae, -a
rēxerit rēxerint erit erunt
SUBJUNCTIVE
PRESENT
regam regāmus regar regāmur
regās regātis regāris, -re regāminī
regat regant regātur regantur
IMPERFECT
regerem regerēmus regerer regerēmur
regerēs regerētis regerēris, -re regerēminī
regeret regerent regerētur regerentur
PERFECT
rēxerim rēxerimus sim sīmus
rēctus, -a, rēctī, -
rēxeris rēxeritis sīs sītis
-um ae, -a
rēxerit rēxerint sit sint
PLUPERFECT
rēxissem rēxissēmus essem essēmus
rēctus, -a, rēctī, -
rēxissēs rēxissētis essēs essētis
-um ae, -a
rēxisset rēxissent esset essent
IMPERATIVE
 PRESENT
rege, rule thou regere, be thou ruled
regite, rule ye regiminī, be ye ruled
FUTURE
regitō, thou shalt rule regitor, thou shalt be ruled
regitō he shall rule regitor, he shall be ruled
regitōte, ye shall rule ——
reguntō, they shall rule reguntor, they shall be ruled
INFINITIVE
Pres. regere, to rule regī, to be ruled
Perf. rēxisse, to have ruled rēctus, -a, -um esse, to have been ruled
Fut.rēctūrus, -a, -um esse, to [rēctum īrī], to be about to be ruled
be about to

rule

PARTICIPLES
Pres. regēns, -entis, ruling Pres. ——
Fut. rēctūrus, -a, -um, about Ger. regendus, -a, -um, to be ruled
to rule
Perf. —— Perf. rēctus, -a, -um, having been
ruled,

ruled

GERUND
Nom. —— SUPINE (Active Voice)
Gen. regendī, of ruling Acc [rēctum], to rule
Dat. regendō, for ruling Abl. [rēctū], to rule, in the

ruling

Acc. regendum, ruling

 Abl. regendō, by ruling

491. FOURTH CONJUGATION. Ī-VERBS.

AUDIŌ

Principal Parts audiō, audīre, audīvī, audītus

Pres. Stem audī-

Perf. Stem audīv-

Part. Stem audīt-

ACTIVE PASSIVE
INDICATIVE
PRESENT
I hear, etc. I am heard, etc.
audiō audīmus au´dior audī´mur
audīs audītis audī´ris, -re audī´minī
audit audiunt audī´tur audiun´tur
IMPERFECT
I was hearing, etc. I was heard, etc.
audiēbam audiēbāmus audiē´bar audiēbā´mur
audiēbās audiēbātis audiēbā´ris, -re audiēbā´minī
audiēbat audiēbant audiēbā´tur audiēban´tur
FUTURE
I shall hear, etc. I shall be heard, etc.
audiam audiēmus au´diar audiē´mur
audiēs audiētis audiē´ris, -re audiē´minī
audiet audient audiē´tur audien´tur
PERFECT
I have heard, etc. I have been heard, etc.
audīvī audīvimus audītus, - sum audītī, sumus
audīvistī audīvistis a, -um es -ae, -a estis
audīvit audīvērunt, -re est sunt
PLUPERFECT
I had heard, etc. I had been heard, etc.
audīveram audīverāmus eram erāmus
audītus, - audītī,
audīverās audīverātis erās erātis
a, -um -ae, -a
audīverat audīverant erat erant
FUTURE PERFECT
I shall have heard, etc. I shall have been heard, etc.
audīverō audīverimus erō erimus
audītus, - audītī,
audīveris audīveritis eris eritis
a, -um -ae, -a
audīverit audīverint erit erunt
SUBJUNCTIVE
PRESENT
audiam audiāmus audiar audiāmur
audiās audiātis audiāris, -re audiāminī
audiat audiant audiātur audiantur
IMPERFECT
audīrem audīrēmus audīrer audīrēmur
audīrēs audīrētis audīrēris, -re audīrēminī
audīret audīrent audīrētur audīrentur
PERFECT
audīverim audiverimus sim sīmus
audītus, - audītī,
audīveris audiveritis sīs sītis
a, -um -ae, -a
audīverit audīverint sit sint
PLUPERFECT
audīvissem audīvissēmus essem essēmus
audītus, - audītī,
audīvissēs audīvissētis essēs essētis
a, -um -ae, -a
audīvisset audīvissent esset essent
IMPERATIVE
PRESENT
 audī, hear thou audīre, be thou heard
audīte, hear ye audīminī, be ye heard
FUTURE
audītō, thou shalt hear audītor, thou shalt be heard
audītō, he shall hear audītor, he shall be heard
audītōte, ye shall hear ——
audiuntō, they shall hear audiuntor, they shall be heard
INFINITIVE
Pres. audīre, to hear audīrī, to be heard
audīvisse, to have heard audītus, -a, -um esse, to have been
heard
audītūrus, -a, -um esse, to be [audītum īrī, to be about to be heard
about to hear
PARTICIPLES
Pres. audiēns, -entis, hearing Pres. ——
Fut. audītūrus, -a, -um, about Ger. audiendus, -a, -um to be heard
to hear
Perf. —— Perf. audītus, -a, -um, having been
heard,

heard

GERUND
Nom. —— SUPINE (Active Voice)
Gen. audiendī, of hearing Acc. [audītum], to hear
Dat. audiendō, for hearing Abl. [audītu], to hear, in the

hearing

Acc. audiendum, hearing

Abl. audiendō, by hearing

492. THIRD CONJUGATION. VERBS IN -IŌ.

CAPIŌ

Principal Parts capiō, capere, cēpī, captus

Pres. Stem cape-

Perf. Stem cēp-

Part. Stem capt-

ACTIVE PASSIVE
INDICATIVE
PRESENT
capiō capimus ca´pior ca´pimur
capis capitis ca´peris, -re capi´minī
capit capiunt ca´pitur capiun´tur
IMPERFECT
capiēbam capiebamus capiē´bar capiēbā´mur
capiēbas capiēbātis capiēba´ris, -re capiēbā´minī
capiēbat capiēbant capiēbā´tur capieban´tur
FUTURE
capiam capiēmus ca´piar capiē´mur
capiēs capiētis capiē´ris, -re capiē´minī
capiet capient capiē´tur capien´tur
PERFECT
cēpī, cēpistī, cēpit, etc. captus, -a, -um sum, es, est, etc.
PLUPERFECT
cēperam, cēperās, cēperat, etc. captus, -a, -um eram, erās, erat, etc.
FUTURE PERFECT
cēperō, cēperis, cēperit, etc. captus, -a, -um erō, eris, erit, etc.
SUBJUNCTIVE
PRESENT
capiam, capiās, capiat, etc. capiar, -iāris, -re, -iātur, etc.
IMPERFECT
 caperem, caperēs, caperet, etc. caperer, -erēris, -re, -erētur, etc.
PERFECT
cēperim, cēperis, cēperit, etc. captus, -a, -um sim, sīs, sit, etc.
PLUPERFECT
cēpissem, cēpissēs, cēpisset, captus,-a, -um essem, essēs, esset,
etc. etc.
IMPERATIVE
PRESENT
2d Pers. cape capite capere capiminī
FUTURE
2d Pers. capitō capitōte capitor ——
3rd Pers. capitō capiuntō capitor capiuntor
INFINITIVE
Pres. capere capī
Perf. cēpisse captus, -a, -um esse
Fut. captūrus, -a, -um esse [captum īrī]
PARTICIPLES
Pres. capiēns, -ientis Pres. ——
Fut. captūrus, -a, -um Ger. capiendus, -a, -um
Perf. —— Perf. captus, -a, -um
GERUND SUPINE (Active Voice)
Gen. capiendī Acc. [captum]
etc. Abl. [captū]

493. DEPONENT VERBS

I. hortor, hortārī, hortātus sum, urge

II. vereor, verērī, veritus sum, fear
Principal Parts
III. sequor, sequī, secūtus sum, follow
IV. partior, partīrī, partītus sum, share, divide

Note. In addition to the passive

conjugation, deponent verbs use certain forms from the active. These are

marked with a star. Deponent -iō verbs of the third conjugation are

inflected like the passive of capiō.

Indicative
Pres. hortor vereor sequor partior
hortāris, -re verēris, -re sequeris, -re partīris, -re
hortātur verētur sequitur partītur
hortāmur verēmur sequimur partīmur
hortāminī verēminī sequiminī partīminī
hortantur verentur sequuntur partiuntur
Impf. hortābar verēbar sequēbar partiēbar
Fut. hortābor verēbor sequar partiar
Perf. hortātus sum veritus sum secūtus sum partītus sum
Plup. hortātus eram veritus eram secūtus eram partītus eram
F. P. hortātus erō veritus erō secūtus erō partītus erō
Subjunctive
Pres. horter verear sequar partiar
Impf. hortārer verērer sequerer partīrer
Perf. hortātus sim veritus sim secūtus sim partītus sim
Plup. hortātus essem veritus secūtus partītus essem
essem essem
Imperative
Pres. hortāre verēre sequere partīre
Fut. hortātor verētor sequitor partītor
Infinitive
Pres. hortārī verērī sequī partīrī
Perf. hortātus esse veritus esse secūtus esse partītus esse
Fut. *hortātūrus *veritūrus *secūtūrus *partītūrus
 esse esse esse esse
Participles
Pres. *hortāns *verēns *sequēns *partiēns
Fut. *hortāturus *veritūrus *secūtūrus *partītūrus
Perf. hortātus veritus secūtus partītus
Ger. hortandus verendus sequendus partiendus
Gerund
*hortandī, etc. *verendī, etc. *sequendī, *partiendī,
etc. etc.
Supine
*[hortātus, -tū] *[veritum, - *[secūtum, - *[partītum, -
tū] tū] tū]

IRREGULAR VERBS

494. sum, am, be

Principal Parts sum, esse, fuī, futūrus

Pres. Stem es-

Perf. Stem fu-

Part. Stem fut-

Indicative
Present
SINGULAR PLURAL
sum, I am sumus, we are
es, thou art estis, you are
est, he (she, it) is sunt, they are
Imperfect
eram, I was erāmus, we were
erās, thou wast erātis, you were
erat, he was erant, they were
Future
erō, I shall be erimus, we shall be
eris, thou wilt be eritis, you will be
erit, he will be erunt, they will be
Perfect
fuī, I have been, was fuimus, we have been, were
fuistī, thou hast been, wast fuistis, you have been, were
fuit, he has been, was fuērunt, fuēre, they have been,

were

Pluperfect
fueram, I had been fuerāmus, we had been
fuerās, thou hadst been fuerātis, you had been
fuerat, he had been fuerant, they had been
Future Perfect
fuerō, I shall have been fuerimus, we shall have been
fueris, thou wilt have been fueritis, you will have been
fuerit, he will have been fuerint, they will have been
Subjunctive
Present Imperfect
SINGULAR PLURAL SINGULAR PLURAL
sim sīmus essem essēmus
sīs sītis essēs essētis
sit sint esset essent
Perfect Pluperfect
fuerim fuerimus fuissem fuissēmus
fueris fueritis fuissēs fuissētis
fuerit fuerint fuisset fuissent
 Imperative
PRESENT FUTURE
2d Pers. Sing. es, be thou 2d Pers. Sing. estō, thou shalt be
2d Pers. Plur. este, be ye 3d Pers. Sing. estō, he shall be
2d Pers. Plur. estōte, ye shall be
3d Pers. Plur. suntō, they shall be

Infinitive Participle
Pres. esse, to be
Perf. fuisse, to have been
Fut. futūrus, -a, -um esse or fore, futūrus, -a, -um, about to be
to be about to be

495. possum, be able, can

Principal Parts possum, posse, potuī, ——

Indicative Subjunctive
SINGULAR PLURAL SINGULAR PLURAL
Pres. possum pos´sumus possim possī´mus
potes potes´tis possīs possī´tis
potest possunt possit possint
Impf. poteram poterāmus possem possē´mus
Fut. poterō poterimus —— ——
Perf. potuī potuimus potuerim potuerimus
Plup. potueram potuerāmus potuissem potuissēmus
F. P. potuerō potuerimus —— ——
Infinitive
Pres. posse Perf. potuisse
Participle
Pres. potens, gen. -entis, (adjective)
 powerful

496. prōsum, benefit

Principal Parts prōsum, prōdesse, prōfuī, prōfutūrus

Pres. Stem prōdes-

Perf. Stem prōfu-

Part. Stem prōfut-

Indicative Subjunctive
SINGULAR PLURAL SINGULAR PLURAL
Pres. prōsum prō´sumus prōsim prōsī´mus
prōdes prōdes´tis prōsīs prōsī´tis
prōdest prōsunt prōsit prōsint
Impf. prōderam prōderāmus prōdessem prodessē´mus
Fut. prōderō prōderimus —— ——
Perf. prōfuī prōfuimus prōfuerim prōfuerimus
Plup. prōfueram prōfuerāmus prōfuissem prōfuissēmus
F. P. prōfuerō prōfuerimus —— ——
Imperative
Pres. 2d Pers. prōdes, Fut. 2d Pers. prōdestō,
prōdeste prōdestōte
Infinitive
Pres. prōdesse Perf. prōfuisse Fut. prōfutūrus, -a, -um esse
Future Participle prōfutūrus, -a, -um

497.

Principal volō, velle, voluī, ——,

Parts
 be willing, will, wish

nōlō, nōlle, nōluī, ——,

be unwilling, will not

mālō, mālle, māluī, ——,

be more willing, prefer

Nōlō and mālō are compounds of volō. Nōlō is for ne (not) + volō, and
mālō for

mā (from magis, more) + volō. The second

person vīs is from a different root.

Indicative
SINGULAR
Pres. volō nōlō mālō
vīs nōn vis māvīs
vult nōn vult māvult
PLURAL
volumus nōlumus mālumus
vultis nōn vultis māvul´tis
volunt nōlunt mālunt
Impf. volēbam nōlēbam mālēbam
Fut. volam, volēs, etc. nōlam, nōlēs, etc. mālam, mālēs, etc.
Perf. voluī nōluī māluī
Plup. volueram nōlueram mālueram
F. P. voluerō nōluerō māluerō
Subjunctive
SINGULAR
Pres. velim nōlim mālim
 velīs nōlīs mālīs
velit nōlit mālit
PLURAL
velī´mus nōlī´mus mālī´mus
velī´tis nōlī´tis mālī´tis
velint nōlint mālint
Impf. vellem nōllem māllem
Perf. voluerim nōluerim māluerim
Plup. voluissem nōluissem māluissem
Imperative
Pres. —— nōlī ——
nōlīte

Fut. —— nōlītō, etc. ——

Infinitive
Pres. velle nōlle mālle
Perf. voluisse nōluisse māluisse
Participle
Pres. volēns, -entis nōlēns, -entis ——

498. ferō, bear, carry,

endure

Principal Parts ferō, ferre, tulī, lātus

Pres. Stem fer-

Perf. Stem tul-

Part. Stem lāt-

Indicative
ACTIVE PASSIVE
Pres. ferō ferimus feror ferimur
fers fertīs ferris, -re ferimimī
fert ferunt fertur feruntur
Impf. ferēbam ferēbar
Fut. feram, ferēs, etc. ferar, ferēris, etc.
Perf. tulī lātus, -a, -um sum
Plup. tuleram lātus, -a, -um eram
F. P. tulerō lātus, -a, -um erō
Subjunctive
Pres. feram, ferās, etc. ferar, ferāris, etc.
Impf. ferrem ferrer
Perf. tulerim lātus, -a, -um sim
Plup. tulissem lātus, -a, -um essem
Imperative
Pres. 2d Pers. fer ferte ferre feriminī
Fut. 2d Pers. fertō fertōte fertor
3d Pers. fertō ferunto fertor feruntor
Infinitive
Pres. ferre ferrī
Perf. tulisse lātus, -a, -um esse
Fut. lātūrus, -a, -um esse ——
Participles
Pres. ferēns, -entis Pres. ——
Fut. lātūrus, -a, -um Ger. ferendus, -a, -um
Perf. —— Perf. lātus, -a, -um

Gerund Supine (Active Voice)

Gen. ferendī Acc. ferendum Acc. [lātum]
Dat. ferendō Abl. ferendō Abl. [lātū]
499. eō, go

Principal Parts eō, īre, iī (īvī), ĭtum (n. perf. part.)

Pres. Stem ī-

Perf. Stem ī- or īv-

Part. Stem it-

Indicative Subjunctive Imperative

SING. PLUR.
Pres. eō īmus eam 2d Pers. ī īte
īs ītis
it eunt

Impf. ībam īrem

2d Pers. ītō ītōte
Fut. ībō —— 3d Pers. ītō euntō

Perf. iī (īvī) ierim (īverim)

Plup. ieram (īveram) īssem (īvissem)
F. P. ierō (īverō)
Infinitive Participles
Pres. īre Pres. iēns, gen. euntis

(§ 472)

Perf. īsse (īvisse) Fut. itūrus, -a, -um

Fut. itūrus, -a, -um esse Ger. eundum
Gerund Supine
Gen. eundī Acc. [itum]
Dat. eundō Abl. [itū]
Acc. eundum
 Abl. eundō

a. The verb eō is used impersonally in the third person

singular of the passive, as ītur, itum est,

etc.

b. In the perfect system the forms with v are very

rare.

500. fīō, passive of faciō;

be made, become, happen

Principal Parts fīō, fierī, factus sum

Indicative Subjunctive Imperative
Pres. fīō —— fīam 2d Pers. fī fīte
fīs ——
fit fīunt

Impf. fīēbam fierem

Fut. fīam ——
Perf. factus, -a, -um factus, -a, -um sim
sum
Plup. factus, -a, -um factus, -a, -um
eram essem
F. P. factus, -a, -um erō
Infinitive Participles
Pres. fierī Perf. factus, -a, -um
Perf. factus, -a, -um Ger. faciendus, -a, -
esse um
Fut. [factum īrī]
 CASTRA MURO FOSSAQUE MUNIUNTUR

APPENDIX II
501. RULES OF SYNTAX

Note. The rules of syntax are here

classified and numbered consecutively. The number of the text section in

which the rule appears is given at the end of each.

Nominative Case
1. The subject of a finite verb is in the nominative and answers the

question Who? or What? § 36.

Agreement
2. A finite verb must always be in the same person and number as its
subject. § 28.

3. A predicate noun agrees in case with the subject of the verb. § 76.
4. An appositive agrees in case with the noun which it explains. § 81.
5. Adjectives agree with their nouns in gender, number, and case. § 65.
6. A predicate adjective completing a complementary infinitive agrees
in

gender, number, and case with the subject of the main verb.

§ 215. a.

7. A relative pronoun must agree with its antecedent in gender and

number;

but its case is determined by the way it is used in its own clause. § 224.

Prepositions
8. A noun governed by a preposition must be in the accusative or
ablative

case. § 52.

Genitive Case
9. The word denoting the owner or possessor of something is in the
genitive

and answers the question Whose? § 38.

10. The possessive genitive often stands in the predicate, especially

after

the forms of sum, and is then called the predicate

genitive. § 409.
 11. Words denoting a part are often used with the genitive of the
whole,

known as the partitive genitive. § 331.

12. Numerical descriptions of measure are expressed by the genitive

with a

modifying adjective. § 443.

Dative Case
13. The indirect object of a verb is in the dative. § 45.
14. The dative of the indirect object is used with the intransitive verbs

crēdō, faveō, noceō, pāreō,

persuādeō, resistō, studeō, and others of like

meaning. § 154.

15. Some verbs compounded with ad, ante, con,

dē, in, inter, ob, post, prae,

prō, sub, super, admit the dative of the indirect

object. Transitive compounds may take both an accusative and a dative.

§ 426.

16. The dative is used with adjectives to denote the object toward
which the

given quality is directed. Such are, especially, those meaning

near, also fit, friendly, pleasing, like, and their

opposites. § 143.
 17. The dative is used to denote the purpose or end for which;

often with another dative denoting the person or thing affected.

§ 437.

Accusative Case
18. The direct object of a transitive verb is in the accusative and
answers

the question Whom? or What? § 37.

19. The subject of the infinitive is in the accusative. § 214.

20. The place to which is expressed by ad or in with

the accusative. Before names of towns, small islands, domus, and

rūs the preposition is omitted.

§§ 263,

266.

21. Duration of time and extent of space are expressed by the

accusative. § 336.

22. Verbs of making, choosing, calling, showing, and the like, may

take a predicate accusative along with the direct object. With

the passive voice the two accusatives become nominatives. § 392.

Ablative Case
23. Cause is denoted by the ablative without a preposition. This

answers the question Because of what? § 102.

 24. Means is denoted by the ablative without a preposition. This

answers the question By means of what? or With what? § 103.

25. Accompaniment is denoted by the ablative with cum. This

answers the question With whom? § 104.

26. The ablative with cum is used to denote the manner of an action.

Cum may be omitted, if an adjective is used with the ablative.

This answers the question How? or In what manner? § 105.

27. With comparatives and words implying comparison the ablative is

used to

denote the measure of difference. § 317.

28. The ablative of a noun or pronoun with a present or perfect

participle

in agreement is used to express attendant circumstance. This is called

the ablative absolute. § 381.

29. 1. Descriptions of physical characteristics are expressed by the

ablative with a modifying adjective. § 444.

2. Descriptions involving neither numerical statements nor physical

characteristics may be expressed by either the genitive or the ablative

with a modifying adjective. § 445.

30. The ablative is used to denote in what respect something is true.

§ 398.
 31. The place from which is expressed by ā or ab,

dē, ē or ex with the separative ablative. This

answers the question Whence? Before names of towns, small islands,

domus, and rūs the preposition is omitted.

§§ 264,

266.

32. Words expressing separation or deprivation require an ablative to

complete their meaning. This is called the ablative of

separation. § 180.

33. The word expressing the person from whom an action starts, when
not the

subject, is put in the ablative with the preposition ā or

ab. This is called the ablative of the personal agent. § 181.

34. The comparative degree, if quam is omitted, is followed by the

separative ablative. § 309.

35. The time when or within which anything happens is expressed by

the ablative without a preposition. § 275.

36. 1. The place at or in which is expressed by the ablative with

in. This answers the question Where? Before names of towns, small

islands, and rūs the preposition is omitted.

§§ 265,

266.

2. Names of towns and small islands, if singular and of the first or

second declension, and the word domus express the place in

which by the locative. § 268.

Gerund and Gerundive

37. 1. The gerund is a verbal noun and is used only in the genitive,
dative,

accusative, and ablative singular. The constructions of these cases are

in general the same as those of other nouns.

§ 406. 1.

2. The gerundive is a verbal adjective and must be used instead of

gerund + object, excepting in the genitive and in the ablative without a

preposition. Even in these instances the gerundive construction is more

usual.

§ 406. 2.

38. The accusative of the gerund or gerundive with ad, or the

genitive with causā, is used to express purpose. § 407.

Moods and Tenses of Verbs

39. Primary tenses are followed by primary tenses, and secondary by

secondary. § 358.
 40. The subjunctive is used in a dependent clause to express the

purpose of the action in the principal clause. § 349.

41. A substantive clause of purpose with the subjunctive is used as

object with verbs of commanding, urging, asking, persuading, or

advising, where in English we should usually have the infinitive.

§ 366.

42. Verbs of fearing are followed by a substantive clause of purpose

introduced by ut (that not) or nē (that or

lest). § 372.

43. Consecutive clauses of result are introduced by ut or

ut nōn, and have the verb in the subjunctive. § 385.

44. Object clauses of result with ut or ut nōn are

found after verbs of effecting or bringing about. § 386.

45. A relative clause with the subjunctive is often used to describe an

antecedent. This is called the subjunctive of characteristic or

description. § 390.

46. The conjunction cum means when, since, or although.

It is followed by the subjunctive unless it means when and its

clause fixes the time at which the main action took place. § 396.
 47. When a direct statement becomes indirect, the principal verb is
changed

to the infinitive, and its subject nominative becomes subject accusative

of the infinitive. § 416.

48. The accusative-with-infinitive construction in indirect statements is

found after verbs of saying, telling, knowing, thinking, and

perceiving. § 419.

49. A present indicative of a direct statement becomes present

infinitive of

the indirect, a past indicative becomes perfect infinitive, and a future

indicative becomes future infinitive. § 418.

50. In an indirect question the verb is in the subjunctive and its

tense is determined by the law for tense sequence. § 432.

DOMINA

APPENDIX III
REVIEWS 1
1. It is suggested that each of these reviews be assigned for a written test.

I. REVIEW OF VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR THROUGH LESSON

VIII
Lesson IX
502. Give the English of the following words: 1
Nouns
agricola dea gallīna pugna
ancilla domina iniūria sagitta
aqua fābula īnsula silva
casa fera lūna terra
causa fīlia nauta tuba
cēna fortūna pecūnia via
corōna fuga puella victōria

Adjectives
alta clāra lāta magna nova pulchra
bona grāta longa mala parva sōla

Verbs
amat est labōrat nārrat nūntiat portat sunt
dat habitat laudat necat parat pugnat vocat

Interrogative
Prepositions Pronouns Adverbs Conjunctions
Particle
ā or ab mea cūr et -ne
ad tua deinde quia
cum quis nōn quod
dē cuius ubi
ē or ex cui
in quem
quid
1. Proper nouns and proper adjectives are not repeated in the reviews. Words used in Cassar’s “Gallic
War” are in heavy type.
503. Give the Latin of the following words: 1
Underline the words you do not remember. Do not look up a single word till
you have gone through the entire list. Then drill on the words you have
underlined.
flight wide goddess what
story tells wild beast way
new money praises (verb) bad
lives (verb) calls alone loves
away from with pleasing pretty
who your prepares water
why then, in the are great
forest next place to is
wreath daughter because announces
deep, high to whom arrow injury, wrong
dinner fortune my where
famous out from kills not
cottage labors (verb) girl good
battle (noun) gives fights (verb) maid
trumpet small carries down from
lady, mistress in chicken long
whom and victory cause
island sailor land whose
farmer
1. The translations of words used in Cæsar are in italics.

504. Review Questions. How many syllables has a Latin word? How are
words divided into syllables? What is the ultima? the penult? the
antepenult? When is a syllable short? When is a syllable long? What is the
law of Latin accent? Define the subject of a sentence; the predicate; the
object; the copula. What is inflection? declension? conjugation? What is the
ending of the verb in the third person singular, and what in the plural? What
does the form of a noun show? Name the Latin cases. What case is used for
the subject? the direct object? the possessor? What relation is expressed by
the dative case? Give the rule for the indirect object. How are questions
answered in Latin? What is a predicate adjective? an attributive adjective?
What is meant by agreement? Give the rule for the agreement of the
adjective. What are the three relations expressed by the ablative? What can
you say of the position of the possessive pronoun? the modifying genitive?
the adjective? What is the base? What is grammatical gender? What is the
rule for gender in the first declension? What are the general principles of
Latin word order?
505. Fill out the following summary of the first declension:
1. Ending in the nominative singular
2. Rule for gender
The First or Ā-Declension a. Singular
3. Case terminations
b. Plural
4. Irregular nouns
Go on to Lesson IX

II. REVIEW OF LESSONS IX-XVII

Lesson XVIII
506. Give the English of the following words:
Nouns of the First Declension
agrī cultūra cōpia fāma galea lacrima patria
cōnstantia dīligentia fēmina inopia lōrīca praeda

Nouns of the Second Declension

ager cibus frūmentum oppidānus scūtum
amīcus cōnsilium gladius oppidum servus
arma (plural) domicilium lēgātus pīlum studium
auxilium dominus līberī populus tēlum
bellum equus magister praemium vīcus
carrus fīlius mūrus proelium vir
castrum fluvius numerus puer

Adjectives of the First and Second Declensons

 aeger, aegra, aegrum neuter, neutra, neutrum
alius, alia, aliud noster, nostra, nostrum
alter, altera, alterum alter, altera, alterum
armātus, -a, -um pulcher, pulchra, pulchrum
crēber, crēbra, crēbrum sōlus, -a, -um
dūrus, -a, -um suus, -a, -um
fīnitimus, -a, -um fīnitimus, -a, -um
īnfīrmus, -a, -um tuus, -a, -um
legiōnārius, -a, -um ūllus, -a, -um
līber, lībera, līberum ūnus, -a, -um
mātūrus, -a, -um uter, utra, utrum
meus, -a, -um validus, -a, -um
miser, misera, miserum vester, vestra, vestrum
multus, -a, -um

Demonstrative
Verbs Adverbs
Pronoun
arat is, ea, id iam
cūrat quō
Conjunctions
dēsīderat an saepe
mātūrat
-que Preposition
properat apud
sed
507. Give the Latin of the following words:
sword war shield (noun) plan (noun)
corselet number whole people
man my it beautiful
your (plural) free (adj.) aid (noun) no (adj.)
hasten children legionary our
but wall weak battle
among grain arms spear
tear (noun) weapon master food
village one (of school) steadiness
strong plow (verb) friend fatherland
long for this or that neighboring town
 and (enclitic) already sick fort
often helmet lieutenant camp
want (noun) river field neither (of two)
which (of two) zeal report, rumor much
care for any abode agriculture
or (in a question) he boy other
whither son his own the other (of two)
wagon slave alone hard
townsman your prize (noun) booty
wretched (singular) master frequent
ripe she (owner) armed
woman carefulness
horse plenty
troops
508. Review Questions. How many declensions are there? What three
things must be known about a noun before it can be declined? What three
cases of neuter nouns are always alike, and in what do they end in the
plural? What two plural cases are always alike? When is the vocative
singular not like the nominative? What is a predicate noun? With what does
it agree? What is an appositive? Give the rule for the agreement of an
appositive. How can we tell whether a noun in -er is declined like puer or
like ager? Decline bonus, līber, pulcher. How can we tell whether an
adjective in -er is declined like līber or like pulcher? Why must we say
nauta bonus and not nauta bona? Name the Latin possessive pronouns.
How are they declined? With what does the possessive pronoun agree?
When do we use tuus and when vester? Why is suus called a reflexive
possessive? What is the non-reflexive possessive of the third person? When
are possessives omitted? What four uses of the ablative case are covered by
the relations expressed in English by with? Give an illustration in Latin of
the ablative of manner; of the ablative of cause; of the ablative of means; of
the ablative of accompaniment. What ablative regularly has cum? What
ablative sometimes has cum? What uses of the ablative never have cum?
Name the nine pronominal adjectives, with their meanings. Decline alius,
nūllus. Decline is. What does is mean as a demonstrative adjective or
pronoun? What other important use has it?
509. Fill out the following summary of the second declension:
1. Endings in the nominative
2. Rule for gender
a. Singular
3. Case terminations of nouns in -us
b. Plural
The Second or
a. The vocative singular of nouns in -us
O-Declension
a. Singular
4. Case terminations of nouns in -um
b. Plural
5. Peculiarities of nouns in -er and -ir
6. Peculiarities of nouns in -ius and -ium
Go on to Lesson XVIII

III. REVIEW OF LESSONS XVIII-XXVI

Lesson XXVII
510. Give the English of the following words:
Nouns of the First Declension
disciplīna poena rēgīna trīstitia
fōrma potentia superbia

Nouns of the Second Declension

lūdus ōrnāmentum sacrum socius verbum

Adjectives of the First and Second Declensions

amīcus grātus interfectus molestus septem
antīquus idōneus īrātus perpetuus superbus
fīnitimus inimīcus laetus proximus

Adverbs Conjunctions Personal Pronoun

hodiē mox etiam
ibi nunc nōn sōlum ... sed etiam ego
maximē nūper
 Verbs
CONJ. I CONJ. II CONJ. III CONJ. IV
volō, -āre dēleō, -ēre agō, -ere audiō, -īre
doceō, -ēre capiō, -ere mūniō, -īre
faveō, -ēre crēdō, -ere reperiō, -īre
IRREGULAR VERB
habeō, -ēre dīcō, -ere veniō, -īre
sum, esse iubeō, -ēre dūcō, -ere
moneō, -ēre faciō, -ere
moveō, -ēre fugiō, -ere
noceō, -ēre iaciō, -ere
pāreō, -ēre mittō, -ere
persuādeō, -ēre rapiō, -ere
sedeō, -ēre regō, -ere
studeō, -ēre resistō, -ere
videō, -ēre
511. Give the Latin of the following words. In the case of verbs always
give the first form and the present infinitive.
ancient not only ... nearest move training
come but also sacred soon take
resist seven rite glad have
see ally, queen punishment to-day
be companion flee believe unfriendly
fly pride obey advise drive
I fortify lately especially, favor (verb)
proud send constant most of all suitable
word sit ornament angry pleasing
sadness also power beauty teach
find school make, do say neighboring
rule (verb) hear injure command destroy
be eager hurl now (verb) friendly
for persuade annoying there seize
only lead slain
512. Review Questions. What is conjugation? Name two important
differences between conjugation in Latin and in English. What is tense?
What is mood? What are the Latin moods? When do we use the indicative
mood? Name the six tenses of the indicative. What are personal endings?
Name those you have had. Inflect sum in the three tenses you have learned.
How many regular conjugations are there? How are they distinguished?
How is the present stem found? What tenses are formed from the present
stem? What is the tense sign of the imperfect? What is the meaning of the
imperfect? What is the tense sign of the future in the first two conjugations?
in the last two? Before what letters is a final long vowel of the stem
shortened? What are the three possible translations of a present, as of
pugnō? Inflect arō, sedeō, mittō, faciō, and veniō, in the present,
imperfect, and future active. What forms of -iō verbs of the third
conjugation are like audiō? what like regō? Give the rule for the dative with
adjectives. Name the special intransitive verbs that govern the dative. What
does the imperative mood express? How is the present active imperative
formed in the singular? in the plural? What three verbs have a shortened
present active imperative? Give the present active imperative of portō,
dēleō, agō, faciō, mūniō.
Go on to Lesson XXVII

IV. REVIEW OF LESSONS XXVII-XXXVI

Lesson XXXVII
513. Give the English of the following words:
Nouns of the First Declension
āla cūra mora porta prōvincia vīta

Nouns of the Second Declension

animus bracchium locus nāvigium perīculum
aurum deus mōnstrum ōrāculum ventus vīnum

Adjectives of the First and Second Declensions

adversus commōtus dubius plēnus
attentus dēfessus maximus saevus
 cārus dexter perfidus sinister

Adverbs
anteā diū ita subitō
celeriter frūstrā longē tamen
dēnique graviter semper tum

Conjunctions
autem sī ubi

Prepositions
dē per prō sine

Verbs
CONJ. I CONJ. II
adpropinquō recūsō superō contineō
nāvigō reportō temptō egeō
occupō servō vāstō prohibeō
postulō stō vulnerō respondeō
teneō
CONJ. III IRREGULAR VERB
discēdō gerō interficiō absum
514. Translate the following words. Give the genitive and the gender of
the nouns and the principal parts of the verbs.
be away moreover boat, ship without before,
wind greatest sail (verb) hold previously
through oracle life suddenly depart,
if danger save dear go away
savage lay waste full always province
wound (verb) gate refuse god care, trouble
wine doubtful heavily hold in, kill
delay opposite, monster keep reply (verb)
faithless adverse approach afar wing
right demand nevertheless thus, so, mind, heart
finally place as left (adj.)
 seize attentive be without, follows bear, carry
quickly then, at lack arm on
before, in that time moved (noun) try
behalf of weary gold when for a long
battle overcome, restrain, in vain time
down from or conquer keep from stand
concerning bring
back,
win
515. Give the principal parts and meaning of the following verbs:
sum moveō moneō pāreō veniō
dō crēdō capiō dūcō iaciō
teneō rapiō doceō faciō videō
iubeō reperiō regō persuādeō absum
agō dēleō faveō sedeō egeō
mittō resistō noceō studeō gerō
mūniō audiō dīcō fugiō stō
516. Review Questions. What are the personal endings in the passive
voice? What is the letter -r sometimes called? What are the distinguishing
vowels of the four conjugations? What forms constitute the principal parts?
What are the three different conjugation stems? How may they be found?
What are the tenses of the indicative? of the infinitive? What tense of the
imperative have you learned? What forms are built on the present stem? on
the perfect stem? on the participial stem? What are the endings of the
perfect active indicative? What is the tense sign of the pluperfect active? of
the future perfect active? How is the present active infinitive formed? the
present passive infinitive? How is the present active imperative formed? the
present passive imperative? How is the perfect active infinitive formed? the
perfect passive infinitive? How is the future active infinitive formed? What
is a participle? How are participles in -us declined? Give the rule for the
agreement of the participle. How are the perfect, pluperfect, and future
perfect passive indicative formed? Conjugate the verb sum in all moods and
tenses as far as you have learned it (§ 494). What is meant by the separative
ablative? How is the place from which expressed in Latin? Give the rule for
the ablative of separation; for the ablative of the personal agent. How can
we distinguish between the ablative of means and the ablative of the
personal agent? What is the perfect definite? the perfect indefinite? What is
the difference in meaning between the perfect indefinite and the imperfect?
What two cases in Latin may be governed by a preposition? Name the
prepositions that govern the ablative. What does the preposition in mean
when it governs the ablative? the accusative? What are the three
interrogatives used to introduce yes-and-no questions? Explain the force of
each. What words are sometimes used for yes and no? What are the
different meanings and uses of ubi?
Go on to Lesson XXXVII

V. REVIEW OF LESSONS XXXVII-XLIV

Lesson XLV
517. Give the English of the following words:
Nouns
FIRST DECLENSION SECOND DECLENSION
rīpa barbarī castellum
captīvus impedīmentum
THIRD DECLENSION
animal collis homō legiō ōrdō soror
arbor cōnsul hostīs mare pater tempus
avis dēns ignis māter pedes terror
caedēs dux imperātor mēnsis pēs turris
calamitās eques īnsigne mīles pōns urbs
calcar fīnis iter mōns prīnceps victor
caput flūmen iūdex nāvis rēx virtūs
cīvis fōns labor opus salūs vīs
cliēns frāter lapis ōrātor sanguis

Adjectives of the First and Second Declensions

barbarus dexter sinister summus
 Prepositions Adverbs Conjunctions
in with the abl. cotīdiē nec, neque
in with the acc. numquam nec ... nec, or neque ... neque
trāns

Verbs
CONJ. I CONJ. III
cessō oppugnō accipiō petō vincō
confirmō vetō incipiō ponō vivō
518. Translate the following words. Give the genitive and the gender of
the nouns and the principal parts of the verbs:
forbid man-of-war conquer redoubt, fort
rank, row judge consul sea
brother defeat, disaster mother tower
force fire retainer drill (verb)
across tree citizen legion
savages foot soldier head terror
horseman receive safety into, to
never general assail, storm right (adj.)
mountain highest begin in
manliness, fountain march stone
courage orator decoration blood
leader neither ... nor bridge labor (noun)
put, place and not bird king
time left cease spur
savage, tooth man chief
barbarous soldier river slaughter
sister month work (noun) strengthen
seek city and foot
captive victor ship enemy
hindrance, daily bank animal
baggage live (verb) father
519. Review Questions. Give the conjugation of possum. What is an
infinitive? What three uses has the Latin infinitive that are like the English?
What is the case of the subject of the infinitive? What is meant by a
complementary infinitive? In the sentence The bad boy cannot be happy,
what is the case of happy? Give the rule. Decline quī. Give the rule for the
agreement of the relative. What are the two uses of the interrogative?
Decline quis. What is the base of a noun? How is the stem formed from the
base? Are the stem and the base ever the same? How many declensions of
nouns are there? Name them. What are the two chief divisions of the third
declension? How are the consonant stems classified? Explain the formation
of lapis from the stem lapid-, mīles from mīlit-, rēx from rēg-. What nouns
have i-stems? What peculiarities of form do i-stems have,—masc., fem., and
neut.? Name the five nouns that have -ī and -e in the abl. Decline turris.
Give the rules for gender in the third declension. Decline mīles, lapis, rēx,
virtūs, cōnsul, legiō, homō, pater, flūmen, opus, tempus, caput, caedēs,
urbs, hostis, mare, animal, vīs, iter.
520. Fill out the following scheme:
Masculine
Gender
Feminine
Endings
Neuter
a. Masc. and
I. Consonant
The Third fem.
Stems
Declension b. Neuters
Case
a. Masc. and
Terminations
II. I-Stems fem.
b. Neuters
Irregular Nouns
Go on to Lesson XLV

VI. REVIEW OF LESSONS XLV-LII

Lesson LIII
521. Give the English of the following words:
Nouns
FIRST DECLENSION SECOND DECLENSION
amīcitia annus rēgnum tergum,
hōra modus signum tergum
littera nūntius supplicium, vertere
oculus supplicium dare
supplicium sūmere
dē
 vestīgium

THIRD DECLENSION FOURTH DECLENSION

aestās nox adventus impetus
corpus pars cornū lacus
hiems pāx domus manus
lībertās rūs equitātus metus
lūx, sōl exercitus portus
prīma lūx vōx fluctus
vulnus
 nōmen

FIFTH DECLENSION INDECLINABLE NOUN

aciēs rēs, spēs nihil
diēs rēs gestae
fidēs, rēs adversae
in fidem venīre rēs pūblica
rēs secundae

Adjectives
FIRST AND SECOND THIRD DECLENSION
DECLENSIONS
dēnsus prīstinus ācer, ācris, ācre gravis, grave
invīsus pūblicus brevis, breve incolumis,
mīrus secundus difficilis, incolume
paucī tantus difficile omnis, omne
prīmus vērus facīlis, facile pār, pār
fortis, forte vēlōx, vēlōx

Pronouns
PERSONAL DEMONSTRATIVE INTENSIVE INDEFINITE
ego hic ipse aliquis, aliquī
nōs īdem quīdam
suī ille quis, quī
tū iste quisquam
vōs quisque

Adverbs Conjunctions Prepositions

nē ... quidem paene satis itaque ante
ōlim quoque vērō nisi post
propter

Verbs
CONJ. I CONJ. II CONJ. III CONJ. IV
 conlocō dēbeō committō, dēsiliō
convocō exerceō committere proelium
cremō maneō dēcidō
dēmōnstrō placeō ēripiō
mandō sustineō sūmō,
sūmere supplicium dē
trādūcō
vertō
522. Translate the following words. Give the genitive and the gender of
the nouns and the principal parts of the verbs.
if not, unless adversity burn peace
on account of former, old- that (of yours) back
unharmed time before turn the back,
public all, every you (plur.) retreat
commonwealth any one (at light night
leap down, all) daybreak hand, force
dismount this (of mine) winter lake
lead across heavy, serious attack day
remain hateful, line of battle commit, intrust
call together detested army a few only
friendship true drill, train sharp, eager
footprint, trace burn join battle we
each snatch from house, home turn
fear (noun) letter midday you (sing.)
hope punishment wonderful I
therefore inflict brave signal
behind, after punishment almost summer
so great on the same cavalry
equal suffer some, any wound
in truth, indeed punishment if any one horn, wing
that (yonder) liberty self, very country
a certain sun not even second, favorable
fall down sustain easy short
owe, ought dense voice
 measure, mode take up, point out, formerly, once
eye assume explain arrival
name hour difficult come under the
wave, billow reign, realm first protection of
thing, matter messenger arrange, swift
exploits part, direction station nothing
republic body please
prosperity harbor year
faith,
protection
of himself
also, too
sufficiently
523. Review Questions. By what declensions are Latin adjectives declined?
What can you say about the stem of adjectives of the third declension? Into
what classes are these adjectives divided? How can you tell to which of the
classes an adjective belongs? Decline ācer, omnis, pār. What are the
nominative endings and genders of nouns of the fourth or u-declension?
What nouns are feminine by exception? Decline adventus, lacus, cornū,
domus. Give the rules for the ordinary expression of the place to which, the
place from which, the place in which. What special rules apply to names of
towns, small islands, and rūs? What is the locative case? What words have
a locative case? What is the form of the locative case? Translate Galba lives
at home, Galba lives at Rome, Galba lives at Pompeii. What is the rule for
gender in the fifth or ē-declension? Decline diēs, rēs. When is the long ē
shortened? What can you say about the plural of the fifth declension?
Decline tuba, servus, pīlum, ager, puer, mīles, cōnsul, flūmen, caedēs,
animal. How is the time when expressed? Name the classes of pronouns and
define each class. Decline ego, tū, is. What are the reflexives of the first and
second persons? What is the reflexive of the third person? Decline it.
Translate I see myself, he sees himself, he sees him. Decline ipse. How is
ipse used? Decline īdem. Decline hic, iste, ille. Explain the use of these
words. Name and translate the commoner indefinite pronouns. Decline
aliquis, quisquam, quīdam, quisque.
Go on to Lesson LIII
 VII. REVIEW OF LESSONS LIII-LX
Lesson LXI
524. Give the English of the following words:
Nouns
FIRST DECLENSION SECOND DECLENSION
aquila aedificium imperium spatium
fossa captīvus negōtium vāllum
concilium
THIRD DECLENSION
agmen gēns mors regiō
celeritās lātitūdō mulier rūmor
cīvitās longitūdō multitūdō scelus
clāmor magnitūdō mūnītiō servitūs
cohors mēns nēmō timor
difficultās mercātor obses vallēs
explōrātor mīlle opīniō
FOURTH DECLENSION FIFTH DECLENSION
aditus passus rēs frūmentāria
commeātus

Adjectives
FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS
aequus maximus plūrimus singulī
bīnī medius posterus superus
ducentī minimus prīmus tardus
duo opportūnus reliquus ternī
exterus optimus secundus ūnus
īnferus pessimus
THIRD DECLENSION
alacer, alacris, alacre humilis, humile peior, peius
audāx, audāx ingēns, ingēns ——, plūs
celer, celeris, celere interior, interius prior, prius
citerior, citerius lēnis, lēne recēns, recēns
difficilis, difficile maior, maius similis, simile
dissimilis, dissimile melior, melius trēs, tria
facilis, facile minor, minus ulterior, ulterius
gracilis, gracile nōbilis, nōbile

Adverbs
ācriter magis optimē proximē
audācter magnopere parum quam
bene maximē paulō statim
facile melius plūrimum tam
ferē minimē prope undique
fortiter multum propius

Conjunctions Prepositions
atque, ac quā dē causā circum
aut quam ob rem contrā
aut ... aut simul atque or inter
et ... et simul ac ob
nam trāns

Verbs
CONJ. I CONJ. II
cōnor moror obtineō valeō
hortor vexō perterreō vereor
CONJ. III
abdō dēdō patior revertor
cadō dēfendō premō sequor
cognōscō ēgredior proficīscor statuō
cōnsequor incendō prōgredior subsequor
contendō incolō quaerō suscipiō
cupiō īnsequor recipiō trādō
currō occīdō relinquō trahō
CONJ. III
orior perveniō
525. Translate the following words. Give the genitive and the gender of
the nouns and the principal parts of the verbs:
on account of width fear (verb) leave
nearly scout worse abandon
keenly, sharply cohort greater, larger be strong
thousand tribe, nation two by two receive,
two business least (adv.) recover
opportune by a little opinion, terrify,
remaining somewhat expectation frighten
above (adj.) crime approach, dwell
next difficult entrance state,
grain supply equal trader citizenship
pace move forward, magnitude, size valley
shout (noun) advance council, slavery
from all sides multitude assembly greatly
against woman space, room best of all
around desire (verb) either ... or (adv.)
three give over, rise, arise better (adv.)
further surrender suffer, allow well (adv.)
line of march kill press hard very much
manor overtake fall much
region hasten, strive surrender unlike
fortification hide set fire to like (adj.)
eagle one defend slow
almost first possess, hold very greatly,
boldly second, favorable delay (verb) exceedingly
bravely two hundred nearest (adv.) building
across former nearer (adv.) mind (noun)
between, inner better (adj.) easily
among middle well known, easy
hither (adj.) low noble recent
so outward mild, gentle huge, great
less three by three swift bold
more provisions eager immediately
most speed as soon as
 worst ditch low (adj.) for
difficulty wherefore or slender than
hostage therefore one by one best (adj.)
death for this reason no one greatest
command, fear (noun) least (adv.) follow close
power return little (adv.) encourage
captive inquire learn, know annoy, ravage
or set out drag hide
and move out, undertake follow
arrive disembark run pursue
attempt, try fix, decide both ... and
length rampart
526. Review Questions. What is meant by comparison? In what two ways
may adjectives be compared? Compare clārus, brevis, vēlōx, and explain
the formation of the comparative and the superlative. What are the adverbs
used in comparison? Compare brevis by adverbs. Decline the comparative
of vēlōx. How are adjectives in -er compared? Compare ācer, pulcher,
liber. What are possible translations for the comparative and superlative?
Name the six adjectives that form the superlative in -limus. Translate in two
ways Nothing is brighter than the sun. Give the rule for the ablative with
comparatives. Compare bonus, magnus, malus, multus, parvus, exterus,
īnferus, posterus, superus. Decline plūs. Compare citerior, interior,
propior, ulterior. Translate That route to Italy is much shorter. Give the
rule for the expression of measure of difference. Name five words that are
especially common in this construction. How are adverbs usually formed
from adjectives of the first and second declensions? from adjectives of the
third declension? Compare the adverbs cārē, līberē, fortiter, audācter.
What cases of adjectives are sometimes used as adverbs? What are the
adverbs from facilis? multus? prīmus? plūrimus? bonus? magnus?
parvus? Compare prope, saepe, magnopere. How are numerals classified?
Give the first twenty cardinals. Decline ūnus, duo, trēs, mīlle. How are the
hundreds declined? What is meant by the partitive genitive? Give the rule
for the partitive genitive. What sort of words are commonly used with this
construction? What construction is used with quīdam and cardinal numbers
excepting mīlle? Give the first twenty ordinals. How are they declined?
How are the distributives declined? Give the rule for the expression of
duration of time and extent of space. What is the difference between the
ablative of time and the accusative of time? What is a deponent verb? Give
the synopsis of one. What form always has a passive meaning? Conjugate
amō, moneō, regō, capiō, audiō, in the active and passive.
Go on to Lesson LXI

VIII. REVIEW OF LESSONS LXI-LXIX

Lesson LXX
527. Review the vocabularies of the first seventeen lessons. See §§ 502,
503, 506, 507.
528. Review Questions. Name the tenses of the subjunctive. What time is
denoted by these tenses? What are the mood signs of the present
subjunctive? How may the imperfect subjunctive be formed? How do the
perfect subjunctive and the future perfect indicative active differ in form?
How is the pluperfect subjunctive active formed? Inflect the subjunctive
active and passive of cūrō, dēleō, vincō, rapiō, mūniō. Inflect the
subjunctive tenses of sum; of possum. What are the tenses of the participles
in the active? What in the passive? Give the active and passive participles of
amō, moneō, regō, capiō, audiō. Decline regēns. What participles do
deponent verbs have? What is the difference in meaning between the perfect
participle of a deponent verb and of one not deponent? Give the participles
of vereor. How should participles usually be translated? Conjugate volō,
nolō, mālō, fīō.
What is the difference between the indicative and subjunctive in their
fundamental ideas? How is purpose usually expressed in English? How is it
expressed in Latin? By what words is a Latin purpose clause introduced?
When should quō be used? What is meant by sequence of tenses? Name the
primary tenses of the indicative and of the subjunctive; the secondary
tenses. What Latin verbs are regularly followed by substantive clauses of
purpose? What construction follows iubeō? What construction follows
verbs of fearing? How is consequence or result expressed in Latin? How is
a result clause introduced? What words are often found in the principal
clause foreshadowing the coming of a result clause? How may negative
purpose be distinguished from negative result? What is meant by the
subjunctive of characteristic or description? How are such clauses
introduced? Explain the ablative absolute. Why is the ablative absolute of
such frequent occurrence in Latin? Explain the predicate accusative. After
what verbs are two accusatives commonly found? What do these
accusatives become when the verb is passive?
Go on to Lesson LXX

IMPERATOR MILITES HORTATUR

SPECIAL VOCABULARIES
The words in heavy type are used in Cæsar’s “Gallic War.”

LESSON IV, § 39

Nouns Verbs
dea, goddess (deity) est, he (she, it) is; sunt,
Diā´na, Diana they are
fera, a wild beast (fierce) necat, he (she, it) kills, is
Lātō´na, Latona killing, does kill
sagit´ta, arrow Conjunction 1
et, and
Pronouns
quis, interrog. pronoun, nom. sing., who?
 cuius (pronounced co͝ oi´yo͝ os, two syllables), interrog.
pronoun, gen. sing., whose?
1. A conjunction is a word which connects words, parts of sentences, or sentences.

LESSON V, § 47

Nouns Verbs
corō´na, wreath, garland, dat, he (she, it) gives
crown nārrat, he (she, it) tells
fā´bula, story (fable) (narrate)
pecū´nia, money Conjunction 1
(pecuniary) quia or quod, because
pugna, battle (pugnacious)
victō´ria, victory
Pronoun
cui (pronounced co͝ oi, one syllable), interrog. pronoun,
dat. sing., to whom? for whom?
1. A conjunction is a word which connects words, parts of sentences, or sentences.

LESSON VI, § 56

Adjectives Nouns
bona, good ancil´la, maidservant
grāta, pleasing Iūlia, Julia
magna, large, great Adverbs 1
mala, bad, wicked cūr, why
parva, small, little nōn, not
pulchra, beautiful, pretty
Pronouns
sōla, alone
mea, my; tua, thy, your
(possesives)
quid, interrog. pronoun,
nom. and acc. sing.,
what?
 -ne, the question sign, an enclitic (§ 16) added to the first
word, which, in a question, is usually the verb, as amat,
he loves, but amat´ne? does he love? est, he is; estne? is
he? Of course -ne is not used when the sentence contains
quis, cūr, or some other interrogative word.
1. An adverb is a word used to modify a verb, an adjective, or another adverb; as, She sings sweetly;
she is very talented; she began to sing very early.

LESSON VII, § 62

Nouns Verbs
casa, -ae, f., cottage ha´bitat, he (she, it) lives, is
cēna, -ae, f., dinner living, does live (inhabit)
gallī´na, -ae, f., hen, laudat, he (she, it) praises,
chicken is praising, does praise
īn´sula, ae, f., island (pen- (laud)
insula) parat, he (she, it) prepares,
Adverbs is preparing, does
de-in´de, then, in the next prepare
place vocat, he (she, it) calls, is
ubi, where calling, does call;
invites, is inviting, does
Preposition
invite (vocation)
ad, to, with acc. to express
motion toward
Pronoun
quem, interrog. pronoun, acc. sing., whom?

LESSON VIII, § 69

Nouns Adjectives
Italia, -ae, f., Italy alta, high, deep (altitude)
Sicilia, -ae, f., Sicily clāra, clear, bright; famous
tuba, -ae, f., trumpet (tube) lāta, wide (latitude)
longa, long (longitude)
via, -ae, f., way, road, nova, new (novelty)
street (viaduct)

LESSON IX, § 77
Nouns
bellum, -ī, n., war (re-bel) mūrus, -ī, m., wall (mural)
cōnstantia, -ae, f., oppidānus, -ī, m.,
firmness, constancy, townsman
steadiness oppidum, -ī, n., town
dominus, -ī, m., master, pīlum, -ī, n., spear (pile
lord (dominate) driver)
equus, -ī, m., horse servus, -ī, m., slave,
(equine) servant
frūmentum, -ī, n., grain Sextus, -ī, m., Sextus
lēgātus, -ī, m., lieutenant, Verbs
ambassador (legate) cūrat, he (she, it) cares for,
Mārcus, -ī, m., Marcus, with acc.
Mark properat, he (she, it)
hastens

LESSON X, § 82
Nouns
amīcus, -ī, m., friend populus, -ī, m., people
(amicable) Rhēnus, -ī, m., the Rhine
Germānia, -ae, f., vīcus, -ī, m., village
Germany
patria, -ae, f., fatherland

LESSON XI, § 86
Nouns
arma, armōrum, n., plur., galea, -ae, f., helmet
arms, especially praeda, -ae, f., booty,
defensive weapons spoils (predatory)
fāma, -ae, f., rumor; tēlum, -ī, n., weapon of
reputation, fame offense, spear
Adjectives
dūrus, -a, -um, hard, Rōmānus, -a, -um,
rough; unfeeling, cruel; Roman. As a noun,
severe, toilsome Rōmānus, -ī, m., a
(durable) Roman

LESSON XII, § 90

Nouns Adjectives
fīlius, fīlī, m., son (filial) fīnitimus, -a, -um,
fluvius, fluvī, m., river bordering upon,
(fluent) neighboring, near to. As
gladius, gladī, m., sword a noun, fīnitimī, -ōrum,
(gladiator) m., plur., neighbors
praesidium, praesi´dī, n., Germānus, -a, -um,
garrison, guard, German. As a noun,
protection Germānus, -ī, m., a
proelium, proelī, n., battle German
multus, -a, -um, much;
plur., many
Adverb
saepe, often

LESSON XIII, § 95
Nouns
ager, agrī, m., field (acre) praemium, praemī, n.,
cōpia, -ae, f., plenty, reward, prize (premium)
abundance (copious);
 plur., troops, forces puer, puerī, m., boy
Cornēlius, Cornē´lī, m., (puerile)
Cornelius Rōma, -ae, f., Rome
lōrī´ca, -ae, f., coat of scūtum, -ī, n., shield
mail, corselet (escutcheon)
vir, virī, m., man, hero
(virile)
Adjectives
legiōnārius, -a, -um, 1 pulcher, pulchra,
legionary, belonging to pulchrum, pretty,
the legion. As a noun, beautiful
legiōnāriī, -ōrum, m., Preposition
plur., legionary soldiers apud, among, with acc.
līber, lībera, līberum, free
Conjunction
(liberty) As a noun.
sed, but
līberī, -ōrum, m., plur.,
children (lit. the
freeborn)
1. The genitive singular masculine of adjectives in -ius ends in -iī and the vocative in -ie; not in -ī, as
in nouns.

LESSON XIV, § 99
Nouns
auxilium, auxi´lī, n., help, cōnsilium, cōnsi´lī, n.,
aid (auxiliary) plan (counsel)
castrum, -ī, n., fort dīligentia, -ae, f.,
(castle); plur., camp (lit. diligence, industry
forts) magister, magistrī, m.,
cibus, -ī, m., food master, teacher 1
Adjectives
aeger, aegra, aegrum, sick miser, misera, miserum,
crēber, crēbra, crēbrum, wretched, unfortunate
frequent (miser)
1. Observe that dominus, as distinguished from magister, means master in the sense of owner.

LESSON XV, § 107

Nouns Adjectives
carrus, -ī, m., cart, wagon armātus, -a, -um, armed
inopia, -ae, f., want, lack; īnfīrmus, -a, -um, week,
the opposite of cōpia feeble (infirm)
studium, studī, n., zeal, vali´dus, -a, -um, strong,
eagerness (study) sturdy
Verb Adverb
mātūrat, he (she, it) iam, already, now
hastens. Cf. properat
-que, conjunction, and; an enclitic (cf. § 16) and always
added to the second of two words to be connected, as
arma tēla´que, arms and weapons.

LESSON XVII, § 117

Nouns
agrī cultūra, -ae, f., Gallia, -ae, f., Gaul
agriculture Gallus, -i, m., a Gaul
domicilīum, domīci´lī, n., lacrima, -ae, f., tear
dwelling place numerus, -ī, m., number
(domicile) abode (numeral)
fēmina, -ae, f., woman
(female)
Adjective Adverb
mātūrus, -a, -um, ripe, quō, whither
mature Conjunction
Verbs an, or, introducing the
arat, he (she, it) plows second half of a double
(arable) question, as Is he a
dēsīderat, he (she, it) Roman or a Gaul, Estne
misses, longs for Romanus an Gallus?
(desire), with acc.

LESSON XVIII, § 124

Nouns Adjectives
lūdus, -ī, m.,school īrātus, -a, -um, angry,
socius, socī, m., furious (irate)
companion, ally (social) laetus, -a, -um, happy,
glad (social)
Adverbs
hodiē, to-day nunc, now, the present
ibi, there, in that place moment
mox, presently, soon, of the nūper, lately, recently, of
immediate future the immediate past

LESSON XX, § 136

Nouns
fōrma, -ae, f., form, beauty regīna, -ae, f., queen
poena, -ae, f., punishment, (regal)
penalty superbia, -ae, f., pride,
potentia, -ae, f., power haughtiness
(potent) trīstītīa, -ae, f., sadness,
sorrow
Adjectives Conjunctions
septem, indeclinable, nōn sōlum ... sed etiam,
seven not only ... but also
superbus, -a, -um, proud,
haughty (superb)

LESSON XXI, § 140

 Nouns Adjectives
sacrum, -ī, n., sacrifice, interfectus, -a, -um, slain
offering, rite molestus, -a, -um,
verbum, -ī, n., word (verb) troublesome, annoying
Verbs (molest)
sedeō, -ēre, sit (sediment) perpetuus, -a, -um,
volō, -āre, fly (volatile) perpetual, continuous
ego, personal pronoun, I (egotism). Always emphatic in
the nominative.

LESSON XXII, § 146

Nouns
disciplīna, -ae, f., training, Gāius, Gāī, m., Caius, a
culture, discipline Roman first name
ōrnāmentum, -ī, n., Tiberius, Tibe´rī, m.,
ornament, jewel Tiberius, a Roman first
name
Verb Adverb
doceō, -ēre, teach maximē, most of all,
(doctrine) especially
Adjective
antīquus, -qua, -quum, old, ancient (antique)

LESSON XXVII, § 168

Nouns Adjectives
āla, -ae, f., wing commōtus, -a, -um,
deus, -ī, m., god (deity) 1 moved, excited
monstrum, -ī, n., omen, maximus, -a, -um,
prodigy; monster greatest (maximum)
ōrāculum, -ī, n., oracle saevus, -a, -um, fierce,
savage
 Verb Adverbs
vāstō, -āre, lay waste, ita, thus, in this way, as
devastate follows
tum, then, at that time
1. For the declension of deus, see § 468

LESSON XXVIII, § 171

Verbs Conjunction
respondeō, -ēre, respond, autem, but, moreover, now.
reply Usually
servō, -āre, save, preserve stands second, never first
Adjective Noun
cārus, -a, -um, dear vīta, -ae, f., life (vital)
(cherish)

LESSON XXIX, § 176

Verb Adverbs
superō, -āre, conquer, semper, always
overcome (insuperable) tamen, yet, nevertheless
Nouns Prepositions
cūra, -ae, f., care, trouble dē, with abl., down from;
locus, -ī, m., place, spot concerning
(location). Locus is per, with acc., through
neuter in the plural and Conjunction
is declined loca, -ōrum, si, if
etc.
perīculum, -ī, n., danger,
peril

LESSON XXX, § 182

 Verbs
absum, abesse, irreg., be discēdō, -ere, depart, go
away, be absent, be away, leave, with
distant, with separative separative abl.
abl. egeō, -ēre, lack, need, be
adpropinquō, -āre, draw without, with separative
near, approach abl.
(propinquity), with interficiō, -ere, kill
dative 1 prohibeō, -ēre, restrain,
contineō, -ēre, hold keep from (prohibit)
together, hem in, keep vulnerō, -āre, wound
(contain) (vulnerable)
Nouns Adjective
prōvincia, -ae, f., province dēfessus, -a, -um, weary,
vīnum, -ī, n., wine worn out
Adverb
longē, far, by far, far away
1. This verb governs the dative because the idea of nearness to is stronger than that of motion to. If
the latter idea were the stronger, the word would be used with ad and the accusative.

LESSON XXXI, § 188

Nouns Adjectives
aurum, -ī, n., gold (oriole) attentus, -a, -um, attentive,
mora, -ae, f., delay careful
nāvigium, nāvi´gī, n., dubius, -a, -um, doubtful
boat, ship (dubious)
ventus, -ī, m., wind perfidus, -a, -um, faithless,
(ventilate) treacherous (perfidy)
Verb Adverb
nāvigō, -āre, sail anteā, before, previously
(navigate)
Preposition
sine, with abl., without
 LESSON XXXII, § 193

Nouns Adjectives
animus, -ī, m., mind, adversus, -a, -um,
heart; spirit, feeling opposite; adverse,
(animate) contrary
bracchium, bracchī, n., plēnus, -a, -um, full
forearm, arm (plenty)
porta, -ae, f., gate (portal)
Preposition Adverb
prō, with abl., before; in diū, for a long time, long
behalf of; instead of

LESSON XXXIV, § 200

Adverbs
celeriter, quickly (celerity) graviter, heavily, severely
dēnique, finally (gravity)
subitō, suddenly
Verb
reportō, -āre, -āvī, bring back, restore; win, gain (report)

LESSON XXXVI, § 211

dexter, dextra, dextrum, sinister, sinistra,
right (dextrous) sinistrum, left
frūstrā, adv., in vain
(frustrate)
gerō, gerere, gessī, gestus, bear, carry on; wear; bellum
gerere, to wage war
occupō, occupāre, occupāvī, occupātus, seize, take
possession of (occupy)
postulō, postulāre, postulāvī, postulātus, demand (ex-
postulate)
recūsō, recūsāre, recūsāvī, recūsātus, refuse
stō, stāre, stetī, status, stand
temptō, temptāre, temptāvī, temptātus, try, tempt, test;
attempt
teneō, tenēre, tenuī, ——, keep, hold (tenacious)

The word ubi, which we have used so much in the sense

of where in asking a question, has two other uses equally
important:
1. ubi = when, as a relative conjunction denoting time; as,
Ubi mōnstrum audīvērunt, fūgērunt, when they
heard the monster, they fled
2. ubi = where, as a relative conjunction denoting place;
as,
Videō oppidum ubi Galba habitat, I see the town
where Galba lives
Ubi is called a relative conjunction because it is
equivalent to a relative pronoun. When in the first
sentence is equivalent to at the time at which; and in the
second, where is equivalent to the place in which.

LESSON XXXVII, § 217

neque or nec, conj., castellum, -ī, n., redoubt,
neither, nor, and ... not; fort (castle)
neque ... neque, neither cotīdiē, adv., daily
... nor
cessō, cessāre, cessāvī, cessātus, cease, with the infin.
incipiō, incipere, incēpī, inceptus, begin (incipient),
with the infin.
oppugnō, oppugnāre, oppugnāvī, oppugnātus, storm,
assail
petō, petere, petivi or petiī, petītus, aim at, assail,
storm, attack; seek, ask (petition)
 pōnō, pōnere, posuī, positus, place, put (position);
castra pōnere, to pitch camp
possum, posse, potuī, ——, be able, can (potent), with
the infin.
vetō, vetāre, vetuī, vetitus, forbid (veto), vith the infin.;
opposite of iubeō, command
vincō, vincere, vīcī, victus, conquer (in-vincible)
vīvō, vīvere, vīxī, ——, live, be alive (re-vive)

LESSON XXXIX, § 234

barbarus, -a, -um, pedes, peditis, m., foot
strange, foreign, soldier (pedestrian)
barbarous. As a noun, pēs, pedis, 1 m., foot
barbarī, -ōrum, m., (pedal)
plur., savages, prīnceps, prīncipis, m.,
barbarians chief (principal)
dux, ducis, m., leader rēx, rēgis, m., king (regal)
(duke). Cf. the verb summus, -a, -um, highest,
dūcō greatest (summit)
eques, equitis, m., virtūs, virtūtis, f.,
horseman, cavalryman manliness, courage
(equestrian) (virtue)
iūdex, iūdicis, m., judge
lapis, lapidis, m., stone
(lapidary)
mīles, mīlitis, m., soldier
(militia)
1. Observe that e is long in the nom. sing, and short in the other cases.

LESSON XL, § 237

Caesar, -aris, m., Cæsar imperātor, imperātōris,
captīvus, -ī, m., captive, m., commander in chief,
prisoner general (emperor)
cōnsul, -is, m., consul legiō, legiōnis, f., legion
frāter, frātris, m., brother māter, mātris, f., mother
(fraternity) (maternal)
homō, hominis, m., man, ōrdō, ōrdinis, m., row,
human being rank (order)
impedīmentum, -ī, n., pater, patris, m., father
hindrance (impediment); (paternal)
plur. impedīmenta, salūs, salūtis, f., safety
-ōrum, baggage (salutary)
soror, sorōris, f., sister
(sorority)

LESSON XLI, § 239

calamitās, calamitātis, f., ōrātor, ōrātōris, m.,
loss, disaster, defeat orator
(calamity) rīpa, -ae, f., bank (of a
caput, capitis, n., head stream)
(capital) tempus, temporis, n., time
flūmen, flūminis, n., river (temporal)
(flume) terror, terrōris, m., terror,
labor, labōris, m., labor, fear
toil victor, victōris, m., victor
opus, operis, n., work, task
accipiō, accipere, accēpī, acceptus, receive, accept
cōnfirmō, cōnfīrmāre, cōnfīrmāvī, cōnfīrmātus,
strengthen, establish, encourage (confirm)

LESSON XLIII, § 245

animal, animālis (-ium 1), ignis, ignis (-ium), m., fire
n., animal (ignite)
avis, avis (-ium), f., bird īnsigne, īnsignis (-ium), n.
(aviation) decoration, badge
(ensign)
 caedēs, caedīs (-ium), f., mare, maris (-ium 2), n.,
slaughter sea (marine)
calcar, calcāris (-ium), n., nāvis, nāvis (-ium), f.,
spur ship (naval);
cīvis, cīvis (-ium), m. and nāvis longa, man-of-war
f., citizen (civic) turris, turris (-ium), f.,
cliēns, clientis (-ium), m., tower (turret)
retainer, dependent urbs, urbis (-ium), f., city
(client) (suburb). An urbs is
fīnis, fīnis (-ium), m., end, larger than an oppidum.
limit (final); plur.,
country, territory
hostis, hostis (-ium), m.
and f., enemy in war
(hostile). Distinguish
from inimīcus, which
means a personal enemy
1. The genitive plural ending -ium is written to mark the i-stems.
2. The genitive plural of mare is not in use.

LESSON XLIV, § 249

arbor, arboris, f., tree mōns, montis (-ium), m.,
(arbor) mountain;
collis, collis (-ium), m., summus mōns, top of the
hill mountain
dēns, dentis (-ium), m., numquam, adv., never
tooth (dentist) pōns, pontis, m., bridge
fōns, fontis (-ium), m.. (pontoon)
fountain, spring; source sanguis, sanguinis, m.,
iter, itineris, n., march, blood (sanguinary)
journey, route (itinerary) summus, -a, -um, highest,
mēnsis, mēnsis (-ium), m., greatest (summit)
month trāns, prep, with acc.,
across (transatlantic)
moenia, -ium, n., plur., vīs (vīs), gen. plur. virium,
walls, fortifications. Cf. f. strength, force,
mūrus violence (vim)

LESSON XLV, § 258

ācer, ācris, ācre, sharp, omnis, omne, every, all
keen, eager (acrid) (omnibus)
brevis, breve, short, brief pār, gen. paris, equal (par)
difficilis, difficile, difficult paucī, -ae, -a, few, only a
facilis, facile, facile, easy few (paucity)
fortis, forte, brave secundus, -a, -um, second;
(fortitude) favorable, opposite of
gravis, grave, heavy, adversus
severe, serious (grave) signum, -ī, n., signal, sign,
standard
vēlōx, gen. vēlōcis, swift
(velocity)
conlocō, conlocāre, conlocāvī, conlocātus, arrange,
station, place (collocation)
dēmōnstrō, dēmōnstrāre, dēmōnstrāvī, dēmōnstrātus,
point out, explain (demonstrate)
mandō, mandāre, mandāvī, mandātus, commit, intrust
(mandate)

LESSON XLVI, § 261

adventus, -ūs, m., impetus, -ūs, m., attack
approach, arrival (impetus); impetum
(advent) facere in, with acc., to
ante, prep, with acc., make an attack on
before (ante-date) lacus, -ūs, dat. and abl.
cornū, -ūs, n., horn, wing plur. lacubus, m., lake
of an army (cornucopia); manus, -ūs, f., hand; band,
force (manual)
ā dextrō cornū, on the portus, -ūs, m., harbor
right wing; (port)
ā sinistrō cornū, on the post, prep, with acc.,
left wing behind, after (post-
equitātus, -ūs, m., cavalry mortem)
exercitus, -ūs, m., army
cremō, cremāre, cremāvī, cremātus, burn (cremate)
exerceō, exercēre, exercuī, exercitus, practice, drill,
train (exercise)

LESSON XLVII, § 270

Athēnae, -ārum, f., plur., propter, prep. with acc.,
Athens on account of, because
Corinthus, -ī, f., Corinth of
domus, -ūs, locative domī, rūs, rūris, in the plur. only
f., house, home (dome). nom. and acc. rūra, n.,
Cf. domicilium country (rustic)
Genāva, -ae, f., Geneva tergum, tergī, n., back; ā
Pompēii, -ōrum, m., plur., tergō, behind, in the
Pompeii, a city in rear
Campania. See map vulnus, vulneris, n.,
wound (vulnerable)
committō, committere, commīsī, commissus, intrust,
commit; proelium committere, join battle
convocō, convocāre, convocāvī, convocātus, call
together, summon (convoke)
timeō, timēre, timuī, ——, fear; be afraid (timid)
vertō, vertere, vertī, versus, turn, change (convert);
terga vertere, to turn the backs, hence to retreat

LESSON XLVIII, § 276

aciēs, -ēī, f., line of battle lūx, lūcis, f., light (lucid);
aestās, aestātis, f., summer prīma lux, daybreak
annus, -ī, m., year (annual) merīdiēs, acc. -em, abl. -ē,
diēs, diēī, m., day (diary) no plur., m., midday
fidēs, fideī, no plur., f., (meridian)
faith, trust; promise, nox, noctis (-ium), f.,
word; protection; in night (nocturnal)
fidem venīre, to come prīmus, -a, -um, first
under the protection (prime)
fluctus, -ūs, m. wave, rēs, reī, f., thing, matter
billow (fluctuate) (real);
hiems, hiemis, f., winter rēs gestae, deeds, exploits
hōra, -ae, f., hour (lit. things performed);
rēs adversae, adversity;
rēs secundae, prosperity
spēs, speī, f., hope

LESSON XLIX, § 283

amīcitia, -ae, f., friendship nūntius, nūntī, m.,
(amicable) messenger. Cf. nūntiō
itaque, conj., and so, pāx, pācis, f., peace
therefore, accordingly (pacify)
littera, -ae, f., a letter of rēgnum, -ī, n., reign,
the alphabet; sovereignty, kingdom
plur., a letter, an epistle supplicum, suppli´cī, n.,
metus, metūs, m., fear punishment;
nihil, indeclinable, n., supplicum sūmere dē,
nothing (nihilist) with abl., inflict
punishment on;
supplicum dare, suffer
punishment. Cf. poena
placeō, placēre, placuī, placitus, be pleasing to, please,
with dative. Cf. § 154
sūmō, sūmere, sūmpsī, sūmptus, take up, assume
sustineō, sustinēre, sustinuī, sustentus, sustain
 LESSON L, § 288
corpus, corporis, n., body ōlim, adv., formerly, once
(corporal) upon a time
dēnsus, -a, -um, dense pars, partis (-ium), f.,
īdem, e´adem, idem, part, region, direction
demonstrative pronoun, quoque, adv., also. Stands
the same (identity) after the word which it
ipse, ipsa, ipsum, emphasizes
intensive pronoun, self; sōl, sōlis, m., sun (solar)
even, very vērus, -a, -um, true, real
mīrus, -a, -um, wonderful, (verity)
marvelous (miracle)
dēbeō, dēbēre, dēbuī, dēbitus, owe, ought (debt)
ēripiō, ēripere, ēripuī, ēreptus, snatch from

LESSON LI, § 294

hic, haec, hoc, nōmen, nōminis, n., name
demonstrative pronoun, (nominate)
this (of mine); he, she, it oculus, -ī, m., eye (oculist)
ille, illa, illud, prīstinus, -a, -um, former,
demonstrative pronoun old-time (pristine)
that (yonder); he, she, it pūblicus, -a, -um, public,
invīsus, -a, -um, hateful, belonging to the state;
detested, with dative Cf. rēs pūblica, reī
§ 143 pūblicae, f., the
iste, ista, istud, commonwealth, the
demonstrative pronoun, state, the republic
that (of yours); he, she, vestīgium, vestī´gī, n.,
it footprint, track; trace,
lībertās, -ātis, f., liberty vestige
modus, -ī, m., measure; vōx, vōcis, f., voice
manner, way, mode
 LESSON LII, § 298
incolumis, -e, unharmed satis, adv., enough,
nē ... quidem, adv., not sufficiently (satisfaction)
even. The emphatic tantus, -a, -um, so great
word stands between nē vērō, adv., truly, indeed, in
and quidem fact. As a conj. but,
nisi, conj., unless, if ... not however, usually stands
paene, adv., almost (pen- second, never first.
insula)
dēcidō, dēcidere, dēcidī, ——, fall down (deciduous)
dēsiliō, dēsilīre, dēsiluī, dēsultus, leap down, dismount
maneō, manēre, mānsī, mānsūrus, remain
trādūcō, trādūcere, trādūxī, trāductus, lead across

LESSON LIII, § 306

aquila, -ae, f., eagle mēns, mentis (-ium), f.,
(aquiline) mind (mental). Cf.
audāx, gen. audācis, adj., animus
bold, audacious opportūnus, -a, -um,
celer, celeris, celere, swift, opportune
quick (celerity). Cf. quam, adv., than. With the
vēlōx superlative quam gives
explōratōr, -ōris, m., the force of as possible,
scout, spy (explorer) as quam audācissimī
ingēns, gen. ingentis, adj., virī, men as bold as
huge, vast possible
medius, -a, -um, middle, recens, gen. recentis, adj.,
middle part of (medium) recent
tam, adv., so. Always with
an adjective or adverb,
while ita is generally
used with a verb
quaerō, quaerere, quaesīvī, quaesītus, ask, inquire, seek
 (question). Cf. petō

LESSON LIV, § 310

alacer, alacris, alacre, nōbilis, nōbile, well
eager, spirited, excited known, noble
(alacrity) noctū, adv. (an old abl.), by
celeritās, -ātis, f., speed night (nocturnal)
(celerity) statim, adv., immediately,
clāmor, clāmōris, m., at once
shout, clamor subitō, adv., suddenly
lēnis, lēne, mild, gentle tardus, -a, -um, slow
(lenient) (tardy)
mulier, muli´eris, f.,
woman
multitūdō, multitūdinis,
f., multitude
nēmŏ, dat. nēminī, acc.
nēminem (gen. nūllīus,
abl. nūllō, from nūllus),
no plur., m. and f., no
one
cupiō, cupere, cupīvī, cupītus, desire, wish (cupidity)

LESSON LV, § 314

aedificium, aedifi´cī, n., reliquus, -a, -um,
building, dwelling remaining, rest of. As a
(edifice) noun, m. and n. plur., the
imperium, impe´rī, n., rest (relic)
command, chief power; scelus, sceleris, n., crime
empire servitūs, -ūtis, f., slavery
mors, mortis (-ium), f., (servitude)
death (mortal) vallēs, vallis (-ium), f.,
valley
abdō, abdere, abdidī, abditus, hide
contendō, contendere, contendī, contentus, strain,
struggle; hasten (contend)
occīdō, occīdere, occīdī, occīsus, cut down, kill. Cf.
necō, interficiō
perterreō, perterrēre, perterruī, perterritus, terrify,
frighten
recipiō, recipere, recēpī, receptus, receive, recover; sē
recipere, betake one’s self, withdraw, retreat
trādō, trādere, trādidī, trāditus, give over, surrender,
deliver (traitor)

LESSON LVI, § 318

aditus, -ūs, m., approach, nam, conj., for
access; entrance obses, obsidis, m. and f.,
cīvitās, cīvitātis, f., hostage
citizenship; body of paulō, adv. (abl. n. of
citizens, state (city) paulus), by a little,
inter, prep, with acc., somewhat
between, among
(interstate commerce)
incolō, incolere, incoluī, ——, transitive, inhabit;
intransitive, dwell. Cf.
habitō, vīvō
relinquō, relinquere, relīquī, relictus, leave, abandon
(relinquish)
statuō, statuere, statuī, statūtus, fix, decide (statute),
usually with infin.

LESSON LVII, § 326

aequus, -a, -um, even, gēns, gentis (-ium), f.,
level; equal race, tribe, nation
cohors, cohortis (-ium), f., (Gentile)
cohort, a tenth part of a negōtium, negōtī, n.,
legion, about 360 men business, affair, matter
currō, currere, cucurrī, (negotiate)
cursus, run (course) regiō, -ōnis, f., region,
difficultās, -ātis, f., district
difficulty rūmor, rūmōris, m.,
fossa, -ae, f., ditch (fosse) rumor, report. Cf. fāma
simul atque, conj., as soon
as
suscipiō, suscipere, suscēpī, susceptus, undertake
trahō, trahere, trāxī, trāctus, drag, draw (ex-tract)
valeō, valēre, valuī, valitūrus, be strong; plūrimum
valēre, to be most powerful, have great influence
(value). Cf. validus

LESSON LVIII, § 332

commeātus, -ūs, m.. mercātor, mercātōris, m.,
provisions trader, merchant
lātitūdō, -inis, f., width mūnītiō, -ōnis, f.,
(latitude) fortification (munition)
longitūdō, -inis, f., length spatium, spatī, n., room,
(longitude) space, distance; time
magnitūdō, -inis, f., size,
magnitude
cognōscō, cognōscere, cognōvī, cognitus, learn; in the
perfect tenses, know (re-cognize)
cōgō, cōgere, coēgī, coāctus, collect; compel (cogent)
dēfendō, dēfendere, dēfendī, dēfēnsus, defend
incendō, incendere, incendī, incēnsus, set fire to, burn
(incendiary). Cf. cremō
obtineō, obtinēre, obtinuī, obtentus, possess, occupy,
hold (obtain)
perveniō, pervenīre, pervēnī, perventus, come through,
arrive

LESSON LIX, § 337

agmen, agminis, n., line of Helvētiī, -ōrum, m., the
march, column; prīmum Helvetii, a Gallic tribe
agmen, the van; passus, passūs, m., a pace,
novissimum agmen, the five Roman feet; mīlle
rear passuum, a thousand
atque, ac, conj., and; (of) paces, a Roman mile
atque is used before quā dē causā, for this
vowels and consonants, reason, for what reason
ac before consonants vāllum, -ī, n., earth-works,
only. Cf. et and -que rampart
concilium, conci´lī, n.,
council, assembly
cadō, cadere, cecidī, cāsūrus, fall (decadence)
dēdō, dēdere, dēdidī, dēditus, surrender, give up; with a
reflexive pronoun, surrender one’s self, submit, with
the dative of the indirect object
premō, premere, pressī, pressus, press hard, harass
vexō, vexāre, vexāvī, vexātus, annoy, ravage (vex)

LESSON LX, § 341

aut, conj., or; aut ... aut, opīniō, -ōnis, f., opinion,
either ... or supposition, expectation
causā, abl. of causa, for rēs frūmentāria, reī
the sake of, because of. frūmentāriae, f. (lit. the
Always stands after the grain affair), grain
gen. which modifies it supply
ferē, adv., nearly, almost timor, -ōris, m., fear. Cf.
timeō
 undique, adv., from all
sides
cōnor, cōnārī, cōnātus sum, attempt, try
ēgredior, ēgredī, ēgressus sum, move out, disembark;
prōgredior, move forward, advance (egress, progress)
moror, morārī, morātus sum, delay
orior, orirī, ortus sum, arise, spring; begin; be born
(from) (origin)
proficīscor, proficīscī, profectus sum, set out
revertor, revertī, reversus sum, return (revert). The
forms of this verb are usually active, and not deponent,
in the perfect system. Perf. act., revertī
sequor, sequī, secūtus sum, follow (sequence). Note the
following compounds of sequor and the force of the
different prefixes: cōnsequor (follow with), overtake;
īnsequor (follow against), pursue; subsequor (follow
under), follow close after

LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY

Translations inclosed within parentheses are not to be used as such; they are
inserted to show etymological meanings.

The “parentheses” are shown in square

brackets [ ], as in the original.

ABCDEFGHILMNOPQRSTUV

A
ā or ab, prep. with abl. altitūdō, -inis, f. [altus,
from, by, off. high], height
Translated on in ā altus, -a, -um, adj. high,
dextrō cornū, on the tall, deep
 right wing; ā fronte, Amāzonēs, -um, f. plur.
on the front or in Amazons, a fabled
front; ā dextrā, on the tribe of warlike
right; ā latere, on the women
side; etc. ambō, -ae, -ō, adj. (decl.
ab-dō, -ere, -didī, -ditus, like duo), both
hide, conceal amīcē, adv. [amīcus,
ab-dūcō, -ere, -dūxī, - friendly], superl.
ductus, lead off, lead amīcissimē, in a
away friendly manner
abs-cīdō, -ere, -cīdī,-cīsus amiciō, -īre, ——, -ictus
[ab(s), off, + caedō, [am-, about, + iaciō,
cut], cut off throw], throw around,
ab-sum, -esse, āfuī, wrap about, clothe
āfutūrus, be away, be amīcitia, -ae, f. [amīcus,
absent, be distant, be friend], friendship
off; with ā or ab and amīcus, -a, -um, adj.
abl., § 501.32 [amō, love], friendly.
ac, conj., see atque As a noun, amīcus, -ī,
ac-cipiō, -ere, -cēpī, - m. friend
ceptus [ad, to, + ā-mittō, -ere, -mīsī, -
capiō, take], receive, missus, send away;
accept lose
ācer, ācris, ācre, adj. amō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus,
sharp; figuratively, love, like, be fond of
keen, active, eager (§ (§ 488)
471) amphitheātrum, -ī, n.
acerbus, -a, -um, adj. amphitheater
bitter, sour amplus, -a, -um, adj.
aciēs, -ēī, f. [ācer, sharp], large, ample;
edge; line of battle honorable, noble
ācriter, adv. [ācer, sharp], an, conj. or, introducing
compared ācrius, the second part of a
ācerrimē, sharply, double question
fiercely ancilla, -ae, f. maidservant
ancora, -ae, f. anchor
ad, prep. with acc. to, Andromeda, -ae, f.
towards, near. With Androm´eda, daughter
the gerund or of Cepheus and wife
gerundive, to, for of Perseus
ad-aequō, -āre, -āvī, angulus, -ī, m. angle,
-ātus, make equal, corner
make level with anim-advertō, -ere, -tī, -
ad-dūcō, -ere, -dūxī, - sus [animus, mind, +
ductus, lead to; move, advertō, turn to], turn
induce the mind to, notice
ad-eō, -īre, -iī, -itus, go to, animal, -ālis, n. [anima,
approach, draw near, breath], animal (§
visit, with acc. (§ 413) 465. b)
ad-ferō, ad-ferre, at-tulī, animōsus, -a, -um, adj.
ad-lātus, bring, spirited
convey; report, animus, -ī, m. [anima,
announce; render, breath], mind, heart;
give (§ 426) spirit, courage,
ad-ficiō, -ere, -fēcī, -fectus feeling; in this sense
[ad, to, + faciō, do], often plural
affect, visit annus, -i, m. year
adflīctātus, -a, -um, adj. ante, prep, with acc. before
[part. of adflīctō, anteā, adv. [ante], before,
shatter], shattered formerly
ad-flīgō, -ere, -flīxī, - antīquus, -a, -um, adj.
flīctus, dash upon, [ante, before], former,
strike upon; harass, ancient, old
distress aper, aprī, m. wild boar
ad-hibeō, -ēre, -uī, -itus Apollō, -inis, m. Apollo,
[ad, to, + habeō, son of Jupiter and
hold], apply, employ, Latona, brother of
use Diana
ad-hūc, adv. hitherto, as ap-pāreō, -ēre, -uī, ——
yet, thus far [ad + pāreō, appear],
aditus, -ūs, m. [adeō, appear
approach], approach,
 access; entrance. Cf. ap-pellō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus,
adventus call by name, name.
ad-ligō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, Cf. nōminō, vocō
bind to, fasten Appius, -a, -um, adj.
ad-loquor, -loquī, -locūtus Appian
sum, dep. verb [ad, ap-plicō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus,
to, + loquor, speak], apply, direct, turn
speak to, address, apud, prep, with acc.
with acc. among; at, at the
ad-ministrō, -āre, -āvī, house of
-ātus, manage, direct aqua, -ae, f. water
admīrātiō, -ōnis, f. aquila, -ae, f. eagle
[admīror, wonder at], āra, -ae, f. altar
admiration, arbitror, -ārī, -ātus sum,
astonishment think, suppose (§ 420.
ad-moveō, -ēre, -mōvī, - c). Cf. exīstimō, putō
mōtus, move to; arbor, -oris, f. tree (§ 247.
apply, employ 1. a)
ad-propinquō, -āre, -āvī, Arcadia, -ae, f. Arcadia, a
-ātus, come near, district in southern
approach, with dat. Greece
ad-sum, -esse, -fuī, - ārdeō, -ēre, ārsī, ārsūrus,
futūres, be present; be on fire, blaze, burn
assist; with dat., § 426 arduus, -a, -um, adj. steep
adulēscēns, -entis, m. and Arīcia, -ae, f. Aricia, a
f. [part. of adolēscō, town on the Appian
grow], a youth, young Way, near Rome
man, young person ariēs, -etis, m. battering-
adventus, -ūs, m. [ad, to, ram (p. 221)
+ veniō, come], arma, -ōrum, n. plur.
approach, arrival (§ arms, weapons. Cf.
466) tēlum
adversus, -a, -um, adj. armātus, -a, -um, adj.
[part. of advertō, turn [armō, arm], armed,
to], turned towards, equipped
 facing; contrary, arō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, plow,
adverse. till
rēs adversae, adversity ars, artis, f. art, skill
aedificium, aedifi´cī, n. articulus, -ī, m. joint
[aedificō, build], ascrībō, -ere, -scrīpsī, -
building, edifice scrīptus [ad, in
aedificō, -āre, -āvi, -ātus addition, + scrībō,
[aedēs, house, + write], enroll, enlist
faciō, make], build Āsia, -ae, f. Asia, i.e. Asia
aeger, aegra, aegrum, adj. Minor
sick, feeble at, conj. but. Cf. autem,
aequālis, -e, adj. equal, sed
like. As a noun, Athēnae, -ārum, f. plur.
aequālis, -is, m. or f. Athens
one of the same age Atlās, -antis, m. Atlas, a
aequus, -a, -um, adj. even, Titan who was said to
level; equal hold up the sky
Aesōpus, -ī, m. Æsop, a at-que, ac, conj. and, and
writer of fables also, and what is
aestās, -ātis, f. summer, more. atque may be
initā aestāte, at the used before either
beginning of summer vowels or consonants,
aetās, -ātis, f. age ac before consonants
Aethiopia, -ae, f. Ethiopia, only
a country in Africa attentus, -a, -um, adj.
Āfrica, -ae, f. Africa [part. of attendō,
Āfricānus, -a, -um, adj. of direct (the mind)
Africa. A name given toward], attentive,
to Scipio for his intent on, careful
victories in Africa at-tonitus, -a, -um, adj.
ager, agrī, m. field, farm, thunderstruck,
land (§ 462. c) astounded
agger, -eris, m. mound audācia, -ae, f. [audāx,
agmen, -inis, n. [agō, bold], boldness,
drive], an army on the audacity
march, column.
 prīmum agmen, the van audācter, adv. [audāx,
agō, -ere, ēgī, āctus, drive, bold], compared
lead; do, perform. audācius,
vītam agere, pass life audācissimē, boldly
agricola, -ae, m. [ager, audāx, -ācis, adj. bold,
field, + colō, daring
cultivate], farmer audeō, -ēre, ausus sum,
agrī cultūra, -ae, f. dare
agriculture audiō, -īre, -īvī or -īī,
āla, -ae, f. wing -ītus, hear, listen to
alacer, -cris, -cre, adj. (§§ 420.d; 491)
active, eager. Cf. ācer Augēās, -ae, m. Auge´as, a
alacritās, -ātis, f. [alacer, king whose stables
active], eagerness, Hercules cleaned
alacrity aura, -ae, f. air, breeze
alacriter, adv. [alacer, aurātus, -a, -um, adj.
active], comp [aurum, gold],
alacrius, alacerrimē, adorned with gold
actively, eagerly aureus, -a, -um, adj.
albus, -a, -um, adj., white [aurum, gold], golden
alcēs, -is, f. elk aurum, -ī, n. gold
Alcmēna, -ae, f. Alcme´na, aut, conj. or.
the mother of aut ... aut, either ... or
Hercules autem, conj., usually
aliquis (-quī), -qua, -quid second, never first, in
(-quod), indef. pron. the clause, but,
some one, some (§ moreover, however,
487) now. Cf. at, sed
alius, -a, -ud (gen. -īus, auxilium, auxi´lī, n. help,
dat. -ī), adj. another, aid, assistance; plur.
other. auxiliaries
alius ... alius, one ... ā-vertō, -ere, -tī, -sus, turn
another. away, turn aside
aliī ... aliī, some ... avis, -is, f. bird (§ 243. 1)
others (§ 110)
Alpēs, -ium, f. plur. the
Alps
alter, -era, -erum (gen.
-īus, dat. -ī), adj. the
one, the other (of
two).
alter ... alter, the one ...
the other (§ 110)

B
ballista, -ae, f. ballista, an bis, adv. twice
engine for hurling bonus, -a, -um, adj.
missiles (p. 220) compared melior,
balteus, -ī, m. belt, sword optimus, good, kind
belt (§ 469. a)
barbarus, -ī, m. bōs, bovis (gen. plur.
barbarian, savage boum or bovum, dat.
bellum, -ī, n. war. and abl. plur. bōbus
bellum īnferre, with or būbus), m. and f.
dat. make war upon ox, cow
bene, adv. [for bonē, from bracchium, bracchī, n.
bonus], compared arm
melius, optimē, well brevis, -e, adj. short
benignē, adv. [benignus, Brundisium, -ī, n.
kind], compared Brundisium, a seaport
benignius, in southern Italy. See
benignissimē, kindly map
benignus, -a, -um, adj. bulla, -ae, f. bulla, a locket
good-natured, kind, made of small
often used with dat. concave plates of gold
bīnī, -ae, -a, distributive fastened by a spring
numeral adj. two each, (p. 212)
two at a time (§ 334)

C
C. abbreviation for Gāius, com-primō, -ere, -pressī, -
Eng. Caius pressus [com-,
cadō, -ere, ce´cidī, together, + premō,
cāsūrus, fall press], press together,
caedēs, -is, f. [caedō, cut], grasp, seize
(a cutting down), con-cidō, -ere, -cidī, ——
slaughter, carnage (§ [com-, intensive, +
465. a) cadō, fall], fall down
caelum, -ī, n. sky, heavens concilium, conci´lī, n.
Caesar, -aris, m. Cæsar, meeting, council
the famous general, con-clūdō, -ere, -clūsī, -
statesman, and writer clūsus [com-,
calamitās, -ātis, f. loss, intensive, + claudō,
calamity, defeat, close], shut up, close;
disaster end, finish
calcar, -āris, n. spur (§ con-currō, -ere, -currī, -
465. b) cursus [com-,
Campānia, -ae, f. together, + currō,
Campania., a district run], run together;
of central Italy. See rally, gather
map condiciō, -ōnis, f. [com-,
Campānus, -a, -um, adj. together, + dicō, talk],
of Campania agreement, condition,
campus, -ī, m. plain, field, terms
esp. the Campus con-dōnō, -āre, -āvī,
Martius, along the -ātus, pardon
Tiber just outside the con-dūcō, -ere, -dūxī, -
walls of Rome ductus, hire
canis, -is, m. and f. dog cōn-ferō, -ferre, -tulī, -
canō, -ere, ce´cinī, ——, lātus, bring together.
sing sē cōnferre, betake one’s
cantō, -āre, -āvi, -ātus self
[canō, sing], sing cōn-fertus, -a, -um, adj.
Capēnus, -a, -um, adj. of crowded, thick
Capena, esp. the cōnfestim, adv.
Porta Cape´na, the immediately
 gate at Rome leading cōn-ficiō, -ere, -fēcī, -
to the Appian Way fectus [com-,
capiō, -ere, cēpī, captus, completely, + faciō,
take, seize, capture (§ do], make, complete,
492) accomplish, finish
Capitōlīnus, -a, -um, adj. cōn-fīrmō, -āre, -āvī,
belonging to the -ātus, make firm,
Capitol, Capitoline establish, strengthen,
Capitōlium, Capitō´lī, n. affirm, assert
[caput, head], the cōn-fluō, -ere, -flūxī,
Capitol, the hill at ——, flow together
Rome on which stood cōn-fugiō, -ere, -fūgī, -
the temple of Jupiter fugitūrus, flee for
Capitolinus and the refuge, flee
citadel con-iciō, -ere, -iēcī, -iectus
capsa, -ae, f. box for books [com-, intensive, +
captīvus, -ī, m. [capiō, iaciō, throw], hurl
take], captive con-iungō, -ere, -iūnxī, -
Capua, -ae, f. Capua, a iūnctus [com-,
large city of together, + iungō,
Campania. See map join], join together,
caput, -itis, n. head (§ 464. unite
2. b) con-iūrō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus
carcer, -eris, m. prison, [com-, together, +
jail iūrō, swear], unite by
carrus, -ī, m. cart, wagon oath, conspire
cārus, -a, -um, adj. dear; con-locō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus
precious [com-, together, +
casa, -ae, f. hut, cottage locō, place], arrange,
castellum, -ī, n. [dim. of place, station
castrum, fort], conloquium, conlo´quī, n.
redoubt, fort [com-, together, +
castrum, -ī, n. fort. loquor, speak],
Usually in the plural, conversation,
castra, -ōrum, a conference
military camp.
 castra pōnere, to pitch cōnor, -ārī, -ātus sum,
camp dep. verb, endeavor,
cāsus, -us, m. [cadō, fall], attempt, try
chance; misfortune, cōn-scendō, -ere, -scendī,
loss -scēnsus [com-,
catapulta, -ae, f. catapult, intensive, + scandō,
an engine for hurling climb], climb up,
stones ascend.
catēna, -ae, f. chain nāvem cōnscendere,
caupōna, -ae, f. inn embark, go on board
causa, -ae, f. cause, cōn-scrībō, -ere, -scrīpsī, -
reason, quā dē causā, scrīptus [com-,
for this reason together, + scrībō,
cēdō, -ere, cessī, cessūrus, write], (write
give way, retire together), enroll,
celer, -eris, -ere, adj. swift, enlist
fleet cōn-secrō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus
celeritās, -ātis, f. [celer, [com-, intensive, +
swift], swiftness, sacrō, consecrate],
speed consecrate, devote
celeriter, adv. [celer, cōn-sequor, -sequī, -
swift], compared secūtus sum, dep.
celerius, celerrimē, verb [com-, intensive,
swiftly + sequor, follow],
cēna, -ae, f. dinner pursue; overtake; win
centum, indecl. numeral cōn-servō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus
adj. hundred [com-, intensive, +
centuriō, -ōnis, m. servō, save], preserve,
centurion, captain save
Cēpheus (dissyl.), -eī (acc. cōnsilium, cōnsi´lī, n.
Cēphea), m. Cepheus, plan, purpose, design;
a king of Ethiopia and wisdom
father of Andromeda cōn-sistō, -ere, -stitī, -
Cerberus, -ī, m. Cerberus, stitus [com-,
the fabled three- intensive, + sistō,
headed dog that cause to stand], stand
 guarded the entrance firmly, halt, take one’s
to Hades stand
certāmen, -inis, n. [certō, cōn-spiciō, -ere, -spēxī, -
struggle], struggle, spectus [com-,
contest, rivalry intensive, + spiciō,
certē, adv. [certus, sure], spy], look at
compared certius, attentively, perceive,
certissimē, surely, see
certainly cōnstantia, -ae, f.
certus, -a, -um, adj. fixed, firmness, steadiness,
certain, sure. perseverance
aliquem certiōrem cōn-stituō, -ere, -uī, -ūtus
facere (to make some [com-, intensive, +
one more certain), to statuō, set], establish,
inform some one determine, resolve
cervus, -ī, m. stag, deer cōn-stō, -āre, -stitī, -
cessō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, stātūrus [com-,
delay, cease together, + stō,
cibāria, -ōrum, n. plur. stand], agree; be
food, provisions certain ; consist of
cibus, -ī, m. food, victuals cōnsul, -ulis, m. consul (§
Cimbrī, -ōrum, m. plur. 464. 2. a)
the Cimbri cōn-sūmō, -ere, -sūmpsī, -
Cimbricus, -a, -um, adj. sūmptus [com-,
Cimbrian intensive, + sumō,
cīnctus, -a, -um, adj. [part. take], consume, use up
of cingō, surround], con-tendō, -ere, -dī, -tus,
girt, surrounded strain; hasten; fight,
cingō, -ere, cīnxī, cīnctus, contend, struggle
gird, surround con-tineō, -ēre, -uī, -
circiter, adv. about tentus [com-,
circum, prep, with acc. together, + teneō,
around hold], hold together,
circum´-dō, -dare, -dedī, - hem in, contain;
datus, place around, restrain
surround, inclose
circum´-eō, -īre, -iī, -itus, contrā, prep, with acc.
go around against, contrary to
circum-sistō, -ere, circum con-trahō, -ere, -trāxī, -
´stetī, ——, stand trāctus [com-,
around, surround together, + trahō,
circum-veniō, -īre, -vēnī, - draw], draw together;
ventus (come of sails, shorten, furl
around), surround contrōversia, -ae, f.
citerior, -ius, adj. in comp., dispute, quarrel
superl. citimus, hither, con-veniō, -īre, -vēnī, -
nearer (§ 475) ventus [com-,
cīvīlis, -e, adj. [cīvis], civil together, + veniō,
cīvis, -is, m. and f. citizen come], come together,
(§ 243. 1) meet, assemble
cīvitās, -ātis, f. [cīvis, con-vertō, -ere, -vertī, -
citizen], (body of versus [com-,
citizens), state; intensive, + vertō,
citizenship turn], turn
clāmor, -ōris, m. shout, cry con-vocō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus
clārus, -a, -um, adj. clear; [com-, together, +
famous, renowned; vocō, call], call
bright, shining together
classis, -is, f. fleet co-orior, -īrī, -ortus sum,
claudō, -ere, -sī, -sus, shut, dep. verb [com-,
close intensive, + orior,
clavus, -ī, m. stripe rise], rise, break forth
cliēns, -entis, m. cōpia, -ae, f. [com-,
dependent, retainer, intensive, + ops,
client (§ 465. a) wealth], abundance,
Cocles, -itis, m. (blind in wealth, plenty. Plur.
one eye), Cocles, the cōpiae, -ārum, troops
surname of Horatius coquō, -ere, coxī, coctus,
co-gnōscō, -ere, -gnōvī, - cook
gnītus, learn, know, Corinthus, -ī, f. Corinth,
understand. Cf. sciō the famous city on the
(§ 420. b) Isthmus of Corinth
cōgō, -ere, coēgī, coāctus Cornēlia, -ae, f. Cornelia,
[co(m)-, together, + daughter of Scipio and
agō, drive], (drive mother of the Gracchi
together), collect; Cornēlius, Cornē´lī, m.
compel, drive Cornelius, a Roman
cohors, cohortis, f. cohort, name
the tenth part of a cornū, -ūs, n. horn; wing
legion, about 360 men of an army, ā dextrō
collis, -is, m. hill, in cornū, on the right
summō colle, on top wing (§ 466)
of the hill (§ 247. 2. a) corōna, -ae, f. garland,
collum, -ī, n. neck wreath; crown
colō, -ere, coluī, cultus, corōnātus, -a, -um, adj.
cultivate, till; honor, crowned
worship; devote one’s corpus, -oris, n. body
self to cor-ripiō, -ere, -uī, -reptus
columna, -ae, f. column, [com-, intensive, +
pillar rapiō, seize], seize,
com- (col-, con-, cor-, grasp
co-), a prefix, cotīdiānus, -a, -um, adj.
together, with, or daily
intensifying the cotīdiē, adv. daily
meaning of the root crēber, -bra, -brum, adj.
word thick, crowded,
coma, -ae, f. hair numerous, frequent
comes, -itis, m. and f. crēdō, -ere, -dīdī, -ditus,
[com-, together, + eō, trust, believe, with
go], companion, dat. (§ 501.14)
comrade cremō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus,
comitātus, -ūs, m. burn
[comitor, creō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus,
accompany], escort, make; elect, appoint
company Creōn, -ontis, m. Creon, a
comitor, -ārī, -ātus sum, king of Corinth
dep. verb [comes, crēscō, -ere, crēvī, crētus,
rise, grow, increase
 companion], Crēta, -ae, f. Crete, a large
accompany island in the
com-meātus, -ūs, m. Mediterranean
supplies Crētaeus, -a, -um, adj.
com-minus, adv. [com-, Cretan
together, + manus, crūs, crūris, n. leg
hand], hand to hand crūstulum, -ī, n. pastry,
com-mittō, -ere, -mīsī, - cake
missus, join together; cubīle, -is, n. bed
commit, intrust. cultūra, -ae, f. culture,
proelium committere, cultivation
join battle. cum, conj. with the indic.
sē committere with dat, or subjv. when; since;
trust one’s self to although (§ 501.46)
commodē, adv. cum, prep, with abl. with
[commodus, fit], (§ 209)
compared cupidē, adv. [cupidus,
commodius, desirous], compared
commodissimē, cupidius,
conveniently, fitly cupidissimē, eagerly
commodus, -a, -um, adj. cupiditās, -ātis, f.
suitable, fit [cupidus, desirous],
com-mōtus, -a, -um, adj. desire, longing
[part. of commoveō, cupiō, -ere, -īvī or -iī,
move], aroused, -ītus, desire, wish. Cf.
moved volō
com-parō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus cūr, adv. why, wherefore
[com-, intensive, + cūra, -ae, f. care, pains;
parō, prepare], anxiety
prepare; provide, get cūria, -ae, f. senate house
com-pleō, -ēre, -plēvī, - cūrō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus
plētus [com-, [cūra, care], care for,
intensive, + pleō, fill], attend to, look after
fill up currō, -ere, cucurrī,
complexus, -ūs, m. cursus, run
embrace currus, -ūs, m. chariot
 cursus, -ūs, m. course
custōdiō, -īre, -īvī, -ītus
[custōs, guard],
guard, watch

D
Daedalus, -ī, m. Dæd´alus, dīcō, -ere, dīxī, dictus
the supposed inventor (imv. dīc), say, speak,
of the first flying tell. Usually
machine introduces indirect
Dāvus, -ī, m. Davus, name discourse (§ 420. a)
of a slave dictātor, -ōris, m. [dictō,
dē, prep, with abl. down dictate], dictator, a
from, from; chief magistrate with
concerning, about, for unlimited power
(§ 209). diēs, -ēi or diē, m.,
quā dē causā, for this sometimes f. in sing.,
reason, wherefore day (§ 467)
dea, -ae, f. goddess (§ 461. dif-ferō, -ferre, distulī,
a) dīlātus [dis-, apart, +
dēbeō, -ēre, -uī, -itus [dē, ferō, carry], carry
from, + habeō, hold], apart; differ.
owe, ought, should differre inter sē, differ
decem, indecl. numeral from each other
adj. ten dif-ficilis, -e, adj. [dis-,
dē-cernō, -ere, -crēvī, - not, + facilis, easy],
crētus [dē, from, + hard, difficult (§ 307)
cernō, separate], difficultās, -ātis, f.
decide, decree [difficilis, hard],
dē-cidō, -ere, -cidī, —— difficulty
[dē, down, + cadō, dīligenter, adv. [dīligēns,
fall], fall down careful], compared
decimus, -a, -um, numeral dīligentius,
adj. tenth dīligentissimē,
dēclīvis, -e, adj. sloping industriously,
downward diligently
dē-dō, -ere, -didī, -ditus, dīligentia, -ae, f. [dīligēns,
give up, surrender, sē careful], industry,
dēdere, surrender diligence
one’s self dī-micō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus,
dē-dūcō, -ere, -dūxī, - fight, struggle
ductus [dē, down, + dī-mittō, -ere, -mīsī, -
dūcō, lead], lead missus [dī-, off, +
down, escort mittō, send], send
dē-fendō, -ere, -dī, - away, dismiss,
fēnsus, ward off, disband.
repel, defend dīmittere animum in,
dē-ferō, -ferre, -tulī, - direct one’s mind to,
lātus [dē, down, + apply one’s self to
ferō, bring], bring Diomēdēs, -is, m. Dī-o-mē
down; report, ´dēs, a name
announce (§ 426) dis-, dī-, a prefix
dē-fessus, -a, -um, adj. expressing separation,
tired out, weary off, apart, in different
dē-ficiō, -ere, -fēcī, -fectus directions. Often
[dē, from, + faciō, negatives the meaning
make], fail, be dis-cēdō, -ere, -cessī, -
wanting; revolt from cessus [dis-, apart, +
dē-fīgō, -ere, -fīxī, -fīxus cēdō, go], depart
[dē, down, + fīgō, from, leave, withdraw,
fasten], fasten, fix go away
dē-iciō, -ere, -iēcī, -iectus dis-cernō, -ere, -crēvī, -
[dē, down, + iaciō, crētus [dis-, apart, +
hurl], hurl down; cernō, sift], separate;
bring down, kill distinguish
de-inde, adv. (from disciplīna, -ae, f.
thence), then, in the instruction, training,
next place discipline
dēlectō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, discipulus, -ī, m. [discō,
delight learn], pupil, disciple
dēleō, -ēre, -ēvī, -ētus, blot discō, -ere, didicī, ——,
out, destroy learn
dēlīberō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, dis-cutiō, -ere, -cussī, -
weigh, deliberate, cussus [dis-, apart, +
ponder quatiō, shake],
dē-ligō, -ere, -lēgī, -lēctus shatter, dash to pieces
[dē, from, + legō, dis-pōnō, -ere, -posuī, -
gather], choose, select positus [dis-, apart, +
Delphicus, -a, -um, adj. pōnō, put], put here
Delphic and there, arrange,
dēmissus, -a, -um [part. of station
dēmittō, send down], dis-similis, -e, adj. [dis-,
downcast, humble apart, + similis, like],
dē-mōnstrō, -āre, -āvī, unlike, dissimilar (§
-ātus [dē, out, + 307)
mōnstrō, point], point dis-tribuō, -ere, -uī, -ūtus,
out, show divide, distribute
dēmum, adv. at last, not diū, adv., compared
till then. diūtius, diūtissimē,
tum dēmum, then at for a long time, long
last (§ 477)
dēnique, adv. at last, dō, dare, dedī, datus, give.
finally. Cf. postrēmō in fugam dare, put to
dēns, dentis, m. tooth (§ flight.
247. 2. a) alicui negōtium dare,
dēnsus, -a, -um, adj. employ some one
dense, thick doceō, -ēre, -uī, -tus,
dē-pendeō, -ēre, ——, teach, show
—— [dē, down, + doctrīna, -ae, f. [doctor,
pendeō, hang], hang teacher], teaching,
from, hang down learning, wisdom
dē-plōrō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus dolor, -ōris, m. pain,
[dē, intensive, + sorrow
plōrō, wail], bewail, domesticus, -a, -um, adj.
deplore [domus, house], of the
house, domestic
dē-pōnō, -ere, -posuī, - domicilium, domici´lī, n.
positus [dē, down, + dwelling; house,
pōnō, put], put down abode. Cf. domus
dē-scendō, -ere, -dī, - domina, -ae, f. mistress (of
scēnsus [dē, down, + the house), lady (§
scandō, climb], climb 461)
down, descend dominus, -ī, m. master (of
dē-scrībō, -ere, -scrīpsī, - the house), owner,
scrīptus [dē, down, + ruler (§ 462)
scrībō, write], write domus, -ūs, f. house,
down home.
dēsīderō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, domī, locative, at home
long for (§ 468)
dē-siliō, -īre, -uī, -sultus dormiō, -īre, -īvī, -ītus,
[dē, down, + saliō, sleep
leap], leap down dracō, -ōnis, m. serpent,
dē-spērō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus dragon
[dē, away from, + dubitō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus,
spērō, hope], despair hesitate
dē-spiciō, -ere, -spēxi, - dubius, -a, -um, adj. [duo,
spectus [dē, down], two], (moving two
look down upon, ways), doubtful,
despise dubious
dē-sum, -esse, -fuī, - du-centī, -ae, -a, numeral
futūrus [dē, away adj. two hundred
from, + sum, be], be dūcō, -ere, dūxī, ductus
wanting, lack, with (imv. dūc), lead,
dat. (§ 426) conduct
deus, -ī, m. god (§ 468) dum, conj. while, as long
dē-volvō, -ere, -volvī, - as
volūtus [dē, down, + duo, duae, duo, numeral
volvō, roll], roll down adj. two (§ 479)
dē-vorō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus duo-decim, indecl.
[dē, down, + vorō, numeral adj. twelve
swallow], devour dūrus, -a, -um, adj. hard,
tough; harsh, pitiless,
dexter, -tra, -trum (-tera, bitter
-terum), adj. to the dux, ducis, m. and f. [cf.
right, right. dūcō, lead], leader,
ā dextrō cornū, on the commander
right wing
Diāna, -ae, f. Diana,
goddess of the moon
and twin sister of
Apollo

E
ē or ex, prep, with abl. out Etrūscī, -ōrum, m. the
of, from, off, of (§ Etruscans, the people
209) of Etruria. See map of
eburneus, -a, -um, adj. of Italy
ivory Eurōpa, -ae, f. Europe
ecce, adv. see! behold! Eurystheus, -ī, m. Eurys
there! here! ´theus, a king of
ē-dūcō, -ere, -dūxī, - Tiryns, a city in
ductus [ē, out, + southern Greece
dūcō, lead], lead out, ē-vādō, -ere, -vāsī, -vāsus
draw out [ē, out, + vādō, go],
ef-ficiō, -ere, -fēcī, -fectus go forth, escape
[ex, thoroughly, + ex, see ē
faciō, do], work out; exanimātus, -a, -um [part.
make, cause of exanimō, put out of
ef-fugiō, -ere, -fūgī, - breath (anima)], adj.
fugitūrus [ex, from, + out of breath, tired;
fugiō, flee], escape lifeless
egeō, -ēre, -uī, ——, be in ex-cipiō, -ere, -cēpī, -
need of, lack, with abl. ceptus [ex, out, +
(§ 501.32) capiō, take], welcome,
ego, pers. pron. I; plur. nōs, receive
we (§ 480) exemplum, -ī, n. example,
model
ē-gredior, -ī, ēgressus ex-eō,-īre,-iī,-itūrus [ex,
sum, dep. verb [ē, out out, + eō, go], go out,
of, + gradior, go], go go forth (§ 413)
out, go forth. ex-erceō, -ēre, -uī, -itus
ē nāvī ēgredī, disembark [ex, out, + arceō,
ē-iciō, -ere, -iēcī, -iectus shut], (shut out),
[ē, forth, + iaciō, employ, train,
hurl], hurl forth, expel exercise, use
elementum, -ī, n., in plur. exercitus, -us, m.
first principles, [exerceō, train], army
rudiments ex-īstimō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus
elephantus, -ī, m. elephant [ex, out, + aestimō,
Ēlis, Ēlidis, f. E´lis, a reckon], estimate;
district of southern think, judge (§ 420. c).
Greece Cf. arbitror, putō
emō, -ere, ēmī, ēmptus, ex-orior, -īrī, -ortus sum,
buy, purchase dep. verb [ex, forth, +
enim, conj., never standing orior, rise], come
first, for, in fact, forth, rise
indeed. Cf. nam expedītus, -a, -um, adj.
Ennius, Ennī, m. Ennius, without baggage
the father of Roman ex-pellō, -ere, -pulī, -
poetry, born 239 B.C. pulsus [ex, out, +
eō, īre, iī (īvī), itūrus, go pellō, drive], drive out
(§ 499) ex-piō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus
eō, adv. to that place, [ex, intensive, + pīo,
thither atone for], make
Ēpīrus, -ī, f. Epi´rus, a amends for, atone for
district in the north of explōrātor, -ōris, m.
Greece [explōrō, investigate],
eques, -itis, m. [equus, spy, scout
horse], horseman, explōrō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus,
cavalryman examine, explore
equitātus, -ūs, m. [equitō, ex-pugnō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus
ride], cavalry [ex, out, + pugnō,
equus, -ī, m. horse
ē-rigō, -ere, -rēxī, -rēctus fight], take by storm,
[ē, out, + regō, make capture
straight], raise up exsilium, exsi´lī, n. [exsul,
ē-ripiō, -ere, -uī, -reptus exile], banishment,
[ē, out of, + rapiō, exile
seize], seize, rescue ex-spectō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus
ē-rumpō, -ere, -rūpī, - [ex, out, + spectō,
ruptus [ē, forth, + look], expect, wait
rumpō, break], burst ex-struō, -ere, -strūxī, -
forth strūctus [ex, out, +
ēruptiō, -ōnis, f. sally struō, build], build
Erymanthius, -a, -um, up, erect
adj. Erymanthian, of exterus, -a, -um, adj.,
Erymanthus, a district compared exterior,
in southern Greece extrēmus or extimus,
et, conj. and, also. outside, outer (§ 312)
et ... et, both ... and. Cf. extrā, prep, with acc.
atque, ac, -que beyond, outside of
etiam, adv. (rarely conj.) ex-trahō, -ere, -trāxī, -
[et, also, + iam, now], trāctus [ex, out, +
yet, still; also, trahō, drag], drag
besides. Cf. quoque. out, pull forth
nōn sōlum ... sed etiam, extrēmus, -a, -um, adj.,
not only ... but also superl. of exterus,
utmost, farthest (§
312)

F
fābula, -ae, f. story, tale, fīō, fierī, factus sum, used
fable as passive of faciō.
facile, adv. [facilis, easy], See faciō (§ 500)
compared facilius, flamma, -ae, f. fire, flame
facillimē, easily (§ flōs, flōris, m. flower
322) fluctus, -ūs, m. [of. fluō,
flow], flood, wave,
facilis, -e, adj. [cf. faciō, billow
make], easy, without flūmen, -inis, n. [cf. fluō,
difficulty (§ 307) flow], river (§ 464. 2.
faciō, -ere, fēcī, factus b)
(imv. fac), make, do; fluō, -ere, flūxī, fluxus,
cause, bring about. flow
impetum facere in, fluvius, fluvī, m. [cf. fluō,
make an attack upon. flow], river
proelium facere, fight a fodiō, -ere, fōdī, fossus,
battle. dig
iter facere, make a fōns, fontis, m. fountain (§
march or journey. 247. 2. a)
aliquem certiōrem fōrma, -ae, f. form, shape,
facere, inform some appearance; beauty
one. Formiae, -ārum, f.
facere verba prō, speak Formiae, a town of
in behalf of. Latium on the Appian
Passive fīō, fierī, factus Way. See map
sum, be done, forte, adv. [abl. of fors,
happen. chance], by chance
certior fierī, be fortis, -e, adj. strong;
informed fearless, brave
fallō, -ere, fefellī, falsus, fortiter, adv. [fortis,
trip, betray, deceive strong], compared
fāma, -ae, f. report, rumor; fortius, fortissimē,
renown, fame, strongly; bravely
reputation fortūna, -ae, f. [fors,
famēs, -is (abl. famē), f. chance], chance, fate,
hunger fortune
familia, -ae, f. servants, forum, -ī, n. market place,
slaves; household, esp. the Forum
family Rōmānum, where the
fascēs, -ium (plur. of life of Rome centered
fascis), f. fasces (p. Forum Appī, Forum of
225) Appius, a town in
fastīgium, fastī´gī, n. top; Latium on the Appian
slope, descent Way
fātum, -ī, n. fate, destiny fossa, -ae, f. [cf. fodiō,
faucēs, -ium, f. plur. jaws, dig], ditch
throat fragor, -ōris, m. [cf.
faveō, -ēre, fāvī, fautūrus, frangō, break], crash,
be favorable to, favor, noise
with dat. (§ 501.14) frangō, -ere, frēgī,
fēlīx, -īcis, adj. happy, frāctus, break
lucky frāter, -tris, m. brother
fēmina, -ae, f. woman. Cf. fremitus, -ūs, m. loud
mulier noise
fera, -ae, f. [ferus, wild], frequentō, -āre, -āvī,
wild beast -ātus, attend
ferāx, -ācis, adj. fertile frētus, -a, -um, adj.
ferē, adv. about, nearly, supported, trusting.
almost Usually with abl. of
ferō, ferre, tulī, lātus, means
bear. frōns, frontis, f. front, ā
graviter or molestē fronte, in front
ferre, be annoyed (§ frūctus, -ūs, m. fruit
498) frūmentārius, -a, -um,
ferreus, -a, -um, adj. adj. pertaining to
[ferrum, iron], made grain.
of iron rēs frūmentāria, grain
fidēlis, -e, adj. [fidēs, supplies
trust], faithful, true frūmentum, -ī, n. grain
fidēs, fideī or fidē, trust, frūstrā, adv. in vain, vainly
faith; promise, word; fuga, -ae, f. [cf. fugiō,
protection. flee], flight.
in fidem venīre, come in fugam dare, put to
under the protection. flight
in fidē manēre, remain fugiō, -ere, fūgī,
loyal fugitūrus, flee, run;
fīlia, -ae (dat. and abl. plur. avoid, shun
fīliābus), f. daughter
 (§ 461. a) fūmō, -are, ——, ——,
fīlius, fīlī (voc. sing, fīlī), smoke
m. son fūnis, -is, m. rope
fīnis, -is, m. boundary, furor, -ōris, m. [furō,
limit, end; in plur. rage], madness.
territory, country (§ in furōrem incīdere, go
243. 1) mad
fīnitimus, -a, -um, adj.
[fīnis, boundary],
adjoining,
neighboring. Plur.
fīnitimī, -ōrum, m.
neighbors

G
Gāius, Gāī, m. Gaius, a gladiātōrius, -a, -um, adj.
Roman name, gladiatorial
abbreviated C., gladius, gladī, m. sword
English form Caius glōria, -ae, f. glory, fame
Galba, -ae, m. Galba, a Gracchus, -ī, m.
Roman name Gracchus, name of a
galea, -ae, f. helmet famous Roman family
Gallia, -ae, f. Gaul, the gracilis, -e, adj. slender (§
country comprising 307)
what is now Holland, Graeca, -ōrum, n. plur.
Belgium, Switzerland, Greek writings, Greek
and France literature
Gallicus, -a, -um, adj. Graecē, adv. in Greek
Gallic Graecia, -ae, f. Greece
gallīna, -ae, f. hen, chicken grammaticus, -ī, m.
Gallus, -ī, m. a Gaul grammarian
gaudium, gaudī, n. joy grātia, -ae, f. thanks,
Genāva, -ae, f. Geneva, a gratitude
city in Switzerland grātus, -a, -um, adj.
acceptable, pleasing.
gēns, gentis, f. [cf. gignō, Often with dat. (§
beget], race, family; 501.16)
people, nation, tribe gravis, -ē, adj. heavy;
genus, -eris, n. kind, disagreeable; serious,
variety dangerous; earnest,
Germānia, -ae, f. weighty
Germany graviter, adv. [gravis,
Germānus, -ī, m. a heavy], compared
German gravius, gravissimē,
gerō, -ere, gessī, gestus, heavily; greatly,
carry, wear; wage. seriously.
bellum gerere, wage graviter ferre, bear ill,
war. take to heart
rēs gestae, exploits. gubernātor, -ōris, m.
bene gerere, carry on [gubernō, pilot], pilot
successfully

H
habēna, -ae, f. halter, rein. ho-diē, adv. [modified
habeō, -ēre, -uī, -itus, form of hōc diē, on
have, hold; regard, this day], to-day
consider, deem homō, -inis, m. and f.
habitō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus (human being), man,
[cf. habeō, have], person
dwell, abide, inhabit. honestus, -a, -um, adv.
Cf. incolō, vīvō [honor, honor],
hāc-tenus, adv. thus far respected, honorable
Helvētiī, -ōrum, m. the honor, -ōris, m. honor
Helvetii, a Gallic tribe hōra, -ae, f. hour
Herculēs, -is, m. Hercules, Horātius, Horā´tī, m.
son of Jupiter and Horatius, a Roman
Alcmena, and god of name
strength horribilis, -e, adj. terrible,
Hesperidēs, -um, f. the horrible
Hesperides, daughters
 of Hesperus, who kept hortor, -āri, -ātus sum,
the garden of the dep. verb, urge, incite,
golden apples exhort, encourage (§
hic, haec, hoc, 493)
demonstrative adj. and hortus, -ī, m. garden
pron. this (of mine); hospitium, hospi´tī, n.
as pers. pron. he, she, [hospes, host],
it (§ 481) hospitality
hīc, adv. here hostis, -is, m. and f. enemy,
hiems, -emis, f. winter foe (§ 465. a)
hīnc, adv. [hīc, here], from humilis, -e, adj. low,
here, hence humble (§ 307)
Hippolytē, -ēs, f. Hydra, -ae, f. the Hydra, a
Hippolyte, queen of mythical water snake
the Amazons slain by Hercules

I
iaciō, -ere, iēcī, iactus, in-gredior, -gredī, -
throw, hurl gressus sum [in, in, +
iam, adv. now, already. gradior, walk],
nec iam, and no longer advance, enter
Iāniculum, -ī, n. the inimīcus, -a, -um, adj.
Janiculum, one of the [in-, not, + amīcus,
hills of Rome friendly], hostile. As a
iānua, -ae, f. door noun, inimīcus, -ī, m.
ibi, adv. there, in that place enemy, foe. Cf. hostis
Īcarus, -ī, m. Ic´arus, the initium, ini´tī, entrance,
son of Dædalus beginning
ictus, -ūs, m. [cf. īcō, initus, -a, -um, part. of
strike], blow ineō.
īdem, e´adem, idem, initā aestāte, at the
demonstrative pron. beginning of summer
[is + dem], same (§ iniūria, -ae, f. [in, against,
481) + iūs, law], injustice,
wrong, injury.
idōneus, -a, -um, adj. alicui iniūriās īnferre,
suitable, fit inflict wrongs upon
igitur, conj., seldom the some one
first word, therefore, inopia, -ae, f. [inops,
then. Cf. itaque needy], want, need,
ignis, -is, m. fire (§§ 243.1; lack
247.2.a; 465.1) in-opīnāns, -antis, adj.
ignōtus, -a, -um, adj. [in-, [in-, not, + opīnāns,
not, + (g)notus, thinking], not
known], unknown, expecting, taken by
strange surprise
ille, illa, illud, inquit, said he, said she.
demonstrative adj. and Regularly inserted in a
pron. that (yonder); as direct quotation
pers. pron. he, she, it in-rigō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus,
(§ 481) irrigate, water
illīc, adv. [cf. ille], yonder, in-rumpō, -ere, -rūpī, -
there ruptus [in, into, +
im-mittō, -ere, -mīsī, - rumpō, break], burst
missus [in, against, + in, break in
mittō, send], send in-ruō, -ere, -ruī,—— [in,
against; let in in, + ruō, rush], rush
immolō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus in
[in, upon, + mola, īn-sequor, -sequī, -secūtus
meal], sprinkle with sum, dep. verb [in,
sacrificial meal; offer, on, + sequor, follow],
sacrifice follow on, pursue
im-mortālis, -e, adj. [in-, īn-signe, -is, n. badge,
not, + mortalis, decoration (§ 465. b)
mortal], immortal īnsignis, -e, adj.
im-mortālitās, -ātis, f. remarkable, noted
[immortālis, īnstāns, -antis, adj. [part.
immortal], of īnsto, be at hand],
immortality present, immediate
im-parātus, -a, -um, adj. īn-stō, -āre, -stitī, -
[in-, not, + parātus, statūrus [in, upon, +
 prepared], unprepared stō, stand], stand
impedīmentum, -ī, n. upon; be at hand;
[impediō, hinder], pursue, press on
hindrance; in plur. īnstrūmentum, -ī, n.
baggage instrument
impedītus, -a, -um, adj. īn-struō, -ere, -strūxī, -
[part. of impediō, strūctus [in, on, +
hinder], hindered, struō, build], draw up
burdened īnsula, -ae, f. island
im-pellō, -ere, -pulī, - integer, -gra, -grum,
pulsus [in, against, + untouched, whole;
pellō, strike], strike fresh, new
against; impel, drive, intellegō, -ere, -lēxī, -
propel lēctus [inter,
imperātor, -ōris, m. between, +legō,
[imperō, command], choose], perceive,
general understand (§ 420. d)
imperium, impe´rī, n. intentō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus,
[imperō, command], aim; threaten
command, order; inter, prep. with acc.
realm, empire; power, between, among;
authority during, while (§ 340)
imperō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, interfectus, -a, -um, adj.
command, order. [part. of inter-ficiō,
Usually with dat. and kill], slain, dead
an object clause of inter-ficiō, -ere, -fēcī, -
purpose (§ 501.41). fectus [inter,
With acc. object, levy, between, + faciō,
impose make], put out of the
impetus, -ūs, m. attack, way, kill. Cf. necō,
impetum facere in, occīdō, trucīdō
make an attack upon interim, adv. meanwhile
im-pōnō, -ere, -posui, - interior, -ius, adj. interior,
positus [in, upon, + inner (§ 315)
pōnō, place], place inter-mittō, -ere, -mīsī, -
upon; impose, assign missus, leave off,
in, prep, with acc. into, to, suspend
against, at, upon, interpres, -etis, m. and f.
towards; with abl. in, interpreter
on. inter-rogō, -āre, -āvī,
in reliquum tempus, for -ātus, question
the future inter-sum, -esse, -fuī, -
in-, inseparable prefix. futūrus [inter,
With nouns and between, +sum, be],
adjectives often with a be present, take part
negative force, like in, with dat. (§
English un-, in- 501.15)
in-cautus, -a, -um, adj. inter-vāllum, -ī, n.
[in-, not, + cautus, interval, distance
careful], off one’s intrā, adv. and prep. with
guard acc. within, in
incendium, incendī, n. intrō, -āre, -āvi, -ātus, go
flame, fire. Cf. ignis, into, enter
flamma in-veniō, -īre, -vēnī, -
in-cendō, -ere, -dī, - ventus [in, upon,
cēnsus, set fire to, +veniō, come], find
burn invīsus, -a, -um, adj. [part.
in-cidō, -ere, -cidī, ——, of invideō, envy],
[in, in, on, + cadō, hated, detested
fall], fall in, fall on; Iolāus, -ī, m. I-o-lā´us, a
happen. friend of Hercules
in furōrem incidere, go ipse, -a, -um, intensive
mad pron. that very, this
in-cipiō, -ere, -cēpi, - very; self, himself,
ceptus [in, on, + herself, itself, (§ 481)
capiō, take], begin īra, -ae, f. wrath, anger
in-cognitus, -a, -um, adj. īrātus, -a, -um, adj. [part.
[in-, not, + cognitus, of īrāscor, be angry],
known], unknown angered, enraged
in-colō, -ere, -uī, ——, is, ea, id, demonstrative
[in, in, + colō, dwell], adj. and pron. this,
inhabit; live
incolumis, -e, adj. sound, that; he, she, it (§
safe, uninjured, 481)
imharmed iste, -a, -ud, demonstrative
in-crēdibilis, -e, adj. [in-, adj. and pron. that (of
not, + crēdibilis, to be yours), he, she, it (§
believed], incredible 481)
inde, from that place, ita, adv. so, thus. Cf. sīc
thence and tam
induō, -ere, -uī, -ūtus, put Italia, -ae, f. Italy
on ita-que, conj. and so,
indūtus, -a, -um, adj. therefore
[part. of induō, put item, adv. also
on], clothed iter, itineris, n. journey,
in-eō, -īre, -iī, -itus [in, march, route; way,
into, + eō, go], go passage (§§ 247.1.a;
into; enter upon, 468).
begin, with acc. (§ iter dare, give a right of
413) way, allow to pass.
īn-fāns, -fantis, adj. [in-, iter facere, march (see
not, + *fāns, p. 159)
speaking], not iubeō, -ēre, iussī, iussus,
speaking. As a noun, order, command.
m. and f. infant Usually with the infin.
īn-fēlīx, -īcis, adj. [in-, not, and subj. acc. (§ 213)
+ fēlīx, happy], iūdex, -icis, m. and f. judge
unhappy, unlucky (§ 464. 1)
īnfēnsus, -a, -um, adj. iūdicō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus
hostile [iūdex, judge], judge,
īn´-ferō, īnfer´re, in´tulī, decide (§ 420. c)
inlā´tus [in, against, Iūlia, -ae, Julia, a Roman
+ ferō, bear], bring name
against or upon, Iūlius, Iūlī, m. Julius, a
inflict, with acc. and Roman name
dat. (§ 501.15). iungō, -ēre, iūnxī, iūnctus,
bellum īnferre, with join; yoke, harness
dat., make war upon
īnferus, -a, -um, adj. low, Iūnō, -ōnis, f. Juno, the
below (§ 312). queen of the gods and
īn-fīnītus, -a, -um, adj. wife of Jupiter
[in-, not, + fīnītus, Iuppiter, Iovis, m. Jupiter,
bounded], boundless, the supreme god
endless iūrō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus,
īn-fīrmus, -a, -um, adj. swear, take an oath
[in-, not, + fīrmus, iussus, -a, -um, part. of
strong], weak, infirm iubeō, ordered
ingenium, inge´ni, n.
talent, ability
ingēns, -entis, adj. vast,
huge, enormous,
large. Cf. magnus

L
L., abbreviation for Lūcius Lentulus, -i, m. Lentulus, a
labefactus, -a, -um, adj. Roman family name
[part. of labefaciō, leō, -ōnis, m. lion
cause to shake], Lernaeus, -a, -um, adj.
shaken, weakened, Lernæean, of Lerna,
ready to fall in southern Greece
Labiēnus, -ī, m. La-bi-e Lesbia, -ae, f. Lesbia, a
´nus, one of Cæsar’s girl’s name
lieutenants levis, -e, adj. light
labor, -ōris, m. labor, toil lēx, lēgis, f. measure, law
labōrō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus libenter, adv. [libēns,
[labor, labor], labor; willing], compared
suffer, be hard pressed libentius,
lacrima, -ae, f. tear libentissimē,
lacus, -ūs (dat. and abl. willingly, gladly
plur. lacubus), m. līber, -era, -erum, adj. free
lake (§ 469. b)
laetē, adv. [laetus, glad], līberī, -ōrum, m. [līber,
compared laetius, free], children
 laetissimē, gladly līberō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus
laetitia, -ae, f. [laetus, [līber, free], set free,
glad], joy release, liberate
laetus, -a, -um, adj. glad, lībertās, -ātis, f. [līber,
joyful free], freedom, liberty
lapis, -idis, m. stone (§§ līctor, -ōris, m. lictor (p.
247.2.a; 464.1) 225)
Lār, Laris, m.; plur. līmus, -ī, m. mud
Larēs, -um (rarely - littera, -ae, f. a letter of
ium), the Lares or the alphabet; in plur. a
household, gods letter, epistle
lātē, adv. [lātus, wide], lītus, -oris, n. seashore,
compared lātius, beach
lātissimē, widely locus, -ī, m. (plur. locī and
Latinē, adv. in Latin. loca, m. and n.),
Latīnē loquī, to speak place, spot
Latin longē, adv. [longus, long],
lātitūdō, -inis, f. [lātus, comp. longius,
wide], width longissimē, a long
Lātōna, -ae, f. Latona, way off; by far
mother of Apollo and longinquus, -a, -um, adj.
Diana [longus, long],
latus, -a, -um, adj. wide distant, remote
lātus, -eris, n. side, flank. longitūdō, -inis, f. [longus,
ab utrōque latere, on long], length
each side longus, -a, -um, adj. long
laudō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus loquor, loqui, locūtus
[laus, praise], praise sum, dep. verb, talk,
laurea, -ae, f. laurel speak
laureātus, -a, -um, adj. lōrīca, -ae, f. [lōrum,
crowned with laurel thong], coat of mail,
laus, laudis, f. praise corselet
lectulus, -ī, m. couch, bed lūdō, -ere, lūsī, lūsus, play
lēgātus, -ī, m. lūdus, -ī, m. play; school,
ambassador; the elementary grades.
lieutenant Cf. schola
legiō, -ōnis, f. [cf. legō, lūna, -ae, f. moon
gather], (body of lūx, lūcis, f. (no gen. plur.),
soldiers), legion, light.
about 3600 men (§ prīma lūx, daybreak
464. 2. a) Lȳdia, -ae, f. Lydia, a
legiōnārius, -a, -um, adj. girl’s name
legionary. Plur.
legiōnariī, -ōrum, m.
the soldiers of the
legion
legō, -ere, lēgī, lēctus,
read
lēnis, -e, adj. gentle,
smooth, mild
lēniter, adv. [lēnis, gentle],
compared lēnius,
lēnissimē, gently

M
M., abbreviation for mīles, -itis, m. soldier (§
Mārcus 464. 1)
magicus, -a, -um, adj. mīlitāris, -e, adj. [mīles,
magic soldier], military.
magis, adv. in comp. rēs mīlitāris, science of
degree [magnus, war
great], more, in a mīlitō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus
higher degree (§ 323) [mīles, soldier], serve
magister, -trī, m. master, as a soldier
commander; teacher mīlle, plur. mīlia, -ium,
magistrātus, -ūs, m. numeral adj. and
[magister, master], subst. thousand (§
magistracy; 479)
magistrate minimē, adv. in superl.
magnitūdō, -inis, f. degree, compared
[magnus, great], parum, minus,
 greatness, size minimē, least, very
magnopere, adv. [abl. of little; by no means (§
magnum opus], 323)
compared magis, minimus, -a, -um, adj. in
maximē, greatly, superl. degree,
exceedingly (§ 323) compared parvus,
magnus, -a, -um, adj., minor, minimus,
compared maior, least, smallest (§ 311)
maximus, great, minor, minus, -ōris, adj. in
large; strong, loud (§ comp. degree,
311) compared parvus,
maior, maius, -ōris, adj., minor, minimus,
comp. of magnus, smaller, less (§ 311)
greater, larger (§ 311) Mīnōs, -ōis, m. Minos, a
maiōrēs, -um, m. plur. of king of Crete
maior, ancestors minus, adv. in comp.
mālō, mālle, māluī, —— degree, compared
[magis, more, + volō, parum, minus,
wish], wish more, minimē, less (§ 323)
prefer (§ 497) Minyae, -ārum, m. the
malus, -a, -um, adj., Minyae, a people of
compared peior, Greece
pessimus, bad, evil (§ mīrābilis, -e, adj. [mīror,
311) wonder at],
mandō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus wonderful, marvelous
[manus, hand, + dō, mīror, -ārī, -ātus sum,
put], (put in hand), dep. verb [mīrus,
intrust; order, wonderful], wonder,
command marvel, admire
maneō, -ēre, mānsī, mīrus, -a, -um, adj.
mānsūrus, stay, wonderful
remain, abide Mīsēnum, -ī, Mise´num, a
Mānlius, Mānlī, m. promontory and
Manlius, a Roman harbor on the coast of
name Campania. See map
mānsuētus, -a, -um, adj. miser, -era, -erum, adj.
[part. of mānsuēscō, wretched, unhappy,
tame], tamed miserable
manus, -ūs, f. hand; force, missus, -a, -um, part. of
band mittō, sent
Mārcus, -ī, m. Marcus, mittō, -ere, mīsī, missus,
Mark, a Roman first send
name modicus, -a, -um [modus,
mare, -is, n. (no gen. measure], modest,
plur.), sea. ordinary
mare tenēre, be out to modo, adv. [abl. of modus,
sea measure, with
margō, -inis, m. edge, shortened o], only,
border merely, just now.
marītus, -ī, m. husband modo ... modo, now ...
Marius, Marī, m. Marius, now, sometimes ...
a Roman name, esp. sometimes
C. Marius, the general modus, -ī, m. measure;
Mārtius, -a, -um, adj. of manner, way; kind
Mars, esp. the moenia, -ium, n. plur. [cf.
Campus Martius mūniō, fortify], walls,
māter, -tris, f. mother ramparts
mātrimōnium, mātrimō molestē, adv. [molestus,
´nī, n. marriage. troublesome],
in mātrimōnium compared molestius,
dūcere, marry molestissimē,
mātūrō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, annoyingly.
hasten. Cf. contendō, molestē ferre, to be
properō annoyed
mātūrus, -a, -um, adj. molestus, -a, -um,
ripe, mature troublesome,
maximē, adv. in superl. annoying, unpleasant
degree [maximus, (§ 501.16)
greatest], compared moneō, -ēre, -uī, -itus,
magnopere, magis, remind, advise, warn
(§ 489)
 maximē, especially, mōns, montis, m.
very much (§ 323) mountain (§ 247. 2. a)
maximus, -a, -um, adj., mōnstrum, -ī, n. monster
superl. of magnus, mora, -ae, f. delay
greatest, extreme (§ moror, -ārī, -ātus sum,
311) dep. verb [mora,
medius, -a, -um, adj. delay], delay, linger;
middle part; middle, impede
intervening mors, mortis, f. [cf.
melior, -ius, -ōris, adj., morior, die], death
comp. of bonus, mōs, mōris, m. custom,
better (§ 311) habit
melius, adv. in comp. mōtus, -ūs, m. [cf. moveō,
degree, compared move], motion,
bene, melius, optimē, movement.
better (§ 323) terrae mōtus,
memoria, -ae, f. [memor, earthquake
mindful], memory. moveō, -ēre, mōvī, mōtus,
memoriā tenēre, move
remember mox, adv. soon, presently
mēns, mentis, f. mind. Cf. mulier, -eris, f. woman
animus multitūdō, -inis, f.
mēnsis, -is, m. month (§ [multus, much],
247. 2. a) multitude
mercātor, -ōris, m. multum (multō), adv.
[mercor, trade], [multus, much],
trader, merchant compared plūs,
merīdiānus, -a, -um, adj. plūrimum, much (§
[merīdiēs, noon], of 477)
midday multus, -a, -um, adj.,
merīdiēs, —— (acc. -em, compared plūs,
abl. -ē), m. [medius, plūrimus, much; plur.
mid, + diēs, day], many (§ 311)
noon mūniō, -īre, -īvī or -iī,
metus, -ūs, m. fear, dread -ītus, fortify, defend
meus, -a, -um, possessive mūnītiō, -ōnis, f. [mūniō,
adj. and pron. my, fortify], defense,
mine (§ 98) fortification
mūrus, -ī, m. wall. Cf.
moenia
mūsica, -ae, f. music

N
nam, conj. for. Cf. enim Niobē, -ēs, f. Ni´obe, the
nam-que, conj., a queen of Thebes
strengthened nam, whose children were
introducing a reason destroyed by Apollo
or explanation, for, and Diana
and in fact; seeing nisi, conj. [nē, not, + sī, if],
that if not, unless, except
nārrō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, nōbilis, -e, adj. well
tell, relate known; noble
nāscor, nāscī, nātus sum, noceō, -ēre, -uī, -itūrus
dep. verb, be born, [cf. necō, kill], hurt,
spring from injure, with dat. (§
nātūra, -ae, f. nature 501.14)
nātus, part. of nāscor noctū, abl. used as adv. [cf.
nauta, -ae, m. [for nāvita, nox, night], at night,
from nāvis, ship], by night
sailor Nōla, -ae, f. Nola, a town
nāvālis, -e, adj. [nāvis, in central Campania.
ship], naval See map
nāvigium, nāvi´gī, n. ship, nōlō, nōlle, nōluī, ——
boat [ne, not, + volō,
nāvigō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus wish], not to wish, be
[nāvis, ship, + agō, unwilling (§ 497)
drive], sail, cruise nōmen, -inis, n. [cf. nōscō,
nāvis, -is (abl. -ī or -e), f. know], (means of
ship (§ 243. 1). knowing), name
 nāvem cōnscendere, nōminō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus
embark, go on board. [nōmen, name],
nāvem solvere, set sail. name, call. Cf.
nāvis longa, man-of-war appellō, vocō
nē, conj. and adv. in order nōn, adv. [nē, not, +
that not, that (with ūnum, one], not.
verbs of fearing), lest; nōn sōlum ... sed etiam,
not. not only ... but also
nē ... quidem, not even nōn-dum, adv. not yet
-ne, interrog. adv., enclitic nōn-ne, interrog. adv.
(see §§ 16, 210). Cf. suggesting an
nōnne and num affirmative answer,
nec or neque, conj. [nē, not? (§ 210). Cf. -ne
not, + que, and], and and num
not, nor. nōs, pers. pron. we (see
nec ... nec or neque ... ego) (§ 480)
neque, neither ... nor noster, -tra, -trum,
necessārius, -a, -um, adj. possessive adj. and
needful, necessary pron. our, ours. Plur.
necō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus [cf. nostrī, -ōrum, m. our
nex, death], kill. Cf. men (§ 98)
interficiō, occīdō, novem, indecl. numeral
trucīdō adj. nine
negō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, novus, -a, -um, adj. new.
deny, say not (§ 420. novae rēs, a revolution
a) nox, noctis, f. night, multā
negōtium, negō´tī, n. [nec, nocte, late at night
not, + ōtium, ease], nūllus, -a, -um (gen. -īus,
business, affair, dat. -ī) adj. [nē, not, +
matter. ūllus, any], not any,
alicui negōtium dare, to none, no (§ 108)
employ some one num, interrog. adv.
Nemaeus, -a, -um, adj. suggesting a negative
Neme´an, of Neme´a, answer (§ 210). Cf. -
in southern Greece ne and nōnne. In
nēmŏ, dat. nēminī (gen. indir. questions,
nūllīus, abl. nūllō, whether
supplied from nūllus), numerus, -ī, m. number
m. and f. [nē, not, + numquam, adv. [nē, not, +
homō, man], (not a umquam, ever],
man), no one, nobody never
Neptūnus, -ī, m. Neptune, nunc, adv. now. Cf. iam
god of the sea, brother nūntiō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus
of Jupiter [nūntius, messenger],
neque, see nec report, announce (§
neuter, -tra, -trum (gen. - 420. a)
trīus, dat. -trī), adj. nūntius, nūntī, m.
neither (of two) (§ messenger
108) nūper, adv. recently, lately,
nē-ve, conj. adv. and not, just now
and that not, and lest nympha, -ae, f. nymph
nihil, n. indecl. [nē, not, +
hīlum, a whit],
nothing.
nihil posse, to have no
power
nihilum, -ī, n., see nihil

O
ob, prep. with acc. on opīniō, -ōnis, f. [opīnor,
account of. In suppose], opinion,
compounds it often supposition,
means in front of, expectation
against, or it is oppidānus, -ī, m.
intensive. [oppidum, town],
quam ob rem, for this townsman
reason (§ 340) oppidum, -ī, n. town,
obses, -idis, m. and f. stronghold
hostage opportūnus, -a, -um, adj.
suitable, opportune,
ob-sideō,-ēre,-sēdī, -sessus favorable
[ob, against, + sedeō, op-primō, -ere, -pressī, -
sit], besiege pressus [ob, against,
obtineō, -ēre, -uī, -tentus + premō, press],
[ob, against, + teneō, (press against), crush;
hold], possess, surprise
occupy, hold oppugnātiō, -ōnis, f.
occāsiō, -ōnis, f. favorable storming, assault
opportunity, favorable oppugnō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus
moment [ob, against, + pugnō
occāsus, -ūs, m. going fight], fight against,
down, setting assault, storm, assail
occīdō, -ere, -cīdī, -cīsus optimē, adv. in superl.
[ob, down, + caedō, degree, compared
strike], strike down; bene, melius, optimē,
cut down, kill. Cf. very well, best of all
interficiō, necō (§ 323)
occupō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus optimus, -a, -um, adj. in
[ob, completely, + superl. degree,
capiō, take], seize, compared bonus,
take possession of, melior, optimus, best,
occupy. Cf. rapio most excellent (§ 311)
oc-currō, -ere, -currī, - opus, -eris, n. work, labor,
cursus [ob, against + task (§ 464. 2. b)
currō, run], run ōrāculum, -ī, n. [ōrō,
towards; meet, with speak], oracle
dat. (§ 426) ōrātor, -ōris, m. [ōrō,
ōceanus, -ī, m. the ocean speak], orator
octō, indecl. numeral adj. orbis, -is, m. ring, circle.
eight orbis terrārum, the
oculus, -ī, m. eye earth, world
officium, offi´cī, n. duty orbita, -ae, f. [orbis,
ōlim, adv. formerly, once wheel], rut
upon a time Orcus, -ī, m. Orcus, the
ōmen, -inis, n. sign, token, lower world
omen
ō-mittō, -ere, -mīsī, - ōrdō, -inis, m. row, order,
missus [ob, over, past, rank (§ 247. 2. a)
+ mittō, send], let go, orīgo, -inis, f. [orior, rise],
omit. source, origin
consilium omittere, orior, -īrī, ortus sum, dep.
give up a plan verb, arise, rise,
omnīnō, adv. [omnis, all], begin; spring, be born
altogether, wholly, ōrnāmentum, -ī, n. [ōrnō,
entirely fit out], ornament,
omnis, -e, adj. all, every. jewel
Cf. tōtus ōrnātus, -a, -um, adj.
onerāria, -ae, f. [onus, [part. of ōrnō, fit out]
load], with nāvis fitted out; adorned
expressed or ōrnō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, fit
understood, merchant out, adorn
vessel, transport
onus, -eris, n. load, burden

P
P., abbreviation for (posterus), -a, -um, adj.,
Pūblius compared posterior,
paene, adv. nearly, almost postrēmus or
palūdāmentum, -ī, n. postumus, following,
military cloak next (§ 312)
palūs, -ūdis, f. swamp, postquam, conj. after, as
marsh soon as
pānis, -is, m. bread postrēmō, adv. [abl. of
pār, paris, adj. equal (§ postrēmus, last], at
471. III) last, finally. Cf.
parātus, -a, -um, adj. dēmum, dēnique (§
[part. of parō, 322)
prepare], prepared, postrīdiē, adv. [posterō,
ready next, + diē, day], on
parcō, -ere, peper´cī the next day
(parsī), parsūrus,
 spare, with dat. (§ postulō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus,
501.14) ask, demand, require.
pāreō, -ēre, -uī, ——, Cf. petō, quaerō,
obey, with dat. (§ 501 rogō
.14) potentia, -ae, f. [potēns,
parō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, able], might, power,
prepare for, prepare; force
provide, procure prae-beō, -ēre, -uī, -itus
pars, partis, f. part, share; [prae, forth, + habeō,
side, direction hold], offer, give
parum, adv., compared praeda, -ae, f. booty, spoil,
minus, minimē, too plunder
little, not enough (§ prae-dīcō, -ere, -dīxī, -
323) dictus [prae, before,
parvus, -a, -um, adj., + dīcō, tell], foretell,
compared minor, predict
minimus, small, little prae-ficiō, -ere, -fēcī, -
(§ 311) fectus [prae, before,
passus, -ūs, m. step, pace. + faciō, make], place
mīlle passuum, in command, with acc.
thousand paces, mile and dat. (§ 501.15)
(§ 331. b) prae-mittō, -ere, -mīsī, -
pateō, -ēre, patuī, ——, missus [prae,
lie open, be open; forward, + mittō,
stretch, extend send], send forward
pater, -tris, m. father (§ praemium, praemī, n.
464. 2. a) reward, prize
patior, -ī, passus sum, praeruptus, -a, -um [part.
dep. verb, bear, suffer, of prae-rumpō, break
allow, permit off], broken off, steep
patria, -ae, f. [cf. pater, praesēns, -entis, adj.
father], fatherland, present, immediate
(one’s) country praesertim, adv.
paucus, -a, -um, adj. especially, chiefly
(generally plur.), few, praesidium, praesi´di, n.
only a few guard, garrison,
paulisper, adv. for a little protection
while prae-stō, -āre, -stitī, -
paulō, adv. by a little, little stitus [prae, before, +
paulum adv. a little, sto, stand], (stand
somewhat before), excel,
pāx, pācis, f. (no gen. surpass, with dat. (§
plur.), peace 501.15); show, exhibit
pecūnia, -ae, f. [pecus, prae-sum, -esse, -fuī, -
cattle], money futūrus [prae, before,
pedes, -itis, m. [pēs, foot], + sum, be], be over,
foot soldier be in command of,
pedester, -tris, -tre, adj. with dat. (§ 501.15)
[pēs, foot], on foot; by praeter, prep, with acc.
land beyond, contrary to (§
peior, peius, -ōris, adj. in 340)
comp. degree, praetereā, adv. [praeter,
compared malus, besides, + eā, this], in
peior, pessimus, addition, besides,
worse (§ 311) moreover
pellis, -is, f. skin, hide praetextus, -a, -um, adj.
penna, -ae, f. feather bordered, edged
per, prep. with acc. praetōrium, praetō´rī, n.
through, by means of, prætorium
on account of. In prandium, prandī, n.
composition it often luncheon
has the force of premō, -ere, pressī,
thoroughly, pressus, press hard,
completely, very (§ compress; crowd,
340) drive, harass
percussus, -a, -um, adj. (prex, precis), f. prayer
[part. of percutiō, prīmō, adv. [prīmus, first],
strike through], at first, in the
pierced beginning (§ 322)
per-dūcō, -ere, -dūxī, - prīmum, adv. [prīmus,
ductus [per, through, first], first.
 + dūcō, lead], lead quam primum, as soon
through. as possible
fossam perdūcere, to prīmus, -a, -um, adj. in
construct a ditch superl. degree,
per-exiguus, -a, -um, adj. compared prior,
[per, very, + exiguus, prīmus, first (§ 315)
small], very small, prīnceps, -cipis, m.
very short [prīmus, first, +
perfidus, -a, -um, adj. capiō, take], (taking
faithless, treacherous, the first place), chief,
false leader (§ 464. 1)
per-fringō, -ere, -frēgī, - prior, prius, -ōris, adj. in
frāctus [per, through, comp. degree, superl.,
frangō, break], prīmus, former (§
shatter 315)
pergō, -ere, perrēxī, prīstinus, -a, -um, adj.
perrēctus [per, former, previous
through, + regō, prō, prep, with abl. before;
conduct], go on, for, for the sake of, in
proceed, hasten behalf of; instead of,
perīculum, -ī, n. trial, test; as (§ 209). In
danger composition, forth,
peristȳlum, -ī, n. peristyle, forward
an open court with prō-cēdō, -ere, -cussī, -
columns around it cessūrus [prō,
perītus, -a, -um, adj. forward, + cēdō, go],
skillful go forward, proceed
perpetuus, -a, -um, adj. procul, adv. far, afar off
perpetual prō-currō, -ere, -currī (-
Perseus, -eī, Perseus, a cucurrī), -cur-sus
Greek hero, son of [prō, forward, +
Jupiter and Danaë currō, run], run
persōna, -ae, f. part, forward
character, person proelium, proeli, n. battle,
per-suādeō, -ēre, -suāsī, - combat.
suāsus [per,
 thoroughly, + suādeō, proelium committere,
persuade], persuade, join battle.
advise, with dat. (§ proelium facere, fight a
501.14), often with an battle
object clause of profectiō, -ōnis, f.
purpose (§ 501.41) departure
per-terreō, -ēre, -uī, -itus proficīscor, -ī, -fectus
[per, thoroughly, + sum, dep. verb, set
terreō, frighten], out, march. Cf.
thoroughly terrify, ēgredior, exeō
alarm prō-gredior, -ī, -gressus
per-veniō, -īre, -vēnī, - sum, dep. verb [prō,
ventus [per, through, forth, + gradior, go],
+ veniō, come], go forth, proceed,
arrive, reach, come to advance. Cf. pergō,
pēs, pedis, m. foot. prōcēdō
pedem referre, retreat prōgressus, see
(§ 247. 2. a) prōgredior
pessimus, -a, -um, adj. in prohibeō, -ēre, -uī, -itus
superl. degree, [prō, forth, away
compared malus, from, + habeō, hold],
peior, pessimus, keep away from,
worst (§ 311) hinder, prevent
petō, -ere, -īvī or -iī, -ītus, prō-moveō, -ēre, -mōvī, -
strive for, seek, beg, mōtus [prō, forward,
ask; make for, travel + moveō, move],
to. Cf. postulō, move forward,
quaerō, rogō advance
Pharsālus, -ī, f. Pharsa´lus prō-nūntiō, -āre, -āvī,
or Pharsa´lia, a town in -ātus [prō, forth, +
Thessaly, near which nūntiō, announce],
Cassar defeated Pompey, proclaim, declare
48 B.C. prope, adv., compared
philosophia, -ae, f. propius, proxi-mē,
philosophy nearly. Prep, with acc.
near
philosophus, -ī, m. prō-pellō, -ere, -pulī, -
philosopher pulsus [prō, forth, +
pictus, -a, -um, adj. [part. pellō, drive], drive
of pingō, paint], forth; move, impel
colored, variegated properō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus
pīlum, -ī, n. spear, javelin [properus, quick], go
(§ 462. b) quickly, hasten. Cf.
piscīna, -ae, f. [piscis, contendō, maturō
fish], fish pond propinquus, -a, -um, adj.
piscis, -is, m. fish [prope, near], near,
pīstor, -ōris, m. baker neighboring
placeō. -ēre, -uī, -itus, propior, -ius, -ōris, adj. in
please, be pleasing, comp. degree, superl.,
with dat. (§ 501.14) proximus, nearer (§
plānitiēs, -ēī, f. [plānus, 315)
level], plain propius, adv. in comp.
plānus, -a, -um, adj. level, degree, compared
flat prope, propius,
plēnus, -a, -um, full proximē, nearer (§
plūrimum, adv. in superl. 323)
degree, compared propter, prep. with acc. on
multum, plūs, account of, because of
plūrimum, very (§ 340)
much. prō-scrībō, -ere, -scrīpsī, -
plūrimum valēre, be scriptus [prō, forth, +
most influential (§ scribō, write],
322) proclaim, publish. Cf.
plūrimus, -a, -um, adj. in prōnūntiō
superl. degree, prō-sequor, -sequī, -
compared multus, secūtus sum, dep.
plūs, plūrimus, most, verb [prō, forth, +
very many (§ 311) sequor, follow],
plūs, plūris, adj. in comp. escort, attend
degree, compared prō-sum, prōdesse,
multus, plūs, prōfuī, prōfutūrus
plūrimus; sing. n. as [prō, for, + sum, be],
 substantive, more; be useful, benefit, with
plur. more, several (§ dat. (§§ 496; 501.15)
311) prō-tegō, -ere, -tēx=i], -
pluteus, -ī, m. shield, tēctus [prō, in front, +
parapet tegō, cover], cover in
poena, -ae, f. punishment, front, protect
penalty prōvincia, -ae, f. territory,
poēta, -ae, m. poet province
pompa, -ae, f. procession proximē, adv. in superl.
Pompēiī, -ōrum, m. degree, compared
Pompeii, a city of prope, propius,
Campania. See map proximē, nearest,
Pompēius, Pompē´ī, m. next; last, most
Pompey, a Roman recently (§ 323)
name proximus, -a, -um, adj. in
pōmum, -ī, n. apple superl. degree,
pōnō, -ere, posuī, positus, compared propior,
put, place. proximus, nearest,
castra pōnere, pitch next (§ 315)
camp pūblicus, -a, -um, adj.
pōns, pontis, m. bridge (§ [populus,people], of
247. 2. a) the people, public, res
popīna, -ae, f. restaurant pūblica, the
populus, -ī, m. people commonwealth
Porsena, -ae, m. Porsena, puella, -ae, f. [diminutive
king of Etruria, a of puer, boy], girl,
district of Italy. See maiden
map puer, -eri, m. boy; slave (§
porta, -ae, f. gate, door 462. c)
portō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, pugna, -ae, f -fight, battle.
bear, carry Cf. proelium
portus, -ūs, m. [cf. porta, pugnō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus
gate], harbor [pugna, battle], fight.
possideō, -ēre, -sēdī, - Cf. contendō, dīmicō
sessus, have, own, pulcher, -chra, -chrum,
possess adj. beautiful, pretty
possum, posse, potuī, (§§ 469.b; 304)
——, irreg. verb Pullō, -ōnis, m. Pullo, a
[potis, able, + sum, I centurion
am], be able, can (§ pulsō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus,
495). strike, beat
nihil posse, have no puppis, -is (acc. -im, abl.
power -ī), f. stern of a ship,
post, prep, with acc. after, deck
behind (§ 340) pūrē, adv. [pūrus, pure],
posteā, adv. [post, after, + comp. pūrius, purely
eā, this], afterwards pūrgō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus,
cleanse, clean
purpureus, -a, -um, adj.
purple, dark red
putō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus,
reckon, think (§
420,c). Cf. arbitror,
exīstimō
Pȳthia, -ae, f. Pythia, the
inspired priestess of
Apollo at Delphi

Q
quā dē causā, for this quīndecim, indecl.
reason, wherefore numeral adj. fifteen
quā rē, therefore, for this quīngentī, -ae, -a, numeral
reason adj. five hundred
quaerō, -ere, -sīvī, -sītus, quīnque, indecl. numeral
seek, ask, inquire. Cf. adj. five
petō, postulō, rogō quīntus, -a, -um, numeral
quālis, -e, interrog. adj. fifth
pronom. adj. of what quis (quī), quae, quid
sort, what kind of. (quod), interrog. pron.
talis ... qualis, such ... as and adj. who? what?
which? (§ 483).
quam, adv. how; after a quis (quī), qua (quae),
comparative, than ; quid (quod), indef.
with a superlative, pron. and adj., used
translated as ... as after sī, nisi, nē, num,
possible, quam any one, anything,
prīmum, as soon as some one, something,
possible any, some (§ 484).
quantus, -a, -um, adj. quisquam, quicquam or
[quam, how], how quidquam (no fem.
great, how much, or plur.), indef. pron.
tantus ... quantus, as any one (at all),
great as anything (at all) (§
quārtus, -a, -um, numeral 486).
adj. [quattuor, four], quisque, quaeque,
fourth quidque (quodque),
quattuor, indecl. numeral indef. pron. and adj.
adj. four each, each one, every
quattuor-decim, indecl. (§ 484).
numeral adj. fourteen quō, interrog. and rel. adv.
-que, conj., enclitic, and (§ whither, where
16). Cf. ac, atque, et quō, conj. in order to, that,
quī, quae, quod, rel. pron. with comp. degree (§
and adj. who, which, 350).
what, that (§ 482) quod, conj. because, in
quia, conj. because. Cf. that. Cf. quia
quod quoque, conj., following
quīdam, quaedam, an emphatic word,
quiddam (quoddam), also, too. Cf. etiam
indef. pron. and adj. a quot-annīs, adv. [quot,
certain one, a certain, how many + annus,
a (§ 485). year], every year,
quidem, adv. to be sure, yearly
certainly, indeed, nē quotiēns, interrog. and rel.
... quidem, not even adv. how often? as
quiēs, -ētis, f. rest, repose often as
quiētus, -a, -um, adj.
quiet, restful

R
rādīx, -īcis, f. root; foot re-periō, -īre, repperī,
rapiō, -ere, -uī, -tus, seize, repertus, find
snatch re-portō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus
rārō, adv. [rārus, rare], [re-, back, + portō,
rarely carry], carry back,
rārus, -a, -um, adj. rare bring back, win, gain
re- or red-, an inseparable rēs, reī, f. thing, business,
prefix, again, back, matter, deed, event,
anew, in return circumstance (§ 467).
rebelliō, -ōnis, f. renewal quam ob rem, for this
of war, rebellion reason.
recēns, -entis, adj. recent rēs adversae, adversity.
re-cipiō, -ere, -cēpī, - rēs frūmentāria, grain
ceptus [re-, back, + supplies.
capiō, take], take rēs gestae, exploits.
back, receive. rēs militāris, science of
sē recipere, withdraw, war.
retreat rēs pūblica, the
re-clīnātus, -a, -um, part. commonwealth.
of reclīnō, leaning rēs secundae, prosperity
back re-scindō, -ere, -scidī, -
re-creātus, -a, -um, part. scissus [re-, back, +
of recreō, refreshed scindō, cut], cut off,
rēctus, -a, -um, adj. [part. cut down
of regō, keep re-sistō, -ere, -stitī, ——
straight], straight, [re-, back, + sistō,
direct cause to stand],
re-cūsō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, oppose, resist, with
refuse dat. (§ 501.14)
red-āctus, -a, -um, part. of re-spondeō, -ēre, -spondī,
redigō, reduced, -spōnsus [re-, in
 subdued return, + spondeō,
red-eō, -īre, -iī, -itus [red-, promise], answer,
back, + eō, go], go reply (§ 420. a)
back, return (§ 413). re-vertō, -ere, -ī, ——, or
Cf. revertō dep. verb re-vertor,
reditus, -ūs, m. [cf. redeō, -ī, -sus sum [re-,
return], return, going back, + vertō, turn],
back turn back, return.
re-dūcō, -ere, -dūxī, - Usually active in the
ductus [re-, back, + perf. system
dūcō, lead], lead back re-vinciō, -īre, -vīnxī, -
re-ferō, -ferre, rettulī, - vīnctus [re-, back, +
lātus [re-, back, + vinciō, bind], fasten
ferō, bear], bear rēx, rēgis, m. [cf. regō,
back; report. rule], king
pedem referre, Rhēnus, -ī, m. the Rhine, a
withdraw, retreat river of Germany
re-ficiō, -ere, -fēcī, -fectus rīpa, -ae, f. bank
[re-, again, + faciō, rogō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, ask.
make], make again, Cf. petō, postulō,
repair. quaerō
sē reficere, refresh one’s Rōma, -ae, f. Rome. See
self map
rēgīna, -ae, f. [rēx, king], Rōmānus, -a, -um, adj.
queen [Rōma, Rome],
regiō, -ōnis, f. region, Roman, follows its
district noun. As a noun, m.
rēgnum, -ī, n. sovereignty; and f. a Roman
kingdom rosa, -ae, f. rose
regō, -ere, rēxī, rēctus [cf. rōstrum, -ī, n. beak of a
rēx, king], govern, ship. In plur., the
rule (§ 490) rostra, the speaker’s
re-iciō, -ere, -iēcī, -iectus stand in the Roman
[re-, back, + iaciō, Forum
hurl], hurl back; rota, -ae, f. wheel
throw away
re-linquō, -ere, -līquī, - Rubicō, -ōnis, m. the
lictus [re-, behind, + Rubicon, a river in
linquō, leave], leave northern Italy. See
behind, leave, map
abandon rūmor, -ōris, m. report,
reliquus, -a, -um, adj. [cf. rumor
relinquō, leave], left rūrsus, adv. [for reversus,
over, remaining. As a turned back], again,
noun, plur. the rest in turn
remōtus, -a, -um, adj. rūs, rūris (locative abl.
[part. of re-moveō, rūrī, no gen., dat., or
remove], remote, abl. plur.), n. the
distant country (§ 501. 36. 1).
re-moveō, -ēre, -mōvī, - Cf. ager, patria, terra
motus [re-, back, +
moveō, move],
remove
rēmus, -ī, m. oar

S
Sabīnus, -a, -um, adj. somnus, -ī, m. sleep
Sabine. As a noun, m. soror, -ōris, f. sister
and f. a Sabine. The spatium, spatī, n. space,
Sabines were an distance; time;
ancient people of opportunity
central Italy. See map spectāculum, -ī, n.
sacrum, -ī, n. [sacer, [spectō, look at],
consecrated], show, spectacle
something spectō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus,
consecrated, look at, witness
sacrifice; usually in spērō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus
plur., religious rites [spēs, hope], hope,
saepe, adv., compared expect (§ 420. c)
saepius, saepissimē, spēs, speī, f. hope (§ 273.
often, frequently 2)
saevus, -a, -um, adj. cruel, splendidē, adv.
savage [splendidus],
sagitta, -ae, f. arrow compared
saliō, -īre, -uī, saltus, jump splendidius,
salūs, -ūtis, f. safety; splendidissimē,
health. splendidly,
salūtem dīcere, send handsomely
greetings splendidus, -a, -um, adj.
salūtō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus brilliant, gorgeous,
[salūs, health], greet, splendid
salute Stabiānus, -a, -um,
salvē, imv. of salveō, hail, Stabian
greetings stabulum, -ī, n. [cf. stō,
sanguis, -inis, m. blood (§ stand], standing
247. 2. a] place, stable, stall
sānitās, -ātis, f. [sānus, statim, adv. [cf. stō,
sound], health, sanity stand], on the spot, at
sapiēns, -entis, adj. [part. once, instantly
of sapiō, be wise], statua, -ae, f. [sistō, place,
wise, sensible set], statue
satis, adv. and indecl. statuō, -ere, -uī, -ūtus
noun, enough, [status, station],
sufficient, sufficiently decide, determine
saxum, -ī, n. rock, stone stilus, -ī, m. iron pencil,
scelus, -eris, n. crime, sin style (p. 210)
scēptrum, -ī, n. scepter stō, -āre, stetī, status,
schola, -ae, f. school, the stand
higher grades. Cf. strātus, -a, -um, adj. [part.
lūdus of sternō, spread],
scientia, -ae, f. [sciēns, paved (of streets)
knowing], skill, strepitus, -ūs, m. [strepō,
knowledge, science make a noise], noise,
scindō, -ere, scidī, scissus, din
cut, tear stringō, -ere, strīnxī,
sciō, -īre, -īvī, -ītus, know strictus, bind tight;
(§ 420. b). Cf. draw, unsheathe
 cognōscō studeō, -ēre, -uī, ——,
scrībō, -ere, scrīpsī, give attention to, be
scrīptus, write eager, with dat. (§
scūtum, -ī, n. shield, 501.14)
buckler studium, studī, n. [cf.
sē, see suī studeō, be eager for],
sēcum = sē + cum eagerness, desire,
secundus, -a, -um, adj. zeal, devotion
[sequor, follow], stultus, -a, -um, adj.
following, next, foolish, stupid
second; favorable, Stymphālis, -idis, adj. f.
successful. Stymphalian, of
rēs secundae, prosperity Stympha´lus, a lake in
sed, conj. but, on the southern Greece
contrary. Stymphālus, -ī, m.
nōn sōlum ... sed etiam, Stympha´lus, a district
not only ... but also of southern Greece
sēdecim, indecl. numeral with a town,
adj. sixteen mountain, and lake,
sedeō, -ēre, sēdī, sessus, all of the same name
sit suādeō, -ēre, -sī, -sus,
semper, adv. always, advise, recommend,
forever with subjv. of purpose
senātus, -ūs, m. [cf. senex, (§ 501.41)
old], council of elders, sub, prep, with acc. and
senate abl. under, below, up
sentiō, -īre, sēnsī, sēnsus, to; at or to the foot of
feel, know, perceive (§ sub-igō, -ere, -ēgī, -āctus
420. d). Cf. intellegō, [sub, under, + agō,
videō drive], subdue, reduce
septem, indecl. numeral subitō, adv. [subitus,
adj. seven sudden], suddenly
septimus, -a, -um, sub-sequor, -ī, -secūtus
numeral adj. seventh sum, dep. verb [sub,
sequor, -ī, secūtus sum, below, + sequor,
dep. verb, follow (§
 493) follow], follow close
serpēns, -entis, f. [serpō, after, follow up
crawl], serpent, snake suc-cēdō, -ere, -cessī, -
sertae, -ārum, f. plur. cessus [sub, below, +
wreaths, garlands cēdō, go], follow,
servitūs, -ūtis, f. [servus, succeed
slave], slavery, suī, reflexive pron. of
servitude himself (herself, itself,
servō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, themselves) (§ 480).
save, rescue, keep sēcum = sē + cum.
servus, -ī, m. slave sēsē, emphatic form of
sēsē, emphatic for sē sē
sex, indecl. numeral adj. sum, esse, fuī, futūrus,
six irreg. verb, be; exist
Sextus, -ī, m. Sextus, a (§ 494)
Roman first name summus, -a, -um, adj. in
sī, conj. if superl. degree,
sīc, adv. thus, in this way. compared superus,
Cf. ita, tam superior, suprēmus
Sicilia, -ae, f. Sicily. See or summus (§ 312),
map supreme, highest;
sīc-ut, just as, as if best, greatest.
signifer, -erī, m. [signum, in summō colle, on the
standard, + ferō, top of the hill
bear], standard bearer sūmō, -ere, sūmpsī,
(p. 224) sūmptus, take up;
signum, -ī, n. ensign, assume, put on.
standard; signal sūmere supplicium dē,
silva, -ae, f. wood, forest inflict punishment on
similis, -e, adj., compared super, prep. with acc. and
similior, simillimus, abl. over, above
like, similar (§ 307) superbia, -ae, f.
simul, adv. at the same [superbus, proud],
time pride, arrogance
simul ac or simul atque, superbus, -a, -um, adj.
conj. as soon as proud, haughty
sine, prep. with abl. superior, comp. of
without (§ 209) superus
singulī, -ae, -a, distributive superō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus
numeral adj. one at a [superus, above], go
time, single (§ 334) over; subdue,
sinister, -tra, -trum, adj. overcome; surpass,
left excel
Sinuessa, -ae, f. Sinues´sa, super-sum, -esse, -fuī,
a town in Campania. ——, be over, survive,
See map with dat. (§ 501.15)
sitis, -is (acc. -im, abl. -ī, superus, -a, -um, adj.,
no plur.), f. thirst compared superior,
situs, -a, -um, adj. [part. of suprēmus or
sinō, set], situated, summus, above,
placed, lying upper (§ 312)
socius, socī, m. comrade, supplicium, suppli´cī, n.
ally [supplex, kneeling in
sōl, sōlis (no gen. plur.), m. entreaty], punishment,
sun torture.
soleō, -ēre, solitus sum, supplicium sūmere dē,
semi-dep. verb, be inflict punishment on.
wont, be accustomed supplicium dare, suffer
sollicitus, -a, -um, adj. punishment
disturbed, anxious surgō, -ere, surrēxī, ——
sōlum, adv. [sōlus, alone], [sub, from below, +
alone, only. regō, straighten], rise
nōn sōlum ... sed etiam, sus-cipiō, -ere, -cēpī, -
not only ... but also ceptus [sub, under, +
sōlus, -a, -um (gen. -īus, capiō, take],
dat. -ī), adj. alone, undertake, assume,
only (§ 108) begin
solvō, -ere, solvī, solūtus, suspicor, -ārī, -ātus sum,
loosen, unbind. dep. verb, suspect,
nāvem solvere, set sail surmise, suppose
sus-tineō, -ēre, -tinuī, -
tentus [sub, under, +
 teneō, hold], hold up,
bear, sustain,
withstand
suus, -a, -um, reflexive
possessive adj. and
pron., his, her, hers,
its, their, theirs (§ 98)

T
T., abbreviation of Titus timeō, -ēre, -uī, ——, fear,
taberna, -ae, f. shop, stall be afraid of. Cf.
tabula, -ae, f. tablet for vereor
writing timor, -ōris, m. [cf. timeō,
tālis, -e, adj. such. fear], fear, dread,
tālis ... quālis, such ... as alarm. Cf. metus
tam, adv. so, such. Cf. ita, Tīryns, Tīrynthis, f. Ti
sīc ´ryns, an ancient town
tamen, adv. yet, however, in southern Greece,
nevertheless where Hercules
tandem, adv. at length, served Eurystheus
finally toga, -ae, f. [cf. tegō,
tangō, -ere, tetigī, tāctus, cover], toga
touch tormentum, -ī, n. engine
tantum, adv. [tantus], only of war
tantus, -a, -um, adj. so totiēns, adv. so often, so
great, such. many times
tantus ... quantus, as tōtus, -a, -um, (gen. -īus,
large as dat. -ī), adj. all, the
tardus, -a, -um, adj. slow, whole, entire (§ 108)
late; lazy trā-dō, -ere, -didī, -ditus
Tarpēia, -ae, f. Tarpeia [trāns, across, + dō,
(pronounced Tar-pē deliver], give up, hand
´ya), the maiden who over, surrender, betray
opened the citadel to trā-dūcō, -ere, -dūxī, -
the Sabines ductus [trāns, across,
Tarquinius, Tarqui´nī, + dūcō, lead], lead
Tarquin, a Roman across
king. With the trahō, -ere, trāxī, trāctus,
surname Superbus, draw, pull, drag.
Tarquin the Proud multum trahere,
Tarracīna, -ae, f. Tarraci protract, prolong
´na, a town in Latium. much
See map trā-iciō, -ere, -iēcī, -iectus
taurus, -ī, m. bull [trāns, across, +
tēctus, -a, -um, adj. [part. iaciō, hurl], throw
of tegō, cover], across; transfix
covered, protected trā-nō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus
tēlum, -ī, n. weapon [trāns, across, + nō,
temerē, adv. rashly, swim], swim across
heedlessly trāns, prep. with acc.
tempestās, -ātis, f. across, over (§ 340)
[tempus, time] storm, trāns-eō, -īre, -iī, -itus
tempest [trāns, across, + eō,
templum, -ī, n. temple, go], go across, cross
shrine (§ 413)
tempto, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, trāns-fīgō, -ere, -fīxī, -
try, test; make trial of, fīxus [trāns, through,
attempt + fīgō, drive], transfix
tempus, -oris, n. time (§ trānsitus, —— (acc. -um,
464. 2. b). in abl. -ū), m. [cf.
reliquum tempus, for trānseō, cross over],
the future passage across
teneō, -ēre, tenuī, ——, trēs, tria, numeral adj.
hold, keep three (§ 479)
tergum, -ī, n. back, ā trīduum, trīduī, n. [trēs,
tergō, on the rear, three, + diēs, days],
tergum vertere, three days’ time, three
retreat, flee days
ternī, -ae, -a, distributive trīgintā, indecl. numeral
numeral adj. three adj. thirty
 each, by threes (§ triplex, -icis, adj. threefold,
334) triple
terra, -ae, f. earth, ground, trīstis, -e, adj. sad; severe,
land. terrible
orbis terrārum, the trīstitia, -ae, f. [trīstis,
whole world sad], sadness, sorrow
terror, -ōris, m. [cf. triumphō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus
terreō, frighten], [triumphus, triumph],
dread, alarm, terror celebrate a triumph
tertius, -a, -um, numeral triumphus, -ī, m.
adj. third triumphal procession,
Teutonēs, -um, m. the triumph.
Teutons triumphum agere,
theātrum, -ī, n. theater celebrate a triumph
Thēbae, -ārum, f. Thebes, trucīdō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus,
a city of Greece cut to pieces,
Thēbānī, -ōrum, m. slaughter. Cf.
Thebans, the people interficiō, necō,
of Thebes occīdō
thermae, -ārum, f. plur. tū, tuī (plur. vōs), pers.
baths pron. thou, you (§
Thessalia, -ae, f. Thessaly, 480)
a district of northern tuba, -ae, f. trumpet
Greece Tullia, -ae, f. Tullia, a
Thrācia, -ae, f. Thrace, a Roman name
district north of tum, adv. then, at that time
Greece turris, -is, f. tower (§ 465.
Tiberius, Tibe´rī, m. 2)
Tiberius, a Roman tūtus, -a, -um, adj. safe
first name tuus, -a, -um, possessive
tībīcen, -īnis, m. [cf. tībia, adj. and pron. your,
pipe], piper, flute yours (§ 98)
player

U
ubi, rel. and interrog. adv. urbs, -is, f. city (§ 465. a)
where, when urgeō, -ēre, ursī, ——,
ūllus, -a, -um (gen. -īus, press upon, crowd,
dat. -ī), adj. any (§ hem in
108) ūrus, -ī, m. wild ox, urus
ulterior, -ius, -ōris, adj. in ūsque, adv. all the way,
comp. degree, superl. even
ultimus, farther, more ūsus, -ūs, m. use,
remote (§ 315) advantage
ultimus, -a, -um, adj. in ut, conj. with the subjv.
superl. degree (see that, in order that,
ulterior), farthest (§ that not (with verbs of
315) fearing), so that, to (§
umbra, -ae, f. shade 350. 1)
umerus, -ī, m. shoulder uter, -tra, -trum (gen.
umquam, adv. ever, at any -īus, dat. -ī), interrog.
time pron. which of two?
ūnā, adv. [ūnus, one], in which? (§ 108)
the same place, at the uterque, utraque,
same time utrumque, indef.
ūndecimus, -a, -um, pron. each of two,
numeral adj. [ūnus, each, both.
one, + decimus, ab utrāque parte, on
tenth], eleventh both sides
undique, adv. from every ūtilis, -e, adj. [ūtor, use],
quarter, on all sides, useful
everywhere utrimque, adv. [uterque,
ūnus, -a, -um (gen. -īus, each of two], on each
dat. -ī), numeral adj. side, on either hand
one; alone (§ 108) ūva, -ae, f. grape, bunch of
grapes
uxor, -ōris, f. wife

V
vāgīna, -ae, sheath, veterānus, -a, -um, adj.
 scabbard old, veteran
vagor, -ārī, -ātus sum, vetō, -āre, -uī, -itus,
dep. verb, wander forbid, prohibit
valeō, -ēre, -uī, -itūrus, be vexō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus,
powerful, be well; in trouble, annoy
the imperative as a via, -ae, f. way, road,
greeting, farewell. street; way, manner.
plūrimum valēre, have Cf. iter
the most power viātor, -ōris, m. [via],
valētūdō, -inis, f. [valeō, traveler
be well], health victor, -ōris, m. [vincō,
validus, -a, -um, adj. [cf. conquer], conqueror,
valeō, be strong], victor. In apposition,
strong, able, well with adj. force
vallēs, -is, f. valley victorious
vāllum, -ī, n. rampart, victōria, -ae, f. [victor,
earthworks victor], victory
varius, -a, -um, adj. vīcus, -ī, m. village
bright-colored videō, -ēre, vīdī, vīsus,
vāstō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus see, perceive. Pass. be
[vāstus, empty], seen; seem (§ 420. d)
(make empty), vigilia, -ae, f. [vigil
devastate, lay waste awake], watch.
vectīgal, -ālis, n. tax, dē tertia vigilia, about
tribute the third watch
vehementer, adv. vīgintī, indecl. numeral
[vehemēns, eager], adj. twenty
compared vīlicus, -ī, m. [vīlla, farm],
vehementius, steward, overseer of a
vehementissimē, farm
eagerly, vehemently vīlla, -ae, f. farm, villa
vehō, -ere, vexī, vectus, vinciō, -īre, vīnxī, vīnctus,
convey, carry. In the bind, tie, fetter
passive often in the vincō, -ere, vīcī, victus,
sense of ride, sail conquer, defeat,
vel, conj. or.
 vel ... vel, either ... or. overcome. Cf. subigō,
Cf. aut superō
vēlōcitās, -ātis, f. [vēlōx, vīnea, -ae, f. shed (p. 219)
swift], swiftness vīnum, -ī, n. wine
vēlōx, -ōcis, adj. swift, fleet violenter, adv. [violentus,
vēlum, -ī, n. sail violent], compared
vēndō, -ere, vēndidī, violentius,
vēnditus, sell violentissimē,
veniō, -īre, vēnī, ventus, violently, furiously
come, go vir, virī, m. man, husband;
ventus, -ī, m. wind hero (§ 462. c)
verbum, -ī, n. word. virīlis, -e, adj. [vir, man],
verba facere prō, speak manly
in behalf of virtūs, -ūtis, f. [vir, man],
vereor, -ērī, -itus sum, manliness; courage,
dep. verb, fear; valor; virtue (§ 464.
reverence, respect (§ 1)
493). Cf. timeō vīs, (vīs), f. strength,
Vergilius, Vergi´lī, m. power, might, violence
Vergil, the poet (§ 468)
vergō, -ere, ——, ——, vīta, -ae, f. [cf. vīvō, live],
turn, lie life, vītam agere,
vērō, adv. [vērus, true], in spend or pass life
truth, surely; conj. vīto, -āre, -āvī, -ātus,
but, however. shun, avoid
tum vērō, then you may vīvō, -ere, vīxī, ——, live.
be sure, introducing Cf. habitō, incolō
the climax of a story vīvus, -a, -um, adj. [cf.
vertō, -ere, -tī, -sus, turn, vīvō, live], alive,
change. living
tergum vertere, retreat, vix, adv. scarcely, hardly
flee vocō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus,
vērus, -a, -um, true, actual call, summon, invite.
vesper, -erī, m. evening Cf. appellō, nōminō
vester, -tra, -trum, volō, -āre, -āvī, -ātūrus,
possessive adj. and fly
 pron. your, yours (§ volō, velle, voluī, ——,
98) irreg. verb, will, be
vestīgium, vestī´gī, n. [cf. willing; wish (§ 497).
vestīgō, track], Cf. cupio
footstep, track, trace volūmen, -inis, n. roll,
vestīmentum, -ī, n. [vestis, book
clothing], garment Vorēnus, -ī, m. Vore´nus, a
vestiō, -īre, -īvī, -ītus centurion
[vestis, clothing], vōs, pers. pron.; you (see
clothe, dress tū) (§ 480)
vestis, -is, f. clothing, vōtum, -ī, n. [neut. part. of
attire, garment, robe voveō, vow], vow,
vestītus, -a, -um, adj. pledge, prayer
[part. of vestiō, vōx, vōcis, f. [cf. vocō,
clothe], clothed call], voice, cry; word
Vesuvius, Vesu´vi, m. vulnerō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus
Vesuvius, the volcano [vulnus, wound],
near Pompeii. See wound, hurt
map vulnus, -eris, n. wound,
injury
vulpēs, -īs, f. fox
EQUES ROMANUS

ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY

This vocabulary contains only the words used in the English-Latin

exercises. For details not given here, reference may be made to the Latin-
English vocabulary. The figures 1, 2, 3, 4, after verbs indicate the
conjugation.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWYZ

A
a, an, commonly not announce, nūntiō, 1
translated annoying, molestus, -a, -
able (be), possum, posse, um
potuī, ——(§ 495) another, alius, -a, -ud (§
abode, domicilium, domici 109)
´lī, n. any, ūllus, -a, -um (§ 108)
about (adv.), circiter any one, anything,
about (prep.), dē, with abl. quisquam, quicquam
about to, expressed by fut. or quidquam (§ 486)
act. part. appearance, fōrma, -ae, f.
abundance, cōpia, -ae, f. appoint, creō, 1
across, trāns, with acc. approach, adpropinquō, 1,
active, ācer, ācris, ācre with dat.
advance, prōgredior, 3 are, used as auxiliary, not
advantage, ūsus, -ūs, m. translated; as a
advise, moneō, 2 copula, sum (§ 494)
after (conj.), postquam; arise, orior, 4
often expressed by the arm, bracchium, bracchī,
perf. part. n.
after (prep.), post, with armed, armātus, -a, -um
acc. arms, arma, -ōrum, n. plur.
against, in, contrā, with army, exercitus, -ūs, m.
acc. around, circum, with acc.
aid, auxilium, auxi´lī, n. arrival, adventus, -us, m.
all, omnis, -e; tōtus, -a, - arrow, sagitta, -ae, f.
um (§ 108) art of war, rēs mīlitāris
allow, patior, 3 as possible, expressed by
ally, socius, socī, m. quam and superl..
almost, paene; ferē ask, petō, 3; quaerō, 3;
alone, ūnus, -a, -um; sōlus, rogō, 1
-a, -um (§ 108) assail, oppugnō, 1
already, iam at, in, with acc. or abl.;
also, quoque with names of towns,
always, semper locative case or abl.
ambassador, lēgātus, -ī, without a preposition
m. (§ 268); time when,
among, apud, with acc. abl.
ancient, antīquus, -a, -um at once, statim
and, et; atque (ac); -que at the beginning of
and so, itaque summer, initā aestāte
Andromeda, Andromeda, Athens, Athēnae, -ārum, f.
-ae, f. attack, impetus, -us, m.
angry, īrātus, -a, um attempt, cōnor, 1; temptō,
animal, animal, -ālis, n. 1
away from, ā or ab, with
abl.

B
bad, malus, -a, -um billow, fluctus, -us, m.
baggage, impedīmenta, bird, avis, -is, f. (§ 243. 1)
-ōrum, n. plur. blood, sanguis, -inis, m.
bank, rīpa, -ae, f. body, corpus, -oris. n.
barbarians, barbarī, bold, audāx, -ācis; fortis, -
-ōrum, m. plur. e
battle, proelium, proelī, n.; boldly, audācter; fortiter
pugna, -ae. f. boldness, audācia, -ae, f.
be, sum (§ 494) booty, praeda, -ae, f.
be absent, be far, absum both, each (of two),
(§ 494) uterque, utraque,
be afraid, timeō, 2; vereor, utrumque
2 both ... and, et ... et
be away, absum (§ 494) boy, puer, -erī, m.
be in command of, brave, fortis, -e
praesum, with dat. (§§ bravely, fortiter
494, 426) bridge, pōns, pontis, m.
be informed, certior fīō bright, clārus, -a, -um
be off, be distant, absum bring back, reportō, 1
(§ 494) bring upon, īnferō, -ferre,
be without, egeō, with abl. -tulī, -lātus,
(§ 180) with acc. and dat. (§ 426)
beast (wild), fera, -ae, f. brother, frāter, -tris, m.
beautiful, pulcher, -chra, - building, aedificium,
chrum aedifi´cī. n.
because, quia; quod burn, cremō, 1; incendō, 3
because of, propter, with business, negōtium, negō
acc.; or abl. of cause ´tī, n.
before, heretofore (adv.), but, however, autem, sed
anteā by, ā, ab, with abl.;
before (prep.), ante, with denoting means, abl.
acc.; alone; sometimes
prō, with abl. implied in a participle
begin, incipiō, 3 by night, noctū
believe, crēdō, 3, with dat.
(§ 153)
belong to, predicate
genitive (§ 409)
best, optimus, superl. of
bonus
betray, trādō, 3
better, melior, comp. of
bonus
between, inter, with acc.
 C
Cæsar, Caesar, -aris, m. citizen, cīvis, -is, m. and f.
calamity, calamitās, -ātis, (§ 243. 1)
f. city, urbs, urbis, f.
call, vocō, 1; appellō, 1; clear, clārus, -a, -um
nōminō, 1 cohort, cohors, -rtis, f.
call together, convocō, 1 come, veniō, 4
camp, castra, -ōrum, n. command, imperō, 1, with
plur. dat. (§ 45); iubeō, 2;
can, could, possum, posse, praesum, with dat. (§
potuī, —— (§ 495) 426)
capture, capiō, 3; occupō, commit, committō, 3
1 commonwealth, rēs
care, cūra, -ae, f. pūblica, reī pūblicae
care for, cūrō, 1 concerning, dē, with abl.
careful, attentus, -a, -um conquer, superō, 1; vincō,
carefulness, dīligentia, -ae, 3
f. construct (a ditch),
carry, ferō, ferre, tulī, lātus perdūcō, 3
(§ 498); portō, 1 consul, cōnsul, -ulis, m.
carry on, gerō, 3 contrary to, contrā, with
cart, carrus, -ī, m. acc.
cause, causa, -ae, f. Corinth, Corinthus, -ī, f.
cavalry, equitātus, -ūs, m. Cornelia, Cornēlia, -ae, f.
cease, cessō, 1 Cornelius, Cornēlius,
Cepheus, Cēpheus, -ī, m. Cornē´li, m.
certain (a), quīdam, corselet, lōrīca, -ae, f.
quaedam, quoddam cottage, casa, -ae, f.
(quiddam) (§ 485) country, as distinguished
chicken, gallīna, -ae, f. from the city, rūs,
chief, prīnceps, -cipis, m. rūris, n.; as territory,
children, līberī, -ōrum, m. fīnēs, -ium, m., plur.
plur. of fīnis
choose, dēligō, 3 courage, virtūs, -ūtis, f.
choose, elect, creō, 1 crime, scelus, -eris, n.
cross, trānseō, 4 (§ 499)
crown, corōna, -ae, f.

D
daily, cotīdiē Diana, Diāna, -ae, f.
danger, perīculum, -ī, n. differ, differō, differre,
daughter, fīlia, -ae, f. (§ distulī, dīlātus (§ 498)
67) different, dissimilis, -e
day, diēs, -ēī, m. difficult, difficilis, -e
daybreak, prīma lūx difficulty, difficultās, -ātis,
dear, cārus, -a, -um f.
death, mors, mortis, f. diligence, dīligentia, -ae, f.
deed, rēs, reī, f. dinner, cēna, -ae, f.
deep, altus, -a, -um disaster, calamitās, -ātis, f.
defeat, calamitās, -ātis, f. distant (be), absum, -esse,
defend, dēfendō, 3 āfuī, āfutūrus (§ 494)
delay (Noun), mora, -ae, f. ditch, fossa, -ae, f.
delay (verb), moror, 1 do, agō, 3; faciō, 3; when
demand, postulō, 1 used as auxiliary, not
dense, dēnsus, -a, -um translated
depart, discēdō, 3; exeō, down from, dē, with abl.
4; proficīscor, 3 drag, trahō, 3
dependent, cliēns, -entis, drive, agō, 3
m. dwell, habitō, 1; incolō, 3;
design, cōnsilium, consi´lī vīvō, 3
n. dwelling, aedificium,
desire, cupiō, 3 aedifi´cī, n.
destroy, dēleō, 2

each, quisque, quaeque, either ... or, aut ... aut

quidque (quodque) (§ empire, imperium, impe
484) ´rī, n.
each of two, uterque, employ, negōtium dō
utraque, utrumque encourage, hortor, 1
each other, inter with acc. enemy, hostis, -is, m. and
of a reflexive f.; inimīcus, -ī, m.
eager, ācer, ācris, ācre; enough, satis
alacer, alacris, alacre entire, tōtus, -a, -um (§
eager (be), studeō, 2 108)
eagerness, studium, studī, expectation, opīniō, -ōnis,
n. f.
eagle, aquila, -ae, f. eye, oculus, -ī, m.
easily, facile
easy, facilis, -e

F
faithless, perfidus, -a, -um foot-soldier, pedes, -itis,
famous, clārus, -a, -um m.
far, longē for (conj.), enim, nam
farmer, agricola, -ae, m. for (prep.), sign of dat.; dē,
farther, ulterior, -ius prō, with abl.; to
father, pater, patris, m. express purpose, ad,
fatherland, patria, -ae, f. with gerundive;
favor, faveō, 2 implied in acc. of time
favorable, idōneus, -a,- and of extent of space
um; secundus, -a, -um for a long time, diū
fear, metus, -ūs, m.; timor, forbid, vetō, 1
-ōris, m. forces, cōpiae, -ārum, f.,
fear, be afraid, timeō, 2 plur. of cōpia
few, paucī, -ae, -a forest, silva, -ae, f.
field, ager, agrī, m. fort, castellum, -ī, n.;
fifteen, quīndecim castrum, -ī, n.
fight, contendō, 3; pugnō, fortification, mūnitiō,
1 -ōnis, f.
find, reperiō, 4 fortify, mūniō, 4
finish, cōnficiō, 3 fortune, fortūna, -ae, f.
fourth, quārtus, -a, -um
fire, ignis, -is, m. (§ 243. free, līber, -era, -erum
1) free, liberate, līberō, 1
firmness, cōnstantia, -ae, f. frequent, crēber, -bra, -
first, prīmus, -a, -um brum
flee, fugiō, 3 friend, amīcus, -ī, m.
flight, fuga, -ae, f. friendly (adj.), amīcus, -a,
fly, volō, 1 -um
foe, see enemy friendly (adv.), amīcē
follow close after, friendship, amīcitia, -ae, f.
subsequor, 3 frighten, perterreō, 2
food, cibus, -ī, m. from, ā or ab, dē, ē, ex,
foot, pēs, pedis, m. with abl. Often
expressed by the
separative ablative
without a prep.
from each other, inter,
with acc. of a reflexive
pron.
full, plēnus, -a, -um

G
Galba, Galba, -ae, m. give, dō, dare, dedī, datus
garland, corōna, -ae, f. give over, surrender,
garrison, praesidium, dēdō, 3; trādō, 3
praesi´dī, n. give up, omittō, 3
gate, porta, -ae, f. go, eō, 4 (§ 499)
Gaul, Gallia, -ae, f. go forth, prōgredior, 3
Gaul (a), Gallus, -ī, m. god, deus, -ī, m. (§ 468)
general, imperātor, -ōris, goddess, dea, -ae, f. (§ 67)
m. gold, aurum, -ī, n.
Geneva, Genāva, -ae, f. good, bonus, -a, -um
gentle, lēnis, -e grain, frūmentum, -ī, n.
German, Germānus, -a, - grain supply, rēs
um frūmentāria
Germans (the), Germānī, great, ingēns, -entis;
-ōrum, m. plur. magnus, -a, -um
Germany, Germānia, -ae, greatest, maximus, -a, -
f. um; summus, -a, -um
get (dinner), parō, 1 guard, praesidium, praesi
girl, puella, -ae, f. ´dī, n.

H
hand, manus, -ūs, f. high, altus, -a, -um
happy, laetus, -a, -um highest, summus, -a, -um
harbor, portus, -ūs, m. hill, collis, -is, m.
hasten, contendō, 3; himself, suī. See self
mātūrō, 1; properō, 1 hindrance,
hateful, invīsus, -a, -um impedīmentum, -ī, n.
haughty, superbus, -a, -um his, eius; huius; istīus;
have, habeō, 2 illīus; reflexive, suus, -
have no power, nihil a, -um (§ 116)
possum hither, citerior, -ius (§
he, is; hic; iste; ille; or not 315)
expressed hold, teneō, 2
head, caput, -itis, n. home, domus, -ūs, f. (§
hear, audiō 468).
heart, animus, -ī, m. at home, domī (§ 267)
heavy, gravis, -e hope (Noun), spēs, speī, f.
Helvetii (the), Helvētiī, hope (verb), spērō, 1
-ōrum, m. plur. horse, equus, -ī, m.
hem in, contineō, 2 horseman, eques, -itis, m.
hen, gallīna, -ae, f. hostage, obses, -idis, m.
her, eius; huius; istīus; and f.
illīus; reflexive, suus, - hostile, inimīcus, -a, -um
a, -um (§ 116) hour, hōra, -ae, f.
hide, abdō, 3 house, domicilium, domici
´lī, n.; domus, -ūs, f.
(§ 468)
hurl, iaciō, 3
 I
I, ego (§ 280); or not injure, noceō, 2, with dat.
expressed (§ 153)
if, sī. if not, nisi injury, iniūria, -ae, f.
ill, aeger, -gra, -grum into, in, with acc.
immediately, statim intrust, committō, 3;
in (of place), in, with abl.; mandō, 1
(of time or of invite, vocō, 1
specification) abl. is, used as auxiliary, not
without prep. translated; as a
in order that, ut, with copula, sum (§ 494)
subjv.; island, īnsula, -ae, f.
in order that not, lest, it, is; hie; iste; ille; or not
nē, with subjv. expressed
in vain, frūstrā Italy, Italia, -ae, f.
industry, dīligentia, -ae, f. its, eius; huius; istīus;
inflict injuries upon, illīus; reflexive, suus, -
iniūriās īnferō with a, -um (§ 116)
dat. (§ 426) itself, suī. See self
inflict punishment on,
supplicium sūmō de
inform some one, aliquem
certiōrem faciō

J
join battle, proelium judge (verb), iūdicō, 1
committō Julia, Iūlia, -ae, f.
journey, iter, itineris, n. (§ just now, nūper
468)
judge (Noun), iūdex, -icis,
m.

K
keep, contineō, 2; king, rēx, rēgis, m.
prohibeo, 2; teneō, 2 kingdom, rēgnum, -ī, n.
keep on doing something, know, cognōscō, 3, in
expressed by the impf. perf.; sciō, 4
indic.
kill, interficiō, 3; necō, 1 ;
occīdō, 3

L
labor (Noun), labor, -ōris, left, sinister, -tra, -trum
m. legion, legiō, -ōnis, f.
labor (verb), labōrō, 1 legionaries, legiōnāriī,
lack (Noun), inopia, -ae, f. -ōrum, m. plur.
lack (verb), egeō, 2, with length, longitūdō, -inis, f.
abl. (§ 180) lest, nē, with subjv.
lady, domina, -ae, f. letter (of the alphabet),
lake, lacus, -ūs, m. (§ 260. littera, -ae, f; (an
2) epistle) litterae,
land, terra, -ae, f. -ārum, f. plur.
language, lingua, -ae, f. lieutenant, lēgātus, -ī, m.
large, ingēns, -entis ; light, lūx, lūcis, f.
magnus, -a, -um like (adj.), similis, -e
larger, maior, maius like, love, amō, 1
lately, nūper line of battle, aciēs, aciēī,
Latona, Lātōna, -ae, f. f.
law, lēx, lēgis, f. little, parvus, -a, -um
lay waste, vāstō, 1 live, habitō, 1; incolō, 3;
lead, dūco, 3 vīvō, 3
leader, dux, ducis, m. and long, longus, -a, -um
f. long, for a long time, diū
learn, know, cognōscō, 3 long for, dēsīderō, 1
leave, depart from, look after, cūrō, 1
discēdō, 3 love, amō, 1
leave behind, abandon,
relinquō, 3
 M

maid, maid servant, mine, meus, -a, -um

ancilla, -ae,f. mistress, domina, -ae, f.
make, faciō, 3 money, pecūnia, -ae, f.
make war upon, bellum monster, mōnstrum, -ī, n.
īnferō with dat. (§ month, mēnsis, -is, m.
426) moon, lūna, -ae, f.
man, homō, -inis, m. and more (adj.), plūs, plūris (§
f.; vir, virī, m. 313); or a
man-of-war, nāvis longa comparative. Adverb,
many, multī, -ae, -a, plur. magis
of multus most (adj.), plūrimus, -a, -
march, iter, itineris, n. (§ um; superl. degree.
468) Adverb, maximē;
Mark, Mārcus, -ī, m. plūrimum
marriage, mātrimōnium, mother, māter, mātris, f.
mātrimō´nī, n. mountain, mōns, montis,
master, dominus, -ī, m.; m.
magīster, -trī, m. move, moveō, 2
matter, negōtium, negō´tī, moved, commōtus, -a, -um
n.; rēs, reī, f. much (by), multō
means, by means of, the multitude, multitūdō, -
abl. inis. f.
messenger, nūntius, nūntī, my, meus, -a, -um
m. myself, mē, reflexive. See
midnight, media nox self
mile, mīlle passuum (§
331. b)
miles, mīlia passuum
mind, animus, -ī, m.;
mēns, mentis, f.

N
name, nōmen, -inis, n. night, nox, noctis, f.
nation, gēns, gentis, f. nine, novem
near, propinquus, -a, -um no, minimē; or repeat verb
nearest, proximus, -a, -um with a negative (§
nearly, ferē 210)
neighbor, fīnitimus, -ī, in. no, none, nūllus, -a, -um (§
neighboring, fīinitimus, - 109)
a, -um no one, nēmō, nūllīus
neither, neque or nec; nor, neque or nec
neither ... nor, neque not, nōn
(nec) ... neque (nec) not even, nē ... quidem
never, numquam not only ... but also, nōn
nevertheless, tamen sōlum ... sed etiam
new, novus, -a, -um nothing, nihil or nihilum,
next day, postrīdiē eius -ī, n.
diēī now, nunc
next to, proximus, -a, -um number, numerus, -ī, m.

O
obey, pāreō, 2, with dat. (§ opportune, opportunus, -a,
153) -um
of, sign of gen.; opposite, adversus, -a, -um
dē, with abl.; oracle, ōrāculum, -ī, n.
out of, ē or ex, with abl. orator, ōrātor, -ōris, m.
often, saepe order, imperō, 1; iubeō, 2
on (of place), in, with abl.; ornament, ōrnāmentum,
(of time) abl. without -ī, n.
prep. other, alius, -a, -ud (§ 109)
on account of, propter, others (the), reliquī,
with acc.; or abl. of -ōrum, m. plur.
cause. ought, dēbeō, 2
on all sides, undique our, noster, -tra, -trum
once (upon a time), ōlim ourselves, nōs, as reflexive
one, ūnus, -a, -um (§ 108) object. See self
one ... another, alius ... overcome, superō, 1 ;
alius (§ 110) vincō, 3
only (adv.), sōlum; tantum own (his, her, its, their),
suus, -a, -um

P
part, pars, partis, f. possible (as), expressed by
peace, pāx, pācis, f. quam and superl.
people, populus, -ī, m. powerful (be), valeō, 2
Perseus, Perseus, -ī, m. praise, laudō, 1
persuade, persuādeō, 2, prefer, mālō, mālle, māluī,
with dat. (§ 153) —— (§ 497)
pitch camp, castra pōnō prepare for, parō, 1, with
place (Noun), locus, -ī, m. acc.
place, arrange, conlocō, 1 press hard, premō, 3
place, put, pōnō, 3 protection, fidēs, fideī, f.
place in command, province, prōvincia, -ae, f.
praeficiō, 3, with acc. public, pūblicus, -a, -um
and dat. (§ 426) Publius, Pūblius, Pūblī, m.
plan (a), cōnsilium, cōnsi punishment, poena, -ae, f.;
´lī, n. supplicium, suppli´cī,
please, placeō, 2, with dat. n.
(§ 154) purpose, for the purpose
pleasing, grātus, -a, -um of, ut, quī, or quō,
plow, arō, 1 with subjv.;
Pompeii, Pompēiī, -ōrum, ad, with gerund or
m. plur. gerundive; causā,
following the genitive
of a gerund or
gerundive
pursue, īnsequor, 3

Q
queen, rēgīna, -ae, f. quite, expressed by the
quickly, celeriter comp. degree
 R
rampart, vāllum, -ī, n. rest (the), reliquī, -ōrum,
rear, novissimum agmen m. plur.
reason, causa, -ae, f. restrain, contineō, 2
receive, accipiō, 3; retainer, cliēns, -entis, m.
excipiō, 3 retreat, pedem referō;
recent, recēns, -entis terga vertō
recently, nūper return, redeō, 4; revertor,
redoubt, castellum, -ī, n. 3
refuse, recūsō, 1 revolution, rēs novae
remain, maneō, 2 Rhine, Rhēnus, -ī, m.
remaining, reliquus, -a, - right, dexter, -tra, -trum
um river, flūmen, -inis, n.;
reply, respondeō, 2 fluvius, fluvī, m.
report (Noun), fama, -ae, road, via, -ae, f.
f.; rūmor, -ōris, m. Roman, Rōmānus, -a, -um
report (verb), adferō; Rome, Rōma, -ae, f.
dēferō; referō (§ 498) row, ōrdō, -inis, m.
republic, rēs pūblica rule, regō, 3
require, postulō, 1 rumor, fāma, -ae, f.;
resist, resistō, 3, with dat. rūmor, -ōris, m.
(§ 154) run, currō, 3

S
sacrifice, sacrum, -ī, n. small, parvus, -a, -um
safety, salūs, -ūtis, f. snatch, rapiō, 3
sail, nāvigō, 1 so, ita; sīc; tam
sailor, nauta, -ae, m. so great, tantus, -a, -um
sake, for the sake of, so that, ut; so that not, ut
causā, following a nōn
gen. soldier, mīles, -itis, m.
same, īdem, eadem, idem some, often not expressed;
(§ 287) quis (quī), qua (quae),
savages, barbarī, -ōrum, m. quid (quod); aliquī,
plur. aliqua, aliquod
save, servō, 1 some one, quis; aliquis (§
say, dīcō, 3 487)
school, lūdus, -ī, m.; some ... others, aliī ... aliī
schola, -ae, f. (§ 110)
scout, explōrātor, -ōris, m. something, quid; aliquid
sea, mare, -is, n. (§ 487)
second, secundus, -a, -um son, fīlius, fīlī, m.
see, videō, 2 soon, mox
seek, petō, 3 space, spatium, spatī, n.
seem, videor, 2, passive of spear, pīlum, -ī, n.
videō spirited, ācer, ācris, ācre;
seize, occupō, 1; rapiō, 3 alacer, alacris, alacre
self, ipse, -a, -um (§ 286); spring, fōns, fontis, m.
suī (§ 281) spur, calcar, -āris, n.
send, mittō, 3 stand, stō, 1
set fire to, incendō, 3 state, cīvitās, -ātis, f.
set out, proficīscor, 3 station, conlocō, 1
seven, septem steadiness, cōnstantia, -ae,
Sextus, Sextus, -ī, m. f.
she, ea; haec; ista; illa (§ stone, lapis, -idis, m.
115); or not expressed storm, oppugnō, 1
ship, nāvis, -is, f. (§ 243. story, fābula, -ae, f.
1) street, via, -ae, f.
short, brevis, -e strength, vīs, (vīs), f.
shout, clāmor, -ōris, m. strong, fortis, -e; validus, -
show, dēmōnstrō, 1 a, -um
Sicily, Sicilia, -ae, f. sturdy, validus, -a, -um
sick, aeger, -gra, -grum such, tālis, -e
side, latus, -eris, n. suddenly, subitō
siege, obsidiō, -ōnis, f. suffer punishment,
since, cum, with subjv. (§ supplicium dō
396); the abl. abs. (§ sufficiently, satis
381) suitable, idōneus, -a, -um
sing, canō, 3; cantō, 1 summer, aestās, -ātis, f.
sister, soror, -ōris, f. sun, sōl, sōlis, m.
sit, sedeō, 2 supplies, commeātus, -ūs,
size, magnitūdō, -inis, f. m.
skillful, perītus, -a, -um surrender, trādō, 3
slave, servus, -ī, m. suspect, suspicor, 1
slavery, servitiūs, -ūtis, f. swift, celer, -eris, -ere;
slow, tardus, -a, -um vēlōx, -ōcis
sword, gladius, gladī, m.

T
take, capture, capiō, 3 think, arbitror, 1; exīstimō,
take part in, intersum, - 1; putō, 1
esse, -fuī, -futūrus, third, tertius, -a, -um
with dat. (§ 426) this, hic, haec, hoc; is, ea,
take possession of, id
occupō, 1 though, cum. with subjv.
tall, altus, -a, -um (§ 396)
task, opus, operis, n. thousand, mīlle (§ 479)
teach, doceō, 2 three, trēs, tria (§ 479)
teacher, magister, -trī, m. through, per, with acc.
tear (Noun), lacrima, -ae, thy, tuus, -a, -um
f. time, tempus, -oris, n.
tell, dīcō, 3; nārrō, 1 to, sign of dat.; ad, in, with
ten, decem acc.; expressing
terrified, perterritus, -a, - purpose, ut, quī, with
um subjv.; ad, with
terrify, perterreō, 2 gerund or gerundive
than, quam to each other, inter, with
that (conj. after verbs of acc. of a reflexive
saying and the like), pron.
not expressed to-day, hodiē
that (pron.), is; iste; ille tooth, dēns, dentis, m.
that, in order that, in top of, summus, -a, -um
purpose clauses, ut; tower, turris, -is, f. (§ 243.
2)
 after verbs of fearing, town, oppidum, -ī, n.
nē (§§ 349, 366, 372) townsman, oppidānus, -ī,
that not, lest, in purpose m.
clauses, nē; after trace, vestīgium, vestī´gī,
verbs of fearing, ut n.
(§§ 349, 366, 372) trader, mercātor, -ōris, m.
the, not expressed train, exerceō, 2
their, gen. plur. of is; tree, arbor, -oris, f.
reflexive, suus, -a, - tribe, gēns, gentis, f.
um (§ 116) troops, cōpiae, -ārum, f.
their own, suus, -a, -um (§ plur.
116) true, vērus, -a, -um
then, at that time, tum trumpet, tuba, -ae, f.
then, in the next place, try, cōnor, 1; temptō, 1
deinde, tum twelve, duodecim
there, as expletive, not two, duo, duae, duo (§
expressed 479)
there, in that place, ibi
therefore, itaque
they, iī; hī; istī; illī; or not
expressed

U
under, sub, with acc. or unlike, dissimilis, -e
abl. unwilling (be), nōlō, nōlle,
undertake, suscipiō, 3 nōluī, —— (§ 497)
unharmed, incolumis, -e up to, sub, with acc.
unless, nisi us, nōs, acc. plur. of ego

V
very, superl. degree; violence, vīs, (vīs), f.
maximē; ipse, -a, -um violently, vehementer
(§ 285) voice, vōx, vōcis, f.
victor, victor, -ōris, m.
victory, victōria, -ae, f.
village, vīcus, -ī, m.

W
wage, gerō, 3 wicked, malus, -a, -um
wagon, carrus. -ī, m. wide, lātus, -a, -um
wall, mūrus, -ī, m. width, lātitūdō, -inis, f.
want, inopia, -ae, f. wild beast, fera, -ae, f.
war, bellum, -ī, n. willing (be), volō, velle,
watch, vigilia, -ae, f. voluī, —— (§ 497)
water, aqua, -ae, f. win (a victory), reportō, 1
wave, fluctus, -ūs, m. wind, ventus, -ī, m.
way, iter, itineris, n. (§ wine, vīnum, -ī, n.
468); via, -ae, f. wing, cornū, -ūs, n.
way, manner, modus, -ī, winter, hiems, -emis, f.
m. wisdom, cōnsilium, consi
we, nōs, plur. of ego; or not ´lī, n.
expressed wish, cupiō, 3; volō, velle,
weak, īnfīrmus, -a, -um voluī, —— (§ 497);
weapons, arma, -ōrum, n. wish not, nōlō, nōlle,
plur.; tēla, -ōrum, n. nōluī, —— (§ 497)
plur. with, cum, with abl.;
wear, gerō, 3 sometimes abl. alone
weary, dēfessus, -a, -um withdraw, sē recipere
what, quis (quī), quae, without, sine, with abl.
quid (quod) (§ 483) woman, fēmina, -ae, f.;
when, ubi; cum (§ 396); mulier, -eris, f.
often expressed by a wonderful, mīrus, -a, -um
participle word, verbum, -ī, n.
where, ubi work, labor, -ōris, m.;
which, quī, quae, quod (§ opus, -eris, n.
482); which of two, worse, peior, peius, comp.
uter, utra, utrum (§ of malus
108) worst, pessimus, -a, -um,
superl. of malus
while, expressed by a wound (Noun), vulnus, -
participle eris, n.
whither, quō wound (verb), vulnerō, 1
who (rel.), quī, quae (§ wreath, corōna, -ae, f.
482); (interrog.) quis wretched, miser, -era, -
(§ 483) erum
whole, tōtus, -a, -um (§ wrong, iniūria, -ae, f.
108)
whose, cuius; quōrum,
quārum, quōrum, gen.
of quī, quae, quod,
rel.; or of quis, quid,
interrog.
why, cūr

Y
year, annus, -ī, m. you, sing. tū; plur. vōs (§
yes, certē; ita; vērō; or, 480); or not expressed
more usually, repeat your, sing. tuus, -a, -um;
the verb (§ 210) plur. vester, -tra, -trum
yonder (that), ille, -a, -ud (§ 98. b)

Z
zeal, studium, studī, n.
 INDEX
The numbers in all cases refer to sections.
ā-declension of nouns, 57, adjectives, 54, 55
461 agreement, 65
ā-verbs, conjugation of, comparison
488 regular, 301
ablative case, 48, 50 by adverbs, 302
absolute, 381 irregular, 307, 311,
after a comparative, 309 312, 315
of accompaniment, 104 declension of
of agent, 181 comparatives, 303
of cause, 102 of first and second
of description, 444, 445 declensions, 83, 93,
of manner, 105 469
of means or instrument, of third declension, 250-
103 257, 471
of measure of difference, with the dative, 143
317 adverbs, 319
of place from which, comparison, 320, 323
179 formation
of place where, 265 regular, 320, 321
of separation, 180 irregular, 322, 323
of specification, 398 agent
of time, 275 expressed by the abl.
accent, 14-16 with ā or ab, 181
accompaniment agreement
abl. of, 104 of adjectives, 65, 215. a
accusative case, 33 of appositives, 81
of predicate nouns, 76
 as subject of the of relative pronouns,
infinitive, 214 224
object, 37 of verbs, 28
of duration and extent, aliquis, 487
336 alius, 108, 110, 470
of place to which, 263, alphabet, 1-3
266 alter, 108, 110
predicate, 392 antepenult, 9. 3
with prepositions, 340 accent of, 15
apposition, 80, 81
article
not used in Latin, 22. a
base, 58
cardinal numerals, 327- complementary infinitive,
329, 478 215
case, 32. 2 compound verbs
causal clauses with cum, with the dative, 425, 426
395, 396 concessive clauses with
cause, cum, 395, 396
expressed by the abl., conjugation stems, 184
102 conjugations
characteristic the four regular, 126,
subjv. of, 389, 390 488-491
comparative irregular, 494-500
declension of, 303 consonants, 2
comparison copula, 21
abl. of, 309 cum
degrees of, 300 conjunction, 395
of adjectives, 300-315 cum
irregular, 311-315, preposition, 209
473, 475
of adverbs
regular, 320-476
irregular, 323, 477
positive wanting, 315
 six adjectives in -lis, 307
dative case, 43 descriptive relative clause
of indirect object, 44, 45 with the subjv., 389, 390
of purpose, or end for deus
which, 437 declension of, 468
with adjectives, 143 difference, measure of,
with compound verbs, 316, 317
426 diphthongs, 6
with special verbs, 153 direct statements, 414
dea distributive numerals,
declension of, 67 327. 3, 334
declension, 23, 32 domī
degree of difference locative, 267
expressed by the abl., domus
317 declension of, 468
demonstrative adjectives duo
and pronouns, declension of, 479
112-115, 290-292, duration of time,
481 expressed by the
deponent verbs, 338, 339, acc., 336
493
descriptive ablative and
genitive, 441-445
ē-declension of nouns, 272, enclitics, 16
273, 467 eō
ē-verbs, conjugation of, conjugation of, 499
489 extent of space
ĕ-verbs, conjugation of, expressed by the acc.,
490 336
ego
declension of, 280, 480
fearing first conjugation, 488
subjv. after verbs of, first or ā-declension, 57,
370-372 461
ferō fourth conjugation, 491
conjugation of, 498 fourth or u-declension,
fifth or ē-declension, 272, 259, 260, 466
273, 467 from
fīlia how expressed, 178-181
declension of, 67 future participle
fīlius formation of, 374. c
declension of, 87-89 future perfect
finite verb formation of
defined, 173 active, 187. 3
fīō passive, 202
conjugation of, 500 future tense
formation of, 137, 156
gender genitive case
in English and in Latin, English equivalents of,
60 33
in the first declension, of description, 443, 445
61 of nouns in -ius and -
in the second ium, 87
declension, 72 partitive, 331
in the third declension, possessive, 38, 409
247 gerund
in the fourth declension, a verbal noun, 402, 403
260 gerundive
in the fifth declension, a verbal adjective, 404
272 with ad to express
general observations on purpose, 407
declension, 74
hic how to read Latin, 17
declension and use of,
290, 291
i inflection
consonant, 3 defined, 23
instrument
i-stems of nouns, 231, 241- abl. of, 100. b, 103
244 intensive pronoun
ī-verbs ipse, declension and use
conjugation of, 491 of, 285, 286, 481
īdem interrogative pronouns
declension of, 287, 481 and adjectives,
iēns 225-227, 483
declension of, 472 intransitive verbs,
ille defined, 20. a
declension and use of, with the dative, 153
290-293, 481 iō-verbs of the third
imperative conj., 492
formation of, 161, 175 ipse
irregular, 161. 2 declension and use of,
in commands, 161 285, 481
imperfect indicative, irregular adjectives, 108
formation and use irregular comparison
of, 133, 134, 165. 1 of adjectives, 307 311,
imperfect subjunctive, 312
354 of adverbs, 323
indefinite pronouns and irregular nouns, 67, 246,
adjectives, 296, 468
297, 484-487 irregular verbs, 494-500
independent clauses, 219 is
indirect object, 44, 45 declension and use of,
indirect questions, 430- 113-116
432 iste
indirect statements, 414- declension and use of,
419 290, 292, 481
infinitive iter
as object, 213 declension of, 468
as subject, 216
complementary, 215
definition of, 173
does not express
purpose, 352
 formation of, 126, 174,
205, 206
in indirect statements,
415-410
used as in English, 213-
216
Latin word order, 68 locative case, 267
magis and maximē measure of difference
comparison by, 302 abl. of, 316, 317
mālō mīlle,
conjugation of, 4.97 declension of, 479
manner construction with, 331.
abl. of, 105 a,b
means moods, defined, 121
abl. of, 103
-ne, enclitic nōs
in questions, 210 declension of, 280, 480
nē, conj., that not, lest Nouns, 19. 2
with negative clauses of first declension, 57, 461
purpose, 350.II second declension, 71-
with verbs of fearing, 74,87-92,462
370 third declension, 230-
nine irregular adjectives, 247, 463-465
108-110 fourth declension, 259,
nōlō 260, 466
conjugation of, 497 fifth declension, 272,
nominative case, 35, 36 273, 467
nōnne num, in questions, 210
in questions, 210 number, 24
numerals, 327-334, 478,
479
o-declension of nouns, 71- order of words, 68
74, 87-92, 462 ordinal numerals, 327. 2,
object, 20 478
 direct, 37
indirect, 44, 45
participial stem, 201. 2 pluperfect subjunctive
participles, defined, 203 active, 361
agreement of, 204 passive, 363
formation, plūs
declension of, 313
of present, 374. b possessive pronouns, 97,
of perfect, 201 98
of future, 374. c,d possum
of deponent verbs, 375 conjugation of, 495
tenses of, 376 predicate
translated by a clause, defined, 19
377 predicate adjective
partitive genitive, 330, defined, 55
331 predicate noun, 75, 76
passive voice prepositions
defined, 163 with the abl., 209
formation of, 164, 202 with the acc., 340
penult, 9. 3 present indicative, 128,
accent of, 15 130, 147
perfect indicative present stem, 126. a
formation, present subjunctive, 344
in the active, 185, 186 primary tenses, 356
in the passive, 202 principal parts, 183
meaning of, 190 pronouns
definite, 190 classification of, 278
indefinite, 190 defined, 19. 2. a
distinguished from the demonstrative, 481
imperfect, 190 indefinite, 297, 484-487
perfect infinitive intensive, 285, 286, 481
active, 195 interrogative, 483
passive, 205 personal, 480
perfect passive participle, possessive, 97, 98
201 reflexive, 281
perfect stem, 185 relative, 220, 221
perfect subjunctive pronunciation, 4-7
active, 361 prōsum
passive, 362 conjugation of, 496
person, 122 purpose
personal endings dative of, 436, 437
active, 122 expressed by the gerund
passive, 164 or gerundive with
personal pronouns, 280, ad, 407
480 not expressed by the
place infinitive, 352
where, whither, whence, subjunctive of, 348-350,
263-265 365-367
names of towns and
domus and rūs,
266-268
pluperfect indicative
active, 187. 2
passive, 202
quality quīdam
gen. or abl. of, 441-445 declension of, 485
quam quis
with a comparative, 308 declension and use of,
quantity, 11-13 225-227, 483
questions quisquam
direct, 210 declension of, 486
indirect, 430-432 quisque
quī declension of, 484
declension and use of,
220,221, 482
reflexive pronouns, 281 result clauses, 384-387
relative clauses of reviews, 502-528
characteristic or rūs
description, 389, constructions of, 266
390
relative clauses of
purpose, 348, 349
relative pronouns, 220,
221
sē subjunctive constructions
distinguished from ipse, characteristic or
285. a description, 389,
second conjugation, 489 390
second or o-declension, indirect questions, 430-
71-93, 462 432
sentences purpose, 349, 366, 372
simple, complex, result, 385, 386
compound, 219 time, cause, or
separation concession, with
abl. of, 180 cum, 395, 396
separative ablative, 178- subjunctive ideas, 346
181 subjunctive tenses, 342,
sequence of tenses, 356- 343
358 subordinate clauses, 219
space suī
extent of, expressed by declension of, 281, 480
the acc., 336 sum
specification conjugation of, 494
abl. of, 398 suus
stems use of, 98. c, 116
of nouns, 230 syllables, 8
of verbs, 184 division of, 9
subject quantity of, 13
defined, 19. 2 syntax
of the infinitive, 213, rules of, 501
214
subjunctive
formation of the present,
344
of the imperfect, 354
 of the perfect, 361, 362
of the pluperfect, 361. c,
363
temporal clauses with time
cum, 395, 396 abl. of, 275
tense time
defined, 120 acc. of, 336
tense signs towns
imperfect, 133 rules for names of, 266,
future, 137, 156 267, 268
pluperfect active, 187. 2 transitive verb, 20. a
future perfect active, trēs
187. 3 declension of, 479
tenses tū
primary and secondary, declension of, 280, 480
356 tuus
sequence of, 357, 358 compared with vester,
third conjugation, 490, 98. b
492
third declension of nouns
classes, 231, 463
consonant stems, 232-
238, 464
gender, 247
i-stems, 241-244, 465
irregular nouns, 246
u-declension of nouns, ultima, 9. 3
259, 260, 466
verbs vocative case, 56. a
agreement of, 28 of nouns in -us of the
conjugation of, 126, second declension,
488-491 73. b
deponent, 338, 339, 493 of proper nouns in -ius
irregular, 494-500 and of fīlius, 88
 personal endings of, voice
122, 164 defined, 163
principal parts of, 183 volō
vester conjugation of, 497
compared with tuus, 98. vōs
b declension of, 280, 480
vīs vowels
declension of, 468 sounds of, 5, 6
vocabularies quantity of, 12
English-Latin, pp. 332-
343
Latin-English, pp. 299-
331
special, pp. 283-298
 DISPLAY PROBLEMS
The illustration in section 77 with interlocked text may not display
properly on all browsers.

Picture by Itself

Two grammatical diagrams were given as images. They are shown

here in plain-text format.
Prepositions, section 179:
_________
ā or ab | | ē or ex
/____________| _____|_____________\
\ | Place | /
|_________|
|
| dē
|
V

Demonstrative pronouns, section 290:

hic iste ille
SPEAKER ---------->-------------->---------------->
_this_, _he_; _that_, _he_; _that_, _he_
(near); (remote); (more remote)
 *** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK LATIN FOR
BEGINNERS ***

Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will be
renamed.

Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright law
means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the
Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States
without permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules,
set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to copying
and distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works to protect the
PROJECT GUTENBERG™ concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a
registered trademark, and may not be used if you charge for an eBook,
except by following the terms of the trademark license, including paying
royalties for use of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge
anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is
very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation
of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project Gutenberg
eBooks may be modified and printed and given away—you may do
practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected by
U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark license,
especially commercial redistribution.

START: FULL LICENSE

 THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK

To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free

distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work (or any
other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project Gutenberg”), you
agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project Gutenberg™ License
available with this file or online at www.gutenberg.org/license.

Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing

Project Gutenberg™ electronic works

1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg™ electronic

work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to and accept all
the terms of this license and intellectual property (trademark/copyright)
agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all the terms of this agreement,
you must cease using and return or destroy all copies of Project
Gutenberg™ electronic works in your possession. If you paid a fee for
obtaining a copy of or access to a Project Gutenberg™ electronic work and
you do not agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement, you may
obtain a refund from the person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set
forth in paragraph 1.E.8.

1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be used on

or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who agree to be
bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few things that you can
do with most Project Gutenberg™ electronic works even without
complying with the full terms of this agreement. See paragraph 1.C below.
There are a lot of things you can do with Project Gutenberg™ electronic
works if you follow the terms of this agreement and help preserve free
future access to Project Gutenberg™ electronic works. See paragraph 1.E
below.

1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the Foundation”

or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
Gutenberg™ electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the
collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an individual
work is unprotected by copyright law in the United States and you are
located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative works
based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg are
removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project Gutenberg™
mission of promoting free access to electronic works by freely sharing
Project Gutenberg™ works in compliance with the terms of this agreement
for keeping the Project Gutenberg™ name associated with the work. You
can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in
the same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg™ License when
you share it without charge with others.

1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in a
constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check the
laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement before
downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or creating
derivative works based on this work or any other Project Gutenberg™
work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning the copyright
status of any work in any country other than the United States.

1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:

1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
access to, the full Project Gutenberg™ License must appear prominently
whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg™ work (any work on which the
phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the phrase “Project
Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, copied
or distributed:

This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms
of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
 www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you
will have to check the laws of the country where you are located
before using this eBook.

1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is derived from

texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not contain a notice
indicating that it is posted with permission of the copyright holder), the
work can be copied and distributed to anyone in the United States without
paying any fees or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a
work with the phrase “Project Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on
the work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs
1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
Project Gutenberg™ trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.

1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is posted with

the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution must
comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional terms
imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked to the
Project Gutenberg™ License for all works posted with the permission of
the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.

1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg™

License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this work or
any other work associated with Project Gutenberg™.

1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this

electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without prominently
displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with active links or
immediate access to the full terms of the Project Gutenberg™ License.

1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or
distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg™ work in a format other than
“Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official version posted on
the official Project Gutenberg™ website (www.gutenberg.org), you must, at
no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a copy, a means of
exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work
in its original “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format
must include the full Project Gutenberg™ License as specified in paragraph
1.E.1.

1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, performing,
copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg™ works unless you comply
with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.

1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing access to
or distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works provided that:

• You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from the
use of Project Gutenberg™ works calculated using the method you
already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed to the
owner of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark, but he has agreed to
donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid within 60 days
following each date on which you prepare (or are legally required to
prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty payments should be clearly
marked as such and sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation at the address specified in Section 4, “Information about
donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.”

• You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he does
not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ License. You
must require such a user to return or destroy all copies of the works
possessed in a physical medium and discontinue all use of and all
access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ works.

• You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any

money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
receipt of the work.
 • You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free distribution
of Project Gutenberg™ works.

1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg™

electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set forth in
this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of the Project
Gutenberg™ trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3
below.

1.F.

1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable

effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread works
not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project Gutenberg™
collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg™ electronic works, and
the medium on which they may be stored, may contain “Defects,” such as,
but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or corrupt data, transcription
errors, a copyright or other intellectual property infringement, a defective or
damaged disk or other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that
damage or cannot be read by your equipment.

1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except

for the “Right of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the
Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
Gutenberg™ electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all liability to
you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal fees. YOU AGREE
THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT
EXCEPT THOSE PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE
THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY
DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE LIABLE
TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL,
PUNITIVE OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE
NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you
discover a defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you
can receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with the
defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a refund.
If you received the work electronically, the person or entity providing it to
you may choose to give you a second opportunity to receive the work
electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy is also defective, you
may demand a refund in writing without further opportunities to fix the
problem.

1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth in
paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO OTHER
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.

1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied warranties or

the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. If any disclaimer or
limitation set forth in this agreement violates the law of the state applicable
to this agreement, the agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum
disclaimer or limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity
or unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the
remaining provisions.

1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
providing copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in accordance
with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works,
harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, that
arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do or cause
to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg™ work, (b)
alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any Project
Gutenberg™ work, and (c) any Defect you cause.

Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project

Gutenberg™

Project Gutenberg™ is synonymous with the free distribution of electronic

works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers including
obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists because of the
efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from people in all walks of
life.

Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the assistance

they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg™’s goals and ensuring
that the Project Gutenberg™ collection will remain freely available for
generations to come. In 2001, the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation was created to provide a secure and permanent future for
Project Gutenberg™ and future generations. To learn more about the
Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and how your efforts and
donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information
page at www.gutenberg.org.

Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg

Literary Archive Foundation

The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit 501(c)

(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the state of
Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal Revenue Service.
The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification number is 64-6221541.
Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation are tax
deductible to the full extent permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state’s
laws.

The Foundation’s business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt
Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to date
contact information can be found at the Foundation’s website and official
page at www.gutenberg.org/contact

Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project

Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation

Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without widespread

public support and donations to carry out its mission of increasing the
number of public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed
in machine-readable form accessible by the widest array of equipment
including outdated equipment. Many small donations ($1 to $5,000) are
particularly important to maintaining tax exempt status with the IRS.

The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating

charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United States.
Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a considerable effort,
much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up with these
requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations where we have not
received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND DONATIONS or
determine the status of compliance for any particular state visit
www.gutenberg.org/donate.

While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we have
not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition against
accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who approach us
with offers to donate.

International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make any

statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from outside the
United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.

Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation methods
and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other ways including
checks, online payments and credit card donations. To donate, please visit:
www.gutenberg.org/donate.
 Section 5. General Information About Project
Gutenberg™ electronic works

Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg™

concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared with
anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project Gutenberg™
eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.

Project Gutenberg™ eBooks are often created from several printed editions,
all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in the U.S. unless a
copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily keep eBooks in
compliance with any particular paper edition.

Most people start at our website which has the main PG search facility:
www.gutenberg.org.

This website includes information about Project Gutenberg™, including

how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to subscribe to
our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
back
Table of Contents
LATIN FOR BEGINNERS
BENJAMIN L. D’OOGE, Ph.D.
CONTENTS
PREFACE
LATIN FOR BEGINNERS TO THE STUDENT—BY WAY OF
INTRODUCTION
PART I
THE PRONUNCIATION OF LATIN
PART II
WORDS AND FORMS
PART III
CONSTRUCTIONS
READING MATTER
APPENDIX I
DECLENSIONS, CONJUGATIONS, NUMERALS, ETC.
APPENDIX II
APPENDIX III
REVIEWS1
SPECIAL VOCABULARIES
LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY
INDEX
DISPLAY PROBLEMS
THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE